Welcome to QuarkXPress 5.0 Help!
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Welcome to QuarkXPress 5.0 Help!

QuarkXPress 5.0 Help is designed to give you precise information about interface items in QuarkXPress. If you need to know more about specific menus, dialog boxes, tools, palettes, and preferences, use the QuarkXPress 5.0 help file. Information is presented in the same order as the QuarkXPress menus, except for palettes and context menus. If you need to know how to complete a specific task, refer to A Guide to QuarkXPress: Using QuarkXPress.

Before using the help file, take a moment to read "How to use QuarkXPress 5.0 Help." New users may want to read "QuarkXPress Basics" and "The QuarkXPress Interface" to familiarize themselves with QuarkXPress fundamentals. Both experienced and new users should read "What’s New in QuarkXPress 5.0" to learn about new features in the software.

How to use QuarkXPress 5.0 Help	What's New in QuarkXPress 5.0
Where we're coming from	QuarkXPress Basics
What you're looking at	The QuarkXPress Interface
Go directly to Help topics


How to use QuarkXPress 5.0 Help
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

How to use QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

QuarkXPress 5.0 Help is a series of hyperlinked windows. Windows are presented in the same order as QuarkXPress menus; each menu is organized by submenus and dialog boxes. For example, the File menu window contains links to the Open and Close windows, the Save window, and the Print window. The Print window contains links to the Document, Setup, and Option windows.

If you don’t know which menu to look under, or if you want to go directly to a topic, use the Index tab to find a general topic or the Find tab to find exactly what you’re looking for.

Windows can contain jumps and pop-ups. Click on red text to get more information about something; clicking on red text exits the current window and displays a different topic window. Click on blue text to see what something looks like; clicking blue text displays a small pop-up window on top of the current window; click on a blank area of the main window to close the pop-up window.

You can use the Go Back button (Mac OS) or the Back button (Windows) to display the previous window. On Windows, you can also use the back and forward arrows to display windows in sequential order (as they occur in the Help file), but this order may differ from the arrangement of the QuarkXPress interface.

Go directly to Help topics


When you click red text, a new topic window (like this one) opens. Return to How to use QuarkXPress 5.0 Help
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

When you click red text, a new topic window (like this one) opens.

Return to How to use QuarkXPress 5.0 Help


Where We're Coming From
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Where We're Coming From

The QuarkXPress 5.0 Help file assumes you are familiar with your computer and know how to:

•	Launch an application

•	Open, save, and close files

•	Use menus, dialog boxes, and palettes

•	Use the mouse, keyboard commands, and modifier keys

If you need help performing any of these tasks, consult the documentation resources (user or reference guides) provided with your computer.


What you're looking at
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

What you're looking at

The help files use various conventions (styles) to help you find information quickly:

Bold type style convention	References and arrows
Charts	Mac OS and Windows references
Print and Web modes	Notes and tips


Bold type style convention
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Bold type style convention

The names of QuarkXPress menu commands, dialog boxes, and other controls are set in bold type. For example: "The Colors palette lets you apply colors or inks to text, pictures, lines, and box backgrounds."


References and arrows
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

References and arrows

Whenever a feature is mentioned, a reference shows you how to access that feature. For example: "The Save as dialog box (File menu) lets you save a copy of a document." Arrows are used to represent the menu path to a feature. For example: "Choose File -->Print to display the Print dialog box."


Charts
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Charts

This help file charts the range of values that any control can accept. Charts follow this format:

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
2 to 270 pt	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001
The "Range" is expressed in the default measurement system. You can enter values in fields using the measurement system described in the "Measurement system" column. For example, measurements may be expressed in pixels, points, or any measurement system supported by QuarkXPress. (The example above shows a feature that accepts any supported measurement system.) The "Smallest increment" is the smallest unit of measurement you can enter.


Mac OS and Windows references
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Mac OS and Windows references

QuarkXPress is designed to incorporate the same features on Mac OS and Windows. The help files are designed to be used with QuarkXPress on either platform. While most of the information in this Help file applies to both platforms, operating system differences occasionally require the application to function in a slightly different manner on Mac OS and Windows. In such a situation, this Help file identifies which functions are unique to Mac OS and which functions are unique to Windows.


Print and Web modes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Print and Web modes

QuarkXPress lets you create documents both for printed output and for the Web. When you’re working on a print document, QuarkXPress is in print mode; when you’re working on a Web document, QuarkXPress is in Web mode. The mode determines which tools, features, and other user interface elements are available. In this guide, features that are unique to print documents are identified with the word [PRINT], and features that are unique to Web documents are identified with  the word [WEB].


Notes and tips
QQuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Notes and tips

NOTE: Notes provide helpful information about particular features.

TIP: Tips provide extra information about particular features and general techniques for electronic publishing.


What's New in QuarkXPress 5.0
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

What's New in QuarkXPress 5.0

This window lists only some of the new features of QuarkXPress 5.0; for information about all the new features of QuarkXPress 5.0, read the file "What’s New in 5_0.pdf," found on the QuarkXPress CD-ROM, which provides a brief overview of the new features in this version of QuarkXPress.

Web documents and Web features	Context menus
Tables	Required components
Layers	Visual indicators


Web documents and Web features
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Web documents and Web features

QuarkXPress 5.0 introduces the Web document, a new QuarkXPress document format that lets you easily publish Web content. Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) has become a standard language for creating pages on the World Wide Web. While retaining QuarkXPress navigational and design features, Web documents let you design HTML page elements by displaying them as a Web page will — a what-you-see-is-what-you-get (WYSIWYG) environment.

Web Tools palette

Exporting a document as HTML

Web document features


Web Tools palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Web Tools palette

When you are working in a Web document or when no documents are open, you can display the Web Tools palette. The Web Tools palette contains form control and image map tools, which can increase the usability of your Web document.

Form control tools let you create a form. Forms can be used for collecting and tracking information such as e-mail addresses, spending habits, and customer comments. Forms can contain text fields, check boxes, radio buttons, and pop-up menus. Image map tools let you add image maps to your Web document. Image maps are pictures that contain "hot" areas —  areas that you can click on to access another Web page or site. You then add a hyperlink to the image map.


Web document features
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Web document features

QuarkXPress lets you design and lay out your Web page in a what-you-see-is-what-you-get (WYSIWYG) environment; the HTML tags for your layout are created when you export the document as HTML. You can design your page using many HTML features, including hyperlinks and forms, and dynamic items such as rollovers, meta tags, and image maps.

Rollovers let you specify that a different picture displays when you move your arrow pointer over a picture. This lets you "swap" images as the pointer moves over and away from the original picture. Rollovers are created using context menus or by choosing Item --> Rollover. Rollovers can only be applied to picture boxes.

Meta tags contain information about a Web page. They’re not displayed in a Web browser, but adding meta tags to your Web documents can make it easier for search engines to index your pages.


Exporting a document as HTML
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Exporting a document as HTML

To turn your QuarkXPress document into a Web page, you must first export it as an HTML file. When you export a document in HTML format, QuarkXPress exports the text and layout, and any necessary accompanying files (such as picture files). You control whether the pictures in the document are converted to Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) format, Graphic Image Format (GIF), or Portable Network Graphic (PNG) format when the document is exported as an HTML file.


Tables
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Tables

You can now create tables in QuarkXPress. Tables let you organize data into rows and columns. You can also create tables that include pictures or boxes with a content of None.

Tables are created using the Table tool, which is available in print and Web documents. Tables can be modified using the Modify dialog box, or through certain options in the Item menu (Item --> Table). Tables can be created in print and Web documents; however, they will be treated differently in each type of document.


Layers
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Layers

Layers are "tiers" of QuarkXPress documents. Using layers allows you to isolate items. For example, if you have items that need to be in a document but should not print, such as job numbers or output instructions, you can place them on a hidden layer. You can also use layers to create different language versions of the same document.

You can create new layers by choosing View --> Show Layers to display the Layers palette.


Context menus
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Context menus

A context menu is a dynamic menu that displays commands specific to the task you are performing.

In QuarkXPress, displaying this menu is as easy as pointing and clicking. To display a context menu on Mac OS, press the appropriate keyboard command and click on the object you want to affect. The default keyboard command is Control+click. However, you can change this keyboard command to Control+Shift+click by clicking Zoom in the Control Key area of the Preferences dialog box Interactive pane  (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Interactive pane).

To display a context menu on Windows, right-click on the object you want to affect.

Context menus are available for the pasteboard, rulers, empty space on a document page, picture boxes, text boxes and text paths, lines, tables, and many palettes. Because it requires less mouse movement and menu searching, a context menu can help you save production time.


Required Components
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Required Components

Required components are new to QuarkXPress 5.0. A required component is a piece of software that provides functionality to QuarkXPress, but unlike XTensions software, required components must be present for QuarkXPress to launch. Required components are stored in the "Required Components" folder inside the QuarkXPress application folder. On Windows, required components have a ".qrc" file extension.


Visual indicators
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Visual indicators

A visual indicator is a small colored box or icon in the upper right corner of an item. Visual indicators are used for different purposes. For instance, when your documents contain layers, the visual indicators are colored to match the layer that the item is on. For example, if Layer 2 is designated as green, any items drawn on Layer 2 will have a green visual indicator. Visual indicators for layers are rectangular, with right-angled corners.

Visual indicators are used in Web documents to indicate that a text box is not an HTML text box. HTML text boxes are rectangular; any other shape of text box will be treated as a raster text box (it will be converted to a picture when you export the Web document as HTML).

Visual indicators also identify a form box or a picture with a rollover, image map, or hyperlink applied.


QuarkXPress Basics
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

QuarkXPress Basics

To use QuarkXPress effectively, you need to understand a few basic concepts. Read this section if you are new to QuarkXPress or if you need a quick refresher. If you are new to QuarkXPress, we recommend that you complete the online training exercises available on the Quark Web site, www.quark.com, to familiarize yourself with the individual QuarkXPress features.

Print and Web modes	Tables
Print document environment [PRINT]	Layers
Web document environment [WEB]	Working with text
Basic tools	Working with text in Web documents [WEB]
The box concept	Placing pictures
Electronic paste-up	Exporting pictures
Shapes and lines	Forms and image maps [WEB]
Master pages and templates	Exporting as HTML [WEB]
Printing	Customizing QuarkXPress
Using palettes and keyboard commands


Print and Web modes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Print and Web modes

QuarkXPress lets you create documents both for print and the Web. When you’re working on a print document, QuarkXPress is in print mode; when you’re working on a Web document, QuarkXPress is in Web mode. The mode determines which tools, features, and other user interface elements are available. In this help file, features that are unique to print documents are identified with the word [PRINT], and features that are unique to Web documents are identified with the word [WEB].


Print document environment [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Print document environment [PRINT]

A work area called the pasteboard surrounds each page or spread. You use the pasteboard to store items temporarily or to experiment with something before you put it on a page. You can have individual pages or multipage spreads, and you can add, move, and delete pages as you work. Pages can be manipulated using the Document Layout palette or the Page menu, and in Thumbnails view.


Web document environment [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Web document environment [WEB]

A page in a Web document has no fixed size; it expands as necessary to make room for the items it contains. However, you can use the page width guide as a guideline to make sure the pages you design will fit on your users’ monitors. Gray regions at the bottom and right of the page indicate the page’s true boundaries, but keep in mind that different Web browsers often display the same page differently.

There are no pasteboards in a Web document. Pages can be manipulated using the Document Layout palette or the Page menu.


Basic tools
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Basic tools

QuarkXPress pages contain items. Items are text boxes, text paths, picture boxes, tables, and lines; they are created in QuarkXPress and manipulated primarily with the Item tool. Contents are text and pictures; they are manipulated primarily with the Content tool.

In general, you will use Item menu commands and the left half of the Measurements palette when working with items. Likewise, you will use the Style menu and the right half of the Measurements palette when working with contents.


The box concept
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

The box concept

In QuarkXPress, most things go into a box. Text is contained in text boxes and pictures are contained in picture boxes. Text can also be placed on a path. You have control over the size, shape, layering, color, and other properties of each box or path — and you have similar control over the text or pictures contained in them.


Tables
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Tables

A table is a series of rectangular, grouped boxes — called "cells" — that you can use to present data in a concise format. QuarkXPress lets you create tables, convert text to tables, easily edit table data, and add or remove rows and columns as necessary. The cells can contain text, pictures, or a content of None.


Layers
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Layers

By letting you control which items display on a page, layers make it easier for you to edit and manipulate documents. The Layers palette lets you place all items on the same layer or create different layers for different items. You can display some layers while hiding others, so you can opt to see only those items that you want to edit at a given time.


Working with text
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Working with text

A text box or a text path contains text. To create a text box or path, use any of the text box creation tools or a text path creation tool. Then use the Get Text command (File menu) to import text files from other sources, including many popular word processors, databases, and spreadsheets. To enter your own text into a text box, select the text box with the Content tool and begin typing.

When you are working with text, the Style menu provides formatting options such as fonts, type styles, and colors. High-end typographic controls are provided through a combination of menu items, keyboard commands, and preferences. To simplify text formatting, you can create paragraph and character style sheets (Edit --> Style Sheets) and apply them using a menu command, the Style Sheets palette, or keyboard commands.

To flow text from one text box to the next (or from one text path to the next), you can create an automatic chain of text. You can also use the Linking and Unlinking tools to manually create text chains. To create an automatic text chain, check Automatic Text Box in the New Document dialog box (File --> New --> Document).


Working with text in Web documents [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Working with text in Web documents [WEB]

The typographic effects available in HTML are more limited than those available within QuarkXPress. You can create text boxes that contain formatted HTML text, or you can use the full range of typographic effects by converting text boxes and text paths to graphics at export. If you export a large amount of your text as graphics, be aware that this will increase the size of your page and the page’s downloading time.


Placing pictures
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Placing pictures

"Picture" is a general term for any type of graphic file in a QuarkXPress document. Just as text boxes contain text, picture boxes contain pictures. To create a picture box, use any of the picture box creation tools. Then, use the Get Picture command (File menu) to import a copy of a picture file. You can also paste a picture that has been copied to the Clipboard into your document.

When you are working with pictures, the Style menu provides formatting choices such as contrast, line screen, and colors. Picture formatting options are selectively available depending on the imported picture’s graphic file format.


Exporting pictures
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Exporting pictures

When you export a Web document as an HTML file, all pictures in that document are converted to either JPEG, GIF, or PNG format, regardless of their previous format. You can control the format in which each picture is exported.

Text boxes and paths can also be exported as pictures. You can control the export format of these items, as well.


Shapes and lines
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Shapes and lines

To create a colored shape, create a picture box (with any kind of shape) and apply a color to the background of the box. Background colors are applied to boxes using the Colors palette (View menu) or the Box tab of the Modify dialog box (Item menu). The Merge and Shape controls (Item menu) let you create boxes with multiple contours and combine different boxes.

Create custom line styles using the Dashes & Stripes dialog box (Edit menu); then use line creation tools to draw the lines. When a line is selected, the Modify dialog box and the Style menu provide options (such as style, width, and arrowheads) for formatting lines.


Electronic paste-up
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Electronic paste-up

Items can be moved, resized, reshaped, and layered with other items. You can drag items into place by aligning them with rulers and guides, or you can enter precise X and Y coordinates in the Measurements palette.

Each type of item has its own Modify dialog box (Item menu) that controls the size, position, background color, position of the contents, and more. To flow text around pictures, lines, and other items, use the Runaround tab in the Modify dialog box. Other Item menu commands let you group items so they can be moved together, change the stacking order of items, duplicate items, and space selected items evenly.


Forms and image maps [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Forms and image maps [WEB]

Web documents can contain forms, which allow readers to send information to the Web server. Forms let readers enter information about themselves or order goods and services over the Internet.

Web documents can also contain image maps. An image map is an HTML feature that lets you link to different pages by clicking on different parts of a picture in a Web page.


Master pages and templates
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Master pages and templates

Items (pictures and text) that recur throughout your document can be placed on master pages. Applying a master page to a document page automatically places the recurring items. For example, if you are working on a newsletter, you might want a master page for the cover and masthead, one for the inside spreads, and one with mailing information for the back page. Master pages can be created, edited, and applied using the Document Layout palette. Once you’ve established the formatting of a publication, you can save a document as a reusable template.


Customizing QuarkXPress
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Customizing QuarkXPress

QuarkXPress has many options for customizing how you work, how your text flows, how your tools work, and more. These are called "preferences," which you can customize for your copy of QuarkXPress (application preferences) and for individual documents (document preferences).

In addition to preferences, you can create custom style sheets, colors, dashes and stripes, lists (which are based on style sheets), and hyphenation and justification specifications for use in a document or template. All these specifications are created through commands in the Edit menu.


Printing [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Printing [PRINT]

The Print dialog box (File menu) offers several output options. For convenience, you can combine all these settings and save them as Print Styles (Edit menu).

When you print, QuarkXPress requires all the font and picture files used in the document. The Collect for Output (File menu) feature automatically gathers the document, pictures, and fonts into one folder, and it produces a report of the document’s fonts, colors, trapping, and other settings — ready for output.


Exporting as HTML [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Exporting as HTML [WEB]

When you export a Web document in HTML format, QuarkXPress exports any necessary accompanying files (such as picture files), too.


Power through palettes and keyboard commands
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Using palettes and keyboard commands

As you use QuarkXPress, you will develop your own working style. Perhaps you will prefer to use the mouse and menu commands for everything; you might find that you prefer the quick access to features provided by palettes and extensive keyboard commands. In many cases, QuarkXPress offers multiple ways to perform a given task.


The QuarkXPress Interface
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

The QuarkXPress Interface

QuarkXPress menus, context menus, and dialog boxes adhere to Mac OS and Windows conventions — with a few enhancements.

If you are new to Mac OS or Windows, we recommend that you consult the documentation resources provided with your computer for complete information about using the operating system. If you are new to QuarkXPress, we recommend that you complete the online training exercises, available on the Quark Web site at www.quark.com, to familiarize yourself with the individual QuarkXPress features.


QuarkXPress menus
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

QuarkXPress menus

The menu bar displays the menus available in QuarkXPress: File, Edit, Style, Item, Page, View, Utilities, Window (Windows only) and Help. The menu bar can also display menus for QuarkXTensions software and third-party XTensions software. Each menu contains groups of related commands separated by lines. Many menu entries are followed by keyboard shortcuts, displayed using the Command, Option, Control, and Shift keys on Mac OS, or the Ctrl, Alt, and Shift keys on Windows.

QuarkXPress menus are context-sensitive, which means that menu items change according to the active item, the current situation, or the selected tool:

•	The commands listed under a menu may change. For example, the Style menu commands change depending on whether text, a picture, or a line is active.

•	An individual menu command may change. For example, the Undo command (Edit menu) changes to reflect your last action (such as Undo Typing or Undo Item Deletion).

•	The availability of menu entries may change. For example, when a picture is selected, the Save Text command (File menu) is not available.

•	The availability of entire menus may change. For example, the Style menu items for text are available only when a text box is active and the Content tool is selected.

•	The function of a menu command may change slightly when you press a modifier key while displaying the menu. For example, on Mac OS, pressing Option while you choose the Item menu changes the Send to Back command to Send Backward.

Checkmarks in menus


Context menus
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Context menus

To save time while working with documents, QuarkXPress also includes special menus called context menus. Context menus are keyboard-activated and context-sensitive, so they respond dynamically to the task at hand.

•	To display a context menu on Mac OS, press the appropriate keyboard command and click the object you want to affect. The default keyboard command is Control+click. You can switch this keyboard command with the Zoom keyboard command (Control+Shift+click) using the buttons in the Control Key area in the Preferences dialog box Interactive pane (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences).

•	To display a context menu on Windows, right-click the object you want to affect.

NOTE: Context menus are available for rulers, empty space on a document page, picture boxes, text boxes and text paths, lines, tables, and many palettes. In print documents, a context menu is available for the pasteboard.


Checkmark
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Checkmark

A checkmark in a menu indicates one of the following:

•	A function has been performed. For example, a checkmark displays next to Flip Vertical (Style menu) when the contents of a box are flipped vertically.

•	A feature is turned on. For example, a checkmark next to Snap to Guides (View menu) means that items in your document will snap to the guides you’ve created.

•	A format from a list has been applied. For example, a checkmark displays in the Font submenu next to the font applied to selected text. When multiple formats have been applied to a selection, checkmarks only display next to formats common to the entire selection.


QuarkXPress dialog boxes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

QuarkXPress dialog boxes

Choosing a menu item followed by ellipsis points (...) displays a dialog box. Dialog boxes contain related commands that allow you to specify exactly what you want to happen. The context-sensitive controls in QuarkXPress dialog boxes consist primarily of tabs, areas, fields, lists, pop-up menus, radio buttons, check boxes, and buttons.

QuarkXPress dialog boxes include navigational and alert dialog boxes.


Tabs
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Tabs

Many dialog boxes provide multiple functions through tabs. By clicking a tab, you can display different sets of controls. Pressing Command + Option+Tab on Mac OS or Ctrl+Tab on Windows displays the next tab in a dialog box.


Area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Area

Related commands within a dialog box or tab are grouped into an "area," which is named and surrounded by a border. For example, the Box tab in the Modify dialog box (Item menu) has a Blend area, which lets you specify a custom blend for a box.


List
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Lists

Some dialog boxes include scrollable lists of elements that you can select or edit. For example, the Colors dialog box (Edit menu) displays a list of colors. You can navigate through lists using the up and down arrow keys. Depending on the type of list, you may be able to multiple-select items to edit. For example, in the Tools pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences), you can select multiple tools and edit common attributes. To select a group of consecutive elements, click the first element then press Shift while clicking the last element in the range. To select multiple, nonconsecutive elements, press Command (Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) while clicking each one.


Field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Field

A field is a rectangular box for entering a specific value. For example, in the Text tab of the Modify dialog box (Item menu), you can enter the number of columns for an active text box in the Columns field. Fields have the following characteristics:

•	You can enter measurements in any of the supported measurement systems, using the following abbreviations: inches or inches decimal ("), picas (p), points (pt), millimeters (mm), centimeters (cm), ciceros (c), and agates (ag).

•	When you are not using the default measurement system, you only need to specify units of measure with an abbreviation. For example, if your measurement preferences are set to inches, and you want to specify an indentation in points, you can enter "6 pt" in the field. The measurement will be converted to inches the next time you open the dialog box.

•	The default measurement system is specified in the Horizontal Measure and Vertical Measure pop-up menus in the Measurements pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Document).

•	You can press Tab to select the next field in a dialog box and Shift+Tab to select the previous field.

•	You can perform mathematical operations in fields using these operators: + (addition), – (subtraction), * (multiplication), or, / (division). For example, to double the width of a box, you can multiply the width by 2 by entering *2 to the right of the current value. You can even perform multiple operations — such as dividing a value by 4, then adding 2.

TIP: QuarkXPress performs multiplication and division first, followed by subtraction and addition, from left to right; you cannot use parentheses when performing mathematical operations in fields. You can add and subtract specific measurements, such as 2".


Pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Pop-up menu

A pop-up menu is a small menu within a dialog box or palette. A pop-up menu contains a list of options and may also have an editable field in which you can enter a custom value (such as a percentage) or a word (such as a font name) rather than choosing an option from the list.

A pop-up menu offers a list of options, and often includes a field where you can enter custom values. For example, the Width pop-up menu in the Frame tab of the Modify dialog box (Item menu) includes a list of frame widths and a field.


Check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Check box

A check box lets you turn options on and off. Checking a box may activate other controls; checking or unchecking a box may expand a dialog box to display more controls.


Radio button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Radio button

A radio button lets you select mutually exclusive options. For example, in the XTensions Manager pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences), you can choose when to display the XTensions Manager dialog box by clicking a radio button.


Button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Button

A button (shaped like this on Mac OS or like this on Windows), performs an action. If a button has a heavier border around it, you can also press Return or Enter (Mac OS) or Enter (Windows) to activate it. On Windows, if a button has a dotted outline around the text, you can also press the space bar to activate the button. A  button may also include a pop-up menu that lets you choose a type of action. For example, the New button in the Style Sheets dialog box (Edit menu) lets you create either a character style sheet or a paragraph style sheet.

Many dialog boxes in QuarkXPress include an Apply button so you can preview your changes before closing the dialog box. For example, the Apply button in the Paragraph Attributes dialog box (Style --> Formats) lets you see how your changes affect selected paragraphs.


 Button (Mac OS)


 Button (Windows)


Navigational dialog boxes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Navigational dialog boxes

The Open and Save as dialog boxes are used to open, import, export, or save files; they include standard Mac OS or Windows controls for navigating through disks and folders so you can locate files, or choose where you want to save files. Dialog boxes in QuarkXPress with Open or Save as navigational dialog box elements include: New Web Document, New Library, New Book, Open, Save as, Get Text, Save Text, Append, Save Page as EPS, Export HTML, Collect for Output, and Auxiliary Dictionary.


Alert dialog boxes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Alert dialog boxes

An alert is a dialog box that warns you when there is a problem and often suggests a solution. For example, if you enter an invalid value in a field, an alert notifies you and often provides an acceptable range of values for the field.


QuarkXPress 5.0 Help Topics
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

QuarkXPress 5.0 Help Topics

Palettes	Style menu	Utilities menu
Context menus	Item menu	Window menu (Windows only)
File menu	Page menu	Keyboard commands
Edit menu	View menu


This is a pop-up. Pop-ups may contain text, pictures, or both.

Click outside the pop-up to close it.


Keyboard Commands
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard Commands

Keyboard commands increase your productivity by quickly accessing dialog boxes or menu items. Keyboard commands can also be used to modify items.

Keyboard Commands for Mac OS

Keyboard Commands for Windows

Please note that special characters such as accented letters are a function of the font and the operating system, not of QuarkXPress. If you want to enter these types of special characters, use the Key Caps (Mac OS) or Character Map (Windows) utilities.


Keyboard Commands for Mac OS
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard Commands for Mac OS

Menus	Dialog Boxes	Palettes
Working in documents	Working with items	Fonts
Text	Pictures


Menus
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Menus

Apple menu	Style menu for pictures	View menu
File menu	Style menu for lines	Utilities menu
Edit menu	Item menu
Style menu for text	Page menu


Dialog Boxes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Dialog Boxes

Tabs	Fields	Buttons	Lists


Palettes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Palettes

Tools	Web Tools	Measurements
Document Layout	Style Sheets	Colors
Trap Information	Lists	Index
Find/Change


Working in Documents
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Working in Documents

Tiling and stacking	Displaying pages	Changing views
Redrawing the screen	Deleting ruler guides	Closing documents
Scrolling and navigating


Working with items
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Working with items

Selecting & deselecting	Creating, resizing, and rotating	Opening Modify dialog box
Modifying line width	Editing Bézier items and paths	Moving items
Nudging items


Fonts
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Fonts

Changing fonts	Modifying font size	Modifying scaling
Modifying kerning/tracking	Modifying baseline shift	Modifying leading


Text
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Text

Copying paragraph attributes	Dragging and dropping text	Page numbers and text flow
Checking spelling	Searching for text	Moving the text insertion point
Entering special characters	Entering hyphens and dashes	Entering spaces
Selecting characters	Clicking the mouse to select text	Deleting characters


Pictures
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Pictures

Importing pictures	Scaling pictures	Resizing boxes and pictures
Centering and fitting pictures	Nudging pictures	Modifying pictures


Keyboard command for Apple menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard command for Apple menu

QuarkXPress Environment window	Option+About QuarkXPress or Control+Option+E


Keyboard commands for File menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for File menu

New Document	Command+N
New Library	Command+Option+N
New Web Document	Command+Option+Shift+N
Open	Command+O
Close	Command+W
Save	Command+S
Save as	Command+Option+S
Revert to last Auto Save	Option+Revert to Saved
Get Text/Picture	Command+E
Save Text	Command+Option+E
Append	Command+Option+A
Save Page as EPS	Command+Option+Shift+S
Document Setup	Command+Option+Shift+P
Page Setup	Command+Option+P
Print	Command+P
Quit	Command+Q


Keyboard commands for Edit menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Edit menu

Undo	Command+Z or F1
Cut	Command+X or F2
Copy	Command+C or F3
Paste	Command+V or F4
Select All	Command+A
Find/Change	Command+F
Close Find/Change	Command+Option+F
Paragraph pane (Preferences dialog box)	Command+Option+Y
Trapping pane (Preferences dialog box)	Option+Shift+F12
Tools pane (Preferences dialog box)	Double-click any item creation tool  or the Zoom tool
Style Sheets	Shift+F11
Colors	Shift+F12
H&Js	Command+Option+H or Option+Shift+F11


Keyboard commands for Style menu for text
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Style menu for text

Size --> Other	Command+Shift+\
Character	Command+Shift+D
Type Style submenu

Plain	Command+Shift+P
Bold	Command+Shift+B
Italic	Command+Shift+I
Underline	Command+Shift+U
Word Underline	Command+Shift+W
Strike Through	Command+Shift+/
Outline	Command+Shift+O
Shadow	Command+Shift+S
All Caps	Command+Shift+K
Small Caps	Command+Shift+H
Superscript	Command+Shift++ (plus)
Subscript	Command+Shift+– (hyphen)
Superior	Command+Shift+V
Alignment submenu

Left	Command+Shift+L
Centered	Command+Shift+C
Right	Command+Shift+R
Justified	Command+Shift+J
Forced	Command+Option+Shift+J
Leading	Command+Shift+E
Formats	Command+Shift+F
Tabs	Command+Shift+T
Rules	Command+Shift+N
Text to Box  (anchor boxes and delete text)	Option+Text to Box


Keyboard commands for Style menu for pictures
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Style menu for pictures

Negative	Command+Shift+– (hyphen)
Contrast	Command+Shift+C
Halftone	Command+Shift+H


Keyboard commands for Style menu for lines
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Style menu for lines

Width --> Other	Command+Shift+\


Keyboard commands for Item menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Item menu

Modify	Command+M
Frame	Command+B
Clipping	Command+Option+T
Runaround	Command+T
Duplicate	Command+D
Step and Repeat	Command+Option+D
Delete	Command+K
Group	Command+G
Ungroup	Command+U
Lock/Unlock	F6
Bring to Front	F5
Bring Forward	Option+Bring to Front or Option+F5
Send to Back	Shift+F5
Send Backward	Option+Send to Back or Option+Shift+F5
Space/Align	Command+, (comma)
Shape (convert Bézier line to  filled-center Bézier box)	Option+ Item --> Shape -->
Edit submenu

Shape	Shift+F4
Runaround	Option+F4
Clipping Path	Option+Shift+F4
Point/Segment Type submenu

Corner Point	Option+F1
Smooth Point	Option+F2
Symmetrical Point	Option+F3
Straight Segment	Option+Shift+F1
Curved Segment	Option+Shift+F2


Keyboard commands for Page menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Page menu

Go to Page dialog box	Command+J
Display [master pages]	Shift+F10
Display [next master page]	Option+F10
Display [previous master page]	Option+Shift+F10
Display document (master page displayed)	Shift+F10
Page Properties dialog box [WEB]	Command+Option+Shift+A


Keyboard commands for View menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for View menu

Fit in Window	Command+0 (zero)
Fit largest spread in window	Option+Fit in Window  or Command+Option+0 (zero)
Actual Size	Command+1
Thumbnails	Shift+F6
Show/Hide Guides	F7
Show/Hide Baseline Grid	Option+F7
Snap to Guides	Shift+F7
Show/Hide Rulers	Command+R
Show/Hide Invisibles	Command+I
Show/Hide Tools & Web Tools	F8
Show/Hide Measurements	F9
Show/Hide Document Layout	F10
Show/Hide Style Sheets	F11
Show/Hide Colors	F12
Show/Hide Trap Information	Option+F12
Show/Hide Lists	Option+F11


Keyboard commands for Utilities menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Utilities menu

Check Spelling --> Word/Selection	Command+L
Check Spelling --> Story	Command+Option+L
Check Spelling --> Document	Command+Option+Shift+L
Suggested Hyphenation	Command+H
Usage dialog box

Fonts tab	F13
Pictures tab	Option+F13


Keyboard commands for tabs in dialog boxes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for tabs in dialog boxes

Display next tab	Command+Option+Tab
Display previous tab	Command+Option+Shift+Tab


Keyboard commands for fields
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for fields

Select next field	Tab
Select previous field	Shift+Tab
Select field with Text Insertion bar	Double-click
Cut	Command+X
Copy	Command+C
Paste	Command+V
Revert fields to original values	Command+Z
Perform math in fields by combining operators

addition	+
subtraction	-
multiplication	*
division	/


Keyboard commands for buttons
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for buttons

OK (or bordered button)	Return or Enter
Cancel	Command+. (period)
Yes	Command+Y
No	Command+N
Apply	Command+A
Set button in Tabs  (in Paragraph Attributes)	Command+S


Keyboard commands for lists (in dialog boxes)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for lists (in dialog boxes)

Select consecutive items in list	Shift+click
Select nonconsecutive items in list	Command+click
Compare two selected items	Option+click Append button  (Import in Print Styles)


Keyboard commands forTools palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Tools palette

Display Tools palette	F8
Select next tool (or display palette)	Command+Option+Tab
Select previous tool (or display palette)	Command+Option+Shift+Tab
Keep a tool selected	Option+click tool
Open Tools pane of Preferences dialog box	Double-click any item creation tool or Zoom tool


Keyboard commands for Measurements palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Measurements palette

Display Measurements palette	F9
Select first field (or display palette)	Command+Option+M
Select font field (or display palette)	Command+Option+Shift+M
Select next field	Tab
Select previous field	Shift+Tab
Exit/Apply	Return or Enter
Exit/Cancel	Command+. (period)


Keyboard commands for Document Layout palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Document Layout palette

Display Document Layout palette	F10
Open Section dialog box  for selected page	Click lower-left corner of palette
Open Insert Pages dialog box	Option+drag master page  into document area


Keyboard commands for Style Sheets palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Style Sheets palette

Display Style Sheets palette	F11
Display edit style sheet context menu	Control+click style sheet
Open Edit Style Sheet dialog box	Command+click style sheet
Apply No Style, then style sheet	Option+click style sheet


Keyboard commands for Colors palette and Trap Information palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Colors palette

Display Colors palette	F12
Open Colors dialog box	Command+click color name


Keyboard commands for Trap Information palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Trap Information palette

Display Trap Information palette	Option+F12


Keyboard commands for Lists palette and Index palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for the Lists palette

Display Lists palette	Option+F11


Keyboard commands for the Index palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for the Index palette

Display Index palette	Command+Option+I
Select Text field	Command+Option+I
Click Add button	Command+Option+Shift+I
Edit selected index entry	Double-click


Keyboard commands for Find/Change palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Find/Change palette

Display Find/Change palette	Command+F
Close palette	Command+Option+F
Change Find Next button to Find First	Option+Find Next


Keyboard commands for tiling and stacking documents
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for tiling and stacking documents

Tile or stack at Actual Size	Control+Tile/Stack
Tile or stack at Fit in Window	Command+Tile/Stack
Tile or stack at Thumbnails	Option+Tile/Stack
Shortcut to Windows submenu	Shift+click title bar
Tile or stack at Actual Size from title bar	Control+Shift+Tile/Stack
Tile or stack at Fit in Window from title bar	Command+Shift+Tile/Stack
Tile or stack at Thumbnails from title bar	Option+Shift+Tile/Stack


Keyboard commands for displaying pages
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for displaying pages

Go to Page dialog box	Command+J
Display [master pages]	Shift+F10
Display [next master page]	Option+F10
Display [previous master page]	Option+Shift+F10
Display document (master page displayed)	Shift+F10


Keyboard commands for changing views
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for changing views

Access view percentage field	Control+V
Any view to Actual Size (Caps Lock on)	Option+click
Actual Size to Fit in Window (Caps Lock on)	Option+click
Any view to 200%	Command+Option+click
200% to Actual Size	Command+Option+click
Fit largest spread in window	Option+Fit in Window or Command+Option+0 (zero)
Zoom in	Control+Shift+click or drag
Zoom out	Control+Option+click/drag


Keyboard commands for redrawing the screen
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for redrawing the screen

Halt redraw	Command+. (period)
Force redraw	Command+Option+. (period)


Keyboard commands for deleting ruler guides
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for deleting ruler guides

Delete horizontal ruler guides	Option+click horizontal ruler
Delete vertical ruler guides	Option+click vertical ruler


Keyboard commands for closing documents
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for closing documents

Close document window	Command+W
Close all document windows	Option+click close box or Command+Option+W


Keyboard commands for scrolling and navigating through documents
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for scrolling and navigating through documents

With Page Grabber Hand	Option+drag
Enable Live Scroll (Interactive Preference off)	Option+drag scroll box
Disable Live Scroll (Interactive Preference on)	Option+drag scroll box
To start of document	Control+A
To end of document	Control+D
Up one screen	Control+K
Down one screen	Control+L
To first page	Control+Shift+A
To last page	Control+Shift+D
To previous page	Control+Shift+K
To next page	Control+Shift+L
Extended keyboard

Start of document	Home
End of document	End
Up one screen	Page up
Down one screen	Page down
To first page	Shift+Home
To last page	Shift+End
To previous page	Shift+Page Up
To next page	Shift+Page Down


Keyboard commands for selecting or deselecting items
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for selecting or deselecting items

Select item at back or behind	Command+Option+Shift+click where items overlap
Select multiple items or points	Shift+click
Deselect all items	Tab (Item tool selected)


Keyboard commands for creating, resizing, and rotating items
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for creating, resizing, and rotating items

Constrain rectangle to square or oval to circle	Shift+while creating or resizing
Constrain item rotation to 0/45/90 degrees	Shift+while rotating
Constrain straight line angle to 0/45/90 degrees	Shift+while creating, resizing, or rotating items


Keyboard commands for opening Modify dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for opening Modify dialog box

Open Modify dialog box	Double-click item with Item tool


Keyboard commands for modifying line width
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for modifying line width

Increase by preset range	Command+Shift+>
Increase by 1 point	Command+Option+Shift+>
Decrease by preset range	Command+Shift+<
Decrease by 1 point	Command+Option+Shift+<


Keyboard commands for editing Bézier items and paths
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for editing Bézier items and paths

Delete Bézier point	Option+click point
Delete active Bézier point while creating item	Delete
Add Bézier point	Option+click segment
Corner to smooth point	Control+drag curve handle
Smooth to corner point	Control+drag curve handle
Smooth to corner point while creating item	Command+Control+drag curve handle
Edit Bézier while creating item	Press command while creating item
Retract curve handles	Control+click point
Expose curve handles	Control+drag point
Select all Bézier points in active item (single path)	Command+Shift+A or double-click point
Select all Bézier points in active item (multiple paths)	Command+Shift+A or triple-click point
Constrain active point to 45-degree movement	Shift+drag point
Constrain active curve handle to 45-degree movement	Shift+drag curve handle
Convert Bézier line to filled-center Bézier box	Option+ Item --> Shape -->


Keyboard commands for moving items
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for moving items

With no constraints	Command+drag
With horizontal/vertical constraints	Command+Shift+drag


Keyboard commands for nudging items (Item tool selected)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for nudging items (Item tool selected)

Left 1 point	Left arrow
Left 1/10 point	Option+left arrow
Right 1 point	Right arrow
Right 1/10 point	Option+right arrow
Up 1 point	Up arrow
Up 1/10 point	Option+up arrow
Down 1 point	Down arrow
Down 1/10 point	Option+down arrow


Keyboard commands for page numbers and text flow
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for page numbers and text flow

Previous box page number character	Command+2
Current page number character	Command+3
Next box page number character	Command+4
Reflow text as current version of QuarkXPress	Option+Open in Open dialog box


Keyboard commands for changing fonts
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for changing fonts

Select Font field in Measurements palette	Command+Option+Shift+M
Previous font	Option+Shift+F9
Next font	Option+F9


Keyboard commands for modifying font size
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for modifying font size

Increase by preset range	Command+Shift+>
Increase by 1 point	Command+Option+Shift+>
Decrease by preset range	Command+Shift+<
Decrease by 1 point	Command+Option+Shift+<
Resize interactively

Proportionally	Command+Option+Shift+drag handle
Constrained	Command+Shift+drag handle
Nonproportionally	Command+drag handle


Keyboard commands for modifying horizontal/vertical scaling
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for modifying horizontal/vertical scaling

Increase by 5%	Command+]
Increase by 1%	Command+Option+]
Decrease by 5%	Command+[
Decrease by 1%	Command+Option+[


Keyboard commands for modifying kerning/tracking
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for modifying kerning/tracking

Increase by 1/20 em	Command+Shift+}
Increase by 1/200 em	Command+Option+Shift+}
Decrease by 1/20 em	Command+Shift+{
Decrease by 1/200 em	Command+Option+Shift+{


Keyboard commands for modifying baseline shift
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for modifying baseline shift

Up 1 point	Command+Option+Shift++ (plus)
Down 1 point	Command+Option+Shift+– (hyphen)


Keyboard commands for modifying leading
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for modifying leading

Increase by 1 point	Command+Shift+"
Increase by 1/10 point	Command+Option+Shift+"
Decrease by 1 point	Command+Shift+:
Decrease by 1/10 point	Command+Option+Shift+:


Keyboard commands for copying paragraph attributes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for copying paragraph attributes

Copy formats to selected paragraphs in text chain	Option+Shift+click


Keyboard commands for dragging and dropping text
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for dragging and dropping text

Drag-copy text (Interactive Preference on)	Shift+drag
Drag text (Interactive Preference off)	Command+Control+drag
Drag-copy text (Interactive Preference off)	Command+Control+Shift+drag


Keyboard commands for clicking buttons in Check Spelling
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for clicking buttons in Check Spelling

Lookup	Command+L
Skip	Command+S
Add	Command+A
Add all suspect words to auxiliary dictionary	Option+Shift+click Done button


Searching for text in the Find/Change palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Searching for text in the Find/Change palette

Searching for Text	Enter in Find What Field
Wild card (Find only)	Command+?
Tab	\t
New paragraph	Command+Return
New line	Command+Shift+Return
New column	Command+Enter
New box	Command+Shift+Enter
Previous box page number character	Command+2
Current page number character	Command+3
Next box page number character	Command+4
Punctuation space	Command+. (period)
Flex space	Command+Shift+F
Backslash	Command+\


Entering Special Characters
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Entering special characters

Indent here	Command+\
Discretionary new line	Command+Return
New paragraph	Return
New line	Shift+Return
New column	Enter
New box	Shift+Enter
Right-indent tab	Option+Tab


Entering hyphens and dashes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Entering hyphens and dashes

Breaking standard hyphen	– (hyphen)
Nonbreaking standard hyphen	Command+=
Discretionary (soft) hyphen	Command+ – (hyphen)
Break at discretionary hyphens only	Command+ – (hyphen)  immediately before word
Nonbreaking en dash	Option+ – (hyphen)
Breaking em dash	Option+Shift+ –( hyphen)
Nonbreaking em dash	Command+Option+ =


Entering spaces
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Entering spaces

Breaking standard space	Space
Nonbreaking standard space	Command+5
Breaking en space	Option+Space
Nonbreaking en space	Command+Option+Space or Command+Option+5
Breaking flexible space	Option+Shift+Space
Nonbreaking flexible space	Command+Option+Shift+Space
Breaking punctuation space	Shift+Space
Nonbreaking punctuation space	Command+Shift+Space


Keyboard commands for moving the text insertion point to
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for moving the text insertion point to

Previous character	Left arrow
Next character	Right arrow
Previous line	Up arrow
Next line	Down arrow
Previous word	Command+left arrow
Next word	Command+right arrow
Previous paragraph	Command+up arrow
Next paragraph	Command+down arrow
Start of line	Command+Option+left arrow
End of line	Command+Option+right arrow
Start of story	Command+Option+up arrow
End of story	Command+Option+down arrow


Keyboard commands for selecting characters
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for selecting characters

Previous character	Shift+left arrow
Next character	Shift+right arrow
Previous line	Shift+up arrow
Next line	Shift+down arrow
Previous word	Command+Shift+left arrow
Next word	Command+Shift+right arrow
Previous paragraph	Command+Shift+up arrow
Next paragraph	Command+Shift+down arrow
Start of line	Command+Option+Shift+left arrow
End of line	Command+Option+Shift+right arrow
Start of story	Command+Option+Shift+up arrow
End of story	Command+Option+Shift+down arrow


Clicking the mouse to select text
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Clicking the mouse to select text

Position text insertion point	One click
Select word	Two clicks in the word
Selected word and its period, comma, etc.	Two clicks between word and punctuation
Select line	Three clicks
Select paragraph	Four clicks
Select story	Five clicks


Keyboard commands for deleting characters
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for deleting characters

Previous character	Delete
Next character	Shift+Delete
Next character (extended keyboard)	Forward Delete
Previous word	Command+Delete
Next word	Command+Shift+Delete
Highlighted characters	Delete


Keyboard commands for importing pictures
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for importing pictures

Import picture at 36 dpi	Shift+Open in Get Picture dialog box
Import color TIFF as grayscale	Command+Open in Get Picture dialog box
Import grayscale TIFF as B&W	Command+Open in Get Picture dialog box
Import EPS without adding spot colors	Command+Open in Get Picture dialog box
Reimport all pictures in document	Command+Open in Open dialog box


Keyboard commands for scaling pictures
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for scaling pictures

Increase scale 5%	Command+Option+Shift+>
Decrease scale 5%	Command+Option+Shift+<


Keyboard commands for resizing boxes and pictures
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for resizing boxes and pictures

Resize box constraining box shape	Shift+drag
Resize box maintaining aspect ratio	Option+Shift+drag
Resize box and scale picture	Command+drag
Resize box and scale picture constraining box shape	Command+Shift+drag
Resize box and scale picture maintaining proportions	Command+Option+Shift+drag


Keyboard commands for centering and fitting pictures
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for centering and fitting pictures

Center	Command+Shift+M
Fit to box	Command+Shift+F
Fit to box maintaining proportions	Command+Option+Shift+F


Keyboard commands for nudging pictures (Content tool selected)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for nudging pictures (Content tool selected)

Left 1 point	Left arrow key
Left 1/10 point	Option+Left arrow key
Right 1 point	Right arrow key
Right 1/10 point	Option+Right arrow key
Up 1 point	Up arrow key
Up 1/10 point	Option+Up arrow key
Down 1 point	Down arrow key
Down 1/10 point	Option+Down arrow key


Keyboard commands for modifying pictures
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for modifying pictures

Negative	Command+Shift+– (hyphen)
Picture Contrast Specifications dialog box	Command+Shift+C
Picture Halftone Specifications dialog box	Command+Shift+H


Keyboard Commands for Windows
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard Commands for Windows

Menus	Dialog Boxes	Palettes
Working in documents	Working with items	Fonts
Text	Pictures


Menus
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Menus

File menu	Style menu for pictures	View menu
Edit menu	Style menu for lines	Utilities menu
Item menu	Page menu	Help menu
Style menu for text


Dialog Boxes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Dialog boxes

Tabs	Fields	Buttons	Lists


Palettes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Palettes

Tools and Web Tools	Measurements	Document Layout
Style Sheets	Colors	Trap Information
Lists	Index	Find/Change


Working in documents
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Working in documents

Displaying pages	Changing views	Redrawing the screen
Deleting ruler guides	Closing documents	Scrolling and navigating


Working with items
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

eWorking with items

Selecting & deselecting	Creating, resizing, and rotating	Opening Modify dialog box
Modifying line width	Editing Bézier items and paths	Moving items
Nudging items


Fonts
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Fonts

Changing fonts	Modifying font size	Modifying scaling
Modifying kerning/tracking	Modifying baseline shift	Modifying leading


Text
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Text

Copying paragraph attributes	Dragging and dropping text	Page numbers and text flow
Checking spelling	Searching for text	Moving the text insertion point
Entering special characters	Entering hyphens and dashes	Entering spaces
Selecting characters	Clicking the mouse to select text	Deleting characters


Pictures
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Pictures

Importing pictures	Scaling pictures	Resizing boxes and pictures
Centering and fitting pictures	Nudging pictures	Modifying pictures


Keyboard commands for File menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for File menu

New Document	Ctrl+N
New Library	Ctrl+Alt+N
New Web Document	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+N
Open	Ctrl+O
Close	Ctrl+F4
Save	Ctrl+S
Save as	Ctrl+Alt+S
Revert to last Auto Save	Alt+Revert to Saved
Get Text/Picture	Ctrl+E
Save Text	Ctrl+Alt+E
Append	Ctrl+Alt+A
Save Page as EPS	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+S
Document Setup	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+P
Page Setup	Ctrl+Alt+P
Print	Ctrl+P
Exit	Ctrl+Q


Keyboard commands for Edit menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Edit menu

Undo	Ctrl+Z
Cut	Ctrl+X
Copy	Ctrl+C
Paste	Ctrl+V
Select All	Ctrl+A
Find/Change	Ctrl+F
Close Find/Change	Ctrl+Alt+F
Paragraph pane (Preferences dialog box)	Ctrl+Alt+Y
Trapping pane (Preferences dialog box)	Ctrl+Shift+F12
Tools pane (Preferences dialog box)	Double-click any item creation tool or Zoom tool
Style Sheets	Shift+F11
Colors	Shift+F12
H&Js	Ctrl+Shift+F11


Keyboard commands for Style menu for text
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Style menu for text

Size --> Other	Ctrl+Shift+\
Character	Ctrl+Shift+D
Type Style submenu

Plain	Ctrl+Shift+P
Bold	Ctrl+Shift+B
Italic	Ctrl+Shift+I
Underline	Ctrl+Shift+U
Word Underline	Ctrl+Shift+W
Strike Thru	Ctrl+Shift+/
Outline	Ctrl+Shift+O
Shadow	Ctrl+Shift+S
All Caps	Ctrl+Shift+K
Small Caps	Ctrl+Shift+H
Superscript	Ctrl+Shift+0 (zero)
Subscript	Ctrl+Shift+9
Superior	Ctrl+Shift+V
Alignment submenu

Left	Ctrl+Shift+L
Centered	Ctrl+Shift+C
Right	Ctrl+Shift+R
Justified	Ctrl+Shift+J
Forced	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+J
Leading	Ctrl+Shift+E
Formats	Ctrl+Shift+F
Tabs	Ctrl+Shift+T
Rules	Ctrl+Shift+N
Text to Box  (anchor boxes and delete text)	Alt+Text to Box


Keyboard commands for Style menu for pictures
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Style menu for pictures

Negative	Ctrl+Shift+– (hyphen)
Contrast	Ctrl+Shift+O
Halftone	Ctrl+Shift+H


Keyboard commands for Style menu for lines
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Style menu for lines

Width --> Other	Ctrl+Shift+\


Keyboard commands for Item menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Item menu

Modify	Ctrl+M
Frame	Ctrl+B
Clipping	Ctrl+Alt+T
Runaround	Ctrl+T
Duplicate	Ctrl+D
Step and Repeat	Ctrl+Alt+D
Delete	Ctrl+K
Group	Ctrl+G
Ungroup	Ctrl+U
Lock/Unlock	F6
Bring to Front	F5
Bring Forward	Ctrl+F5
Send to Back	Shift+F5
Send Backward	Ctrl+Shift+F5
Space/Align	Ctrl+, (comma)
Shape (convert Bézier line to filled-center Bézier box)	Alt+Item --> Shape -->
Edit submenu

Shape	F10
Runaround	Ctrl+F10
Clipping Path	Ctrl+Shift+F10
Point/Segment Type submenu

Corner Point	Ctrl+F1
Smooth Point	Ctrl+F2
Symmetrical Point	Ctrl+F3
Straight Segment	Ctrl+Shift+F1
Curved Segment	Ctrl+Shift+F2


Keyboard commands for Page menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Page menu

Go to Page dialog box	Ctrl+J
Display [master pages]	Shift+F4
Display [next master page]	Ctrl+Shift+F4
Display [previous master page]	Ctrl+Shift+F3
Display document (master page displayed)	Shift+F4
Page Properties dialog box [WEB]	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+A


Keyboard commands for View menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for View menu

Fit in Window	Ctrl+0 (zero)
Fit largest spread in window	Alt+Fit in Window or Ctrl+Alt+0 (zero)
Actual Size	Ctrl+1 (one)
Thumbnails	Shift+F6
Show/Hide Guides	F7
Show/Hide Baseline Grid	Ctrl+F7
Snap to Guides	Shift+F7
Show/Hide Rulers	Ctrl+R
Show/Hide Invisibles	Ctrl+I
Show/Hide Tools & Web Tools	F8
Show/Hide Measurements	F9
Show/Hide Document Layout	F4
Show/Hide Style Sheets	F11
Show/Hide Colors	F12
Show/Hide Trap Information	Ctrl+F12
Show/Hide Lists	Ctrl+F11


Keyboard commands for Utilities menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Utilities menu

Check Spelling --> Word/Selection	Ctrl+W
Check Spelling --> Story	Ctrl+Alt+W
Check Spelling --> Document	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+W
Suggested Hyphenation dialog box	Ctrl+H


Help menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Help menu

Open Help file	Alt+About QuarkXPress


Keyboard commands for tabs in dialog boxes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for tabs in dialog boxes

Display next tab	Ctrl+Tab
Display previous tab	Ctrl+Shift+Tab


Keyboard commands for fields
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for fields

Select next field	Tab
Select previous field	Shift+Tab
Select field with Text Insertion bar	Double-click
Cut	Ctrl+X
Copy	Ctrl+C
Paste	Ctrl+V
Undo	Ctrl+Z
Revert fields to original values	Ctrl+Shift+Z
Perform math by combining operators

addition	+
subtraction	-
multiplication	*
division	/


Keyboard commands for buttons
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for buttons

OK (or bordered button)	Enter
Cancel	Escape
Apply	Alt+A
Yes	Y
No	N
Set button in Tabs tab  (in Paragraph Attributes)	Alt+S


Keyboard commands for lists (in dialog boxes)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for lists (in dialog boxes)

Select consecutive items in list	Shift+click
Select nonconsecutive items in list	Ctrl+click
Compare two selected items	Alt+click Append button  (Import in Print Styles)


Keyboard commands for Tools palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Tools palette and Web Tools palette

Display Tools palette or Web Tools palette	F8
Select next tool (or display palette)	Ctrl+Alt+Tab
Select previous tool (or display palette)	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Tab
Keep a tool selected	Alt+click tool
Open Tools pane of Preferences dialog box	Double-click any item creation tool or the Zoom tool


Keyboard commands for Measurements palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Measurements palette

Display Measurements palette	F9
Select first field (or display palette)	Ctrl+Alt+M
Select font field (or display palette)	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+M
Select next field	Tab
Select previous field	Shift+Tab
Exit/Apply	Enter
Exit/Cancel	Escape


Keyboard commands for Document Layout palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Document Layout palette

Display Document Layout palette	F4
Open Section dialog box for selected page	Click lower-left corner of palette
Open Insert Pages dialog box	Alt+drag master page into document area


Keyboard commands for Style Sheets palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Style Sheets palette

Display Style Sheets palette	F11
Display edit style sheet context menu	Right-click style sheet name
Open Edit Style Sheet dialog box	Ctrl+click style sheet
Apply No Style, then style sheet	Alt+click style sheet name


Keyboard commands for Colors palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Colors palette

Display Colors palette	F12
Open Colors dialog box	Ctrl+click color name


Keyboard commands for Trap Information Palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Trap Information Palette

Display Trap Information palette	Ctrl+F12


Keyboard commands for Lists palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Lists palette

Display Lists palette	Ctrl+F11


Keyboard commands for Index palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Index palette

Select Text field (or display Index palette)	Ctrl+Alt+I
Click Add button	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+I
Edit selected index entry	Double-click


Keyboard commands for Find/Change palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Find/Change palette

Display palette	Ctrl+F
Close palette	Ctrl+Alt+F
Change Find Next button to Find First	Alt+Find Next


Keyboard commands for displaying pages
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for displaying pages

Go to Page dialog box	Ctrl+J
Display [master pages]	Shift+F4
Display [next master page]	Ctrl+Shift+F4
Display [previous master page]	Ctrl+Shift+F3
Display document (master page displayed)	Shift+F4


Keyboard commands for changing views
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for changing views

Access view percentage field	Ctrl+Alt+V
Any view to Actual Size	Ctrl+1 (one)
Any view to Fit in Window	Ctrl+0 (zero)
Any view to 200%	Ctrl+Alt+click
200% to Actual Size	Ctrl+Alt+click
Fit largest spread in window	Alt+Fit in Window or Ctrl+Alt+0 (zero)
Zoom in	Ctrl+Space+click/drag
Zoom out	Ctrl+Alt+Space+click/drag


Keyboard commands for scrolling and navigating through documents
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for scrolling and navigating through documents

With Page Grabber Hand	Alt+drag
To start of document	Ctrl+Home
To end of document	Ctrl+End
Up one screen	Page Up
Down one screen	Page Down
To first page	Ctrl+Page Up
To last page	Ctrl+Page Down
To previous page	Shift+Page Up
To next page	Shift+Page Down
To previous spread	Alt+Page Up
To next spread	Alt+Page Down


Keyboard commands for redrawing the screen
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for redrawing the screen

Halt redraw	Escape
Force redraw	Shift+Escape


Keyboard commands for deleting ruler guides
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for deleting ruler guides

Delete horizontal ruler guides	Alt+click horizontal ruler
Delete vertical ruler guides	Alt+click vertical ruler


Keyboard commands for closing documents
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for closing documents

Close document window	Ctrl+F4


Keyboard commands for selecting/deselecting items
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for selecting/deselecting items

Select item in back or behind	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+click where items overlap
Select multiple items or points	Shift+click
Deselect all items	Tab (Item tool selected)


Keyboard commands for creating, resizing, and rotating items
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for creating, resizing, and rotating items

Constrain rectangle to square, or oval to circle	Shift+while creating or resizing
Constrain item rotation to 0/45/90 degrees	Shift+while rotating
Constrain straight line angle to 0/45/90 degrees	Shift+while creating, resizing, or rotating


Keyboard commands for editing Bézier items and paths
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for editing Bézier items and paths

Delete Bézier point	Alt+click point or Backspace (Item tool)
Delete Bézier point while creating item	Backspace
Add Bézier point	Alt+click segment
Corner to smooth point	Ctrl+Shift+drag curve handle
Smooth to corner point	Ctrl+Shift+drag curve handle
Smooth to corner point while creating item	Ctrl+click point, then press Ctrl+F1
Edit Bézier while creating item	Ctrl+create item
Retract curve handles	Ctrl+Shift+click point
Expose curve handles	Ctrl+Shift+drag point
Select all Bézier points in active item  (single path)	Ctrl+Shift+A or triple-click point
Select all Bézier points in active path  (multiple paths)	Ctrl+Shift+A or double-click point
Constrain active point to  45-degree movement	Shift+drag point
Constrain active curve handle to  45-degree movement	Shift+drag curve handle
Convert Bézier line to  filled-center Bézier box	Alt+Item --> Shape -->


Keyboard commands for opening Modify dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for opening Modify dialog box

Open Modify dialog box for selected item	Double-click item with Item tool selected


Keyboard commands for modifying line width
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for modifying line width

Increase by preset range	Ctrl+Shift+>
Increase by 1 point	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+>
Decrease by preset range	Ctrl+Shift+<
Decrease by 1 point	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+<


Keyboard commands for moving items
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for moving items

With no constraints	Ctrl+drag
With horizontal/vertical constraints	Ctrl+Shift+drag


Keyboard commands for nudging items (Item tool)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for nudging items (Item tool)

Left 1 point	Left arrow
Left 1/10 point	Alt+left arrow
Right 1 point	Right arrow
Right 1/10 point	Alt+right arrow
Up 1 point	Up arrow
Up 1/10 point	Alt+up arrow
Down 1 point	Down arrow
Down 1/10 point	Alt+down arrow


Keyboard commands for page numbers and text flow
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for page numbers and text flow

Previous box page number character	Ctrl+2
Current page number character	Ctrl+3
Next box page number character	Ctrl+4
Reflow text in current version of QuarkXPress	Alt+Open in Open dialog box


Keyboard commands for changing fonts
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for changing fonts

Selecting font field in Measurements palette	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+M
Previous font	Ctrl+Shift+F9
Next font	Ctrl+F9


Keyboard commands for modifying font size
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for modifying font size

Increase by preset range	Ctrl+Shift+>
Increase by1 point	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+>
Decrease by preset range	Ctrl+Shift+<
Decrease by1 point	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+<
Resize interactively

Proportionally	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+drag handle
Constrained	Ctrl+Shift+drag handle
Nonproportionally	Ctrl+drag handle


Keyboard commands for modifying scaling
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for modifying scaling

Increase by 5%	Ctrl+]
Increase by 1%	Ctrl+Alt+]
Decrease by 5%	Ctrl+[
Decrease by 1%	Ctrl+Alt+[


Keyboard commands for modifying kerning/tracking
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for modifying kerning/tracking

Increase by 1/20 em	Ctrl+Shift+}
Increase by 1/200 em	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+}
Decrease by 1/20 em	Ctrl+Shift+{
Decrease by 1/200 em	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+{


Keyboard commands for modifying baseline shift
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for modifying baseline shift

Up 1 point	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+)
Down 1 point	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+(


Keyboard commands for modifying leading (auto to absolute)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for modifying leading

Increase by 1 point	Ctrl+Shift+"
Increase by 1/10 point	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+"
Decrease by 1 point	Ctrl+Shift+:
Decrease by 1/10 point	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+:


Keyboard commands for copying paragraph attributes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for copying paragraph attributes

Copy formats to selected paragraphs in text chain	Alt+Shift+click


Keyboard commands for dragging and dropping text
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for dragging and dropping text

Drag-copy text (Interactive Preference on)	Shift+drag


Keyboard commands for searching for text
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for searching for text

Searching for text	Enter in Find What Field
Wild card (Find only)	Ctrl+?
Tab	\t
New paragraph	Ctrl+Enter
New line	Ctrl+Shift+Enter
New column	\c
New box	\b
Previous box page number character	Ctrl+2
Current page number character	Ctrl+3
Next box page number character	Ctrl+4
Punctuation space	Ctrl+. (period)
Flex space	Ctrl+Shift+F
Backslash	Ctrl+\


Keyboard commands for clicking buttons in Check Spelling
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for clicking buttons in Check Spelling

Lookup	Alt+L
Skip	Alt+S
Add	Alt+A
Add all suspect words to auxiliary dictionary	Alt+Shift+click Close button


Entering special characters
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Entering special characters

Indent here	Ctrl+\
Discretionary new line	Ctrl+Enter
New paragraph	Enter
New line	Shift+Enter
New column	Keypad Enter
New box	Shift+Keypad Enter
Right-indent tab	Shift+Tab


Entering hyphens and dashes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Entering hyphens and dashes

Breaking standard hyphen	Hyphen
Nonbreaking standard hyphen	Ctrl+=
Discretionary (soft) hyphen	Ctrl+hyphen
Nonbreaking en dash	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+hyphen
Breaking em dash	Ctrl+Shift+=
Nonbreaking em dash	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+=


Entering spaces
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Entering spaces

Breaking standard space	Space
Nonbreaking standard space	Ctrl+5
Breaking en space	Ctrl+Shift+6
Nonbreaking en space	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+6
Breaking flexible space	Ctrl+Shift+5
Nonbreaking flexible space	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+5
Breaking punctuation space	Shift+Space
Nonbreaking punctuation space	Ctrl+Shift+Space


Moving the text insertion point to:
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Moving the text insertion point to:

Previous character	Left arrow
Next character	Right arrow
Previous line	Up arrow
Next line	Down arrow
Previous word	Ctrl+left arrow
Next word	Ctrl+right arrow
Previous paragraph	Ctrl+up arrow
Next paragraph	Ctrl+down arrow
Start of line	Ctrl+Alt+left arrow or Home
End of line	Ctrl+Alt+right arrow or End
Start of story	Ctrl+Alt+up arrow or Ctrl+Home
End of story	Ctrl+Alt+down arrow or Ctrl+End


Selecting characters
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Selecting characters

Previous character	Shift+left arrow
Next character	Shift+right arrow
Previous line	Shift+up arrow
Next line	Shift+down arrow
Previous word	Ctrl+Shift+left arrow
Next word	Ctrl+Shift+right arrow
Previous paragraph	Ctrl+Shift+up arrow
Next paragraph	Ctrl+Shift+down arrow
Start of line	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+left arrow or Shift+Home
End of line	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+right arrow or Shift+End
Start of story	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+up arrow or Ctrl+Shift+Home
End of story	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+down arrow or Ctrl+Shift+End


Clicking the mouse to select text
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Clicking the mouse to select text

Position text insertion point	One click
Select word	Two clicks in the word
Select word and its period, comma, etc.	Two clicks between word and punctuation
Select line	Three clicks
Select paragraph	Four clicks
Select story	Five clicks


Deleting characters
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Deleting characters

Previous character	Backspace
Next character	Delete or Shift+Backspace
Previous word	Ctrl+Backspace
Next word	Ctrl+Delete or Ctrl+Shift+Backspace
Selected characters	Delete or Backspace


Keyboard commands for importing pictures
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for importing pictures

Import picture at 36 dpi	Shift+Open in Get Picture dialog box
Import color TIFF as grayscale	Ctrl+Open in Get Picture dialog box
Import grayscale TIFF as B&W	Ctrl+Open in Get Picture dialog box
Import EPS without adding spot colors	Ctrl+Open in Get Picture dialog box
Reimport all pictures in document	Ctrl+Open in Open dialog box


Keyboard commands for scaling pictures
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for scaling pictures

Increase 5%	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+>
Decrease 5%	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+<


Keyboard commands for resizing boxes and pictures
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for resizing boxes and pictures

Resize box constraining box shape	Shift+drag
Resize box maintaining aspect ratio	Alt+Shift+drag
Resize box and scale picture	Ctrl+drag
Resize box and scale picture constraining box shape	Ctrl+Shift+drag
Resize box and scale picture maintaining proportions	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+drag


Keyboard commands for centering and fitting pictures
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for centering and fitting pictures

Center	Ctrl+Shift+M
Fit to box	Ctrl+Shift+F


Keyboard commands for nudging pictures (Content tool selected)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for nudging pictures (Content tool selected)

Left 1 point	Left arrow
Left 1/10 point	Alt+left arrow
Right 1 point	Right arrow
Right 1/10 point	Alt+right arrow
Up 1 point	Up arrow
Up 1/10 point	Alt+up arrow
Down 1 point	Down arrow
Down 1/10 point	Alt+down arrow


Keyboard commands for modifying pictures
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for modifying pictures

Negative	Ctrl+Shift+– (hyphen)
Picture Contrast Specifications dialog box	Ctrl+Shift+C
Picture Halftone Specifications dialog box	Ctrl+Shift+H


Context Menus
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Context menus

When you employ a special mouse click, QuarkXPress displays a context menu — a menu containing commands that are specific to the item you clicked. Because it requires less mouse movement and menu searching, a context menu can help you save time while working with documents. Context menus are context-sensitive, so they respond dynamically to the task at hand.

Displaying a context menu	Context menus for document page items
Variations in context menus	Context menus for QuarkXPress palettes


Displaying a context menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Displaying a context menu

To display a context menu on Mac OS, press the appropriate keyboard command and click the object you want to affect. The default keyboard command is Control+click.

In QuarkXPress 4.0 and earlier, Control+click activated the Zoom function on Mac OS. If you are accustomed to this workflow and want to continue using it, you can exchange the default context menu keyboard command (Control+click) with the default Zoom keyboard command (Control+Shift+click) by using the Control Key area in the Preferences dialog box Interactive pane (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences).

To display a context menu on Windows, right-click the object you want to affect.

NOTE: Context menus are available for rulers, empty space on a document page, picture boxes, text boxes and text paths, lines, tables, form controls, and many palettes. In print documents, a context menu is available for the pasteboard.


Context menus for document page items
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Context menus for document page items

Default document page context menu for a print document [PRINT]

When you display the context menu by clicking an empty portion of a page, or the pasteboard in a print document, the default document page context menu displays. The available choices in the document page context menu are Fit in Window, Actual Size, Preferences, Save, Print, and Export. Depending on the selected tool and the contents of the Clipboard, the Paste command may also be available.

Default document page context menu for a Web document [WEB]

When you display the context menu by clicking an empty portion of a page in a Web document, the default document page context menu displays. The available choices in the document page context menu are Preferences, Save, Print, and Export. The Paste command may also be available, depending on the selected tool and the contents of the Clipboard.


Variations in context menus
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Variations in context menus

Context menus are context-sensitive, meaning menu items change according to the active item, the current situation, and the selected tool. The document page context menu commands change depending on whether text, a picture, or a line is active, and depending on whether the active item was selected with the Item tool or the Content tool. They can also vary depending on whether you are working in a print document or a Web document.

For example, in a print document, if a text box or text path is selected with the Item tool when you display a document page context menu, the menu displays these commands: Fit in Window, Actual Size, Modify, Content, Send and Bring, Cut, Copy, and possibly Paste. The Send and Bring submenu allows you to choose Send Backward, Send to Back, Bring Forward, and Bring to Front.

If the same text box is selected with the Content tool when you display the document page context menu, QuarkXPress adds three additional sections to the menu. The first additional section contains the Get Text and Save Text commands. The second additional section contains commands that perform the same functions as commands of the same name in the Style menu: Character Style Sheet and Paragraph Style Sheet. The third section contains the commands Hyperlink and Anchor. When text is selected, the context menu also displays Cut, Copy, Paste, and Convert Text to Table.

QuarkXPress changes these menu sections for an active picture or line so that it includes commands appropriate to the active item.


QuarkXPress palette context menus
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Context menus for QuarkXPress palettes

QuarkXPress can display context menus for the Colors, Hyperlinks, Layers, Lists, Style Sheets, and Index palettes, as well as for open Book palettes. These menus are context-sensitive, meaning that menu items change according to the palette, the active item, the current situation, and the selected tool. For example, when the Item tool is selected, you cannot display a context menu for the Style Sheets palette, but when a text box is selected with the Content tool, you can display the context menu for the Style Sheets palette.

Because of the nature of context menus, there are a number of possibilities for what might display in these menus at any given time. You can experiment with different context menus to familiarize yourself with these menus and the various choices available for the different QuarkXPress items and palettes.


Palettes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Palettes

Palettes give you complete control over page design, character formatting, color, trapping, and long-document publishing features. Each palette may be hidden or displayed, and placed anywhere on your monitor, which allows you to fully customize your workspace. Options in some palettes depend on the tool selected in the Tools palette.

The primary palettes in QuarkXPress include the Tools palette, the Web Tools palette, the Measurements palette, the Document Layout palette, the Style Sheets palette, the Colors palette, the Trap Information palette, the Lists palette, the Layers palette, and the Hyperlinks palette. Each of these palettes may be displayed using the View menu.

Secondary palettes in QuarkXPress are those palettes that are listed in the View menu when certain QuarkXTensions software are installed. These include the Profile Information palette, which is available when the Quark CMS QuarkXTensions software is loaded, and the Index palette, which is available when the Index QuarkXTensions software is loaded.

The Book palette and the Library palette function differently from the palettes that are available in the View menu.

Opening palettes	Closing palettes
Moving palettes	Resizing palettes


Opening palettes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Opening palettes

To open or display a palette, choose View --> Show [name of palette]. Palettes always display in front of other windows, and remain open until you close them.


Closing palettes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Closing palettes

You can close palettes when you do not need them. To close a palette, click the close box in the upper left (Mac OS) or right (Windows) corner of the palette, or choose View --> Hide [name of palette].


Moving palettes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Moving palettes

Palettes are especially convenient because they can be placed anywhere on your screen, allowing you to customize your workspace. Click and drag the bar at the top of a palette to reposition it.


Resizing palettes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Resizing palettes

You can resize the Document Layout, Style Sheets, Colors, Lists, Layers, Hyperlinks, and Index palettes by dragging the size box in the lower right corner of the palettes (Mac OS) or by dragging any edge of the palettes (Windows).


Tools palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Tools palette

To perform a task properly, you need the right tool. The Tools palette lets you create and place boxes, lines, pictures, tables, and text; rotate items; link text boxes so text flows from page to page; and enlarge and reduce the document view. You can customize the Tools palette by rearranging and hiding tools, and you can customize many individual tools by using preferences. The selected tool determines which commands in QuarkXPress are available. An additional tool palette, the Web Tools palette, is available when you are working in a Web document. You can also use keyboard commands to efficiently select or change tools.

To display the Tools palette, choose View --> Show Tools (in a print document) or View --> Tools --> Show Tools (in a Web document). Windows only: To change the orientation of the palette from vertical to horizontal, press Ctrl and double-click the title bar of the palette.

To close the Tools palette, choose View --> Hide Tools (in a print document) or View --> Tools --> Hide Tools (in a Web document), or click the close box in the upper left (Mac OS) or right (Windows) corner of the palette.

Selecting a tool

To select a tool, click it. Press Command+Option+Tab (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Alt+Tab (Windows) to select the tool below the current tool; press Command+Option+Shift+Tab (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Tab (Windows) to select the tool above the current tool.

Tool overview (a list of the tools in the default Tools palette)


Tool preferences
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Tool preferences

You can specify default settings for magnification and item creation through the Tools pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences). You can also access the Tools pane by double-clicking an item creation tool or the Zoom tool. Tool preferences apply to the active document; if no documents are open, tool preferences become application default preferences.


Customizing the Tools palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Customizing the Tools palette

QuarkXPress lets you customize the Tools palette by rearranging, hiding, and adding tools. Many tools are condensed under "pop-out" tools, indicated by an arrow next to the tool.

•	To display the pop-out tools, click and hold a tool that displays an arrow next to it.

•	To use a pop-out tool, click and drag to select the tool. This replaces the tool in the main Tools palette.

•	To add a tool to the main Tools palette, press Control (Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) while you click and drag to select a new pop-out tool.

•	To hide a tool, press Control (Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) while you click that tool. At least one pop-out tool from each category must remain on the palette.

TIP: When you quit QuarkXPress, your current tool arrangement is saved in the "XPress Preferences" file. The next time you launch QuarkXPress, your Tools palette will be just as you left it.


Keyboard commands for the Tools palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for the Tools palette

Use the following keyboard commands with the Tools palette and tools:

Tool Choice	Mac OS command	Windows command
Show Tools palette	F8	F8
Hide Tools palette	F8	F8
Show/hide individual tool	Control+click tool	Ctrl+click tool
Select tool below current tool	Command+Option+ Tab	Ctrl+Alt+Tab
Select tool above current tool	Command+Option +Shift+Tab	Ctrl+Alt+ Shift+Tab
Show Tools pane of Preferences dialog box	Double-click any item creation tool	Double-click any item creation tool
Use Page Grabber Hand*	Option	Alt
Use Zoom In pointer	Control+Shift	Ctrl+Shift
Use Zoom Out pointer	Option+Control	Ctrl+Alt+spacebar
NOTE: You can only show/hide tools that display in pop-out menus: the text box, picture box, line, text path tools, image map, or form control tools. At least one of the tools in the category must display in the Tools palette; for example, you cannot hide all the text box tools.

*The Page Grabber Hand is not accessible when the Zoom tool is selected (Mac OS and Windows) or when the Caps Lock key is down (Mac OS only).

Mac OS only:

The Zoom In keyboard command can be changed to Control in the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Interactive pane).

TIP: If both the Tools and the Web Tools palettes are open in a Web document, pressing F8 hides them both. If only the Tools palette is open, pressing F8 hides the Tools palette; you must press F8 again to display the Web Tools palette. [WEB]


Tool Overview
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Tool overview

The basic function of each tool in the Tools palette is described below. Click on a tool name for complete information about how each tool works. Click on a tool name to get information about using the tool; click "Display (tool name)" to see a specific tool.

The Item tool selects, moves, resizes, and reshapes items (boxes, lines, text paths, and groups), and reshapes clipping and runaround paths. Display Item tool.

The Content tool imports and edits text and pictures, and repeats most Item tool functionality. Display Content tool.

The Rotation tool rotates items manually rather than by entering values in fields. Display Rotation tool.

The Zoom tool enlarges or reduces the document view. Display Zoom tool.

The Text Box tool creates rectangular text boxes; provides access to other text box tools. Display rectangle text box tool.

The Picture Box tool creates rectangle picture boxes; provides access to other picture box tools. Display rectangle picture box tool.

The Table tool creates tables. Display Table tool.

The Line tool creates straight diagonal lines of any angle and provides access to other line tools. Display Line tool.

The Orthogonal Line tool creates straight horizontal and vertical lines. Display Orthogonal Line tool.

The Line Text Path tool creates a straight line, of any angle, that contains text and provides access to other text path tools. Display Line Text Path tool.

The Linking tool establishes text chains to flow text through multiple text boxes. Display Linking tool.

The Unlinking tool breaks links among text boxes. Display Unlinking tool.

The Page Grabber Hand is not part of the Tools palette. Display Page Grabber Hand.


Item Tool and Content Tool
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Item tool and Content tool

When the Item tool is selected, you can cut, copy, and paste text or picture boxes, lines, text paths, groups, form boxes or form controls. When the Content tool is selected, you can cut, copy, paste, clear, delete, and edit selected text or pictures. The Item tool and the Content tool also have several characteristics in common. Use the Item and Content tools interchangeably to select and manipulate boxes, lines, and text paths — or to import and apply styles to pictures.

When the Item tool is selected, this additional functionality is available:

•	Cut, copy, or paste active items entirely. (This is also possible when any tool except the Content tool is selected.)

•	Delete active Bézier points using the Delete (Mac OS) or Backspace (Windows) key.

•	Move active items using arrow keys.

•	Activate a group by selecting only one of its items.

•	Change the line attributes of an active text path. (This is also possible when any other tool is selected except the Content tool.)

When the Content tool is selected, you can cut, copy, paste, or clear (Mac OS) or delete (Windows) selected text or a picture in an active picture box. The box itself is unaffected. You can also use the Content tool to edit and apply attributes to existing text or import new text into an active text box or text path.

Pointers associated with the Item and Content tools:

Text Insertion Bar	Text insertion point	Marquee pointer
Picture Mover pointer	Arrow pointer	Mover pointer
Point pointer	Curve Handle pointer	Line segment pointer
Resizing pointer


Text Insertion Bar
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Text Insertion bar

When the Content tool is selected and the pointer is over a selected text box, text path, or text button, the Text Insertion bar displays. Click the pointer to place the Text Insertion bar where you want to begin importing or editing text. You cannot place the Text Insertion bar below existing paragraphs within a text box. To select text, click and drag the Text Insertion bar. You can cut, copy, clear (Mac OS) or delete (Windows), drag-and-drop, or apply Style menu attributes to selected text.


Text Insertion point
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Text insertion point

When you click the Text Insertion bar in text, the text insertion point displays. When you create a new text box, the text insertion point displays automatically at the top of the box.

You can enter text at this point by typing or by choosing File --> Get Text. You can delete text preceding this point by pressing Delete (Mac OS) or Backspace (Windows); you can delete text following this point by pressing forward delete (Mac OS) or Delete (Windows). To reposition the text insertion point, use the arrow keys on the keyboard or click with the Text Insertion bar.


Picture Mover pointer
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Picture Mover pointer

When the Content tool is selected and the pointer is over an active picture box or active image button containing a picture, the Picture Mover pointer displays. To move the picture, click and drag the Picture Mover pointer in any direction, or use the arrow keys.

You can edit the picture using the Style menu, the Measurements palette, keyboard commands, or the Picture tab of the Modify dialog box (Item --> Modify).

TIP: "Items" in QuarkXPress are picture boxes, text boxes, lines, text paths, tables, form boxes, form controls, image maps, groups, and multiple-selected items. "Contents" in QuarkXPress are pictures and text.


 Picture Mover pointer


Marquee Pointer
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Marquee pointer

When the Item or Content tool is selected, you can access a standard Marquee pointer for selecting multiple items. Click outside the boundaries of any items, then drag the Marquee pointer over items to select them. To add or remove an item from a marqueed selection, press Shift while you click it.


 Marquee pointer


Arrow pointer
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Arrow pointer

When you select the Item or Content tool, the Arrow pointer displays. To select an item, click it with the Arrow pointer; to select multiple items, Shift+click them.


 Arrow pointer


Mover pointer
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Mover pointer

When the Item tool is selected and the pointer is over the an active item, the Mover pointer displays. You can access the Mover pointer when the Content tool is selected by pressing Command (Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows). To move active items, click and drag with the Mover pointer. To move active items horizontally or vertically only, press Shift with the Item tool selected or Command+Shift (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Shift (Windows) with the Content tool selected before you click and drag.

When you click and immediately begin dragging, QuarkXPress displays an outline of the active items as you drag them. If you prefer to see the contents of the active items as you reposition them, you can use delayed item dragging. With the Item tool selected, press the mouse button until the resize handles disappear, and then start dragging. If Delayed Item Dragging (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Interactive pane) is set to Show Contents, the item and items in front of or behind it will appear semitransparent as you drag; this can help you position the item more accurately. If Delayed Item Dragging is set to Live Refresh, the item will display normally (not semitransparent), and any runaround changes caused by repositioning the item will display immediately.

TIP: Before you can display the Mover pointer for a Bézier line, the line’s bounding box must be displayed. To display the bounding box for a Bézier line, uncheck Item --> Edit --> Shape.


 Mover pointer


Resizing pointer
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Resizing pointer

Bounding box handles are the small squares that display around the perimeter of a box, or at each end of a line. When the Item or Content tool is selected and the pointer is over a bounding box handle on an active item, the Resizing pointer displays. To enlarge or reduce an item, click on a handle and drag the Resizing pointer.

Keyboard commands

You can simultaneously scale the contents of a box or text path and resize the item by pressing modifier keys as you drag a handle:

Resize item and scale	Mac OS command	Windows command
Scale	Command+drag	Ctrl+drag
Scale and constrain	Command+Shift+drag	Ctrl+Shift+drag
Scale and maintain proportions	Command+Option+Shift+drag	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+drag


 Resizing pointer


Point pointer
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Point pointer

When the Item or Content tool is selected and the pointer is over a point on a selected Bézier shape, the Point pointer displays. To select a point, click with the Point pointer displayed.

•	Press Shift while clicking to select multiple points.

•	Double-click a point to select all the points in the shape. Triple-click to select all the points in a multiple-path item.

•	To reshape, click to select one point and drag using the Point pointer. If the point is deselected, you can press Shift while selecting and dragging to move the point in 45-degree increments only.

•	Press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) to change the Point pointer into a Point Deletion pointer, and click to delete the point.


 Point pointer


 Point Deletion pointer


 Retract Curve Handle pointer


Curve Handle pointers
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Curve Handle pointers

When the Item or Content tool is selected and the pointer is over a curve handle on a selected Bézier shape, one of the two Curve Handle pointers displays. To reshape a curve, click and drag with the Curve Handle pointer displayed. Curve handle angles determine the starting angles for curves. The distance of the curve handles from the point determines the severity of the curve.

•	Press Shift while dragging a curve handle to move it in 45-degree increments from the point.

•	Press Control+Shift (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Shift (Windows) while dragging a curve handle to change a smooth point to a corner point, or vice versa.

•	Press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) to change the Curve Handle pointer into the Retract Curve Handle pointer, and click to retract the curve handle.


Curve Handle pointer
  Curve Handle pointers


 Retract Curve Handle pointer


Line Segment pointer
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Line Segment pointer

When the Item or Content tool is over a line segment on a selected Bézier shape, the Line Segment pointer displays. To select a line segment (and the two points attached to it), click it with the Line Segment pointer displayed.

•	To reshape a Bézier item, click and drag the Line Segment pointer.

•	Press Shift while dragging a line segment to constrain both its curve handles to 45-degree increments.

•	Press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) to change the Line Segment pointer into an Add Point pointer, and click to add a point.


 Line Segment pointer


 Add Point Pointer


Rotation tool
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Rotation tool

Use the Rotation tool to rotate items manually rather than by entering values in fields. Use the Rotation tool to rotate boxes or straight lines and text paths. When you are finished rotating items, the Tools palette will revert to the previous tool.

Pointers associated with the Rotation tool:

Arrow pointer

Arrowhead pointer

Rotation pointer


Arrow pointer
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Arrow pointer

If no items are selected when you select the Rotation tool,the Arrow pointer displays. To select an item to rotate, click it with the Arrow pointer.


Rotation pointer
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Rotation pointer

When the Rotation tool is selected and the pointer is over an active item, the Rotation pointer displays. To establish a point for an item to rotate around, click and hold the Rotation pointer. The rotation point can be within or outside the active item.


 Rotation pointer


Arrowhead pointer
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Arrowhead pointer

After you establish the rotation point, the Arrowhead pointer displays. To rotate the item, drag the Arrowhead pointer in a circular motion. A line extends from the center of the rotation point to the Arrowhead pointer, indicating the item’s angle of rotation.

You can rotate an item from –360 degrees to +360 degrees. As you drag the Arrowhead pointer, the Box Angle field in the Measurements palette displays the angle change. Press Shift to constrain rotation to 45-degree increments.


 Arrowhead pointer


Rotating boxes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Rotating boxes

With the Rotation tool selected, click and press the mouse button until the pointer flashes, and then start dragging. If Delayed Item Dragging (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Interactive pane) is set to Show Contents, the item and items in front of or behind it will appear semitransparent as you drag; this can help you position the item more accurately. If Delayed Item Dragging is set to Live Refresh, the item will display normally (not semitransparent), and any runaround changes caused by repositioning the item will display immediately.


Rotating straight lines and text paths
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Rotating straight lines and text paths

Lines and text paths created with the Orthogonal or Line tools can only be rotated with the Rotation tool.


Reverting to the previous tool
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Reverting to the previous tool

After you rotate an item, the Rotation tool automatically reverts to the last tool selected (the Item tool or Content tool). To prevent this, press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) while selecting the Rotation tool. This allows you to rotate multiple items without having to reselect the tool each time you rotate.


Zoom Tool
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Zoom tool

Use the Zoom tool to change the view percent of a document or to view a specific area. You can access the Zoom tool, use the Zoom In or Zoom Out pointers, and set preferences for the Zoom tool.


Zoom In pointer
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Zoom In pointer

When you select the Zoom tool, the Zoom In pointer displays. To enlarge the document view according to a specified interval, click the Zoom In pointer. To enlarge a specific area of a document to fit in the document window, marquee the area.


Zoom Out pointer
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Zoom Out pointer

When the Zoom In pointer is displayed, press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) to access the Zoom Out pointer. To reduce the document view, click the Zoom Out pointer. To view a specific area of a document, marquee an area larger than the existing view area by clicking and dragging. The area is reduced as necessary to fit the document window.


Zoom tool preferences
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Zoom tool preferences

The Zoom tool enlarges or reduces the document view according to the Minimum, Maximum, and Increment settings in the Tools pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences). To quickly access the Tools pane of the Preferences dialog box, double-click the Zoom tool.

Select the Zoom tool in the Tools pane and then click the Modify button to access the View dialog box, which allows you to specify attributes for the Zoom tool. The values in the Minimum and Maximum fields indicate the smallest and largest document views you can obtain by clicking the Zoom tool (within the 10% to 800% range for Mac OS, or within the range allowed by the Display DPI Value you specified in the Display pane of the Preferences dialog box for Windows). The value in the Increment field indicates the percent change in view for each mouse click of the Zoom In pointer or Zoom Out pointer. The default value is 25%.


Accessing the Zoom tool
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Accessing the Zoom tool

When any other tool is selected, you can access the Zoom In pointer by pressing the appropriate keyboard command (Mac OS) or Ctrl+space (Windows). On Mac OS, the default keyboard command is Control+Shift. You can exchange this with the keyboard command for displaying context menus (Control) in the Interactive pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences).

You can access the Zoom Out pointer while any tool is selected by pressing Control+Option (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Alt+space (Windows).

TIP: If the pointer is over a Bézier point when you press these keyboard commands, the Zoom tool will not display.


Standard-Shape Text Box Tools
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Standard-shape text box tools

Use the standard-shape text box tools to create text boxes (containers for text) in the following predefined shapes:

•	Rectangle Text Box tool for rectangular or square text boxes

•	Rounded-corner Text Box tool for rectangular text boxes with curved corners

•	Concave-corner Text Box tool for rectangular text boxes with corners rounded inward

•	Beveled-corner Text Box tool for rectangular text boxes with beveled corners

•	Oval Text Box tool for oval or circular text boxes

•	You can also use the freehand text box tools to create text boxes of any shape, or the Bézier text box tool to create text boxes with point-by-point control.

When you select a text box tool, the crosshair pointer displays; size and placement of the text box are reflected in the Measurements palette. After drawing a text box, the Tools palette will revert to the previous tool. You can also set preferences for text boxes.


Crosshair pointer
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Crosshair pointer

When a standard-shape text box tool is selected, the Crosshair pointer displays. To create a standard-shape text box, click and drag the Crosshair pointer diagonally. To create a square or circular text box, press Shift while you click and drag.

TIP: You can change the shape of a selected text box using the Shape submenu of the Item menu.


Size and placement
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Size and placement

As you click and drag the Crosshair pointer, the X, Y, W, and H fields in the Measurements palette display the coordinates, width, and height of the text box. If the rulers are displaying in the document window (View --> Show Rulers), dotted lines on the ruler indicate the starting position of the Crosshair pointer and the width and height of the text box.


Text box tool preferences
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Text box tool preferences

New text boxes have the attributes specified in the Tools pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences). To quickly access the Tools pane of the Preferences dialog box, double-click a text box tool.

Select a standard-shape text box tool in the Tools pane and then click the Modify button to access the Modify dialog box, which allows you to specify attributes for new text boxes such as the background color, number of columns, frame, and runaround. You can also specify Corner Radius values (the amount of space taken up by the corners) for rounded-corner, concave-corner, and beveled-corner text boxes.


Reverting to the previous tool
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Reverting to the previous tool

After you create a text box, the text box tools automatically revert to the last tool selected (the Item tool or Content tool). To prevent this, press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) while selecting a text box tool. This allows you to draw several text boxes without selecting the tool again.


Standard-Shape Picture Box Tools
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Standard-shape picture box tools

Use the standard-shape picture box tools to create picture boxes (containers for pictures) in the following predefined shapes:

•	Rectangle Picture Box tool for rectangular or square picture boxes

•	Rounded-corner Picture Box tool for rectangular picture boxes with curved corners

•	Concave-corner Picture Box tool for rectangular picture boxes with corners rounded inward

•	Beveled-corner Picture Box tool for rectangular picture boxes with beveled corners

•	Oval Picture Box tool for oval or circular picture boxes

•	You can also use the freehand picture box tool to create items of any shape, or the Bézier picture box tool to create picture boxes with point-by-point control.

NOTE: Pictures are imported into picture boxes; you cannot have a picture in a document that contains no picture boxes.

When you select a picture box tool, the crosshair pointer displays; size and placement of the picture box are reflected in the Measurements palette. After drawing a picture box, the Tools palette will revert to the previous tool. You can also set preferences for picture boxes.


Crosshair pointer
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Crosshair pointer

When a standard-shape picture box tool is selected, the Crosshair pointer displays. To create a standard-shape picture box, click and drag the Crosshair pointer diagonally. To create a square or circular picture box, press Shift while you click and drag.

TIP: You can change the shape of a selected picture box using the Shape submenu of the Item menu.


Size and placement
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Size and placement

As you click and drag the Crosshair pointer, the X, Y, W, and H fields in the Measurements palette display the coordinates, width, and height of the picture box. If the rulers are displaying in the document window (View --> Show Rulers), dotted lines on the ruler indicate the starting position of the Crosshair pointer and the width and height of the picture box.


Picture box tool preferences
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Picture box tool preferences

New picture boxes have the attributes specified in the Tools pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences). To quickly access the Tools pane of the Preferences dialog box, double-click any picture box tool.

Select a standard-shape picture box tool in the Tools pane and then click the Modify button to access the Modify dialog box, which allows you to specify attributes for new picture boxes such as the background color, picture placement within the box, frame, and runaround. You can also specify Corner Radius values (the amount of space taken up by the corners) for rounded-corner, concave-corner, and beveled-corner picture boxes.


Reverting to the previous tool
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Reverting to the previous tool

After you create a picture box, the picture box tools automatically revert to the last tool selected (the Item tool or Content tool). To prevent this, press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) while selecting a picture box tool. This allows you to draw several picture boxes without selecting the tool again.


Straight Line Tools
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Straight line tools

Use the straight line tools to create horizontal, vertical, and diagonal lines:

•	Orthogonal Line tool for horizontal and vertical lines

•	Line tool for diagonal lines

•	You can also use the freehand line tool to create items of any shape, or the Bézier line tool to create lines with point-by-point control..

When you select a line tool, the crosshair pointer displays; size and position of the line are reflected in the Measurements palette. After drawing a line, the Tools palette will revert to the previous tool. You can also set preferences for lines.


Crosshair pointer
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Crosshair pointer

When either straight line tool is selected, the Crosshair pointer displays. To create a straight line, click and drag the Crosshair pointer. To constrain lines created with the Line tool to any 45-degree increment (such as 0, 45, or 90 degrees.), press Shift while you click and drag.


Size and position
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Size and position

As you click and drag the Crosshair pointer, the fields in the Measurements palette change to reflect the position, length, or angle of the line. If the rulers are displaying in the document window (View --> Show Rulers), dotted lines on the ruler indicate the starting and ending position of the Crosshair pointer.

QuarkXPress reports the position of straight lines according to their Endpoints, Left Point, Midpoint, or Right Point. Fields in the Measurements palette change to report the appropriate values for the selected line mode. The left point is the leftmost point of the line and the right point is the rightmost point of the line.


Line tool preferences
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Line tool preferences

New lines have the attributes specified in the Tools pane  of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences). To quickly access the Tools pane of the Preferences dialog box, double-click one of the line tools.

Select a straight line tool in the Tools pane and then click the Modify button to access the Modify dialog box, which allows you to specify attributes for new lines such as style, width, color, shade, and runaround.


Reverting to the previous tool
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Reverting to the previous tool

After you create a line, the line tools automatically revert to the last tool selected (the Item tool or Content tool). To prevent this, press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) while selecting a line tool. This allows you to draw several lines without selecting the tool again.


Straight Text Path Tools
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Straight text path tools

Use the straight text path tools to create horizontal, vertical, and diagonal text paths (lines that support text):

•	Orthogonal Text Path tool for horizontal and vertical text paths

•	Line Text Path tool for diagonal text paths

•	You can also use the freehand text path tool to create items of any shape, or the Bézier line tool to create text paths with point-by-point control.

When you select a text path tool, the crosshair pointer displays; size and position of the text path are reflected in the Measurements palette. After drawing a line, the Tools palette will revert to the previous tool. You can also set preferences for lines.


Crosshair pointer
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Crosshair pointer

When either straight text path tool is selected, the Crosshair pointer displays. To create a straight text path, click and drag the Crosshair pointer. To constrain text paths created with the Line Text Path tool to any 45-degree increment (such as 0, 45, or 90 degrees.), press Shift while you click and drag.


Size and position
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Size and position

As you click and drag the Crosshair pointer, the fields in the Measurements palette change to reflect the position, length, or angle of the text path. If the rulers are displaying in the document window (View --> Show Rulers), dotted lines on the ruler indicate the starting and ending position of the Crosshair pointer.

QuarkXPress reports the position of straight text paths according to their Endpoints, Left Point, Midpoint, or Right Point. Fields in the Measurements palette change to report the appropriate values for the selected line mode. The left point is the endpoint you draw from; the right point is the endpoint created when you release the mouse button.


Text path tool preferences
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Text path tool preferences

New text paths have the attributes specified in the Tools pane  of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences). To quickly access the Tools pane of the Preferences dialog box, double-click one of the text path tools.

Select a text path tool in the Tools pane and then click the Modify button to access the Modify dialog box, which allows you to specify attributes for new text paths such as the style, width, color, shade, and runaround for the line, or the alignment and orientation of text in relation to the line.


Reverting to the previous tool
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Reverting to the previous tool

After you create a text path, the text path tools automatically revert to the last tool selected (the Item tool or Content tool). To prevent this, press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) while selecting a text path tool. This allows you to draw several text paths without selecting the tool again.


Bézier Tools
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Bézier tools

Use the Bézier text box, picture box, line, and text path tools to create items of any shape, with point-by-point control.

When you select a Bézier tool, the crosshair pointer displays; size and position of the item are reflected in the Measurements palette. After drawing an item, the Tools palette will revert to the previous tool. You can also set preferences for Bézier items.


Crosshair pointer
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Crosshair pointer

When a Bézier tool is selected, the Crosshair pointer displays. To create a Bézier item:

•	Click to establish the first corner point in the shape, or click and drag to establish the first smooth point in the shape. If you click and drag, the curve handles of the smooth point display.

•	Release the mouse button and repeat the above step to establish a second point, a third point, and so on. Segments display between each two points. Click when you want a corner point; click and drag when you want a smooth point.

•	When curve handles display, their angles determine the starting angles for curves. The distance of the curve handles from the point determines the severity of the curve.

•	To access the Item tool to reshape the item before it is completed, press Command (Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows). While Command or Ctrl is pressed, the Crosshair pointer changes to the Arrow pointer, or to one of the Bézier reshaping pointers when placed over a point, segment, or curve handle. Press Command+Control (Mac OS) or Ctrl+F1 (Windows) and click a point to change a smooth point to a corner point.

•	Complete the new shape by double-clicking to create the last point or by selecting a new tool in the Tools palette. If you have one of the Bézier box tools selected, you can also complete the shape by clicking the first point in the box. The Crosshair pointer changes to the Close Box pointer when the pointer is positioned over the first point in a box.


Placement
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Placement

As you click and drag using any of the Bézier pointers, the X and Y fields in the Measurements palette display the pointer’s coordinates. If the rulers are displaying in the document window (View --> Show Rulers), dotted lines on the ruler indicate the position of the pointer.


Bézier tool preferences
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Bézier tool preferences

New Bézier items have the attributes specified in the Tools pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences). To quickly access the Tools pane of the Preferences dialog box, double-click a Bézier tool.

Select a Bézier tool in the Tools pane and then click the Modify button to access the Modify dialog box, which allows you to specify attributes for new Bézier items drawn with the tool.


Reverting to the previous tool
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Reverting to the previous tool

After you create a Bézier item, the Bézier tools automatically revert to the last tool selected (the Item tool or Content tool). To prevent this, press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) while selecting a Bézier tool. This allows you to draw several Bézier items without selecting the tool again.


Freehand Tools
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Freehand tools

Use the freehand text box, picture box, line, or text path tools to create items of any shape.

When you select a freehand tool, the crosshair pointer displays; size and position of the item are reflected in the Measurements palette. After drawing an item, the Tools palette will revert to the previous tool. You can also set preferences for Bézier items.


Crosshair pointer
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Crosshair pointer

When a freehand tool is selected, the Crosshair pointer displays. Click and drag to draw a shape. Release the mouse button to complete the shape. If you are using one of the freehand box tools, the Close Box pointer is displayed when you drag the Crosshair pointer over the starting point.

To edit the curves of a completed freehand shape, use the Item tool or Content tool, and make sure Item --> Edit --> Shape is checked.


Placement
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Placement

As you click and drag the Crosshair pointer, the X and Y fields in the Measurements palette display the pointer’s coordinates. If the rulers are displaying in the document window (View --> Show Rulers), dotted lines on the ruler indicate the position of the Crosshair pointer.


Freehand tool preferences
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Freehand tool preferences

New freehand items have the attributes specified in the Tools pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences). To quickly access the Tools pane of the Preferences dialog box, double-click a freehand tool.

Select a freehand tool in the Tools pane and then click the Modify button to access the Modify dialog box, which allows you to specify attributes such as the background color, picture angle, frame, and runaround for new freehand items.


Reverting to the previous tool
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Reverting to the previous tool

After you create a freehand item, the freehand tools automatically revert to the last tool selected (the Item tool or Content tool). To prevent this, press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) while selecting a freehand tool. This allows you to draw several freehand items without selecting the tool again.


Linking/Unlinking Tools
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Linking/Unlinking tools

Use the Linking tool to link text boxes so that text flows from box to box. This text is referred to as a "chain" or "story." Use the Unlinking tool to break the links between text boxes. When you first select the Linking tool, the Arrow pointer displays. To select the first text box in a chain, click it with the Arrow pointer. The text box displays a marquee.

When the first text box in the chain is selected and displays a marquee, the Linking pointer displays. To link the box to another box, click on a second box. Text flows through the boxes in the order in which you link them. When the Linking tool is selected, links for the selected text boxes display as arrows.

TIP: The Automatic Text Box feature and master pages can be used to create an automatic text chain, instead of manually linking boxes.

After you link two boxes, the Linking tool automatically reverts to the last tool selected (the Item tool or Content tool). To prevent this, press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) while selecting the Linking tool. This allows you to link multiple boxes without selecting the tool again.

When you first select the Unlinking tool, the Arrow pointer displays. Click any text box within a text chain; the text box links display as arrows. To break links between boxes, click the arrowhead or the tail feathers on the linking arrows.

To remove a text box from a text chain, and reroute the links around it, press Shift while you click the box with the Unlinking tool selected. After you break the link between two boxes, the Unlinking tool automatically reverts to the last tool selected (the Item tool or Content tool). To prevent this, press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) while selecting the Unlinking tool. This allows you to break the link between several boxes without selecting the tool again.


 Linking pointer


Table Tool
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Table tool

Use the Table tool to create tables in both print and Web documents. Tables consist of cells, which may contain text or pictures. When you select the Table tool, the crosshair pointer displays; size and placement  of the table is reflected in the Measurements palette. After drawing a table, the Tools palette will revert to the previous tool. You can also set preferences for tables.


Crosshair pointer
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Crosshair pointer

When the Table tool is selected, the Crosshair pointer displays. To create a table, click and drag the Crosshair pointer diagonally. To create a square table, press Shift while you click and drag.


Size and placement
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Size and placement

As you click and drag the Crosshair pointer, the X, Y, W, and H fields in the Measurements palette display the coordinates, width, and height of the table. If the rulers are displaying in the document window (View --> Show Rulers), dotted lines on the ruler indicate the starting position of the Crosshair pointer and the width and height of the table.

If Show Creation Dialog is checked in the Modify dialog box Creation tab (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Tools pane --> Table tool --> Modify), releasing the mouse button activates the Table Properties dialog box, where you can specify the number of rows and columns for the new table, and indicate whether the contents of the table cells will be text or pictures.


Table tool preferences
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Table tool preferences

New tables have the attributes specified in the Tools pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences). To quickly access the Tools pane of the Preferences dialog box, double-click the Table tool.

Select the Table tool in the Tools pane and then click the Modify button to access the Modify dialog box, which allows you to specify attributes such as runaround, background, and cell or border colors for new tables. In Web documents, you can also specify attributes for frames.


Reverting to the previous tool
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Reverting to the previous tool

After you create a table, the Table tool automatically reverts to the last tool selected (the Item tool or Content tool). To prevent this, press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) while selecting the Table tool. This allows you to draw several tables without selecting the tool again.


Page Grabber Hand Tool
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Page Grabber Hand tool

Use the Page Grabber Hand to scroll a page in any direction. The Page Grabber Hand allows you to scroll with more precision than the scroll bars, and to scroll horizontally and vertically at the same time. You can access the Page Grabber Hand by pressing Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) while any tool except the Zoom tool is selected. On Mac OS, make sure the Caps Lock key is not in use. Click and drag in any direction to move around within a page, spread, or document. When you release the Option key (Mac OS) or Alt key (Windows), the previous tool is selected again.

The Page Grabber Hand is always in Live Scroll mode, regardless of the Live Scroll setting in the Interactive pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences). This means the document view is updated as you scroll, rather than redrawing after you stop.

Scrolling with the Page Grabber Hand is affected by the Speed Scroll setting in the Interactive pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences). Speed Scroll accelerates scrolling by temporarily greeking pictures and blends; when you stop scrolling, the page elements redraw completely.


Web Tools Palette [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Web Tools palette

The Web Tools palette lets you create and place form boxes and form controls in Web documents. When the ImageMap QuarkXTensions software is loaded, it also lets you draw hot areas for image maps.

You can customize the Tools palette by rearranging and hiding tools, and you can customize many individual tools by using preferences. The selected tool determines which commands in QuarkXPress are available. You can also use keyboard commands to efficiently select or change tools.

The Web Tools palette displays only when a Web document is active. To display the Web Tools palette, choose View --> Tools --> Show Web Tools. The Web Tools palette must be closed manually. To close the Web Tools palette, choose View --> Tools --> Hide Web Tools or click the Close box.

TIP: If both the Tools and the Web Tools palettes are open in a Web document, pressing F8 hides them both. If only the Tools palette is open, pressing F8 hides the Tools palette; you must press F8 again to display the Web Tools palette and the Tools palette.

To select a tool, click it. Press Command+Option+Tab (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Alt+Tab (Windows) to select the tool below the current tool; press Command+Option+Shift+Tab (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Tab (Windows) to select the tool above the current tool.

Web tools overview (a list of the tools in the default Web Tools palette)


Web Tools Preferences
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Web Tools preferences

You can specify default settings for Web item creation through the Tools pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences  -> Preferences). You can also access the Tools pane by double-clicking an image map tool or the Form Box tool in the Web Tools palette. Tool preferences apply to the active document; if no documents are open, tool preferences become application default preferences.


Customizing the Web tools palette [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Customizing the Web tools palette [WEB]

QuarkXPress lets you customize the Web Tools palette by rearranging, hiding, and adding tools. Some tools are condensed under "pop-out" tools, indicated by an arrow next to the tool.

•	To display the pop-out tools, click and hold a tool that displays an arrow next to it.

•	To use a pop-out tool, click and drag to select the tool. This replaces the tool in the main Web Tools palette.

•	To add a tool to the main Web Tools palette, press Control (Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) while you click and drag to select a new pop-out tool.

•	To hide a tool, press Control (Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) while you click that tool. At least one tool from each pop-out category must remain on the palette.

TIP: When you quit QuarkXPress, your current tool arrangement is saved in the "XPress Preferences" file. The next time you launch QuarkXPress, your Web Tools palette will be just as you left it.


Keyboard commands for Web Tools palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for Web Tools palette

Use the following keyboard commands with the Web Tools palette and tools:

Tool choice	Mac OS command	Windows command
Show Web Tools palette	F8	F8
Hide Web Tools palette	F8	F8
Show/hide individual tool*	Control+click	Ctrl+click
Select tool below current tool	Command+Option+Tab	Ctrl+Alt+Tab
Select tool above current tool	Command+Option+Shift+Tab	Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Tab
Show Tools pane of Preferences dialog box	Double-click image map or form box tools	Double-click image map or form box tools
* You can only hide tools that display in pop-out menus: the image map, form box and file selection tools. At least one of the tools in the category must display in the Tools palette; for example, you cannot hide all the image map tools.

TIP: If both the Tools and the Web Tools palettes are open in a Web document, pressing F8 hides them both. If only the Tools palette is open, pressing F8 hides the Tools palette; you must press F8 again to display the Web Tools palette. [WEB]


Web Tools Palette Overview
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Web Tools palette overview (default Web Tools palette)

The basic function of each tool in the Web Tools palette is described below. Click on a tool name to get information about using the tool; click "Display (tool name)" to see a specific tool.

The Image Map tool creates image map "hot areas." The image map tools are available when the ImageMap QuarkXTensions software is loaded. Display rectangular, oval, or Bézier Image Map tool.

The Form Box tool creates a form box (to contain form controls). Display Form Box tool.

The File Selection tool creates a file submission form control. Display File Selection tool.

The Text Field tool creates a text field form control. Display Text Field tool.

The Button tool creates a button form control. Display Button tool.

The Image Button tool creates a button form control that will allow a picture to be imported. Display Image Button tool.

The Pop-up Menu tool creates a pop-up menu form control. Display Pop-up Menu tool.

The List Box tool creates a list form control. Display List tool.

The Radio Button tool creates a radio button form control. Display Radio Button tool.

The Check Box tool creates a check box form control. Display Check Box tool.


Default Web Tools palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Web Tools (overview)

The Image Map tool creates rectangular image map "hot areas" and provides access to other image map tools. The image map tools are available when the ImageMap QuarkXTensions software is loaded.

The Form Box tool creates a form box (to contain form controls).

The File Selection tool creates a file submission form control. By default, this is a pop-out tool of the form box tool.

The Text Field tool creates a text field form control.

The Button tool creates a button form control.

The Image Button tool creates a button form control that will allow a picture to be imported.

The Pop-up Menu tool creates a pop-up menu form control.

The List Box tool creates a list form control.

The Radio Button tool creates a radio button form control.

The Check Box tool creates a check box form control.


Image map tools

Image Map tools

The Image Map tools are available when the ImageMap QuarkXTensions software is loaded. An image map is an HTML feature that lets you link to different Web pages by clicking on different parts of a picture (called "hot areas") in a Web page. Use the image map tools to create hot areas in an image map using the following predefined shapes:

•	Rectangle Image Map tool for rectangular and square hot areas

•	Oval Image Map tool for oval and circular hot areas

•	Bézier Image Map tool for Bézier-shaped hot areas

Crosshair pointer

Image map tool preferences

Reverting to the previous tool


Crosshair pointer
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Crosshair pointer

When an image map tool is selected, the Crosshair pointer displays. To create a hot area, begin within the bounds of a picture and click and drag the Crosshair pointer. The hot area displays as an opaque layer over the picture. To create a square or circular hot area, press Shift while you click and drag.

To display a hot area, select a picture and then choose View --> Show Guides. To hide hot areas, choose View --> Hide Guides. You can adjust the size of a hot area by clicking on it, selecting a handle on the hot area’s bounding box, and then dragging the handle to resize.


Image map tool preferences
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Image map tool preferences

Image map tools have attributes specified in the Tools pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences).

Select an image map tool in the Tools pane and then click Modify to access the Image Map Properties dialog box, which allows you to specify the maximum number of points for a Bézier hot area, and the granularity of hot areas.


Reverting to the previous tool
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Reverting to the previous tool

After you create a hot area, the image map tools automatically revert to the last tool selected (the Item tool or Content tool). To prevent this, press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) while selecting an image map tool. This allows you to draw several hot areas without selecting the tool again.


Form Box tool
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Form Box tool

Use the Form Box tool to create a form box that can contain form controls. Form boxes cannot overlap each other on a page.

Crosshair pointers	Size and placement
Form Box tool preferences	Reverting to the previous tool


Crosshair pointer
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Crosshair pointer

When the Form Box tool is selected, the Crosshair pointer displays. To create a form box, click and drag the Crosshair pointer diagonally. To create a square form box, press Shift while you click and drag. If Show Visual Indicators is chosen in the View menu, a form box visual indicator displays in the upper right corner of the box.


Size and Placement
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Size and placement

As you click and drag the Crosshair pointer, the X, Y, W, and H fields in the Measurements palette display the coordinates, width, and height of the form box. If the rulers are displaying in the document window (View --> Show Rulers), dotted lines on the ruler indicate the starting position of the Crosshair pointer and the width and height of the form box.


Form box tool preferences
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Form box tool preferences

New form boxes have the attributes specified in the Tools pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences). To quickly access the Tools pane of the Preferences dialog box, double-click the Form Box tool.


Reverting to the previous tool
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Reverting to the previous tool

After you create a form box, the form box tool automatically reverts to the last tool selected (the Item tool or Content tool). To prevent this, press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) while selecting the Form Box tool. This allows you to draw several form boxes without selecting the tool again.


Form control tools
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Form control tools

Use the form control tools to create Web page forms that allow users to enter or upload their own information, and then submit that information to the Web server.

Use the following tools to create form controls:

•	File Selection tool for controls that let users submit a file.

•	Text Field tool for controls that let users enter plain text or a password in a field, or for hidden fields that can calculate information to be submitted with the form without displaying on the user’s screen.

•	Button tool for buttons that users can click to perform an action.

•	Image Button tool for adding imported pictures to buttons.

•	Pop-up Menu tool for controls that let users choose from among several options in a pop-up menu.

•	List Box tool for controls that let users choose from among several options in a scrollable list.

•	Radio Button tool for radio buttons that let users choose from among mutually exclusive options.

•	Check Box tool for check boxes that let users turn an option on or off.

All form controls must be contained within a form box. If you use one of the form control tools to create a form control outside of an existing form box, QuarkXPress creates a new form box to contain the control. The default size of the new form box is determined by settings in the Preferences dialog box. (Choose Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences. In the Tools pane, choose the Form Box tool and click Modify to make changes to the default size.)

TIP: While hidden fields can overlap each other within a form box, visible form controls cannot.

Crosshair pointer

Size and placement

Reverting to the previous tool


Crosshair pointer
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Crosshair pointer

When a form control tool is selected, the Crosshair pointer displays. To create a form control, click and drag the Crosshair pointer diagonally.


Size and Placement
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Size and placement

As you click and drag the Crosshair pointer, the X and Y fields in the Measurements palette display the coordinates of the form control. For some form controls, the W and H field also indicate the width and height of the control. If the rulers are displaying in the document window (View --> Show Rulers), dotted lines on the ruler indicate the starting position of the Crosshair pointer and the width and height of the form control.

TIP	Many form controls have pre-set sizes, and may automatically expand to accommodate information you enter for the form control in the Modify dialog box (Item --> Modify).


Reverting to the previous tool
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Reverting to the previous tool

After you create a form control, the form control tool automatically reverts to the last tool selected (the Item tool or Content tool). To prevent this, press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) while selecting the form control tool. This allows you to draw several form controls without selecting the tool again.


Measurements palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Measurements palette

The Measurements palette (View --> Show Measurements) lets you quickly edit several commonly used item specifications without choosing Item --> Modify or using the Style menu. Options in the Measurements palette change to reflect the selected tool or item. The left side of the palette indicates an item’s position; the right side indicates an item’s content. This section describes the various components of the Measurements palette.

You can edit any of the values in the Measurements palette (F9). Changes made to values on the left side of the palette are applied by pressing Return (Mac OS) or Enter (Windows) or exiting the palette; changes made to numerical values on the right side of the palette are applied by moving to a different field, pressing Return (Mac OS) or Enter (Windows), or exiting the palette. Clicking a button or choosing an item from a pop-up menu on the right side of the Measurements palette applies the change immediately.

Measurements displayed in the Measurements palette are updated when you create, move, resize, or modify items, create or move guides, or reposition the ruler origin.

Click on the Measurements palette to activate it, or press Command+Option+M (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Alt+M (Windows) to access the first field in the palette. Press Tab to select the next field, or press Shift+Tab to select the previous field. Click on the document, or press Return or Enter (Mac OS) or Enter (Windows) to apply changes made in the Measurements palette. Press Command+. (period) (Mac OS) or Esc (Windows) to exit the Measurements palette without applying changes.

The fields displayed in the Measurements palette correspond to fields that can be accessed by choosing Item --> Modify.

Measurements palette for:

Text boxes	Picture boxes
Lines	Text paths
Groups or multiple-selected items	Bézier items
Tables	Image maps [WEB]
Form boxes [WEB]	Form controls [WEB]
Ruler origin	Ruler guides


Measurements palette for text boxes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Measurements palette for text boxes

Item information

Content information


Item information
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Item information

When a text box is selected in the document window, the left side of the Measurements palette lets you view and edit the text box item information.

•	The X and Y fields indicate the horizontal and vertical locations of the origin (upper left corner) of the text box. These fields also display the coordinates of the pointer after selecting one of the text box creation tools in the Tools palette but before clicking the mouse button.

•	The W and H fields indicate the width and height of the text box.

•	The Box Angle field indicates the text box’s angle of rotation.

•	The Cols field indicates the number of columns in the text box.


Content information
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Content information

When the Content tool is selected, the right side of the Measurements palette lets you edit the contents of the text box.

•	The Flip Horizontal button lets you horizontally flip the contents of the text box.

•	The Flip Vertical button lets you vertically flip the contents of the text box.

•	The Leading field indicates paragraph leading. To adjust leading, enter a value in the field or click the arrows.

•	The kerning/tracking field indicates kerning when the text insertion point is between two characters and indicates tracking when a block of text is selected. To adjust kerning and tracking, enter a value in the field or click the arrows.

•	The Left, Center, Right, Justify, and Forced buttons indicates the corresponding alignment of selected paragraphs.

•	The Font pop-up menu indicates the selected font. To change the font, choose a font from the pop-up menu or enter the name of the font in the field. Windows only: To see what the font looks like, press Shift while accessing the Font pop-up menu.

•	The Size pop-up menu indicates the size of the selected font. To change the font size, choose a size from the pop-up menu or enter a value in the field.

•	The Plain, Bold, Italics, Underline, Word Underline, Strike through, Outline, Shadow, All Caps, Small Caps, Superscript, Subscript, and Superior type style buttons indicate the corresponding type styles. Multiple type styles may be applied to a single character or group of characters.

NOTE: The Measurements palette looks slightly different for anchored text boxes. When an anchored text box is active, the Measurements palette indicates whether the text box aligns with the ascent or baseline of the associated line of text. Click the ascent or baseline button to change the alignment of an anchored text box. The X and Y fields are not available for anchored text boxes. When the Content tool is selected, the Measurements palette displays the same content controls for anchored text boxes as for nonanchored text boxes.

TIP: When an HTML text box is selected, the following settings are unavailable in the Measurements palette: kerning and tracking arrows; Outline, Shadow, Small Caps, Superior, and Word Underline type style buttons; Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical buttons; the Box Angle field; and the Justified and Forced alignment buttons. If you want to use any of these settings in an HTML text box, choose Item --> Modify and check Convert to Graphic on Export to convert the HTML text box to a raster box.


Measurements palette for picture boxes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Measurements palette for picture boxes

Item information

Content information


Item information
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Item information

When a picture box is selected, the left side of the Measurements palette lets you edit the picture box item information.

•	The X and Y fields indicate the location of the origin (upper left corner) of the picture box. These fields also display the coordinates of the pointer after selecting one of the picture box creation tools in the Tools palette but before clicking the mouse button.

•	The W and H fields indicate the width and height of the picture box.

•	The Box Angle field indicates the picture box’s angle of rotation.

•	The Corner Radius field indicates the radii of the corners of the picture box.


Content information
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Content information

When the Item tool or the Content tool is selected, the right side of the Measurements palette lets you edit the contents of the picture box.

•	The Flip Horizontal button lets you horizontally flip the contents of the picture box.

•	The Flip Vertical button lets you vertically flip the contents of the picture box.

•	The X% and Y% fields indicate the horizontal and vertical scaling of the contents of the picture box.

•	The X+ and Y+ fields indicate the horizontal and vertical offset of the contents of the picture box from the picture box’s origin (upper left corner).

•	The Angle field indicates the angle of rotation of the contents of the picture box.

•	The Skew field indicates the skew (slant) of the contents of the picture box.

NOTE: The Measurements palette looks slightly different for anchored picture boxes. When an anchored picture box is active, the Measurements palette indicates whether the picture box aligns with the ascent or the baseline of the associated line of text. Click the ascent or baseline button to change the alignment of the anchored picture box. The X and Y fields are not available for anchored picture boxes. When the Item tool or Content tool is selected, the Measurements palette displays the same content controls for anchored picture boxes as those for nonanchored text boxes.


Measurements palette for lines
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Measurements palette for lines

Fields displayed in the Measurements palette for non-Bézier lines vary according to the line description method chosen from the Mode pop-up menu. Line description methods available in the Mode pop-up menu include Endpoints, Left Point, Midpoint, and Right Point.


Endpoints
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Endpoints

When Endpoints is chosen from the Mode pop-up menu:

•	The X1 and Y1 fields indicate the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the leftmost end-point of the line.

•	The X2 and Y2 fields indicate the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the rightmost end-point of the line.

•	The Mode pop-up menu lets you choose whether to describe the selected line by Endpoints; by the Left Point, length, and angle; by the Right Point, length, and angle; or by the Midpoint, length, and angle.

•	The W field indicates the width of the line.

•	The left pop-up menu indicates the line’s style.

•	The right pop-up menu indicates the line’s arrowheads.


Left Point
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Left Point

When Left Point is chosen from the Mode pop-up menu:

•	The X1 and Y1 fields indicate the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the left end-point of the line.

•	The Angle field indicates the line’s angle of rotation.

•	The L field indicates the line’s length.

•	The Mode pop-up menu lets you choose whether to describe the selected line by Endpoints; by the Left Point, length, and angle; by the Right Point, length, and angle; or by the Midpoint, length, and angle.

•	The W field indicates the width of the line.

•	The left pop-up menu indicates the line’s style.

•	The right pop-up menu indicates the line’s arrowheads.


Midpoint
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Midpoint

When Midpoint is chosen from the Mode pop-up menu:

•	The XC and YC fields indicate the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the midpoint of the line.

•	The Angle field indicates the line’s angle of rotation.

•	The L field indicates the line’s length.

•	The Mode pop-up menu lets you choose whether to describe the selected line by Endpoints; by the Left Point, length, and angle; by the Right Point, length, and angle; or by the Midpoint, length, and angle.

•	The W field indicates the width of the line.

•	The left pop-up menu indicates the line’s style.

•	The right pop-up menu indicates the line’s arrowheads.


Right Point
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Right Point

When Right Point is chosen from the Mode pop-up menu:

•	The X2 and Y2 fields indicate the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the right end-point of the line.

•	The Angle field indicates the line’s angle of rotation.

•	The L field indicates the line’s length.

•	The Mode pop-up menu lets you choose whether to describe the selected line by Endpoints; by the Left Point, length, and angle; by the Right Point, length, and angle; or by the Midpoint, length, and angle.

•	The W field indicates the width of the line.

•	The left pop-up menu indicates the line’s style.

•	The right pop-up menu indicates the line’s arrowheads.


Measurements palette for text paths
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Measurements palette for text paths

Fields displayed in the left half of the Measurements palette for text paths are the same as the fields displayed for lines. Fields displayed in the right half of the Measurements palette for text paths are the same as the fields for text boxes. The only exception is that if you flip text on a text path, it flips both vertically and horizontally; you cannot independently flip text on a text path vertically or horizontally.


Measurements palette for groups and multiple-selected items
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Measurements palette for groups and multiple-selected items

When groups of items or multiple items are selected, the Measurements palette lets you edit the origin and angle of the group of items.

•	The X and Y fields indicate the location of the origin (upper left corner) of the bounding box containing the group of items.

•	The W and H fields indicate the width and height of the bounding box containing the group of items.

•	The Angle field indicates the angle of rotation of the group of items. When an item is rotated with a group of items, it is rotated relative to the center of the bounding box enclosing the group, not to its own origin (upper left corner).

NOTE: If an HTML text box is part of the group of items; the Angle field is not available. [WEB]


Measurements palette for editing Bézier items [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Measurements palette for editing Bézier items [PRINT]

When a point, line segment, or curve handle on a Bézier shape is selected, the Measurements palette lets you edit the origin, dimension, and angle of the item, as well as the type of point or line segment in the shape. You can also enter values to manipulate point position and curve handle angle and length.

•	The X and Y fields indicate the horizontal and vertical locations of the origin (upper left corner) of the Bézier item’s bounding box.

•	The W and H fields indicate the width and height of the item.

•	The Angle field indicates the angle of rotation of the item.

•	The Symmetrical Point button lets you convert a point into a symmetrical point.

•	The Smooth Point button lets you convert a point into a smooth point.

•	The Corner Point button lets you convert a point into a corner point.

•	The Straight Segment button lets you convert a curved line segment to a straight line segment.

•	The Curved Segment button lets you convert a straight line segment to a curved line segment.

•	The XP and YP fields indicate the horizontal and vertical location of the active point.

•	The Diamond Curve Handle Angle field indicates the angle of the diamond-shaped curve handle in relation to the active point.

•	The Diamond Curve Handle Distance field indicates the distance of the diamond-shaped curve handle from the active point.

•	The Square Curve Handle Angle field indicates the angle of the square-shaped curve handle in relation to the active point.

•	The Square Curve Handle Distance field indicates the distance of the square-shaped curve handle from the active point.


Measurements palette for Tables
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Measurements palette for tables

Item information

Content information for text cells

Content information for picture cells


Item information
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Item information

When a table is selected with the Item tool, the left side of the Measurements palette  lets you edit the table item information.

•	The X and Y fields indicate the horizontal and vertical locations of the origin (upper left corner) of the table. These fields also display the coordinates of the pointer after selecting the table creation tool from the Tools palette but before clicking the mouse button.

•	The W and H fields indicate the width and height of the table.


Content information for text cells
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Content information for text cells

When a text cell is selected with the Content tool, the right side of the Measurements palette  lets you edit the contents of the text cell.

•	The Flip Horizontal button lets you horizontally flip the contents of the text cell.

•	The Flip Vertical button lets you vertically flip the contents of the text cell.

•	The Leading field indicates paragraph leading. To adjust leading, enter a value in the field or click the arrows.

•	The kerning/tracking field indicates kerning when the text insertion point is between two characters and indicates tracking when a block of text is selected. To adjust kerning and tracking, enter a value in the field or click the arrows.

•	The Left, Center, Right, Justify, and Forced buttons indicates the corresponding alignment of selected paragraphs.

•	The Font pop-up menu indicates the selected font. To change the font, choose a font from the pop-up menu or enter the name of the font in the field. Windows only: To see what the font looks like, press Shift while accessing the Font pop-up menu.

•	The Size pop-up menu indicates the size of the selected font. To change the font size, choose a size from the pop-up menu or enter a value in the field.

•	The Plain, Bold, Italics, Underline, Word Underline, Strike through, Outline, Shadow, All Caps, Small Caps, Superscript, Subscript, and Superior type style buttons indicate the corresponding type styles. Multiple type styles may be applied to a single character or group of characters.

NOTE: When a table in a Web document is active, the following settings are disabled in the Measurements palette if text cells are selected: kerning and tracking arrows; Outline, Shadow, Small Caps, Superior, and Word Underline type style buttons; Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical buttons; the Box Angle field; and the Justified and Forced alignment buttons. If you want to use any of these settings in a table, choose Item --> Modify and check Convert Table to Graphic on Export to convert the table’s text cells to raster boxes (pictures). [WEB]


Content information for Picture cells
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Content information for picture cells

When a picture cell is selected with the Content tool, the right side of the Measurements palette lets you edit the contents of the picture cell.

•	The Flip Horizontal button lets you horizontally flip the contents of the picture cell.

•	The Flip Vertical button lets you vertically flip the contents of the picture cell.

•	The X% and Y% fields indicate the horizontal and vertical scaling of the contents of the picture cell.

•	The X+ and Y+ fields indicate the horizontal and vertical offset of the contents of the picture cell from the picture cell’s origin (upper left corner).

•	The Angle field indicates the angle of rotation of the contents of the picture cell.

•	The Skew field indicates the skew (slant) of the contents of the picture cell.


Measurements palette for image maps [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Measurements palette for image maps [WEB]

•	The X and Y fields indicate the horizontal and vertical locations of the origin (upper left corner) of the hot area as you draw it. These also display the coordinates of the pointer after selecting one of the image map tools from the Web Tools palette but before clicking the mouse button.

•	The W and H fields indicate the changing width and height of a rectangular or oval hot area as you draw it.

Once the image map is drawn and you release the mouse button, the Measurements palette changes to reflect picture box settings.

NOTE: The image map tools are available when the ImageMap QuarkXTensions software is loaded.


Measurements palette for form boxes [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Measurements palette for form boxes [WEB]

•	The X and Y fields indicate the horizontal and vertical locations of the origin (upper left corner) of the form box. These fields also display the coordinates of the pointer after selecting the Form Box tool in the Web Tools palette but before clicking the mouse button.

•	The W and H fields indicate the changing width and height of the form box.


Measurements palette for form controls [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Measurements palette for form controls [WEB]

File submission controls	Text field form controls
Button form controls	Image button form controls
Pop-up menu form controls	List form controls
Radio button form controls	Check box form controls


Measurements palette for file submission controls [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Measurements palette for file submission controls [WEB]

•	The X and Y fields indicate the horizontal and vertical locations of the origin (upper left corner) of the File Submission control. These fields also display the coordinates of the pointer after selecting the File Selection tool in the Web Tools palette but before clicking the mouse button.

•	The W field indicates the changing width of the file submission control.


Measurements palette for text field form controls [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Measurements palette for text field form controls [WEB]

•	The X and Y fields indicate the horizontal and vertical locations of the origin (upper left corner) of the text field form control. These fields also display the coordinates of the pointer after selecting the Text Field tool in the Web Tools palette but before clicking the mouse button.

•	The W and H fields indicate the changing width and height of the text field form control. The H field is available only for multi-line text and hidden field form controls.


Measurements palette for button form controls [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Measurements palette for button form controls [WEB]

•	The X and Y fields indicate the horizontal and vertical locations of the origin (upper left corner) of the button form control. These fields also display the coordinates of the pointer after selecting the Button tool in the Web Tools palette but before clicking the mouse button.


Measurements palette for image button form controls [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Measurements palette for image button form controls [WEB]

•	The X and Y fields indicate the horizontal and vertical locations of the origin (upper left corner) of the image button form control. These fields also display the coordinates of the pointer after selecting the Image Button tool in the Web Tools palette but before clicking the mouse button.

•	The W and H fields indicate the changing width and height of the image button form control.

•	The Box Angle field is not available for an image button form control.

•	The Corner Radius field indicates the radii of the corners of the image button form control.

•	The Flip Horizontal button lets you horizontally flip the contents of the image button form control.

•	The Flip Vertical button lets you vertically flip the contents of the image button form control.

•	The X% and Y% fields indicate the horizontal and vertical scaling of the contents of the image button form control.

•	The X+ and Y+ fields indicate the horizontal and vertical offset of the contents of the image button form control from the image button form control’s origin (upper left corner).

•	The Angle field indicates the angle of rotation of the contents of the image button form control.

•	The Skew field indicates the skew (slant) of the contents of the image button form control.


Measurements palette for pop-up menu form controls [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Measurements palette for pop-up menu form controls [WEB]

•	The X and Y fields indicate the horizontal and vertical locations of the origin (upper left corner) of the pop-up menu form control. These fields also display the coordinates of the pointer after selecting the Pop-up Menu tool in the Web Tools palette but before clicking the mouse button.


Measurements palette for list form controls [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Measurements palette for list form controls [WEB]

•	The X and Y fields indicate the horizontal and vertical locations of the origin (upper left corner) of the list form control. These fields also display the coordinates of the pointer after selecting the List Box tool in the Web Tools palette but before clicking the mouse button.

•	The H field indicates the changing height of the list form control.


Measurements palette for radio button form controls [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Measurements palette for radio button form controls [WEB]

•	The X and Y fields indicate the horizontal and vertical locations of the origin (upper left corner) of the radio button form control. These fields also display the coordinates of the pointer after selecting the Radio Button tool from the Web Tools palette but before clicking the mouse button.

•	The W and H fields indicate the changing width and height of the radio button form control.

When a radio button form control is selected with the Content tool, the right side of the Measurements palette lets you edit the contents of the text cell.

•	The Left, Center, and Right buttons indicate the corresponding alignment of selected paragraphs in the radio button form control.

•	The Font pop-up menu indicates the selected font. To change the font, choose a font from the pop-up menu or enter the name of the font in the field. Windows only: To see what the font looks like, press Shift while accessing the Font pop-up menu.

•	The Size pop-up menu indicates the size of the selected font. To change the font size, choose a size from the pop-up menu or enter a value in the field.

•	The Plain, Bold, Italics, Underline, Word Underline, Strike through, Outline, Shadow, All Caps, Small Caps, Superscript, Subscript, and Superior type style buttons indicate the corresponding type styles. Multiple type styles may be applied to a single character or group of characters.

NOTE: When a radio button form control is selected with the Content tool, the following settings will not display in the Measurements palette: leading arrows, kerning and tracking arrows; the Angle field; the Cols field; Outline, Shadow, Small Caps, Superior, and Word Underline type style buttons; Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical buttons; and the Justified and Forced alignment buttons.


Measurements palette for Check box form controls [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Measurements palette for check box form controls [WEB]

•	The X and Y fields indicate the horizontal and vertical locations of the origin (upper left corner) of the check box form control. These fields also display the coordinates of the pointer after selecting the Check Box tool from the Web Tools palette but before clicking the mouse button.

•	The W and H fields indicate the changing width and height of the check box form control.

•	When a check box form control is selected with the Content tool, the right side of the Measurements palette lets you edit the contents of the text cell.

•	The Left, Center, and Right buttons indicate the corresponding alignment of selected paragraphs in the radio button form control.

•	The Font pop-up menu indicates the selected font. To change the font, choose a font from the pop-up menu or enter the name of the font in the field. Windows only: To see what the font looks like, press Shift while accessing the Font pop-up menu.

•	The Size pop-up menu indicates the size of the selected font. To change the font size, choose a size from the pop-up menu or enter a value in the field.

•	The Plain, Bold, Italics, Underline, Word Underline, Strike through, Outline, Shadow, All Caps, Small Caps, Superscript, Subscript, and Superior type style buttons indicate the corresponding type styles. Multiple type styles may be applied to a single character or group of characters.

NOTE: When a check box form control is selected with the Content tool, the following settings will not display in the Measurements palette: leading arrows, kerning and tracking arrows; the Angle field; the Cols field; Outline, Shadow, Small Caps, Superior, and Word Underline type style buttons; Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical buttons; and the Justified and Forced alignment buttons.


Measurements palette for Ruler Origin relocation
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Measurements palette for Ruler Origin relocation

The X and Y fields indicate the changing origin of the ruler when dragging the 0,0 origin crosshair out of the ruler origin box.


Measurements palette for Ruler Guide placement
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Measurements palette for Ruler Guide placement

The X and Y fields indicate the horizontal locations of vertical guides and the vertical positions of horizontal guides as they are dragged from the ruler.


Document Layout palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Document Layout palette

The Document Layout palette (View --> Show Document Layout) lets you add, delete, move, and access document pages and master pages using the page insert, duplicate and delete area; the master pages area; and the document page area.


Page insert, duplicate, and delete area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Page insert, duplicate, and delete area

The four icon buttons at the top of the Document Layout palette (F10 on Mac OS, F4 on Windows) let you insert single-sided and facing pages in a print document, or Web pages in a Web document. These icons also let you duplicate and delete selected pages.

•	The single-page icon lets you insert blank single-sided document pages into a print layout, or Web pages into a Web layout. To insert a single-sided page or Web page, click and drag the single-page icon into the document page area of the Document Layout palette, move the pointer over the document page icons to preview the placement of the page, and release the mouse button to place the page in the layout.

•	The facing-page icon lets you insert blank facing-page document pages into a print layout. The facing-page icon is available only if you have checked Facing Pages either in the New Document dialog box (File --> New--> Document) or in the Document Setup dialog box (File --> Document Setup). To insert a blank facing-page document page, click and drag the facing-page icon into the document page area of the Document Layout palette, move the pointer over the document page icons to preview the placement of the page, and release the mouse button to place the page in the layout. [PRINT]

•	The single-page and facing-page icons also let you create new master pages. To create a new master page, click and drag the single-page or facing-page icon into the master page area of the Document Layout palette and release the mouse button. Releasing the mouse button when an existing master page is selected replaces the master page with a blank page. The facing-page icon is available only in print documents.

•	The copy page icon (Mac OS and Windows) lets you create new master pages based on existing master pages. To duplicate a master page, click the master page in the master page area to select it, then click the copy page icon. The new master page is placed in the master page area immediately after the master page from which it is duplicated.

•	The delete page icon (Mac OS and Windows) lets you delete selected master pages and document pages. To delete a master page, select it in the master page area of the Document Layout palette, then click the delete page icon. To delete a document page, select it in the document page area of the Document Layout palette, then click the delete page icon. An alert asks you to confirm the deletion. You can also press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) while clicking the delete icon to bypass the confirmation alert.


Master pages area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Master pages area

The master pages area of the Document Layout palette lets you insert, apply, and rename user-defined master pages.

•	Master page icons (single-page or facing-page) let you insert new pages in a document based on a master page. To insert a page based on a master page, click and drag the master page’s icon (single-page or facing-page) into the document page area of the Document Layout palette, move the pointer over the document page icons to preview the placement of the page, and release the mouse button to place the page in the layout. The facing-page icon is available only in print documents.

•	Master page icons (single-page or facing-page) also let you apply master page elements to blank pages. To apply a master page to a blank page, click and drag the master page’s icon on top of the blank page in the document page area of the Document Layout palette, and release the mouse button.

•	The name fields next to the master page icons (single-page or facing-page) let you rename the master pages. Click (Mac OS) or double-click (Windows) the name field to select it, then enter a name of up to 64 characters for the master page. Each master page may have a prefix of up to three characters. When created, new master pages are automatically assigned prefixes of "A," "B," "C," and so on. To change the prefix of a master page, click (Mac OS) or double-click (Windows) the name field next to the master page icon single-page or facing-page), and enter the prefix, followed immediately by a hyphen and the remainder of the name.

TIP: You can expand the master page area using the split bar between the master page and document page areas. To expand the master page area, click the split bar and drag it down. This lets you display the entire list of master pages.


Document page area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Document page area

The document page area of the Document Layout palette displays page  layout, page numbers, and the master pages on which individual pages are based.

•	Document page icons (single-page, left facing page, right facing page) can be repositioned in the layout. To reposition a page, drag the page to a new position in the layout.

•	Blank single-page document page icons indicate single pages that are not based on master pages.

•	Single-page icons containing master page prefixes indicate document pages that are based on master pages.

•	Blank facing-page icons (left and right) indicate facing pages that are not based on master pages. [PRINT]

•	Facing-page document page icons (left and right) containing master page prefixes indicate document pages that are based on master pages. [PRINT]

•	The number that displays under a page icon indicates the page’s actual page number, including prefixes or section starts.

•	[WEB] In a Web document, the name that displays under a page icon indicates the name of the export file that will be created for that page.

•	[WEB] Page names can be changed in the Page Properties dialog box (Page --> Page Properties).

•	The bar at the bottom of the Document Layout palette indicates the page number of a selected page in a print document, or the name of a selected page in a Web document. In print documents, clicking this bar displays the Section dialog box (Page --> Section).

•	Double-clicking a document page icon displays the associated page in the document window.

TIP: To display the absolute page number for a sectioned page, press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) and click the document page icon. The absolute page number will display in the bar at the bottom of the Document Layout palette. [PRINT]


Style Sheets palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Style Sheets Palette

The Style Sheets palette (View --> Show Style Sheets) lets you create, apply, edit, duplicate, and delete character and paragraph  style sheets.


Paragraph style sheet area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Paragraph style sheet area

The paragraph style sheet area lets you choose paragraph style sheets and apply them to text. Style sheets in the paragraph style sheet area are available when both the Content tool and a text box are selected.

•	Clicking the paragraph icon next to a paragraph style sheet, or clicking the paragraph style sheet name, lets you apply the style sheet to selected paragraphs or at the text insertion point.

•	A highlighted paragraph style sheet name indicates that the style sheet is selected. Only one paragraph style sheet may be selected at a time.

•	The keyboard command (if any) specified for a paragraph style sheet displays to the right of the style sheet name.

TIP: To display the Style Sheets dialog box (Edit --> Style Sheets) from the Style Sheets palette, press Command (Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) while clicking a style sheet name.


Character style sheet area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Character style sheet area

The character style sheet area lets you choose character style sheets and apply them to text. Style sheets in the character style sheet area are available when both the Content tool and a text box are selected.

•	Clicking the character icon next to a character style sheet, or clicking the style sheet name, lets you apply the style sheet to selected characters or at the text insertion point.

•	A highlighted character style sheet name indicates that the style sheet is selected. Only one character style sheet may be selected at a time.

•	The keyboard command (if any) specified for a character style sheet displays to the right of the style sheet name.

TIP: The split bar between the paragraph style sheet and character style sheet areas lets you expand the paragraph style sheet area so you can display your entire list of paragraph style sheets. To expand the paragraph style sheet area, click the split bar and drag it down.


Colors palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Colors palette

The Colors palette (View --> Show Colors) lets you add color to selected text, pictures, box backgrounds, lines, and frames using buttons, the blends area, or the color selection area.


Colors palette buttons
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Colors palette buttons

The buttons located at the top of the Colors palette (F12) let you apply color to frames, text, lines, or the background of picture boxes and text boxes.

•	The Frame Color button lets you view and apply the colors to the frame for the selected text boxes or picture boxes.

•	The Line Color button lets you view and apply the color to selected lines.

•	The Text Color button lets you view and apply the color to selected text or the text insertion point.

•	The Picture Color button lets you apply color to certain picture formats. Click here for a list of picture formats you can apply color to.

•	The Background Color button lets you view and apply the colors to the background for the selected text boxes, picture boxes, table cells, and groups.

•	The shade pop-up menu indicates the amount of a selected color. To change the amount of a selected color, choose a value from the pop-up menu, or enter a value directly in the field. You can enter values from 0 to 100%, using increments as fine as 0.1%.


Blends area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Blends area

The blends area of the Colors palette lets you apply color blends to the backgrounds of text boxes, picture boxes, table cells, and groups.

•	The type pop-up menu indicates the type of blend applied to the backgrounds of selected text boxes, picture boxes, cells, or groups. Options in the type pop-up menu include Solid, Linear Blend, Mid-Linear Blend, Rectangular Blend, Diamond Blend, Circular Blend, and Full Circular Blend.

•	The #1 and #2 buttons let you choose the beginning and ending colors of a blend when an option other than Solid is chosen from the type pop-up menu. Clicking the #1 button lets you specify the first color in the blend; clicking the #2 button lets you specify the second color.

•	The angle field indicates the angle at which a blend fills a box. You can enter a value from –360 degrees to 360 degrees, using increments as fine as 0.001.


Color selection area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Color selection area

The color selection area of the Colors palette lets you apply colors to frames; text; pictures; lines; and backgrounds of text boxes, picture boxes, table cells, and groups. Click a color name to apply it to the selected item.

•	Swatches display colors to the left of their names in the list.

•	Swatches also let you apply colors to selected lines; frames; and the backgrounds of boxes, table cells, and groups. To apply a color to a line, frame, or background, drag and drop the swatch over the item in the document page.

•	A highlighted color name indicates the selected color. If various colors are applied to multiple-selected items, the Colors palette indicates that Mixed Colors are applied.

•	An icon to the right of a color name indicates whether the color is a process color or a spot color. None, White, and Registration are neither spot nor process colors, so they do not display one of these icons.

TIP: Press Command (Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) while clicking a color name to display the Colors dialog box (Edit --> Colors).


Trap Information palette [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Trap Information palette [PRINT]

The Trap Information palette (View --> Show Trap Information) lets you specify trapping information on an item-by-item basis.

Trapping boxes and text	Default Trap Information window
Trapping frames	Source of Trap Values area
Trapping lines	Properties area
Trapping tables


Trapping boxes and text
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Trapping boxes and text

The Trap Information palette (Option+F12 on Mac OS, Ctrl+F12 on Windows) displays the trapping values for a selected box. You can specify trapping for any QuarkXPress box, its contents (except for some imported pictures), its frames, and its background.

The Background and Text pop-up menus indicate the trapping options for the selected box or the selected text:

•	The Default option indicates the default values for the Background and Text fields using the trapping values specified in the Trap Specifications dialog box (Edit --> Colors --> Edit Trap) for the item color against the item’s background color.

•	The Overprint option indicates that QuarkXPress will overprint an active item. Overprint overrides the Overprint Limit value entered in the Trapping pane (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences), and overprints the item regardless of the shade of the item and background colors involved.

•	The Knockout option indicates that an active item will knock out of its background.

•	The Auto Amount (+) option applies the positive value entered in the Auto Amount field of the Trapping pane (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences). This value displays as a positive number (a spread) to the right of the Background or Text pop-up menu.

•	The Auto Amount (–) option applies the negative value entered in the Auto Amount field of the Trapping pane (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences). This value displays as a negative number (a choke) to the right of the Background or Text pop-up menu.

•	The Custom option specifies a custom choke or spread value for the active item, entered in the field to the right of the pop-up menu.


Trapping frames [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Trapping frames

A frame for a box always traps to the background color(s) specified for the box, to the color(s) used to color the frame, and to any background color(s) behind the box. Choosing a trapping type in the pop-up menus specifies trapping values for the Frame Inside, Frame Middle, and Frame Outside fields:

•	The Frame Inside option indicates trapping applied between the innermost color of a frame and the box contents (background color or picture).

•	The Frame Middle option indicates trapping applied to colors within a frame.

•	The Frame Outside option indicates trapping applied between the outermost color of a frame and colors behind the box.

The trapping types contained in the pop-up menus are the same as those described in Trapping boxes and text.


Trapping lines
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Trapping lines

A line always traps to the color(s) used to color it, and to any background colors behind the line. Choose a trapping type from the pop-up menu to specify trapping values for the Line, Line Middle, and Gap fields:

•	The Line field indicates trapping applied to the color specified for a line (in relation to an adjacent background color).

•	The Line Middle field indicates trapping applied to colors within a line. This field is available when any line style except Solid is applied to the line.

•	The Gap field indicates trapping applied to the color specified for a line gap in relation to an adjacent background color. The Gap field is only available with dashed lines or multi-lines with only one arrowhead.

The trapping types contained in the pop-up menus are the same as those described in Trapping boxes and text.


Trapping Tables
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Trapping tables

A gridline always traps to the color(s) used to color it, and to any background colors behind the gridline. Choose a trapping type from the pop-up menu to specify trapping values for the Line, Line Middle, and Gap fields:

•	The Line field indicates trapping applied to the color specified for a gridline (in relation to an adjacent background color).

•	Line Middle indicates trapping applied to colors within a gridline. This field is available when any line style except Solid is applied to the gridline.

•	The Gap field indicates trapping applied to the color specified for a gridline gap in relation to an adjacent background color. The Gap field is only available with dashed lines or multi-lines.

The trapping types contained in the pop-up menus are the same as those described in Trapping boxes and text.


Default Trap information window
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Default Trap Information window

Information about a default trap value can be viewed by clicking the icon to the right of the value. The Default Trap Information window displays information about the item’s trapping relationship with its background.

•	The Object Color field indicates the color applied to the item.

•	The Underneath Color field indicates the color of the item(s) behind the selected item. "Multiple" displays if there are multiple background colors, and there is not a conflict between the choke and spread amount in the Trap Specifications dialog box (Edit --> Colors --> Edit Trap). "Indeterminate" displays if there is a conflict between the choke amount and the spread amount. Otherwise, the name of the color covering the entire background of the item displays.


Source of Trap Values area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Source of Trap Values area

Text displayed in this area is grayed for trap sources that are not being used.

•	Edit Trap indicates that the source of trap value is from settings in the Trap Specifications dialog box (Edit --> Colors --> Edit Trap).

•	Trap Preferences indicates that the source of the trap value is from settings in the Trapping pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences).


Properties area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Properties area

Text displayed in this area is gray for trap properties that are not being used.

•	Proportional indicates that proportional trapping is applied. Proportional trapping uses the calculated trap value multiplied by the difference between the luminance of the item color and background color to calculate the trapping value.

•	Process Trapping indicates that the item color and background color have process trapping applied. Process trapping is not applied if the background behind the item has more than one color.

•	Rich Black indicates that Rich Black is applied to the item color or background, and that Rich Black trapping will be used.

•	Small Object indicates that trapping for text smaller than 24 points, or for an item width (such as a stripe or a line narrower than 10 points) will require special trapping if process trapping is on.

•	Overprint Limit indicates that the item color was set to overprint the background, but the shade of the item was less than the overprint limit in the Overprint Limit field of the Trapping pane (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences).

•	Knockout Limit indicates that the color’s luminance is less than or equal to the knockout limits specified in the Trapping pane (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences).

•	Smallest Trap Value indicates that multiple colors behind the item have traps in the same direction (all chokes or all spreads). The smallest trap value of the colors behind the item is used.


Lists palette [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Lists palette [PRINT]

The Lists palette (View --> Show Lists) helps you create lists, such as a table of contents, for any number of documents. The Lists palette displays text with style sheets applied, as defined in the Lists dialog box (Edit --> Lists).

Viewing lists

Updating lists for chapters and documents

Updating lists for books


Viewing and updating lists [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Viewing lists

The Lists palette (Option+F11 on Mac OS, Ctrl+F11 on Windows) helps you work with lists. You can view and update lists for a single document, a chapter of a book, or an entire book.

NOTE: Books are only available in print documents.

To view lists, a document, chapter, or book must be open.

•	The Show List pop-up menu lets you choose to display lists for a book or current document. Choosing Current Document lets you view the list for the open document; choosing another entry lets you view lists for any open book.

•	The List Name pop-up menu displays the names of all lists for the current document or book.

•	The Find field lets you locate items in the Lists palette. Enter the first few letters of a list entry to find the closest entry in the Lists palette. Double-click the entry to locate the item in the document.

•	The Build button lets you copy the current list to an active text box. The style sheets (Edit --> Lists --> Edit --> Format as pop-up menu) for the list are applied automatically. The Build button is not available unless a text box is active.


Updating lists for chapters and documents
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Updating lists for chapters and documents

The Lists palette is not automatically updated as you work. If you have made changes to the text, you must click the Update button to update the list.

Clicking Update scans the document for list items in the current document, so that you can build a list and save it with the document. When the updating process is complete, the list displays in the Lists palette.


Updating lists for books
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Updating lists for books

Clicking Update lets you update lists for the open book. QuarkXPress reads the saved list information from the publication file and displays it in the Lists palette. However, you may not have the most recent versions of the lists for each chapter. Click Update to force QuarkXPress to rescan all chapters in a book and build a new list.


Layers palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Layers palette

In QuarkXPress, layers are tiers of a document (similar to a traditional printer’s clear plastic overlays). The Layers palette (View --> Show Layers) lets you manipulate layers and provides a menu for performing various layer functions.

Layers buttons	Layers selection area
Attributes dialog box	Move Items dialog box
Merge Layers dialog box	Delete Layers dialog box


Layers buttons
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Layers buttons

The buttons on the Layers palette let you add, remove, and merge layers, as well as move items on those layers.

•	Clicking the New Layer button adds a new layer to the active document. You can use the default name for the layer, or you can assign the layer a new name by double-clicking the layer in the palette and entering a new name in the Attributes dialog box.

•	The Move Item to Layer button displays the Move Items dialog box, which lets you move selected items to other layers.

•	The Merge Layers button displays the Merge Layers dialog box, which lets you combine selected layers and their items into one layer.

•	The Delete Layer button lets you remove selected layers from the active document.


Layer selection area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Layer selection area

The three columns in the lower portion of the Layers palette let you display, lock, and manipulate layers, including the default layer.

•	The Visible column lets you show and hide the selected layer. Hidden layers cannot be printed.

•	The Lock column lets you lock and unlock the items on the selected layer.

•	The Layer column displays the names of the layers in the active document.


Layer column
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Layer column

The Layer column lets you select layers to edit, duplicate, delete, merge, or rearrange.

•	The Edit icon indicates the active layer.

•	The Item icon displays to the right of any layer containing selected items. To move the selected items to another layer, drag the Item icon to the desired layer.

•	The Layer column lets you rearrange layers by Option+dragging (Mac OS) or Alt+dragging (Windows) selected layers to different locations in the palette.


Default layer
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Default layer

Each document has a default layer that is listed in the Layers palette. You can add and remove items from the Default layer, but the Default layer cannot be deleted.

Master page items reside on the Default layer on document pages. With regard to layers, master page items have the following characteristics:

•	If you apply a master page to a document page, the items on the master page will affect only the Default layer of that page.

•	Items added to the master page are placed behind any items that have been added to the Default layer of the document page.

•	Master page items residing on the Default layer may be moved to another layer, but the items will no longer be master page items.


Attributes dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Attributes dialog box

Double-clicking a layer in the Layers palette displays the Attributes dialog box, which lets you change the attributes of that layer.

•	The Name field identifies the layer.

•	The Layer Color button displays a selection of colors that may be used to assign a new color to the layer. This color will display in the visual indicator for items on that layer.

•	The Visible check box lets you display and print items on new layers. Layers that are not visible do not print.

•	The Locked check box locks items on new layers. Items are locked into position on their layers and cannot be inadvertently moved within their layer or to another layer. However, by changing an item’s Origin Across and Origin Down measurements (Item --> Modify --> Box tab), a locked item can be moved within its layer.

•	You can unlock an individual item so you can move or resize it, by selecting the item and choosing Item  -> Unlock (F6).  However, unlocked items cannot be moved to another layer as long as their layer is locked.

•	The Suppress Printout check box prevents the printing of items on a layer-by-layer basis. However, you can uncheck the Suppress Printout and Suppress Picture Printout controls in the Modify dialog box (Item menu) to override this setting and print individual items on a suppressed layer. The Suppress Printout option is available only for print documents. [PRINT]

•	The Keep Runaround check box maintains runaround so that text on visible layers flows around items on hidden layers.


Move items dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Move items dialog box

Selecting items and then clicking the Move Item to Layer button displays the Move Items dialog box, which lets you move selected items to other layers. To activate the Move Item to Layer button, simply select the items you want to move.


Merge layers dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Merge layers dialog box

Selecting two or more layers in the Layers palette and then clicking the Merge Layers button displays the Merge Layers dialog box, which lets you combine selected layers and their items into one layer. To activate the Merge Layers button, at least one of the selected layers must contain items.


Delete Layer dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Delete Layer dialog box

Selecting a layer containing items and then clicking the Delete Layer button (Mac OS and Windows) displays the Delete Layer dialog box. The Delete Layer dialog box lets you specify whether you want to delete the items on the selected layer or move the items to another layer.


Profile Information palette [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Profile Information Palette [PRINT]

The Profile Information palette (View --> Show Profile Information) provides useful information about the selected picture and lets you assign it an ICC profile or rendering intent after the picture has been imported.

NOTE: The Profile Information palette is available when the Quark CMS QuarkXTensions software is loaded and has been activated in the Color Management Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management).

Picture Type, File Type, and Color Space fields

Changing profile information for an imported picture

Color Manage to check boxes


Picture Type, File Type, and Color Space fields [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Picture Type, File Type, and Color Space fields

The Picture Type, File Type, and Color Space fields provide specific file information about the picture in the active picture box.


Changing profile information for an imported picture [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Changing profile information for an imported picture

The Profile Information palette lets you specify the profile and rendering intent for an individual picture.

•	The Profile pop-up menu lets you choose a profile that matches the color space (RGB, CMYK, or Hexachrome) in which the picture was saved. If the name of the source profile for a picture displays in italics, the profile is not available on your system. When Default is chosen in the Profile pop-up menu, Quark CMS assigns the profile indicated for that picture’s color space in the Color Management Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management).

•	The Rendering Intent pop-up menu lets you choose a rendering intent for the picture. A rendering intent tells the Color Management Module (CMM) what color properties it should preserve when it translates a color from the source device gamut to the destination device gamut. Perceptual scales all the colors in the source gamut so that they all fit within the destination gamut. Relative Colorimetric retains colors that are in both the source gamut and the destination gamut; the only source colors that are changed are those that are not within the destination gamut. Saturation considers the saturation of source colors, and changes them to colors with the same relative saturation in the destination gamut. Absolute Colorimetric retains colors that are in both the source gamut and the destination gamut; colors that are outside the destination gamut are adjusted in relation to how they would look when printed on white paper.


Color Manage to check boxes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Color Manage to check boxes

•	When an RGB picture is active, the Color Manage to RGB Destinations check box lets you specify whether Quark CMS will apply color management when the color space of the image is the same as the Monitor or Composite Output profile color space chosen in the Color Management Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management).

•	When a CMYK picture is active, the Color Manage to CMYK Destinations check box lets you specify whether Quark CMS will apply color management when the color space of the image is the same as the Separation Output profile color space chosen in the Color Management Preferences dialog box.


Hyperlinks palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Hyperlinks palette

The Hyperlinks palette (View --> Show Hyperlinks) lets you add hyperlinks to the active print or Web document. Hyperlinks in print documents work only when you export the document as a PDF. Hyperlinks in a Web document work only when you export the document as HTML. This section describes the various components of the Hyperlinks palette.

Hyperlinks palette buttons

Hyperlinks list


Hyperlinks palette buttons
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Hyperlinks palette buttons

The buttons located at the top of the Hyperlinks palette let you create, edit, and delete hyperlinks and anchors.

New Hyperlink button	Edit button
New Anchor button	Delete button
Show/Hide button


New Hyperlink button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

New Hyperlink button

The New Hyperlink button lets you create new destinations and hyperlinks:

•	If nothing is selected in the active document, this button displays the New Hyperlink dialog box and lets you create destinations that are not yet associated with a hyperlink.

•	If a range of text or a picture is selected in the active document, this button displays the New Hyperlink dialog box and lets you turn that text or picture into a hyperlink.


New Anchor button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

New Anchor button

The New Anchor button lets you create new anchors. If a text box or picture box is selected in the active document, this button lets you create an anchor that is associated with a text location, range of text, or picture box.


Edit button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit button

The Edit button lets you edit the destination or anchor selected in the Hyperlinks palette.


Delete button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Delete button

The Delete button (Mac OS and Windows) lets you delete the destination or anchor selected in the Hyperlinks palette. When you delete a destination or anchor that is used by one or more hyperlinks in the active document, an alert displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the destination or anchor. If you click OK, those hyperlinks are then removed from their corresponding text ranges or picture boxes.


Show/Hide button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show/Hide button

The Show/Hide button lets you show or hide hyperlinks and anchors in the active document. When you click this button, it remains pressed until you click it again. When the Show/Hide button is pressed:

•	A text hyperlink in a print document displays as underlined text. The text and the underline display in the color specified in the General pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences). [PRINT]

•	A text anchor displays a small colored arrow at the beginning of the text. The arrow color is determined by the setting in the General pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences).

When the Show/Hide button is not pressed, text hyperlinks do not display underlined in print documents and text anchors do not display in print or Web documents. However, hyperlinks and anchors for picture boxes are not affected by the Show/Hide button; they can be hidden by choosing View --> Hide Visual Indicators.


Hyperlinks list
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Hyperlinks list

The lower portion of the Hyperlinks palette lists all destinations, anchors, and references in the active document:

•	Destinations display with a globe or a page icon. You can display all the references that use a destination by clicking that destination’s disclosure triangle (Mac OS) or disclosure box (Windows) icon.

•	Anchors display with an anchor icon. You can display all the references that use an anchor by clicking that anchor’s disclosure triangle (Mac OS) or disclosure box (Windows) icon.

•	References (hyperlinks) display with a hyperlink icon. References display under the destinations or anchors to which they point.


Index palette [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Index palette [PRINT]

The Index palette (View --> Show Index) lets you add words to four different levels of an index, determine the scope of index references, create cross-references, and edit or delete index entries. When the Index palette is open, index markers are displayed around index entries in a document. Index markers display as colored brackets or squares. The Index palette is available when the Index QuarkXTensions software is loaded.

Entry area	Reference area
Index palette buttons	Entries list


Entry area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Entry area

An index entry is an individual item listed in an index. The Entry area lets you enter text for an index entry, determine how to sort an entry alphabetically, and determine a level for an index entry.

•	The Text field lets you specify index entries by typing in the field, selecting text in the document, or selecting an existing entry in the entries list. Pressing Command+Option+I (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Alt+I (Windows) opens the palette and selects the Text field. You can enter up to 255 characters in the Text field. When you select text in a document, the first 255 characters are automatically entered in the Text field. For example, if you select the word "QuarkXPress" in a document, it is automatically entered in the Text field.

•	The Sort As field lets you override the alphabetical sorting of an entry in the Text field. (Entering a variant spelling in the Sort As field does not affect the spelling of the index entry, only the way it is sorted in the index.) For example, if the entry in the Text field is "20th Century," you may want it sorted as "Twentieth Century." To do so, enter "Twentieth Century" in the Sort As field. You can enter up to 255 characters in the Sort As field.

•	The Level pop-up menu lets you specify the hierarchy of entries in an index. You can have two levels in a run-in index and up to four levels in a nested index. When you choose First Level, the index entry is entered alphabetically in the Entry list. When you choose Second Level, Third Level, or Fourth Level, you must specify which entry the added entry will fall under. To specify the location, click in the left column beside the entry.

•	You can change an entry’s level by pressing Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows), and dragging the entry to a new level.


Reference area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Reference area

The Reference area lets you specify the character style for an index entry’s references (usually page numbers), specify the scope an index entry covers, and create cross-references.

•	The Style pop-up menu lets you apply a character style sheet to the page numbers listed for a specific index entry. The style sheet also applies to the text you enter for a cross-reference. You can use different styles to indicate index entries that provide more information or certain types of information. For example, you might apply a bold style to a page number that has an illustration.

•	The Scope pop-up menu lets you specify the range of text an index entry covers and create cross-references. The options in the Scope pop-up menu are as follows:

•	Selection Start: Lists the number of the page that contains the index marker’s open bracket.

•	Selection Text: Lists the page numbers from the index marker’s open bracket to its close bracket.

•	To Style: Lists the page numbers from the index marker’s open bracket to the occurrence of a specified paragraph style sheet after the close bracket. An adjacent pop-up menu lets you choose from the document’s list of paragraph style sheets, or you can choose Next. Choosing Next covers all text until a new paragraph style sheet occurs following the close bracket.

•	Specified #of ¶s: Lists the page numbers from the index marker’s open bracket through a succeeding number of paragraphs beyond the close bracket. A field lets you enter the number of paragraphs to include.

•	To End Of: Lists the page numbers from the index marker’s open bracket to either the end of the current story or the end of the document. You can choose Story or Document from an adjacent pop-up menu.

•	Suppress Page #: Does not list the page number for an index entry. For example, some of your first-level index entries may not have page numbers because they’re broken down into second-level entries with page numbers.

•	Cross-Reference: Refers the reader to a cross-referenced entry in the index rather than, or in addition to, a page number. You can choose See, See also, or See herein from a pop-up menu, then enter text in the field or click an entry in the list to automatically fill in the field.


 Add button


 Add Reverse button


 Add All button


Add All Reverses button
 Add All Reverse button


Find Next button
 Find Next Entry button


Find First button
 Find First Entry button


 Edit button


Index palette buttons
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Index palette buttons

•	The Add button (Command+Option+Shift+I on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+Shift+I on Windows) lets you add an index entry or reference to the Entries list according to the current settings in the Entry and Reference areas and the location of the arrow in the Entries list.

•	Pressing Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) changes the Add button to Add Reverse. Clicking Add Reverse adds an entry to the Entries list in reverse order. For example, Jane Doe is added as Doe, Jane when you click Add Reverse.

•	The Add All button adds all occurrences of the selected text to the Entries list.

•	Pressing Option (Mac OS) or Alt+Ctrl (Windows) changes the Add All button to Add All Reverse. This will add all occurrences of the selected text to the Entries list in reverse order.

•	The Find Next Entry button lets you jump from the position of the text insertion point to the next occurrence of an indexed word (the next index marker) in a story. If a range of text is selected, then clicking the Find Next Entry button will find the next indexed word following the selected text.

•	Pressing Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) changes the Find Next Entry button to Find First Entry. Clicking Find First Entry displays the first occurrence of an indexed word in a story.

•	The Delete button (Mac OS and Windows) lets you delete an index entry from the Entries list. When you delete an entry, all its references, all the entries nested under it, and all its cross-references are deleted. An alert asks you to confirm this action.

•	The Edit button lets you edit index entries or index references. When the Edit button is selected, the icon displays reversed. You can then select an entry and use the Entry area to change Text, Sort As, and Level information, or the Reference area to change the Style and Scope information.

TIP: You can also double-click an entry to edit it. When you are finished editing, double-click another entry or click the Edit button again.


Entries list
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Entries list

The Entries list displays first-level entries with second-, third-, and fourth-level entries indented under them. The entries and icons in the list let you do the following:

•	Arrow: Click next to an entry to specify a location for a second-level, third-level, or fourth-level index entry.

•	Disclosure triangle (Mac OS) or disclosure box (Windows) icon: Click to display page numbers and cross-references for an index entry.

•	Entries column: Click index entries to select them for editing or deleting.

•	Page numbers: Page numbers are listed under an entry. Click to select the page numbers for editing or deleting. Double-click to enter a temporary edit mode and display the reference’s starting location in a document.

•	Cross-references: Cross-references are listed under an entry. Click to select a cross-reference for editing or deleting. Double-click to enter a temporary edit mode and display the references’ starting location in a document.

•	The Occurrences column shows the number of times each index entry is indexed in a document.


Single-page document page icons
 Single-page


Left facing-page document page icon
 Left facing-page


Right facing-page document page icon
 Right facing-page


Facing-page icon
 Facing-page


Delete icon (Mac OS)
 Delete button (Mac OS)


Delete icon (Windows)
 Delete button (Windows)


Copy icon (Mac OS)
 Copy button (Mac OS)


Copy icon (Windows)
 Copy button (Windows)


Rectangular Image Map tool icon
 Rectangular Image Map tool


Oval Image Map tool icon
 Oval Image Map tool


Bézier Image Map Tool icon
 Bézier Image Map Tool


Form Box tool icon
 Form Box tool


File Selection tool icon
 File Selection tool


Text Field tool icon
 Text Field tool


Button tool icon
 Button tool


Image Button tool icon
 Image Button tool


Pop-up Menu tool icon
 Pop-up Menu tool


List Box tool icon
 List Box tool


Radio Button tool icon
 Radio Button tool


Check Box tool icon
 Check Box tool


 Plain type style button


 Bold type style button


 Italics type style button


 Underline type style button


 Word Underline type style button


 Strike through type style button


 Outline type style button


 Shadow type style button


 All Caps type style button


 Small Caps type style button


 Superscript type style button


 Subscript type style button


 Superior type style button


 Item tool


 Content tool


Angle field

Box Angle/Angle field (Box Angle field is on the left side of the Measurements palette; Angle field is on the right)


Justified alignment button
 Justify alignment button


Forced alignment button
 Force Justify alignment button


 Left alignment button


 Right alignment button


 Centered alignment button


 Flip Horizontal button


 Flip Vertical button


 Show/Hide button


 New Hyperlink button


 New Anchor button


 Globe (URL) icon


 Hyperlink (page) icon


Anchor destination icon
 Anchor icon


Edit (pencil) icon
 Edit (pencil) button


 Hyperlink icon


 New Layer button


 Merge Layers button


Move Item button
 Move to Layer button


 Item icon (Layers palette)


 Lock icon (Layers palette)


 Visible icon (Layers palette)


 Frame Color button


 Line Color button


Background Color button
 Picture Color/Background Color button


 Text Color button


 Character icon


 Paragraph icon


 Skew field


 Corner Radius field


 Leading arrows/field


Tracking arrows/field
 Kerning/Tracking arrows/field


 Symmetrical point button


 Smooth point button


 Corner point button


Diamond Handle Angle field
 Diamond Curve Handle Angle field


 Curved Segment button


 Straight Segment button


Diamond Curve Handle Distribution
 Diamond Curve Handle Distance field


 Square Curve Handle Angle field


Square Curve Handle Distribution
 Square Curve Handle Distance field


 Align Ascent button


 Align Baseline button


 Rotation tool


 Zoom tool


 Linking tool


 Table tool


 Unlinking tool


Rectangular picture box tool
 Rectangular text box tool


 Oval text box tool


 Rounded-corner text box tool


Concave text box tool
 Concave-corner text box tool


 Beveled-corner text box tool


 Bézier text box tool


 Freehand text box tool


 Rectangular picture box tool


 Oval picture box tool


 Rounded-corner picture box tool


Concave picture box tool
 Concave-corner picture box tool


 Beveled-corner picture box tool


 Bézier picture box tool


 Freehand picture box tool


Straight line tool
 Line tool


 Orthogonal line tool


 Bézier line tool


 Freehand line tool


Straight text path tool
 Line text path tool


 Orthogonal text path tool


 Bézier text path tool


 Freehand text path tool


 Text Insertion Bar


 Text insertion point


 Zoom In pointer


 Zoom Out pointer


 Crosshair pointer


 Close Box pointer


 Page Grabber Hand


File Menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

File menu

The QuarkXPress File menu lets you manipulate electronic files in a number of ways, including creating, opening, and saving files as well as setting up a document for printing. The File menu is divided into five sections.

•	The first section lets you create and open documents, libraries, and books. The New and Open commands are available unless too many files are open (over 25 documents and libraries combined, plus an additional 25 books).

•	The second section lets you close and save document files and work with revisions of files. The Close and Save as commands are available when a file is open. The Save and Revert to Saved commands are available any time unsaved changes were made to a file.

•	The third section lets you import text and pictures into documents, save text in a variety of formats, append sets of document attributes, save document pages as HTML or EPS files, and collect the files required for output into a folder with the document. The Append, Export, Save Page as EPS, and Collect for Output commands are available when a document is open. The Get Text and Save Text commands are available when a text box is selected with the Content tool; the Get Picture command is available when a picture box is selected with the Item tool or the Content tool.

•	The fourth section lets you change a document’s size and control the way it prints. The Document Setup, Page Setup, and Print commands are available when a document is active.

•	The fifth section lets you close the application. The Quit command (Mac OS) or Exit command (Windows) is always available.


New submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

New submenu

The New command displays a submenu that lets you create new print documents, Web documents, libraries, and books.


Document command [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Document command [PRINT]

File --> New

The Document command (Command+N on Mac OS, Ctrl+N on Windows) displays the New Document dialog box, which lets you specify the properties of a new print document.


New Document dialog box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

New Document dialog box [PRINT]

File --> New --> Document

The New Document dialog box lets you use the Page area, Margin Guides area, Column Guides area, and the Automatic Text Box check box to define a print document’s first page and default master page. (By default, all new documents contain a master page.) These specifications become default application values and are displayed the next time you open the New Document dialog box.


Page area [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Page area [PRINT]

File --> New --> Document

The Page area lets you specify a standard or custom page size, as well as an orientation for the print document.

•	To specify a standard page size, choose an option from the Size pop-up menu. The appropriate dimensions are automatically displayed in the Width and Height fields.

•	To specify a custom page size, enter values in the Width and Height fields. The minimum page size is .112" by.112"; the maximum is 48" by 48". When you enter values in the fields, the option in the Size pop-up menu changes to Custom.

•	To change the Orientation option for the document on Mac OS, click the portrait or landscape icon. To change the Orientation option for the document on Windows, click the Portrait or Landscape button. The values in the Width and Height fields change to reflect the new orientation.


Margin Guides area [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Margin Guides area [PRINT]

File --> New --> Document

The Margin Guides area lets you specify the position of margin guides on the default master page and its document pages. You can also specify whether a print document contains facing pages or nonfacing pages.

•	Enter values in the Top, Bottom, Left, and Right fields to specify the margins for the default master page. When Facing Pages is checked, the Left and Right margin fields change to Inside and Outside (the Inside margin is nearest the binding; the Outside margin is on the opposite edge).

•	Check Facing Pages to create a document with left and right page formats. If you check Facing Pages, the new document’s original master page, and any additional master pages you create, will be divided into left and right components to represent the facing-page spread.

NOTE: If you check Automatic Text Box, the values you enter in the Margin Guides fields determine the size and location of the automatic text box.


Column Guides area [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Column Guides area [PRINT]

File --> New --> Document

The Column Guides area lets you specify the position of column guides on the default master page.

•	Enter a value between 1 and 30 in the Columns field to specify the number of columns.

•	Enter a value from 3 to 288 points (4") in the Gutter Width field to specify the amount of white space between columns.

NOTE: If you check Automatic Text Box, the values you enter in the Column Guides fields are used to divide the automatic text box.


Automatic Text Box check box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Automatic Text Box check box [PRINT]

File --> New --> Document

Check Automatic Text Box to place an automatic text box on the first page of a new print document. The values in the Margin Guides and Column Guides fields determine the size, placement, and columns in the automatic text box.

An automatic text box is a text box through which text flows automatically to other pages when pages are inserted into a document. When you check Automatic Text Box, this text box is automatically placed on the master page. The first page of the document, if it is based on the default master page, includes the automatic text box.


Library command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Library command

File --> New

A library is a file that displays as a palette and lets you store and retrieve QuarkXPress items. The Library command (Command+Option+N on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+N on Windows) displays the New Library dialog box, which lets you create a new library.


New Library dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

New Library dialog box

File --> New --> Library

The New Library dialog box lets you specify a location for the library file and name the library. Enter a name in the Library Name field (Mac OS) or File name field (Windows) and click Create to display the new library. On Windows, QuarkXPress automatically selects the appropriate extension for a library file (".qxl") in the Save as type pop-up menu.


Book command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Book command

File --> New

A book is a file that displays as a palette and helps you manage multiple-document publications. The Book command displays the New Book dialog box, which lets you create a new book.


New Book dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

New Book dialog box

File --> New --> Book

The New Book dialog box lets you specify a location for the book file and name the book. Enter a name in the Book Name field (Mac OS) or File name field (Windows) and click Create to display the new book. On Windows, QuarkXPress automatically selects the appropriate extension for a book file (".qxb") in the Save as type pop-up menu.


Web Document command [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Web Document command [WEB]

File --> New --> Web Document

The Web Document command (Command+Option+Shift+N on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+Shift+N on Windows) displays the New Web Document dialog box, which lets you specify the properties of a new Web document.


New Web Document dialog box [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

New Web Document dialog box [WEB]

File --> New --> Web Document

The New Web Document dialog box lets you use the Colors area, Layout area, Background Image check box, and Repeat pop-up menu to define a Web document’s first page and default master page. (By default, all new documents contain a master page.) These become application default specifications and display the next time you open the New Web Document dialog box.


Colors area [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Colors area [WEB]

File --> New --> Web Document

The Colors area lets you specify default colors for text, the page background, and hyperlinks:

•	The Text pop-up menu lets you specify the default color of text entered in the document.

•	The Background pop-up menu lets you specify a background color for the new Web document.

•	The Link pop-up menu lets you specify the color of unvisited links in the reader’s Web browser.

•	The Visited Link pop-up menu lets you specify the color of visited links in the reader’s Web browser.

•	The Active Link pop-up menu lets you specify the color of links that the reader is clicking.


Layout area [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Layout area [WEB]

File --> New --> Web Document

The Layout area lets you enter values for the default page width:

•	The Page Width pop-up menu and field let you specify the position of the page width guide, a vertical guide that helps you estimate where the reader’s browser window ends horizontally. Enter a value (in pixels) in the field or choose a standard width value from the pop-up menu.

•	In a variable width page, text boxes that have been specified as variable width boxes (Item --> Modify) can expand and contract to fit the width of the reader’s Web browser. To make the page a variable width page, check Variable Width Page. Enter a percentage value in the Width field to specify the percentage of the viewable browser area that the page will occupy. Enter the minimum allowable width of the variable page (in pixels) in the Minimum field. If the reader’s browser window is made smaller than this width, items will stop being resized.


Background Image check box [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Background Image check box [WEB]

File --> New --> Web Document

The Background Image check box lets you indicate that you will use a picture as the default background of the new Web document. To specify a picture, check Background Image, and then click Select (Mac OS) or Browse (Windows) to locate the picture.


Repeat pop-up menu [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Repeat pop-up menu [WEB]

File --> New --> Web Document

When you check Background Image, the Repeat pop-up menu is available, allowing  you to choose the number of times that the picture will display:

•	The Tile option continuously repeats the picture both horizontally and vertically.

•	The Horizontal option continuously repeats the picture horizontally, but not vertically.

•	The Vertical option continuously repeats the picture vertically, but not horizontally.

•	The None option displays the picture only once, in the upper left corner of the browser window.

TIP: You can reposition the page width reference guide for an individual page or for all pages based on the same master page using the Page Properties or Master Page Properties dialog box.


Open command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Open command

File menu

The Open command (Command+O on Mac OS, Ctrl+O on Windows) displays the Open dialog box, which lets you open an existing QuarkXPress document, template, library, or book.


Open dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Open dialog box

File --> Open

The Open dialog box displays a list of QuarkXPress files (documents, templates, libraries, and books). Depending on which type of file you have selected, the dialog box displays different information:

•	The Document/Web Document/Template/Library/Book Version field displays the version of QuarkXPress used to create and save the selected file.

•	Mac OS only: Check Preview to display a grayscale thumbnail of the selected document. A preview will display only if Include Preview was checked in the Save as dialog box (File menu) when the document was first saved.

•	Mac OS only: The Page Size field displays the page size of the selected document or template below the thumbnail.


Close command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Close command

File menu

The Close command (Command+W on Mac OS) lets you close the active document. On Mac OS, the keyboard command (Command+Option+W) closes all open documents. If a document contains unsaved changes, an alert dialog box displays to let you save changes. If a document was not saved previously, the Save as dialog box displays and lets you name the document and save changes.


Save command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Save command

File menu

The Save command (Command+S on Mac OS, Ctrl+S on Windows) lets you retain changes made to the active document. For documents that have been previously saved, the Save feature retains changes you have made and replaces the document with a new version. If you have not yet saved the active document, or if you are working on a template, choosing Save displays the Save as dialog box, which lets you specify a name and location for the document.

NOTE: If you are using the Auto Backup feature, each time you choose Save, a new revision of the active document is stored in the destination folder. The Auto Backup controls are in the Save pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences).


Save as command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Save as command

File menu

The Save as command (Command+Option+S on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+S on Windows) displays the Save as dialog box, which lets you specify a name, location, and other attributes for the document. You can use the Save as feature to create another copy of the active document with a new name or to create a template.


Save as dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Save as dialog box

File --> Save as

The Save as dialog box lets you name the document, specify a location for it, save the document as a template, and save the document in an older version of QuarkXPress. On Mac OS, you can also include a preview of the document.


Save current document as
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Save current document as (field — Mac OS), File name (field — windows)

File --> Save as

The Save current document as field (Mac OS) or the File name field (Windows) lets you enter a name for the document.


Type (pop-up menu — Mac OS), Save as type (pop-up menu — Windows)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Type (pop-up menu — Mac OS), Save as type (pop-up menu — Windows)

File --> Save as

The Type (Mac OS) or Save as type (Windows) pop-up menu lets you choose whether to save the file in document or template format. Choose Template [PRINT] or Web Template [WEB] to save the current document as a reusable pattern for new documents that may contain the same elements. Templates are protected from overwriting.


Include Preview check box (Mac OS only)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Include Preview check box (Mac OS only)

File --> Save as

The Include Preview check box lets you create a small graphic representation of the first page of the document. The preview can be viewed in the Open dialog box (File menu).


Version pop-up menu [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Version pop-up menu [PRINT]

File --> Save as

QuarkXPress lets you open older version documents in QuarkXPress 5.0, and also lets you downsave 5.0 print documents as 4.0 documents. The first time you choose File --> Save while working in an earlier version document in QuarkXPress 5.0, the Save as dialog box displays to remind you that the document is in an earlier version format. After that, QuarkXPress runs a standard Save when you choose File --> Save, until you close and reopen the document.

Choose 4.0 from the Version pop-up menu to create a document that can be opened by QuarkXPress 4.0. Items based on features implemented in later versions of QuarkXPress are altered or removed. [PRINT] Click here for important information about downsaving.


Downsaving documents as 4.0 [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Downsaving documents as 4.0 [PRINT]

When you open 4.0 documents in version 5.0, all 4.0 information is retained. However, when you downsave 5.0 documents as 4.0 documents, many 5.0-specific attributes are altered or lost (see the following explanations). You can only downsave print documents; Web documents cannot be saved in an earlier version of QuarkXPress.

•	Editing documents: When you downsave a 5.0 document as 4.0, you can open and edit that document in version 4.0 just like any other 4.0 document. When you downsave a 5.0 document, then reopen it in version 5.0, the document behaves like any other document created in 4.0.

•	Tables: A table converts to a group of individual boxes with all the usual properties of QuarkXPress boxes. Once a table is saved in 4.0 format, the table and cell information cannot be reinstated by reopening the document in QuarkXPress 5.0.

•	Layers: Layer information is not retained; the stacking order for items in the 4.0 document is determined by the stacking order of the layers at the time the document was downsaved. The layer information cannot be reinstated by reopening the document in QuarkXPress 5.0.

•	Hyperlinks: Although style sheets used for hyperlinks are retained, the hyperlink information itself is not retained in the document.

•	Text Inset: Text that uses multiple text insets retains the 5.0 insets until you enter a new value in the Text Inset field (Item --> Modify--> Text tab).

•	Books: A book created in QuarkXPress 5.0 cannot be opened in earlier versions of the application.

•	Lists: Lists that are already built are retained. Lists that are not yet built lose character style sheet entries.


Revert to Saved command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Revert to Saved command

File menu

The Revert to Saved command lets you discard changes and restore the active document to the most recently saved version.

TIP: If you are using the Auto Save feature, pressing Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) while you choose Revert to Saved reverts the document to the last automatically-saved version. The Auto Save controls are in the Save pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences).


Get Text command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Get Text command

File menu

The Get Text command (Command+E on Mac OS, Ctrl+E on Windows) displays the Get Text dialog box, which lets you import text files from a variety of sources. The Get Text command is available when a text box is selected with the Content tool. When a picture box is active, Get Picture replaces Get Text in the File menu.


Get Text dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Get Text dialog box

File --> Get Text

The Get Text dialog box lets you import ASCII text, ASCII text saved with XPress Tags, HTML files, and word processing files into the selected text box. Imported text is inserted at the text insertion point, or it replaces selected text.

When large text files in most file formats are being imported, the page number indicator in the lower left corner of the document window changes to indicate the percentage of the file that has been imported.

•	Use the controls in the dialog box to locate the text file you want to import. The Get Text dialog box lists ASCII files, XPress Tags files, HTML files, and files from word processors for which an import/export filter is loaded.

•	Select the text file in the list. When you select a file on Mac OS, the Type and Size fields indicate its format and size. When you select a file on Windows, the Name, Format, File Size, and Date fields display the appropriate information.

•	Check Convert Quotes to convert double hyphens to em dashes, and foot or inch marks to typesetter’s quotation marks, when the text is imported. Foot and inch marks are converted to the quotation marks format you have specified in the Quotes area of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Interactive pane).

•	Check Include Style Sheets to import style sheets from a Microsoft Word or WordPerfect file to the document’s list of style sheets. To convert XPress Tags code contained in imported ASCII text (Mac OS or Windows) or Rich Text Format text (Windows only) to actual text formatting, also check Include Style Sheets.

NOTE: QuarkXPress includes import/export filters for Microsoft Word and WordPerfect. To import a file created with one of these applications or a file that contains XPress Tag codes, use the XTensions Manager dialog box (Utilities menu) to enable the necessary import/export filter.


Get Picture command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Get Picture command

File menu

The Get Picture command (Command+E on Mac OS, Ctrl+E on Windows) displays the Get Picture dialog box, which lets you import picture files from a variety of sources. The Get Picture command is available when a picture box is selected with the Item tool or the Content tool. When a text box is active, Get Text replaces Get Picture in the File menu.


Get Picture dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Get Picture dialog box

File --> Get Picture

On Mac OS, the Get Picture dialog box lets you import an EPS, DCS, GIF, JPEG, PDF, PhotoCD, PICT, PNG, TIFF, or Windows bitmap picture file into the active picture box.

On Windows, the Get Picture dialog box lets you import a BMP, EPS, DCS, GIF, JPEG, PDF, Mac PICT, PhotoCD, PNG, TIFF, or WMF file into the active picture box.

Use the XTensions Manager dialog box (Utilities menu) to enable the XTensions software necessary to import the following picture file formats:

•	To import Photo CD files, enable the PhotoCD filter.

•	To import PNG files, enable the PNG filter.

•	To import TIFF files saved with LZW compression, enable the LZW Import filter.

•	To import a page from a PDF file, enable the PDF filter.

If you import a picture into a box that contains a picture, the existing picture is replaced. When a large TIFF file is being imported, the page number indicator in the lower left corner of the document window changes to indicate the percentage of the file that has been imported.

•	Use the controls in the dialog box to locate the picture file you want to import.

•	Check Preview to display the picture before it is imported.

NOTE: The Get Picture command places the entire picture in the active picture box, regardless of the size of either the picture or the box.

The Color Management area is available when the Quark CMS QuarkXTensions software is installed and color management is enabled in the Color Management Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management).


Color Management area [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Color Management area [PRINT]

File --> Get Picture

The Color Management area in the Get Picture dialog box lets you specify ICC profile information for an individual picture upon import. The Color Management area is available when the Quark CMS QuarkXTensions software is installed and color management is enabled in the Color Management Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management).

•	The Profile pop-up menu lets you choose an International Color Consortium (ICC) profile. The ICC profile matches the device from which the picture was scanned or the profile used when saving the picture using an image-editing application (if that profile still corresponds with the device on which the picture will be output).

•	The Rendering Intent pop-up menu lets you choose a rendering intent for the picture you are importing. A rendering intent tells the Color Management Module (CMM) what color properties it should preserve when it translates a color from the source device gamut to the destination device gamut: the Perceptual option scales all the colors in the source gamut so that they all fit within the destination gamut. The Relative Colorimetric option retains colors that are in both the source gamut and the destination gamut; the only source colors that are changed are those that are not within the destination gamut. The Saturation option considers the saturation of source colors, and changes them to colors with the same relative saturation in the destination gamut. The Absolute Colorimetric option retains colors that are in both the source gamut and the destination gamut; colors that are outside the destination gamut are adjusted in relation to how they would look when printed on white paper.

•	When an RGB image is selected in the Get Picture dialog box, the Color Manage to RGB Destinations check box lets you specify whether Quark CMS will apply color management when the color space of the image is the same as the Monitor or Composite Output profile color space chosen in the Color Management Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management).

•	When a CMYK picture is selected in the Get Picture dialog box, the Color Manage to CMYK Destinations check box lets you specify whether Quark CMS will apply color management when the color space of the image is the same as the Separation Output or Composite Output profile color space chosen in the Color Management Preferences dialog box.


Save Text command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Save Text command

File menu

The Save Text command (Command+Option+E on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+E on Windows) displays the Save Text dialog box, which lets you export text in a variety of file formats. The Save Text command is available when a text box is selected with the Content tool.


Save Text dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Save Text dialog box

File --> Save Text

The Save Text dialog box lets you export ASCII text, ASCII text saved with XPress Tags, HTML, and word processing files. The Save Text command saves only text; it does not save pictures, anchored text, or anchored picture boxes. When text is being saved, the page number indicator in the lower left corner of the document window changes to indicate the percentage of the text that has been saved.

•	Use the controls in the dialog box to specify a location for the text file.

•	Enter a name for the text file in the Save text as field (Mac OS) or File name field (Windows).

•	Click Entire Story to export the story containing the text insertion point; click Selected Text to export only selected text.

•	On Mac OS, choose an option from the Format pop-up menu to specify a file format for the exported text. The pop-up menu includes ASCII Text and the names of any import/export filters you have loaded.

•	On Windows, choose an option from the Save as type pop-up menu to specify a file format for the exported text. The pop-up menu includes ASCII Text (*txt), Rich Text Format (*.rtf), and the names of any import/export filters you have loaded.

•	Windows only: When you save text in ASCII format, the default line break on Windows is indicated by a return character plus a line feed character. On Mac OS, the standard line break is indicated by only a return character. The Mac OS Line Endings check box lets you save ASCII text from Windows with the Mac OS line endings.

NOTE: QuarkXPress includes import/export filters for Microsoft Word and WordPerfect. To export a file in one of these formats or a file that contains XPress Tag codes, use the XTensions Manager dialog box (Utilities menu) to enable the necessary import/export filter.


Append command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Append command

File menu

Appending is the process of importing components from other documents into the existing document. For example, if you want to use several style sheets from one document in another document, you can append them. The Append command (Command+Option+A on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+A on Windows) displays the Append dialog box, which lets you select a document, template, or library from which to import style sheets, colors, hyphenation and justification specifications, lists, and dashes and stripes. In a Web document, you can also append meta tags and menus. Once you choose a document, template, or library to append from, the Append to dialog box is displayed.


Append to dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Append to dialog box

File --> Append

The Append to dialog box lets you selectively import components from the selected source document, template, or library. Click the Style Sheets, Colors, H&Js, Lists, or Dashes & Stripes tab (or the Menu or Meta Tags tab in Web documents) to choose from a list of those components. The Available column lists all the appropriate components in the source file. Select the components you want to import into the target document and double-click them, or click the arrow icon to move them to the Including column. To select a range of components, click the first components and press Shift while you click the last component in the range. To select nonconsecutive components, press Command (Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) while you click each component.

If any components you are importing have the same name as existing components, the Append Conflict dialog box displays.


Append Conflict dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Append Conflict dialog box

File --> Append --> OK

The Append Conflict dialog box provides options for handling imported components (style sheets, colors, hyphenation and justification specifications, lists, and dashes and stripes) that have the same name as existing components, but different specifications. The Existing and New lists display descriptions of the components to help you decide how to handle the conflict.

•	Click Rename to display a dialog box that lets you rename the appended component. Enter a new name for the component and click OK.

•	Click Auto-Rename to have QuarkXPress place an asterisk in front of the appended component’s name.

•	Click Use New to have the appended component overwrite the existing component.

•	Click Use Existing to cancel the append of the component with the same name; the existing component remains unchanged in the document.

TIP: If you want all components with conflicting names to be handled the same way, check Repeat For All Conflicts. For example, if you want to rename all conflicting components, check Repeat for All Conflicts, and then click Rename.


Export command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Export command

File menu

The Export command displays a submenu that lets you choose a format for exporting pages of a document. You can export pages as HTML in a Web document. The Export submenu also lets you export document pages in conjunction with some XTensions software, such as the PDF Filter QuarkXTensions software.


HTML command [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

HTML command [WEB]

File --> Export

The HTML command displays the Export HTML dialog box, which lets you save a page or range of pages in the active Web document as an HTML file.


Export HTML dialog box [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Export HTML dialog box [WEB]

File --> Export --> HTML

The Export HTML dialog box lets you specify the location where exported files will be created. The export file name for each page is specified in the Page Properties dialog box (Page --> Page Properties). Use the Pages field to specify the pages to export, and the External CSS File and Launch Browser check boxes to specify style information and launch your Web browser after exporting.


Pages field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Pages field

File --> Export --> HTML

The Pages field lets you specify the pages to export. In this field, you can enter:

•	The word "All" to export all the pages in a document (the default).

•	Nonsequential ranges, which are usually separated by commas (for example, "1, 3, 7").

•	Sequential ranges, which are usually separated by hyphens (for example, "3–7").

•	A combination of nonsequential and sequential ranges (for example, "1, 3, 7–10").

•	The word "End" to export from the beginning of a range to the end of the document (for example, "7-end").

NOTE: The page range separators (for example, commas for nonsequential ranges and hyphens for sequential ranges) can be changed in the Page Range Separators area of the Preferences dialog box Interactive pane (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Interactive tab).


External CSS File and Launch Browser check boxes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

External CSS File and Launch Browser check boxes

File --> Export --> HTML

The External CSS File check box lets you indicate that the style information in the exported Web document will be stored as a Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) file in the export folder.

The Launch Browser check box lets you display the first exported page in your default browser after you export.


Save Page as EPS command [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Save Page as EPS command [PRINT]

File menu

The Save Page as EPS command (Command+Option+Shift+S on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+Shift+S on Windows) displays the Save Page as EPS dialog box, which lets you save an Encapsulated PostScript picture file of a page in the active document. The EPS file retains and reproduces all text, layout, and pictures on the original page. You can import the EPS file into many applications that support the EPS format.


Save Page as EPS dialog box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Save Page as EPS dialog box [PRINT]

File --> Save Page as EPS

The Save Page as EPS dialog box lets you specify the page to be saved, as well as the name, location, scale, and format of the EPS file. To accurately reproduce the pages, QuarkXPress needs access to the necessary PostScript printer fonts and high-resolution picture files. You can use a low-resolution preview if you cannot locate a picture.

Page, Scale, and Bleed fields; Spread and Transparent Page check boxes

Format pop-up menu

Space pop-up menu

Preview and Data pop-up menus

OPI pop-up menu

Profiles tab


Page, Scale, Bleed fields, Spread, Transparent Page check boxes [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Page, Scale, Bleed fields, Spread, Transparent Page check boxes [PRINT]

File --> Save Page as EPS

The lower left corner of the Save Page as EPS dialog box lets you specify the page to generate the EPS file and its size.

•	The Page field lets you specify the page to save as an EPS file. You can also enter an absolute page number, which represents the page’s sequential order in the document. To specify an absolute page number, enter a plus sign (+) before the number.

•	The Scale field lets you enter a percentage value to save a reduced version of the page.

•	The Bleed field lets you enter a value to "expand" the EPS file’s boundaries. For example, entering a value of .25" will include .25" of any items that are .25" outside the page boundaries. If the items extend more than .25" beyond the page boundaries, the items will be cropped at .25".

•	Check Spread to generate an EPS file of the entire spread specified in the Page field.

•	Check Transparent Page to export the EPS file with a transparent background instead of the standard white background.

NOTE: The Bleed field is not available when Custom Bleeds QuarkXTensions software is loaded. For information about Custom Bleeds, see the documentation included on the QuarkXPress CD-ROM.


Format pop-up menu [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Format pop-up menu [PRINT]

File --> Save Page as EPS

Choose a picture file format from the Format pop-up menu.

•	The Color option generates a color EPS file.

•	The B&W option generates a black-and-white EPS file.

•	The DCS option generates a preseparated process color EPS file.

•	The DCS 2.0 option generates a preseparated EPS that includes process and spot colors.


Space pop-up menu [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Space pop-up menu [PRINT]

File --> Save Page as EPS

The Space pop-up menu lets you choose the color space of the EPS file. Choose CMYK to create a CMYK EPS file, or choose RGB to create an RGB EPS file.


Preview, Data (pop-up menus) [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Preview, Data pop-up menus [PRINT]

File --> Save Page as EPS

The Preview pop-up menu and Data pop-up menu let you specify how the file is created so you can use it in a Mac OS or Windows environment.

Choose an option from the Preview pop-up menu to create a preview. On Mac OS, you can choose PICT or TIFF to create a screen preview, or choose None to exclude the preview. On Windows, you can choose TIFF to create a screen preview of the EPS file, or choose None to exclude the preview.

If your page contains bitmap (raster) data, choose an option from the Data pop-up menu to control how the data is included in the EPS. Choose ASCII, Binary,  or Clean 8-bit.

Although documents print more quickly in binary format, ASCII is more portable because it is a standard format readable by a wider range of printers and print spoolers. Clean 8-bit is similar to binary, except it avoids certain patterns of binary data that are used to communicate with parallel port printers. This may be necessary when printing to an output device connected using a parallel port.


OPI pop-up menu [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

OPI pop-up menu [PRINT]

File --> Save Page as EPS

The OPI (Open Prepress Interface) method substitutes the high-resolution versions of color and grayscale bitmap images in a page saved as an EPS file. Choose an option from the OPI pop-up menu if the page contains bitmap image data in TIFF or EPS file format:

•	Use the default setting, Include Images, when you are not using an OPI server. The Include Images option does not embed OPI comments for EPS pictures, and if a high-resolution file cannot be found for printing, the screen preview is substituted.

•	QuarkXPress always includes OPI comments with TIFF pictures, regardless of your OPI settings. When you choose Omit TIFF while outputting to an OPI prepress system, the comments are included but the TIFF itself is not described in the PostScript. (Most OPI systems use this method.) With Omit TIFF chosen for a document containing TIFF and EPS pictures, the EPS pictures are included in the PostScript, but OPI comments for the EPS pictures are not included.

•	Choose Omit TIFF & EPS when you are outputting to an OPI prepress system that replaces both TIFF and EPS pictures. The Omit TIFF & EPS option includes OPI comments for both TIFF and EPS pictures in the file.

NOTE: The OPI pop-up menu is unavailable when the OPI QuarkXTensions software is loaded.


Profiles dialog box tab [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Profiles dialog box tab [PRINT]

File --> Save Page as EPS

The Profiles tab lets you specify color management settings when exporting a page as an EPS. The Profiles tab is available when the Quark CMS QuarkXTensions software is loaded and color management has been enabled in the Color Management Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management).

•	The Composite pop-up menu lets you choose the ICC profile for the output device you are using to print composite.

•	The Separation pop-up menu lets you choose the ICC profile for the output device you are using to print separations.

•	When profiles are chosen from both the Separation and Composite pop-up menus, the Composite Simulates Separation check box lets you print the EPS to a composite printing device, while simulating the separation device profile.


Collect for Output command [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Collect for Output command [PRINT]

File menu

The Collect for Output feature prepares a document for delivery to a service bureau by creating a report file that describes the document, and copying the document and its associated pictures, color profiles, and fonts into one folder. The Collect for Output command displays the Collect for Output dialog box, which lets you specify a location for the collected files and name the report file.

NOTE: If you choose Collect for Output for a document that has not been saved, the Save as dialog box displays. Enter a name in the Save current document as field (Mac OS) or the File name field (Windows), and click Save. The Collect for Output dialog box will then display.


Collect for Output dialog box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Collect for Output dialog box [PRINT]

File --> Collect for Output

The Collect for Output dialog box provides controls that let you select or create a folder for the document, its imported picture files, its ICC color profiles, its fonts, and the report file. It also lets you specify which document components QuarkXPress will collect.

Report Name (Mac OS), File name (Windows), Report Only check box, and Output Request Template

Collect area


Report Name(field — Mac OS), File name(field — Windows), Report Only check box, and Output Request Template [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Report Name (field — Mac OS), File name (field — Windows), Report Only check box, and Output Request Template [PRINT]

File --> Collect for Output

The Collect for Output feature generates a report containing useful information about the document. The report is a text file, formatted with XPress Tags, that is placed in the same folder as the collected document and picture files.

The Report Name field (Mac OS) or the File name field (Windows) lets you enter a name for the output report file. On Windows, QuarkXPress automatically selects the appropriate file extension for XPress Tags ("*.xtg") in the Save as type pop-up menu. The Report Only check box lets you generate only a report, without collecting any items. The report file includes the following information:

•	Document name, date, total pages, width, height

•	Version of QuarkXPress, file size

•	Required XTensions modules

•	Active XTensions modules

•	Names of the fonts used

•	Graphics used (size, box/picture angle, skew, path name, type, fonts in EPS, location in document)

•	Resolution of pictures

•	Hyphenation and justification specifications

•	Each color created and information required to reproduce custom colors

•	Trapping information

•	Color plates required for each page

You can import the report file into the "Output Request Template" located in your QuarkXPress application folder. The template includes space for adding information that service bureaus commonly need — your company name, phone number, etc. You can customize the template to suit your specific needs. When you import the file, make sure the XPress Tags filter is loaded and check Include Style Sheets in the Get Text dialog box (File menu).


Collect area [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Collect area [PRINT]

File --> Collect for Output

The Collect area lets you specify which items QuarkXPress will collect with the report.

•	The Document option copies the document to the specified target folder.

•	The Linked Pictures option copies imported picture files that must remain linked to the document for high-resolution output. These pictures will be placed in the "Pictures" subfolder within the target collection folder. When QuarkXPress collects pictures with the document, the path to each collected picture is updated to reflect the new file locations in the "Pictures" folder within the target folder.

•	The Embedded Pictures option copies pictures that are embedded in the document upon import, such as PICT files (Mac OS) or BMP and WMF files (Windows). Including copies of embedded pictures in the collection will not affect output resolution of the pictures, but you may find it useful to keep copies of these pictures with the collected document items. These pictures will be placed in the "Pictures" subfolder within the target folder.

•	The Color Profiles option copies any International Color Consortium (ICC) profiles associated with the document or imported pictures. These profiles will be placed in the "Color Profiles" subfolder within the target folder. The Color Profiles check box is available only when the Quark CMS QuarkXTensions software is loaded.

•	Mac OS only: The Screen Fonts option copies any screen fonts required for displaying the document. These font files will be placed in the "Fonts" subfolder within the target folder.

•	Mac OS only: The Printer Fonts option copies any printer fonts required for printing the document. These font files will be placed in the "Fonts" subfolder within the target folder.

•	Windows only: The Fonts option copies any fonts required for printing the document. These font files will be placed in the "Fonts" subfolder within the target folder.

NOTE: On Mac OS, TrueType fonts function as both screen fonts and printer fonts. If your document uses only TrueType fonts, QuarkXPress will collect them either when you check Screen Fonts or when you check Printer Fonts. If your document uses a combination of TrueType and Type 1 fonts, or only uses Type 1 fonts, check both Screen Fonts and Printer Fonts to be sure the Type 1 fonts are completely collected.


Document Setup command [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Document Setup command [PRINT]

File menu

The Document Setup command (Command+Option+Shift+P on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+Shift+P on Windows) displays the Document Setup dialog box, which lets you change the size, orientation, and facing-pages status of a document.


Document Setup dialog box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Document Setup dialog box [PRINT]

File --> Document Setup

The Document Setup dialog box lets you specify a new size for a document and change whether or not it has facing pages.

•	To change a document’s page size, choose a different page size from the Size pop-up menu or enter values in the Width or Height fields. To change the Orientation option for the document, click the portrait or landscape icon on Mac OS, or the Portrait or Landscape button on Windows.

•	To change a single-page document to a facing-page document, check Facing Pages. To change a facing-page document to a single-page document, uncheck Facing Pages.

TIP: If Facing Pages is checked but unavailable in the Document Setup dialog box, the document contains facing-page master pages. To change from a facing-page to a single-page document, first change any facing-page master pages to single-page master pages by dragging the single-page master page icon on top of them in the Document Layout palette (all formatting on associated document pages will be lost). Then choose File --> Document Setup and uncheck Facing Pages.


Page Setup command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Page Setup command

File menu

The Page Setup command (Command+Option+P on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+P on Windows) displays the Setup tab of the Print dialog box.

In a Web document, the Page Setup command (C+Option+P on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+P on Windows) displays a Page Setup dialog box (Mac OS) or a Properties dialog box (Windows) that is structured by the selected printer driver.


Print command [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Print command [WEB]

File menu

Since the primary destination of Web documents is the World Wide Web, QuarkXPress relies on browser applications when printing Web documents.

In a Web document, the Print command (Command+P on Mac OS, Ctrl+P on Windows) launches the default browser specified in the Preferences dialog box Browsers pane (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences), and then displays the Print dialog box for that application. The page that prints is the page that was displayed when you chose File -->Print.


Print command [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Print command [PRINT]

File menu

In a print document, the Print command (Command+P on Mac OS, Ctrl+P on Windows) displays the Print dialog box, which lets you specify the settings for a print document.

The Print dialog box is divided into two specific areas:

•	The fields, pop-up menus, and buttons at the top and bottom of the dialog box are the static components of the Print dialog box. They include the Printer pop-up menu (Mac OS), the Properties button (Windows), the Copies and Pages fields, the Print Style pop-up menu, the Page Setup (Mac OS) button, the Printer button (Mac OS), and the Capture Settings button.

•	The area in the middle of the Print dialog box consists of five standard tabs: Document, Setup, Output, Options, and Preview. Each tab contains a unique set of print-related options. (The Output tab options differ depending on whether color separations are on or off.)

Additional tabs may display in the Print dialog box, depending on the QuarkXTensions software that is loaded. For example, the Profiles tab displays when Quark CMS QuarkXTensions software is loaded.

If you choose File --> Print in a Web document, many of the options listed above will not be available; click here for more information about printing Web documents.


Printer pop-up menu, Properties button — Windows only [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Printer pop-up menu, Properties button (Windows only) [PRINT]

File --> Print

The Printer pop-up menu displays all the printers installed on your computer, either through the parallel or serial ports, or across a network. The Properties button opens a dialog box with controls specific to the selected printer driver. For more information on how to install printers or the options in the Properties dialog box, consult the documentation provided with Microsoft Windows.


Print Style pop-up menu [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Print Style pop-up menu [PRINT]

File --> Print

Print styles are sets of predefined output settings that you create in the Print Styles dialog box (Edit --> Print Styles). The Print Style pop-up menu lets you choose an option from your list of print styles. The Default setting means that you have no print style selected. When you choose a print style, all the tabs reflect the settings of that style. If you modify any settings to override the print style, a bullet • (Mac OS) or an asterisk * (Windows) is added before the print style name in the Print Style pop-up menu.

You can choose an option from the list of print styles when you use a PostScript or non-PostScript printer. If the print style defines options that are not available for non-PostScript printing, an alert will display.


Copies, Pages fields [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Copies, Pages fields [PRINT]

File --> Print

The Copies field lets you specify the number of copies to print. The Pages field lets you specify the document pages to print. The Pages field lets you enter:

•	The word "All" to print all the pages in a document (the default setting).

•	Nonsequential ranges, which are usually separated by commas (for example, "1, 3, 7").

•	Sequential ranges, which are usually separated by hyphens (for example, "3–7").

•	A combination of nonsequential and sequential ranges (for example, "1, 3, 7–10").

•	The word "End" to print from the beginning of a range to the end of the document (for example, "7-end").

NOTE: The page range separators (for example, commas for nonsequential ranges and hyphens for sequential ranges) can be changed in the Page Range Separators area of the Preferences dialog box Interactive tab (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Interactive tab).

If you designated a prefix and page number style in the Section dialog box (Page --> Section), you must use that prefix and style when you enter page numbers in fields. You can also enter an absolute page number, which represents the page’s sequential order in the document. To specify an absolute page number, enter a plus sign (+) before the number.

If you used the Pages field to specify document pages that are different from the default, the Pages pop-up menu lets you choose the word All to reset the Pages field to the default setting.


Page Setup, Printer buttons (Mac OS only) [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Page Setup, Printer buttons (Mac OS only) [PRINT]

File --> Print

The Page Setup button displays the page setup dialog box for the selected printer driver. The Printer button displays the printer driver dialog box for the selected printer driver. The controls in these dialog boxes depend on the printer driver, and can change according to which printer driver you have selected.


Capture Settings button [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Capture Settings button [PRINT]

File --> Print

The Capture Settings button saves the current output specifications with the document and closes the Print dialog box. The output specifications display the next time you choose File --> Print.


Document dialog box tab [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Document dialog box tab [PRINT]

File --> Print --> Document tab

The Print dialog box Document tab (Command+P on Mac OS, Ctrl+P on Windows) lets you specify various document output settings.

Separations, Spreads, and Collate settings

Printing blank pages and thumbnails

Back to Front and Page Sequence settings

Bleed and Registration settings

Tiling pop-up menu


Separations, Spreads, and Collate settings
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Separations, Spreads, and Collate settings

File --> Print --> Document tab

•	The Separations check box lets you print color separations. When Separations is checked, a plate will be printed for each spot color or process ink as specified in the Print column of the Output tab.

•	The Spreads check box lets you print two or more adjoining pages side-by-side on the film or paper. To arrange a spread for correct output, place the pages in a horizontal row in the Document Layout palette (View --> Show Document Layout).

•	The Collate check box lets you print more than one copy of a document so that they output with all pages in the correct order for binding. If you print three copies of a document and check Collate, QuarkXPress prints one complete copy of the document before beginning the second copy. If Collate is unchecked, QuarkXPress prints three copies of the first page, then three copies of the second page, and so on.


Printing blank pages and thumbnails
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Printing blank pages and thumbnails

File --> Print --> Document tab

•	The Print Blank Pages check box lets you print pages in your document that are blank. When Separations is unchecked and Print Blank Pages is checked, blank pages will output. When Separations is unchecked and Print Blank Pages is unchecked, blank pages will not output.

•	When Separations is checked, the Print Blank Pages check box changes to Print Blank Plates. Checking Print Blank Plates will print all plates designated in the Output tab Plates pop-up menu. When Print Blank Plates is unchecked, blank plates will not output.

•	The Thumbnails check box lets you print many pages of a document on one sheet of paper in reduced size. The Thumbnails check box lets you print pages as thumbnails to non-PostScript printers as well as to PostScript devices.


Back to Front and Page Sequence settings
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Back to Front and Page Sequence settings

File --> Print --> Document tab

•	The Back to Front check box lets you print a multipage document in reverse order. The last page in the document will print first.

•	The Page Sequence pop-up menu lets you specify the page sequence. All is the default option, and choosing it prints all of the related pages. When you choose Odd, only odd-numbered pages are printed. When you choose Even, only even-numbered pages are printed.


Bleed and Registration settings
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Bleed and Registration settings

File --> Print --> Document tab

•	The Bleed field lets you specify bleed values for a document. A bleed value is the distance that an item can extend beyond the edge of a page’s final trim size.

NOTE: The Bleed field is disabled when the Custom Bleeds QuarkXTensions software is loaded.

•	The Registration pop-up menu lets you specify that crop marks and registration marks print on every page. You can choose Centered or Off Center. The Offset field lets you enter a value for the distance between the edge of the page and the beginning of the crop marks when you choose Centered or Off Center in the Registration area pop-up menu.

•	Crop marks, also called "cut marks" or "trim marks," are short, vertical and horizontal lines printed outside the page’s final trim size, indicating where to cut the page. Registration marks are symbols that are used to align overlaying plates.


Tiling pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Tiling pop-up menu

File --> Print --> Document tab

•	To print a large document in sections (tiles), choose an option from the Tiling pop-up menu. When you specify tiling, QuarkXPress prints portions of each document page in two or more overlapping tiles that create the complete page when laid side-by-side. When you choose Manual, you control the way in which a page is tiled by positioning the ruler origin. When you choose Automatic, QuarkXPress determines the number of tiles that are needed to print each document page, based on the document size, the printer’s media (paper) size, whether or not Absolute Overlap is checked, and the value you enter in the Overlap field (the default overlap is 3").

•	The value entered in the Overlap field is the amount QuarkXPress will use to extend the page as needed to create the tile. When Absolute Overlap is checked, QuarkXPress will use only the value in the Overlap field when extending the page to create the tile. If Absolute Overlap is unchecked, QuarkXPress will use at least the amount in the Overlap field when creating the tile, but may use a larger amount if necessary. Do not check Absolute Overlap if you want your document centered on the final assembled tiles. QuarkXPress prints tickmarks and location information on each tile to aid you in reassembling them.


Setup dialog box tab [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Setup dialog box tab [PRINT]

File --> Print --> Setup tab

The Print dialog box Setup tab (Command+Option+P on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+P on Windows) lets you specify printing information such as printer type, paper size, page orientation, and scale.

Printer Description, Paper Size, and Reduce or Enlarge settings

Page Positioning, Fit in Print Area, and Orientation settings


Printer Description, Paper Size, and Reduce or Enlarge settings
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Printer Description, Paper Size, and Reduce or Enlarge settings

File --> Print --> Setup tab

•	The Printer Description pop-up menu lets you specify the appropriate PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file for your PostScript printer. When you do this, the Paper Size, Paper Width, and Paper Height fields will automatically be filled with default information supplied by the PPD. If you choose a PPD for an imagesetter, the Paper Offset and Page Gap fields will also be available; check with your service bureau for information about optimal settings. If you do not have the right PPD, choose a similar built-in, generic PPD.

NOTE: PPDs are created by printer manufacturers and are usually supplied with PostScript printers. Contact the appropriate printer manufacturer for more information.

•	The Paper Size pop-up menu lets you specify the media size used by your printer. To specify the width and height of custom media supported by your printer, choose Custom from the Paper Size pop-up menu and enter values in the Paper Width and Paper Height fields.

•	The Reduce or Enlarge field lets you enter a percentage value to specify that your document will print smaller or larger than its actual size. The default setting is 100%. The Reduce or Enlarge field lets you scale documents for non-PostScript printing as well as PostScript output.


Page Positioning, Fit in Print Area and Orientation settings
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Page Positioning, Fit in Print Area and Orientation settings

File --> Print --> Setup tab

•	The Page Positioning pop-up menu lets you specify the position of the document on the selected output media. The default Page Positioning option is Left Edge, which positions the top left of the document page on the top left of the selected media. The Center option centers the page horizontally and vertically in the imageable area of the selected output media. The Center Horizontal option centers the page left-to-right in the imageable area. The Center Vertical option centers the page top-to-bottom in the imageable area. The Page Positioning pop-up menu lets you position documents for PostScript or non-PostScript devices.

•	The Fit in Print Area check box lets you reduce or enlarge the size of a page in your document to fit the imageable area of the selected media. The Fit in Print Area option can be applied when printing to a PostScript printer or a non-PostScript device.

•	The Orientation controls let you specify whether to print in portrait or landscape mode. To specify the orientation of the document on Mac OS, click the portrait or landscape icon. To specify the orientation of the document on Windows, click the Portrait or Landscape button. Portrait orientation is the default; however, if your document page is wider than the selected paper size, landscape orientation is selected automatically.


Output dialog box tab, with color separations off [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Output dialog box tab, with color separations off [PRINT]

File --> Print --> Output tab

The Print dialog box Output tab lets you specify color, resolution, and halftone screen and value settings. The following Output tab settings for printing are available with color separations off (color separations are specified by checking Separations in the Document tab):

Print Colors pop-up menu: Black & White and Grayscale settings, Composite CMYK and Composite RGB settings

Halftoning, Resolution and Frequency settings


Print Colors, Black & White, and Grayscale settings
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Print Colors pop-up menu: Black & White, and Grayscale settings

File --> Print --> Output tab

•	The Print Colors pop-up menu lets you specify what color space will be used to print the document.

•	Black & White prints all document items as black and white (no shades of gray) to a black-and-white printer. For example, box backgrounds will print as black or white only; imported pictures may print with shades of gray.

•	Grayscale prints colors as shades of gray to a black-and-white printer. For example, a box with a yellow background will print as a light shade of gray.


Composite CMYK, Composite RGB settings
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Print Colors pop-up menu: Composite CMYK, Composite RGB settings

File --> Print --> Output tab

•	Composite CMYK prints composite CMYK color to a color printer when a color printer is chosen in the Setup tab Printer Description pop-up menu. If you choose a printer description for a CMYK device in the Setup tab of the Print dialog box, the Print Colors pop-up menu defaults to Composite CMYK.

•	Composite RGB prints composite RGB color to a color printer when a color printer is chosen in the Setup tab Printer Description pop-up menu. If you choose a printer description for an RGB device in the Setup tab of the Print dialog box (File --> Page Setup), the Print Colors pop-up menu defaults to Composite RGB

NOTE: If you are using color management and have chosen a composite RGB profile as the composite output destination (Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management), the Composite CMYK option is not available in the Print Colors pop-up menu. If you are using color management and have selected a composite CMYK profile as the composite output destination, the Composite RGB option is not available in the Print Colors pop-up menu.


Halftoning, Resolution and Frequency settings
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Halftoning, Resolution and Frequency settings

File --> Print --> Output tab

•	The Halftoning pop-up menu lets you choose halftone screen values. The Conventional option uses PPD halftone values, if available; otherwise, it uses QuarkXPress-calculated halftone screen values. The Printer option uses halftone screen values provided by the selected printer; in this case, QuarkXPress does not send halftoning information.

•	The default resolution for the printer is entered automatically in the Resolution field. To specify a resolution other than the default, enter a dots-per-inch (dpi) value in the Resolution field, or choose an option from the Resolution pop-up menu.

•	The default line frequency for the printer is entered automatically in the Frequency field. To specify a line frequency other than the default, enter a lines-per-inch (lpi) value in the Frequency field, or choose an option from the Frequency pop-up menu.

•	The list at the bottom of the Output tab lists Process Black as the only color used to print your document when a black-and-white PPD is selected in the Document tab. If a color PPD is selected, the appropriate color plates display in the list.


Output dialog box tab, with color separations on [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Output dialog box tab, with color separations on [PRINT]

File --> Print --> Output tab

The Print dialog box Output tab lets you specify color, resolution, and halftone screen and value settings. The following Output tab settings for printing are available with color separations on (color separations are specified by checking Separations in the Print dialog box Document tab):

Plates and Halftoning pop-up menus

Resolution and Frequency fields

Default Halftone, Frequency, Angle, and Function settings for individual plates


Plates and Halftoning pop-up menus
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Plates and Halftoning pop-up menus

File --> Print --> Output tab

•	The Plates pop-up menu lets you choose whether to print process or spot colors. The Used Process & Spot option prints plates for process and spot colors used in the document. The Convert to Process option converts all colors in the file to process colors (at print time only) and prints process plates. The All Process & Spot option prints all process and spot color plates.

•	The Halftoning pop-up menu specifies halftone screen values. When Separations is checked in the Document tab, the Conventional option is the only option available in the Halftoning pop-up menu. The Conventional option uses QuarkXPress-calculated halftone screen values.


Resolution and Frequency fields
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Resolution and Frequency fields

File --> Print --> Output tab

•	The default resolution for the printer is entered automatically in the Resolution field. To specify a resolution other than the default, enter a dots per inch (dpi) value in the Resolution field, or choose an option from the Resolution pop-up menu.

•	The default line frequency for the printer is entered automatically in the Frequency field. To specify a line frequency other than the default, enter a lines per inch (lpi) value in the Frequency field, or choose an option from the Frequency pop-up menu.


Halftone, Frequency, Angle and Function settings:
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Halftone, Frequency, Angle and Function settings:

File --> Print --> Output tab

The list at the bottom of the Output tab lists the plates used in the document, as well as the default Halftone, Frequency, Angle, and Function settings.

•	A checkmark in the Print column indicates a plate will be printed: The default setting is checked. To cancel printing for an individual plate, uncheck any checkmark in the Print column, or select the plate and choose No from the Print column pop-up menu.

•	The Plate column lists spot colors and process inks in the document when Separations is checked (File --> Print --> Document tab). The Plates pop-up menu at the top of the Output tab specifies which document plates are listed.


Halftone pop-up menu for individual plates
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Halftone pop-up menu

File --> Print --> Output tab

The Halftone pop-up menu lets you assign a different screen angle to a spot color. You can choose C, M, Y, or K in the Halftone pop-up menu to produce the current angle, frequency, and dot function for the corresponding process color. The default screen values for spot colors are specified in the Halftone pop-up menu in the Edit Colors dialog box (Edit --> Colors --> New).


Frequency column for individual plates
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Frequency column

File --> Print --> Output tab

The Frequency column lists the line screen frequency value. This is the lines per inch (lpi) value that will be applied to each of the color plates. If you do not want to use the Default value for a plate, choose Other from the Frequency pop-up menu to display the Frequency (Mac OS) or Other (Windows) dialog box. Enter a lines per inch (lpi) value in the Frequency field; then click OK.


Angle column for individual plates
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Angle column

File --> Print --> Output tab

The Angle column lists the screen angle for each color plate. If you do not want to use the Default value, choose Other from the Angle pop-up menu to display the Angle (Mac OS) or Other (Windows) dialog box. Enter a screen angle value in the Angle field; then click OK.

Certain screen angle and offset values in two-color spot color blends can produce moiré patterns. If you have a blend consisting of two spot colors and you see a moiré pattern, you can change the default screen angle for one of those colors.

Color	Default screen angle (in degrees)
Cyan	105.000
Magenta	75.000
Yellow	90.000
Black	45.000
Spot colors	Corresponds to default angle for the process color selected in the Halftone pop-up menu (Edit Color dialog box)


Function column for individual plates
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Function column

File --> Print --> Output tab

The Function column pop-up menu lets you specify alternate dot shapes in printed screens. The Function pop-up menu displays the available dot shape types: Default, Dot, Line, Ellipse, Square, and Tri-Dot.

The default dot shape is a circle, but there may be instances in which you need to use another dot type. If you will be setting up the document to print to file, it is important to know if any special dot settings are needed. Let your professional printer be your guide. Depending on their output hardware or presses, they may have a preference for particular dot types.


Options dialog box tab [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Options dialog box tab [PRINT]

File --> Print --> Options tab

The Print dialog box Options tab lets you specify settings that are useful for reporting PostScript errors, making PostScript files, printing negatives, and printing pictures. Settings in the bottom half of the dialog box let you control the way pictures are printed.

Quark PostScript Error Handler utility	Page Flip and Negative Print settings
Output and Data pop-up menus	OPI settings
Resolution and Overprint EPS settings


Quark PostScript Error Handler utility
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Quark PostScript Error Handler utility

File --> Print --> Options tab

The Quark PostScript Error Handler utility provides, in addition to PostScript error handling, information about where on a page a PostScript error occurs. To receive printed PostScript error reporting from QuarkXPress, check Quark PostScript Error Handler. If a PostScript error occurs during the printing of a QuarkXPress item (text box, picture box, line, or item created with XTensions software), the utility will print the page containing the QuarkXPress items handled successfully up to the point of the error. The utility will then print an error report containing: (1) The bounding box of the item in which the error occurred. This box is identified by a black border and a 50% black background. (2) A message at the top left of the page specifying the type of item causing the error. Compare the error report to the printed page to isolate the offending item. The bounding box on the error report indicates the location of the object causing the error.

The Quark PostScript Error Handler is designed only for PostScript printing. The Quark PostScript Error Handler will append its report to any other PostScript error reporting utilities you may be using.


Page Flip and Negative Print
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Page Flip and Negative Print

File --> Print --> Options tab

•	The Page Flip pop-up menu lets you choose from four options: None; Horizontal (reverses the printing of page images from left to right); Vertical (prints page images upside down); or Horizontal & Vertical (prints page images from left to right, upside down).

•	The Negative Print check box lets you print negative page images. When Negative Print is checked, flipping a page horizontally or vertically will produce right-reading, emulsion-down film output, a common standard for commercial printers in the United States.


Output pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Output and Data pop-up menus

File --> Print --> Options tab

•	The Output pop-up menu lets you specify how pictures are printed. Normal is the default, and provides high-resolution output of pictures using the data from the pictures’ source files. The Low Resolution option prints pictures at screen preview resolution. The Rough option suppresses printout of pictures and box frames and prints a box with an "x" in it, much like an empty picture box on-screen. (If a picture box has a background color of None, an "x" will not print in the box when choosing Rough from the Output pop-up menu.)

•	From the Data pop-up menu, choose ASCII, Binary, or Clean 8-bit. Although documents print more quickly in binary format, ASCII is more portable because it is a standard format readable by a wider range of printers and print spoolers. The Clean 8-bit option combines ASCII and binary in a very versatile and portable file format.

•	If a print job flushes without printing, the Binary setting may be causing an error; when this occurs, try choosing Clean 8-bit or ASCII instead.


OPI settings
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

OPI settings

File --> Print --> Options tab

•	The OPI pop-up menu lets you control whether TIFF and EPS pictures are output or OPI (Open Prepress Interface) comments are substituted during output.

•	Use the default setting, Include Images, when you are not using an OPI server. The Include Images option does not embed OPI comments for EPS pictures, and if a high-resolution file cannot be found for printing, the screen preview is substituted.

•	QuarkXPress always includes OPI comments with TIFF pictures, regardless of your OPI settings. When you choose Omit TIFF while outputting to an OPI prepress system, the comments are included, but the TIFF itself is not described in the PostScript. (Most OPI systems use this method.) With Omit TIFF chosen for a document containing TIFF and EPS pictures, the EPS pictures are included in the PostScript, but OPI comments for the EPS pictures are not included.

•	Choose Omit TIFF & EPS when you are outputting to an OPI prepress system that replaces both TIFF and EPS pictures. The Omit TIFF & EPS option includes OPI comments for both TIFF and EPS pictures in the file.

NOTE: When OPI QuarkXTensions software is loaded, the OPI pop-up menu is unavailable.


Resolution and Overprint EPS settings
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Resolution and Overprint EPS settings

File --> Print --> Options tab

•	Full Res of Rotated Objects lets you print rotated TIFF pictures in full resolution to non-PostScript printers. To enable the Full Res of Rotated Objects check box, you must choose Normal from the Output pop-up menu; additionally, you must choose a non-PostScript printer from the Chooser (Mac OS Apple menu) or choose a non-PostScript printer from the Print dialog box Printer pop-up menu (Windows).

TIP: The Full Res of Rotated Objects function can be very memory-intensive, and may require large amounts of hard drive space and RAM.

•	The Overprint EPS Black option lets you force all black elements in imported EPS pictures to overprint (regardless of their overprint settings).

•	The Full Resolution TIFF Output option lets you print 1-bit TIFFs at the full picture resolution (not to exceed the resolution specified in the Output tab). If Full Resolution TIFF Output is unchecked, images greater than 1-bit will be subsampled to twice the lpi.


Preview dialog box tab [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Preview dialog box tab [PRINT]

File --> Print --> Preview tab

The Print dialog box Preview tab lets you view the effect of the settings you made for a print job before you output it.

Statistical information about the document page is listed on the left half of the Preview tab.

The large page icon on the right is a graphic preview of the document. The page icon does not display the actual items you included on your document pages; rather, it represents document pages in relation to their placement on the media as the document outputs from the printer.

•	The blue rectangle represents the document page.

•	The green rectangle represents the imageable area for the selected media. When you choose a Tiling option (Print dialog box Document tab), the green rectangles indicate the imageable areas of individual pages, which allows you to preview how the tiled pages will overlap at output.

•	A black rectangle in the graphic preview represents the media area when a sheet-fed device is chosen in the Printer Description pop-up menu (Print dialog box Setup tab).

•	A gray area surrounding the document represent bleeds when a bleed value is entered in the Bleed field (Print dialog box Document tab), or when a bleed setting is chosen using the Custom Bleeds QuarkXTensions software (Print dialog box Bleed tab).

•	If the page size, including crop marks and bleed, is greater than the imageable area of the print media, a red area indicates portions of the document that are outside the imageable area, and will therefore be clipped. If the Tiling pop-up menu is set to Automatic in the Document tab, the red area does not display.

•	Registration marks display in black when a Registration option is chosen (Print dialog box Document tab).

•	The "R" in the graphic preview illustrates rotation, positive/negative, flip, and reading.

•	The arrow to the left of the graphic preview indicates the film or page feed direction.

Below the graphic preview are two smaller icons:

•	The cut sheet icon indicates that you have selected a cut sheet output device in the Printer Description pop-up menu (Print dialog box Setup tab), while a roll-fed icon indicates that you have selected a roll-fed output device in the Printer Description pop-up menu.

•	The question mark is a pop-up button; clicking it displays a legend of the different colors used in the graphic preview.


Profiles dialog box tab [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Profiles dialog box tab [PRINT]

File --> Print --> Profiles tab

The Profiles tab of the Print dialog box lets you change the default profiles specified in the Color Management Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management). The Profiles tab is available when Quark CMS is loaded and color management has been enabled in the Color Management Preferences dialog box.

•	The Separation and Composite pop-up menus override the default profiles you specified in the Color Management Preferences dialog box.

•	The Composite Simulates Separation option lets you print to the chosen composite printing device, while simulating output to the separation device. This check box is available when a profile is chosen in both the Separation and Composite pop-up menus.

NOTE: Changes you make in the Print dialog box Profiles tab are reflected in the Color Management Preferences dialog box.


Quit command (Mac OS only)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Quit command (Mac OS only)

File menu

The Quit command (Command+Q) lets you close all open files and quit the application. If an open document contains unsaved changes, a Save alert dialog box displays and lets you save changes.


Exit command — Windows only
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Exit command (Windows only)

File menu

The Exit command (Ctrl+Q) lets you close all open files and quit the application. If an open document contains unsaved changes, a Save alert displays and lets you save changes.


Edit menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit menu

The QuarkXPress Edit menu lets you use the Clipboard, find and replace text, change QuarkXPress default specifications, and create formatting specifications for a document. The Edit menu is divided into six sections.

•	The first section lets you reverse or recreate certain actions. If the Undo or Redo command (Command+Z on Mac OS, Ctrl+Z on Windows) is unavailable, the last action you performed cannot be undone.

•	The second section lets you edit text, pictures, and items. If the Item tool is selected, you can cut, copy, paste, or delete active items; or you can select all items on the current page.

•	If the Content tool is selected, you can cut, copy, paste, or delete selected text or an active picture; or you can select all the text in the active text chain. On Windows, the Paste Special command lets you paste and embed pictures from other applications.

•	The third section provides controls for accessing third-party applications used for editing pictures. On Mac OS, you can automatically import and update pictures, tables, or charts by using the Mac OS Subscription features. On Windows, the Links command lets you use a Microsoft Windows function called Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) to link and embed pictures from other applications. On Windows, the Insert Object command is available when a picture box is selected; the Object submenu is available for selected picture boxes that contain a linked or embedded object.

•	The fourth section lets you display the Clipboard. The Show Clipboard command is always available.

•	The fifth section lets you find and replace text, style sheets, and character attributes; customize QuarkXPress with preferences; and create and manipulate style sheets, colors, hyphenation and justification specifications (H&Js), lists, and styles for lines and frames (called dashes and stripes). In a Web document, you can create and manipulate meta tags and menus. The commands are always available.

•	The sixth section lets you create and manipulate print styles. The Print Styles command is always available.


Undo/Redo command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Undo/Redo command

Edit menu

The Undo command (Command+Z on Mac OS, Ctrl+Z on Windows) identifies the last action performed and lets you reverse the action. For example, after you apply a style sheet to a paragraph, the menu command reads Undo Style Change. After you choose Undo, the menu command changes to Redo.

The Redo command identifies the last Undo command performed and lets you reimplement that action. For example, if you choose Undo Style Change, the menu command changes to Redo Style Change. After you choose Redo, the menu command changes back to Undo.

NOTE: The Undo command is not available for every action you perform. An alert usually warns you if an action cannot be undone.


Cut command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Cut command

Edit menu

When the Item tool is selected, the Cut command (Command+X on Mac OS, Ctrl+X on Windows) removes active items and their contents and places them on the Clipboard. When the Content tool is selected, the Cut command removes selected text or a selected picture and places it on the Clipboard.


Copy command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Copy command

Edit menu

When the Item tool is selected, the Copy command (Command+C on Mac OS, Ctrl+C on Windows) places a copy of active items and their contents on the Clipboard. When the Content tool is selected, the Copy command places a copy of selected text or a selected picture on the Clipboard. The Copy command does not remove elements from the document.


Paste command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Paste command

Edit menu

The Paste command (Command+V on Mac OS, Ctrl+V on Windows) places the Clipboard’s contents into a document or into a document item as shown in the table below. The ability to paste depends on the selected tool, the contents of the Clipboard, and the active item in the document.

Tool	Clipboard contents	Paste location
Item	boxes, lines, text paths, or table	center of document window
Content	text	text insertion point of selected text box, path, or cell
Content	picture	upper left corner of picture box or cell
Content	boxes, lines, text paths, or tables	center of document window
Content	box, table, or no-content line	anchored at text insertion point of selected text box, path, or cell
NOTE: If you paste text in a box containing selected text, the selected text is replaced. If you paste a picture in a box containing a picture, the picture is replaced.


Paste Special command — Windows only
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Paste Special command (Windows only)

Edit menu

The Paste Special command lets you choose the format of an object that you paste, paste and embed, or paste and link into your document through the use of the Microsoft Windows OLE function. OLE (Object Linking and Embedding) enables a server application to provide an object to a client application. Using a server application, such as an illustration program, you can copy a picture to the Clipboard as an object. You are then able to paste, paste and embed, or paste and link the object into the client application, QuarkXPress. If you later want to edit the embedded or linked object, just double-click on it with the Content tool and the object’s server application launches and allows you to edit it. The Paste Special command is available for pictures when the Content tool is selected, a picture box is active, and the Clipboard contains a picture copied from an OLE server application. Choosing the Paste Special command opens the Paste Special dialog box.

When an object is pasted, no information about the file it came from is included. In contrast, embedded and linked objects retain information about their source file. When an object is embedded in QuarkXPress, all pertinent data from the source file is included, so the object is able to transfer itself back into the server application that created it. When an object is linked, all pertinent information is retained in the source file, which QuarkXPress accesses when needed. The advantage of an embedded object is that it can be opened in the server application that created it without accessing the source file. The advantage of a linked object is that when a linked object’s source file is updated, the linked object in QuarkXPress is also automatically updated. For information about linking and embedding objects, see Paste/Paste Link buttons and As list.

NOTE: The Paste Special command is part of OLE, not QuarkXPress, and therefore may work differently with other versions of Windows or OLE. Also, not all Windows applications support OLE. For information about a particular application, refer to the documentation for that application.

To find out what server applications are available on your computer, select a picture box with the Content tool and choose Insert Object from the Edit menu. The Object Type list displays the file types that can be created with the available server applications.


Paste Special dialog box — Windows only
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Paste Special dialog box (Windows only)

Edit --> Paste Special

The Paste Special dialog box gives you control over how the object stored on the Clipboard is pasted. Using the Source field, the Paste/Paste Link buttons, the As list, and the Result area, you can paste, paste and embed, or paste and link the object. You can also choose to display the object as an icon.


Source field — Windows only
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Source field (Windows only)

Edit --> Paste Special

The Source field displays different information depending on whether or not the object on the Clipboard came from a file that was first saved in the server application. If the file was saved before copying, then the location of the file where the object came from is displayed.


Paste/Paste Link buttons — Windows only
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Paste/Paste Link buttons (Windows only)

Edit --> Paste Special

The Paste and Paste Link buttons are mutually exclusive, which means that only one of them can be selected. If Paste is selected, then the object on the Clipboard will be pasted, or pasted and embedded, depending on the option you select in the As list. If Paste Link is selected, then the object is pasted with a link to its source file.

TIP: When linking objects, always be sure to save the source file in the server application. If you link an object without saving the source file, QuarkXPress will not be able to access the appropriate information when you need to edit the object in the server application later on. For the same reason, do not delete the source file of a linked object. If you move a source file, use the Links dialog box (Edit --> Links --> Change Source button) to update its location.


As (list) — Windows only
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

As list (Windows only)

Edit --> Paste Special

The As list displays all the available formats for pasting the object from the clipboard. The selected button determines which options are available:

•	When the Paste button is selected, you can paste the object as an embedded object, a metafile, or a bitmap image. Different variations of these options display in the As list. For example, if you copied a chart from Microsoft Excel, "Microsoft Excel Worksheet Object" and "Metafile" would display in the As list. If you created an image with Microsoft Paint, then "Bitmap Image Object," "Metafile," and "Device-Independent Bitmap" would display. Choosing the option with a name ending with "Object" pastes and embeds, while choosing "Metafile," "Bitmap," or "Device-Independent Bitmap" pastes.

•	When Paste Link is selected, only one option relating to the server application displays in the As list. For example, if you copied a chart from Microsoft Excel, then only "Microsoft Excel Worksheet" would display in the list.


Result area — Windows only
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Result area (Windows only)

Edit --> Paste Special

As soon as you select an available format from the As list, the Result area displays a summary of information about how that picture will be pasted.


Display As Icon check box — Windows only
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Display As Icon check box (Windows only)

Edit --> Paste Special

To display the picture as an icon on-screen, check the Display As Icon check box. This check box is only available when you embed or link the object. When checked, a preview of the icon displays along with the Change Icon button.

TIP: Displaying a picture as an icon is meant solely to speed up screen redraw by freeing memory that would otherwise be consumed by large picture files. If the Display as Icon check box is enabled when you print, your output will contain the icon rather than the picture.


Change Icon (button and dialog box) — Windows only
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Change Icon (button and dialog box) (Windows only)

Edit --> Paste Special

Clicking the Change Icon button displays the Change Icon dialog box. Use the Icon area to choose between the current and default icons, or locate a new icon with the From File button and field. If you do not know the exact location of the icon file, use the Browse button to search. All the icons in the location you specify in the From File field display below the field. The text you enter in the Label field displays below the icon in the picture box to help you remember what picture the icon represents.


Clear (command — Mac OS), Delete (command — windows)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Clear command (Mac OS), Delete command (Windows)

Edit menu

When the Item tool is selected, the Clear command (Mac OS) or Delete command (Windows) deletes active items and their contents. When the Content tool is selected, choosing Clear (Mac OS) or Delete (Windows) deletes the contents of an active picture box, or selected text from an active text box. The items or contents are not placed on the Clipboard. If you use the Clear or Delete command while a linked text box is selected, the text in the original box either reflows through subsequent boxes or generates an overflow symbol at the end of the chain.


Select All command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Select All command

Edit menu

When the Item tool is selected, the Select All command (Command+A on Mac OS, Ctrl+A on Windows) selects all the items on the current spread and its pasteboard in a print document, or all the items on the current page in a Web document. When the Content tool is selected, the Select All command selects all the text in the active box or text chain.

The Select All command cannot be used to select all points in a Bézier item. Instead, press Command+Shift+A (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Shift+A (Windows) while a Bézier point is active, or double-click a Bézier point to select all Bézier points.


Subscribe to, Subscriber Options commands (Mac OS only)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Subscribe to, Subscriber Options commands (Mac OS only)

Edit menu

Mac OS software (version 8.x to 9.x) places two commands, Subscribe to and Subscriber Options, in the Edit menu.

Subscribe functions appear in many applications and are often used for automatically updating a document whenever imported pictures in the document are modified in an outside application. However, since QuarkXPress already offers features such as Auto Picture Import (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> General pane) and the Usage dialog box (Utilities menu) to perform this function, QuarkXPress users may find the subscribe functions useful mostly for importing tables or charts from a spreadsheet application that supports publish and subscribe functions, but does not normally save files as pictures. Using the subscribe functions, these imported tables can then be automatically updated as pictures in the QuarkXPress layout whenever they are modified in the spreadsheet application.

The subscribe functions in QuarkXPress are available for picture boxes. When a picture box is selected and the Content tool selected, the Subscribe to command is available; this allows you to import EPS or PICT edition files. Edition files are the picture files created by an application that supports Publisher functions. If given a choice between EPS and PICT, we recommend that you subscribe to EPS edition files. (QuarkXPress cannot subscribe to TIFF edition files.) For complete information about the Subscribe to and Subscriber Options commands, please refer to your computer’s documentation.


Links command — Windows only
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Links command (Windows only)

Edit menu

The Links command displays the Links dialog box, which lets you manipulate linked objects within the active document. This command is available when at least one object is linked to the document.

NOTE: The Links command is part of OLE, not QuarkXPress, and therefore may work differently with different versions of Windows or OLE.


Links dialog box — Windows Only
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Links dialog box (Windows only)

Edit --> Links

In the Links column of the dialog box, all of the linked objects within the active document are shown. If the column is not wide enough to display the entire location of the source file, the beginning part of the path will not be visible. View the Source field below the list to see the entire path of the selected source file. The Type column and field display the object type. The Type field may also specify the server application used to create the object. The Update column shows how the object is updated, either automatically or manually, depending on the option selected in the Update field. To change how the object is updated, select a link in the list by clicking it once, and then click the appropriate button in the Update field:

•	Choosing Automatic allows QuarkXPress to update the object whenever a change is detected in the source file.

•	Choosing Manual updates the object only when you use the Update Now button described below.

To manipulate a linked object, select it in the list and use one of these buttons:

•	The Update Now button updates the linked object. When clicked, QuarkXPress locates the source file and alters the object according to how it was last saved in the source file. Use this button to update the objects that are set to Manual.

•	The Open Source button launches the server application that was used to create the object and opens its source file.

•	The Change Source button displays the Change Source dialog box, which lets you relocate a source file that was moved from its original location. It functions like any Windows Open or Save as dialog box.

•	The Break Link button breaks the link between the object and its source file. When pressed, an alert asks you to confirm that you want to break the link. If you break a link, all that remains is the low-resolution picture of the object. Without the link, QuarkXPress will not be able to access the original file and print the picture at higher resolutions.


Object submenu — Windows only
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Object submenu (Windows only)

Edit menu

The Object submenu is only available for selected picture boxes that contain an embedded or linked object. The Object submenu changes according to the object within the selected picture box. For example, if you embed an image from Microsoft Paint in the selected picture box, then the Object submenu changes to the Bitmap Image Object submenu. Regardless of the submenu title, two options are listed in the submenu: Edit and Open. Selecting either option will launch the server application and automatically open the object’s source file.

TIP: The Edit command differs from the Open command. Choosing Edit should allow the client application to take on the editing functions of the server application so that the object may be edited solely within the client application. Currently, QuarkXPress does not use this capability and therefore opens the server application to edit embedded or linked objects.


Insert Object command — Windows only
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Insert Object command (Windows only)

Edit menu

The Insert Object command displays the Insert Object dialog box, which lets you create a new object using a server application or retrieve an existing file. This command is available whenever a picture box is selected with either the Content tool or the Item tool.

NOTE: The Insert Object command is part of OLE, not QuarkXPress, and therefore may work differently with different versions of Windows or OLE.


Insert Object dialog box — Windows only
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Insert Object dialog box (Windows only)

Edit --> Insert Object

The Insert Object dialog box differs depending on which option, Create New or Create from File, is selected.

•	When Create New is selected, the Object Type list displays all the available server application object types. Choose one and view the Result field for a summary of how the object will be inserted. Click OK to launch that application and create an object to place in the picture box. When you do this, QuarkXPress applies the changes you make in the server application to the picture box. When you are done, choose Exit --> Return to <QuarkXPress Document Name> from the File menu in the server application. If you plan to link the object later, make sure you save the file in the server application before you exit.

NOTE: When you use the Create New button, the object you are about to create cannot be linked and will therefore be automatically embedded. This is because a linked object must have a source file, and since no source file exists yet, linking is not possible. Therefore, if you create a new object and want to link it, first create and save the object as described above; then re-insert the object in the picture box using the Create from File button.

•	When Create from File is selected, the File field displays, allowing you to enter the specific location of a file to insert. If you do not know the exact location and file name of the object you want to insert, click the Browse button to search for the file. Check Link to link the object; otherwise it will be automatically embedded. The Result field displays summary information about how the file will be inserted.


Show Clipboard, Hide Clipboard command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show Clipboard, Hide Clipboard command

Edit menu

The Show Clipboard command displays the Clipboard. The Clipboard contains the last item, text, or picture you cut or copied from any application that supports the Clipboard. An item cannot be edited within the Clipboard, and it is erased as soon as another item is copied there.


Find/Change command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Find/Change command

Edit menu

The Find/Change command (Command+F on Mac OS, Ctrl+F on Windows) displays the Find/Change palette, which lets you search for and replace text or text attributes (including style sheet, font, size, color, and type style) in the current story or document. The Find/Change feature does not work on document and master pages simultaneously. To use the Find/Change feature on master pages, first display a master page in the document window (Page --> Display).


Find/Change palette
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Find/Change palette

Edit --> Find/Change

The Find/Change palette lets you specify search parameters so you can selectively replace found material. The Find/Change palette displays in front of other windows until you close by clicking the close box.

Use the Find Next/Find First button to specify where to start the search; the Change, then Find; Change; Change All buttons control which instances of text will be replaced. Use the Document/Masters, Whole Word, Ignore Case and Ignore Attributes check boxes to specify what type of text to find; use the Find What/Change To fields to enter the text you want to find. The expanded Find What and the expanded Change To fields let you search for or replace text according to its attributes (font, color, size, style sheets, and type styles).


Find What/Change To fields
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Find What/Change To fields

Edit --> Find/Change

The text fields in the Find What and Change To areas let you enter text to search for and text to replace the found text. The text fields allow up to 80 characters, including special characters. You can search for variations of a word by entering a wild card character in the Find What text field. For example, searching for "walk\?" would find "walks," "walked," "walker," and so on.

To search for	Mac OS command	Windows command	Displays as
Wild card (find only)	Command+Shift+?	Ctrl+Shift+?	\?
Tab	\t	Ctrl+Tab	\t
New paragraph	Command+Return	Ctrl+Enter	\p
New line	Command+Shift+Return	Ctrl+Shift+Enter	\n
New column	Command+Enter	Ctrl+keypad Enter	\c
New box	Command+Shift+Enter	Ctrl+Shift+keypad Enter	\b
Previous box page number	Command+2	Ctrl+2	\2
Current page number	Command+3	Ctrl+3	\3
Next box page number	Command+4	Ctrl+4	\4
Punctuation space	Command+. (period)	Ctrl+. (period)	\.
Flex space	Command+Shift+F	Ctrl+Shift+F	\f
Backslash	Command+\	Ctrl+\	\\
TIP: Mac OS only: QuarkXPress also lets you press Command+Tab to enter "\t" in the Find What field; however, Mac OS uses the key combinations Command+Tab and Command+Shift+Tab to switch between applications. For information about how to change these key combinations for the Mac OS so that you can use Command+Tab to enter "\t" in the Find What field, see the Mac OS help files.


Document/Masters check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Document/Masters check box

Edit --> Find/Change

When Document is checked, QuarkXPress searches the entire document. When Document is unchecked, QuarkXPress searches only the current story. When choosing Find/Change with a master page displayed, the Document check box changes to Masters. When Masters is checked, all master pages will be searched; when Masters is unchecked, the selected text box is searched.


Whole Word check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Whole Word check box

Edit --> Find/Change

Checking Whole Word limits the text in the Find What field to instances bounded by spaces, omitting text buried inside longer words. For example, when Whole Word is checked, a search for "Quark" will only find "Quark." When it is unchecked, a search for "Quark" will find the word inside "QuarkXPress."


Ignore Case check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Ignore Case check box

Edit --> Find/Change

Checking Ignore Case lets you find all uppercase and lowercase variations of the text in the Find What field. For example, when Ignore Case is checked, a search for "Quark" will find "quark" or "QUARK." When finding and changing words with Ignore Case checked, QuarkXPress replaces capitalization patterns as follows:

Found text is	Changed text will be
all lowercase	all lowercase
ALL UPPERCASE	ALL UPPERCASE
Capitalized (First Character)	Capitalized (First Character)
Other capitalization pattern	Same case as text in Change To
Uncheck Ignore Case to find words with specific capitalization patterns and replace them with other capitalization patterns.


Ignore Attributes check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Ignore Attributes check box

Edit --> Find/Change

Check Ignore Attributes to let QuarkXPress find text regardless of its style sheet, font, size, or type style. If Ignore Attributes is unchecked, an expanded palette displays additional options.


Find What (expanded area)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Find What (expanded area)

Edit --> Find/Change --> (Ignore Attributes unchecked)

The following options display in the Find What area when Ignore Attributes is unchecked:

•	Check Text to find and change specific text. When checked, you must enter the text you want to find, or the search function will not operate. If you want to search for only text attributes, uncheck the Text box.

•	Check Style Sheet to limit the search to text that has a certain paragraph or character style sheet applied to it. When checked, the search ignores any text that does not have the specified style sheet applied to it. Text found by style sheet may vary in appearance if other attributes have been applied locally in the document. To find text with local formatting, the other text attribute check boxes can be used in conjunction with the Style Sheet check box, or independently of it.

•	Check Font to limit the search to text of a certain font; enter or choose a font.

•	Check Size to limit the search to text of a certain size; enter or choose a type size from the pop-up menu.

•	Check Color to limit the search to text of a particular color; choose a color from the pop-up menu.

•	Check Type Style to have QuarkXPress use type style as a Find What criterion. Specify the attributes you want to include in the search. If you do not check Type Style, the application does not consider type style in the search, and the Type Style area is unavailable.

TIP: The Type Style buttons in the Find What area have three states: omitted (white), allowed (gray), and required (black). To omit text of a particular type style from the search, make sure the appropriate type style icon remains deselected (white). To require a type style to be included in the search, click it twice to select it; the icon turns black. To allow (but not require) a type style to be included in the search, click it once; the icon turns gray. Omitted type styles must be absent to cause a match; required type styles must be present to cause a match. If a type style is allowed, it does not matter if the attribute is present.


Change To (expanded area)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Change To expanded area

Edit --> Find/Change --> (Ignore Attributes unchecked)

The following options display in the Change To area when Ignore Attributes is unchecked:

Check Text to change found text to the text entered in the Text field. When unchecked, text is left as it is. Enter the replacement text (up to 80 characters) in the Text field. If you do not check Text, the application does not replace text in the Find What area with new text, and the Text field is unavailable.

To delete all instances of the text, check Text but do not enter anything in the field.

•	Check Style Sheet to apply a paragraph or character style sheet to found text. If other options checked in the palette conflict with the attributes of the style sheet, the style sheet will still be applied, but the other checked attributes will be applied as well, resulting in local formatting.

•	Check Font and enter or choose a font from the pop-up menu to change the font in found text. When unchecked, fonts are unchanged.

•	Check Size and enter or choose a size to change the text size in found text. When unchecked, sizes are left as they are.

•	Check Color and choose a color to change the color of found text. When unchecked, colors are left as they are.

•	Check Type Style to replace the found type style with a different type style. Click the attributes you want to include as replacement type styles. If you do not check Type Style, the application does not replace the found type style with a new one, and the Type Style area is unavailable.

TIP: The Change To Type Style buttons have three states: deselected (white), allowed (gray), and required (black). Leave a button deselected if you want to strip that attribute from found text. To allow a type style to remain unchanged in found text, click once on a button to select it; the icon turns gray. To apply a style to found text, click twice on a button to select it; the icon turns black.


Find Next/Find First button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Find Next/Find First button

Edit --> Find/Change

The Find Next button lets you start and continue a search. The search starts at the text insertion point. Pressing Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) changes the Find Next button to the Find First button. The Find First button lets you start the search from the beginning of the story or document, regardless of the location of the text insertion point.


Change, then Find; Change; Change All buttons
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Change, then Find; Change; Change All buttons

Edit --> Find/Change

The Change buttons let you selectively replace each instance of found text. Clicking a Change button will replace the selected text with the text in the Change To field.

•	Click Change, then Find to replace the found instance using the Change To specifications, and then find the next instance.

•	Click Change to replace the found instance using the Change To specifications. Click Find Next to continue the search.

•	Click Change All to replace all found instances with the Change To specifications without pausing to confirm the changes.

TIP: To skip a found instance, ignore the Change buttons and click Find Next.


Preferences Commands
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Preferences

Edit --> Preferences

Preferences let you specify default settings and customize the way QuarkXPress works. You can modify application or document preferences. Application preferences apply to QuarkXPress; therefore, they affect the way all documents are handled. Document preferences affect only the active document. However, if you change document preferences with no documents open, the new preferences become default settings for all new documents.

The Preferences command displays in the Preferences submenu, which lets you choose which preferences will display. For example, the Preferences submenu command displays the Preferences dialog box for QuarkXPress. Additional commands can display in the submenu when certain XTensions software is loaded. For example, when the Quark CMS QuarkXTensions software is loaded, the Color Management command displays in the Preferences submenu; when the Index QuarkXTensions software is loaded, the Index command displays in the Preferences submenu.


Preferences dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Preferences dialog box

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences

The Preferences submenu command displays the Preferences dialog box. The Preferences dialog box contains several panes, which let you specify default settings for the various functions of QuarkXPress. The panes are divided into three groups: Application, Document, and Web Document.


Application Preferences (list)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Application Preferences list

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences

Application preferences let you customize your copy of QuarkXPress. Changes to preferences in the Application group affect all documents. The Application preferences include the Display pane, the Interactive pane, the Save pane, the XTensions Manager pane, and the Browsers pane.


Display dialog box pane
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Display dialog box pane

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences

The Display pane lets you use the Guides/Guide Colors area; the Tile to Multiple Monitors (Mac OS), Full-screen Documents (Mac OS), Off-screen Draw, and Opaque Text Box Editing check boxes; the Color TIFFS and Gray TIFFS pop-up menus; the Display DPI Value field (Windows); the Pasteboard Width field; and Show All Alerts button to specify how guides and other elements in the application will appear on-screen for all documents.


Guides Area (Mac OS), Guide Colors Area (Windows)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Guides area (Mac OS), Guide Colors area (Windows)

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Display pane

The Guides or Guide Colors area lets you specify the color of margin guides, ruler guides, and baseline grid lines displayed on color monitors. These colors are also used when you are working with runaround and clipping paths. The margin guides color indicate the items; the ruler guides color indicates runaround, and the baseline grid color indicates clipping paths. To specify a color for these elements, click the color field next to Margin, Ruler, or Grid. Use the color selection controls to select guide colors.

The margin guide color is also used for the Page Width Reference Guide in Web documents.

TIP: You can also use the Margin, Ruler, and Grid controls to specify the shade at which guides display on grayscale monitors.


Tile to Multiple Monitors check box (Mac OS only)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Tile to Multiple Monitors check box (Mac OS only)

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Display pane

Tiling resizes document windows so that equal portions of all open documents display on-screen. Checking Tile to Multiple Monitors lets you use more than one monitor when you tile documents (View --> Windows --> Tile Documents). This option is checked by default.


Full-screen Documents check box (Mac OS only)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Full-screen Documents check box (Mac OS only)

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Display pane

Checking Full-screen Documents maximizes the display of new documents on-screen. Then, when you create, tile, or stack documents, the document windows cover the entire screen except for a small strip along the right side. Full-screen Documents is effective when opening old documents only if the window position has not been saved using the Save Document Position check box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Save pane). The Full-screen Documents check box is unchecked by default.

TIP: Mac OS only: Pressing Option when you click a document’s zoom box also maximizes document display.


Off-screen Draw check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Off-screen Draw check box

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Display pane

Checking Off-screen Draw specifies that QuarkXPress redraws the entire screen at once rather than in successive stages. This option is checked by default.


Opaque Text Box Editing check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Opaque Text Box Editing check box

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Display pane

If the Opaque Text Box Editing option is checked, text boxes turn temporarily opaque while you are editing them. If Opaque Text Box Editing is unchecked, text boxes retain their background color — whether it’s a solid color, blend or None — when you are editing them. This option is unchecked by default.


Color TIFFs pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Color TIFFs pop-up menu

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Display pane

The Color TIFFs pop-up menu lets you specify the color depth of screen previews created for color TIFFs when they are imported (using the Get Picture command). The default value is 16-bit on Mac OS and 24-bit on Windows.

•	8-bit creates screen previews with 256 possible colors.

•	16-bit (Mac OS only) creates screen previews with thousands of possible colors.

•	24-bit (Windows only) creates screen previews with thousands of possible colors.

•	32-bit (Mac OS only) creates screen previews with millions of possible colors and lets you print 32-bit color TIFFs in PICT format to a QuickDraw printer.

NOTE: The Color TIFFs setting only affects the bit depth of screen previews; the bit depth of the printed picture is not affected.


Gray TIFFs pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Gray TIFFs pop-up menu

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Display pane

The Gray TIFFs pop-up menu lets you specify the resolution of screen previews created for grayscale TIFFs when they are imported (using the Get Picture command). The default is 256 levels.

•	16 levels: Creates screen previews with 16 levels of gray for faster screen redraw.

•	256 levels: Creates screen previews with 256 levels of gray from pictures scanned at this level.

NOTE: The Gray TIFFs setting only affects the bit depth of screen previews; the bit depth of the printed picture is not affected.


Display DPI Value field — Windows only
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Display DPI Value field (Windows only)

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Display pane

The Display DPI Value field lets you adjust your monitor so that it displays the best representation of your document on-screen. Enter the number of dots per inch (dpi) your monitor displays. You can check the accuracy of the display by measuring the horizontal ruler in a QuarkXPress document with a pica pole or ruler. If one inch on the horizontal ruler is larger than one inch on the pica pole or ruler, enter a smaller number in the Display DPI Value field. If one inch on the horizontal ruler is smaller than one inch on the pica pole or ruler, enter a larger number in the Display DPI Value field.

NOTE: The maximum zoom depends on the value in the Display DPI Value field. Any value greater than 85 dpi will decrease the maximum zoom. For example, at the default value of 96 dpi, the maximum zoom is only 692%.


Pasteboard Width field [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Pasteboard Width field [PRINT]

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Display pane

The Pasteboard Width field lets you specify the width of the pasteboard on either side of the page or spread in a print document. Pasteboard width is measured as a percentage of the document width. The width of the document plus the pasteboard cannot exceed 48". The default Pasteboard Width value is 100%. At least .5" of pasteboard will always surround document pages.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 100%	percent	.1


Show All Alerts button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show All Alerts button

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Display pane

If you have clicked Do not show this warning again in any alert dialog boxes, clicking Show All Alerts lets the alert dialog boxes display again.


Interactive dialog box pane
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Interactive dialog box pane

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences

The Interactive pane lets you use the Scrolling, Quotes, Delayed Item Dragging, Page Range Separators, and Control Key (Mac OS) areas; and the Drag and Drop Text and Show Tool Tips check boxes to customize how scrolling and other "on-the-fly" actions will behave.


Scrolling area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Scrolling area

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Interactive pane

The Scrolling area lets you specify how fast you can scroll through documents and how documents update on-screen.

•	Drag the slider between Slow and Fast to specify the speed at which documents scroll when you press the scroll arrows on a document window.

•	Check Speed Scroll to temporarily greek pictures and blends for faster scrolling. (Pictures that are already displayed when you start scrolling through a document will not be greeked unless you scroll them out of the document window.) This option is unchecked by default.

•	Check Live Scroll to update the document view as you drag the scroll boxes in document window scroll bars. This option is unchecked by default. To turn Live Scroll on and off while you are scrolling, press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) as you drag a scroll box.


Quotes area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Quotes area

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Interactive pane

The Quotes pop-up menu and the Smart Quotes check box let you choose a style for converting and entering quotation marks.

•	To specify the default characters to be used with the Smart Quotes feature and with the Convert Quotes option in the Get Text dialog box (File --> Get Text), choose an option from the Quotes pop-up menu. The default option is "".

•	Check Smart Quotes to force QuarkXPress to automatically replace feet and inches marks '," with the chosen quotation marks as you type. This option is checked by default.

TIP: On Mac OS, to type straight quotation marks '," (for feet and inches) when Smart Quotes is enabled, press Control while typing the quotation characters. On Windows, to type straight quotation marks '," (for feet and inches) when Smart Quotes is enabled, press Ctrl+' for feet (') or Ctrl+Alt+' for inches (").


Delayed Item Dragging area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Delayed Item Dragging area

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Interactive pane

The controls in this area let you determine how QuarkXPress will display items when you press the mouse button and pause before dragging an item.

•	When Live Refresh is enabled, pressing the mouse button until the resize handles disappear, and then dragging the item makes any runaround changes caused by repositioning the item display immediately. The dragged item and its contents will not appear semitransparent.

•	When Show Contents is enabled, pressing the mouse button until the resize handles disappear, then dragging the item causes the item and items in front of or behind it to appear semitransparent.

•	The Delay seconds field lets you specify the amount of time (in seconds) required to pause in order to enable Show Contents or Live Refresh before dragging an item. The default interval is 0.75 seconds.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0.1 to 5	seconds	0.001


Page Range Separators area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Page Range Separators area

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Interactive pane

Hyphens and commas are the default separators for indicating sequential and nonsequential ranges in the Pages field of the Print dialog box for a print document. If you specified commas or hyphens as part of page numbers in the Section dialog box (Page menu), you will need to change the default separators. For example, if your page numbers are "A-1, A-2," then you will not be able to specify ranges in the Pages field using hyphens. To edit the separators, enter new characters in the Sequential and Nonsequential fields.


Control Key area (Mac OS only)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Control Key area (Mac OS only)

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Interactive pane

The Control Key area lets you choose whether pressing Control+click activates context menus or the zoom function. The default option is Contextual Menu.

•	Clicking Zoom activates the zoom function for QuarkXPress pages when you press Control and click the mouse button. When this option is chosen, Control+Shift+click displays context menus.

•	Clicking Contextual Menu displays context menus when you press Control and click the mouse button. When this option is chosen, Control+Shift+click activates the zoom function.


Drag and Drop Text check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Drag and Drop Text check box

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Interactive pane

Checking Drag and Drop Text lets you cut, copy, and paste text in a story with the mouse rather than with menu or keyboard commands. The default is unchecked.

•	To cut and paste, select the text; then drag it to a new location.

•	To copy and paste, select the text; then press Shift while you drag it to a new location.

TIP: Mac OS only: When Drag and Drop text is unchecked, you can use keyboard commands to temporarily enable it. To cut and paste text, press Command+Control while you click and drag selected text. To copy and paste, press Command+Control+Shift while you click and drag selected text. You can’t drag text between stories or between documents.


Show Tool Tips check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show Tool Tips check box

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Interactive pane

Check Show Tool Tips to make QuarkXPress display the names of tools or palette icons when you place your pointer over them. This option is checked by default.


Save dialog box pane
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Save dialog box pane

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences

The Save pane includes the Auto Save and Auto Backup areas as well as the Auto Library Save and Save Document Position check boxes; these controls that let you customize how QuarkXPress saves and performs backups of your document.


Auto Save area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Auto Save area

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Save pane

Checking Auto Save protects your work from system or power failure. When checked, QuarkXPress will automatically record document changes to a temporary file in your document folder after a specified time interval. Enter the interval (in minutes) in the Every minutes field. When Auto Save is checked, the default setting is Every 5 minutes. QuarkXPress will not overwrite the original file until you manually save (File --> Save). When you open the document after a system interruption, QuarkXPress displays an alert indicating that the document will be restored to the last auto-saved version.

NOTE: The Revert to Saved command (File --> Revert to Saved) reverts to the last manually saved version of a document regardless of your Auto Save settings. Pressing Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) while you choose File --> Revert to Saved reverts to the last auto-saved version of a document.


Auto Backup area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Auto Backup area

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Save pane

Check Auto Backup and enter a value in the Keep revisions field to retain as many as 100 revisions of a document. Each time you manually save (File --> Save), QuarkXPress copies the previous manually-saved version to the Destination folder you specify. The default setting for Auto Backup is unchecked.

•	Click Document Folder to store revisions in the same folder with the document.

•	Click Other Folder to choose a folder other than the document folder for storing revisions. Click Select (Mac OS) or Browse (Windows) to display the Backup Folder (Mac OS) or Browse for Folder (Windows) dialog box. Then choose or create a folder and click Select (Mac OS) or OK (Windows) to close the dialog box. The name of the selected Folder displays in the Destination area.

Consecutive numbers are added to the name of the original document for each backup. When the last revision is created (for example, 5 of 5), the oldest revision in the folder is deleted. To retrieve a backup from the destination folder, open it like any other QuarkXPress document.


Auto Library Save check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Auto Library Save check box

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Save pane

Checking Auto Library Save saves changes to a QuarkXPress library file whenever you add an entry to it. This option is checked by default.


Save Document Position check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Save Document Position check box

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Save pane

Check Save Document Position if you want QuarkXPress to automatically remember the size, position, and proportions of your document window. This option is checked by default.


XTensions Manager dialog box pane
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

XTensions Manager dialog box pane

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences

The XTensions Manager pane contains the Show XTensions Manager at Startup area, which lets you customize the built-in XTensions Manager.


Show XTensions Manager at startup area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show XTensions Manager at startup area

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> XTensions pane

This area lets you specify whether the XTensions Manager dialog box displays when you launch QuarkXPress, and under what circumstances. The XTensions Manager is a utility that allows you to enable or disable individual XTensions modules or sets of XTensions software directly from QuarkXPress. (XTensions are add-on software modules that customize the feature set of QuarkXPress.)

•	Click Always if you want the XTensions Manager dialog box to display automatically every time you launch QuarkXPress.

•	Click When and check "XTension" folder changes if you want the XTensions Manager dialog box to display during launch only after you have added or removed XTensions software from your "XTension" folder.

•	Click When and check Error loading XTensions occurs if you want the XTensions Manager dialog box to display during launch only when QuarkXPress encounters a problem loading XTensions software.


Browsers dialog box pane [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Browsers dialog box pane [WEB]

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences

The Browsers pane allows to specify which Web browsers you want to use to preview your Web documents or to view HTML files as you export them. The Browsers pane includes the Default and Browsers columns and the Add and Delete buttons.


Default column [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Default column [WEB]

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Browsers pane

The Default column allows you to specify which browser to use when you do not specify a particular browser for preview. This is also the browser that will be used when Launch Browser is checked in the Export HTML dialog box (File --> Export --> HTML). Click in the Default column to put a checkmark next to the desired default browser.


Browser column [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Browser column [WEB]

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Browsers pane

The Browser column displays a list of Web browsers that you can use to preview your Web documents.


Add button [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Add button [WEB]

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Browsers pane

Clicking the Add button displays the Select Browser dialog box, which lets you add a new browser to the list.


Delete button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Delete button

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Browsers pane

Clicking the Delete button deletes the selected browser from the list.


Document preferences, Web document preferences lists
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Document Preferences, Web Document Preferences lists

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences

Document preferences include the General pane, Measurements pane, Paragraph pane, Character pane, Tools pane, Trapping pane (print documents only), and Layer pane. Changes made to document preferences only affect the active document, but if you alter settings in the document preferences dialog box with no documents open, changes apply to all new documents.

NOTE: Any changes you make in QuarkXPress when no document is open determine the default settings for every document you create from then on. This includes document preferences and changes to specifications such as colors, style sheets, and hyphenation and justification specifications.


General dialog box pane
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

General dialog box pane

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences

The General pane lets you specify various default settings for page layout, such as the snap distance for guides and the colors of hyperlinks and anchors. The General pane contains the Display, Guides, Master Page Items, Auto Picture Import, Framing, and Hyperlinks areas; the Auto Page Insertion pop-up menu; the Auto Constrain check box; and  the Image Export Directory and Site Root Directory fields.


Display area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Display area

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> General pane

The Display area lets you specify settings for greeking text and pictures, and for displaying blends.


Greek text Below field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Greek Text Below field

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> General pane

When you check Greek Text Below and enter a value in the field, QuarkXPress speeds screen redraw by "greeking" — displaying gray bars in place of text smaller than a specified size. Greeking does not affect printing.

Text greeking is affected by the viewing percentage. For example, if the Greek Text Below value is 7 points, all text below 7 points will be greeked in Actual Size view (View menu). If you choose 200% view, text below 3.5 points will be greeked, and so on. The default setting is 7 points.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
2 to 720 pt	points	.001


Greek Pictures check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Greek Pictures check box

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> General pane

If Greek Pictures is checked, QuarkXPress displays imported pictures as gray boxes. Selecting a box that contains a greeked picture displays the picture normally. This option is unchecked by default.


Accurate Blends check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Accurate Blends check box

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> General pane

The Accurate Blends check box lets you control the display of two-color blends on 8-bit (256-color) monitor setups. To display blends without banding and with more accurate colors, check Accurate Blends. For faster display of blends, uncheck Accurate Blends. On monitors driven by 16-bit or 24-bit video boards, blends always display as if Accurate Blends was checked. You create blends for box backgrounds using the Colors palette (View menu). This option is checked by default.


Guides area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Guides area

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> General pane

The buttons in the Guides area let you click In Front or Behind to specify whether ruler guides and page guides are placed in front of or behind all items on a page. The default option is Behind. The Snap Distance field lets you change the 6-pixel default distance at which objects snap to page guides when Snap to Guides is chosen (View menu).

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
1 to 216	pixels	1


Master Page Items area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Master Page Items area

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> General pane

A master item is an item that is automatically placed on the document page when you apply a master page. When you apply a new master page to a document page, unmodified master items (placed by the original master page) on the document page are deleted, but modified master items may not be deleted.

•	Click Keep Changes if you want modified master items on your document pages to remain when a new master page is applied. The items that are kept are no longer master items. Keep Changes is the default option.

•	Click Delete Changes if you want modified master items on your document pages to be deleted when a new master page is applied.

New master pages are applied to document pages whenever you (1) drag and drop a master page icon from the master page area in the Document Layout palette onto a document page icon in the Document Layout palette (View --> Show Document Layout); (2) delete a master page that is applied to document pages using the Document Layout palette; or (3) add, delete, or move an odd number of pages in a facing-page document.

NOTE: If you change the Master Page Items setting while working on a document, only subsequent applications of new master pages use the new setting.


Auto Picture Import area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Auto Picture Import area

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> General pane

The Auto Picture Import area controls whether QuarkXPress automatically updates pictures that have been modified since you last opened a document. QuarkXPress can locate pictures for which there is a path between the picture file and the QuarkXPress document. The default option is Off.

•	To enable the Auto Picture Import feature, click On. When you open a document, QuarkXPress automatically reimports modified pictures into the document using the modified files. All your content specifications (scaling, positioning, and so on) are retained. To disable the Auto Picture Import feature, click Off.

•	To receive an alert before QuarkXPress imports modified pictures, click Verify. The alert gives you the option of opening the document with or without updating the pictures. If you choose to update the pictures, QuarkXPress displays the Missing/Modified Pictures dialog box. You can use this dialog box to view these pictures in the document and to update the pictures selectively.


Framing area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Framing area

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> General pane

The Framing area lets you specify whether frames are placed inside or outside text and picture boxes.

•	When you click Inside, the distance between the text and the frame is determined by the box’s Text Inset values (Item --> Modify). When you place a frame inside a picture box, the frame overlaps the picture. Inside is the default option.

•	When you click Outside, the frame is placed outside the box, increasing its width and height. The frame cannot extend beyond a constraining box or the pasteboard.

NOTE: If you change the Framing setting while working in a document, only subsequently created boxes use the new setting.


Hyperlinks area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Hyperlinks area

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> General pane

The Hyperlinks area lets you choose the color for anchor icons and hyperlinks. Anchor icon colors are available for print and Web documents, while hyperlink colors are available for print documents only.


Anchor Color, Hyperlink Color buttons
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Anchor Color, Hyperlink Color buttons

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> General pane

The Anchor Color button lets you choose the color for the anchored hyperlink icon. When you click the Anchor Color button, a color selector displays. Choose a color and then click OK to return to the Preferences dialog box.

The Hyperlink Color button lets you choose the color for hyperlinks in a print document that will be exported in Portable Document Format (PDF). The colors you choose in the Hyperlinks area display only in QuarkXPress; they have no effect on how hyperlinks will display in a PDF document that is exported from QuarkXPress. When you click the Hyperlink Color button, a color selector displays. Choose a color and then click OK to return to the Preferences dialog box. The Hyperlink Color selector is only available in print documents. [PRINT]

NOTE: To export a document as a PDF file, the PDF Filter QuarkXTensions software must be loaded.


Auto Page Insertion pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Auto Page Insertion pop-up menu

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> General pane

Auto Page Insertion options let you determine whether pages are inserted automatically to contain text overflow from an automatic text box or a chain of text boxes (on a page associated with a master page that contains an automatic text box). The pop-up menu also lets you determine where any pages will be inserted.

•	Choose Off to disable Auto Page Insertion.

•	The End of Story option is the default setting. It places new pages immediately after the page containing the last overflowing text box in the chain. Inserted pages use the master page of the page containing the overflow.

•	The End of Section option places new pages at the end of the section in which the overflow occurs. Inserted pages use the master page of the last page in the section.

•	The End of Document option places new pages at the end of the document. Inserted pages use the master page of the document’s last page.

NOTE: Text overflow causes pages to be automatically inserted only if (1) Auto Page Insertion is enabled; (2) the master page that will be used has an automatic text chain (as indicated by the intact chain icon in the upper left corner of the master page); or (3) the overflow is either from the text box defined on the master page as the automatic text box, or from a chain of at least two text boxes. If there is no automatic text chain on the applied master page (as indicated by the broken chain icon), QuarkXPress will not add pages during overflow, regardless of the Auto Page Insertion setting.


 Intact Chain icon


 Broken Chain icon


Auto Constrain check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Auto Constrain check box

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> General pane

The Auto Constrain check box lets you automatically create hierarchical relationships among newly created items. When you check Auto Constrain, every item you create or paste in the document is constrained by the borders of a box stacked behind it, if those borders surround the borders of the new box. Every box you create automatically becomes capable of constraining another item. This option is unchecked by default.

•	Constraining is a group attribute; checking Auto Constrain means that when you create new items, you are creating constrained groups.

•	Use the Unconstrain and the Ungroup commands in the Item menu to unconstrain and ungroup items that have been automatically constrained and grouped.

NOTE: You cannot resize or move constrained items beyond their constraining boxes, and most actions (such as moving or deleting) that you apply to constraining boxes affect their constrained items as well.


Image Export Directory field [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Image Export Directory field [WEB]

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> General pane

The Image Export Directory field lets you specify the name of the folder in which all image files will be placed when a Web document is exported. The folder will be created at the same level as the exported document (or in the site root folder, if one is specified). If you leave this field blank, the image files are placed in the same folder as the exported document (or in the site root folder, if one is specified). By default, a folder named "image" will be created at the same level as the exported document. Exported images will be placed in the "image" folder. The Image Export Directory field is only available for Web documents.


Site Root Directory field [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Site Root Directory field [WEB]

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> General pane

The Site Root Directory field lets you specify the name and location of the folder to be used as the root folder for the exported version of the active Web document. Click the Select (Mac OS) or Browse (Windows) button to the right of the field to locate the site root folder with a dialog box. The Site Root Directory field is only available in Web documents.


Measurements dialog box pane
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Measurements dialog box pane

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences

The Measurements pane lets you specify default measuring units for document rulers and the Measurements palette. The Measurements pane contains the Horizontal and Vertical pop-up menus; the Points/Inch and Ciceros/cm fields; and the Item Coordinates button.


Horizontal, Vertical (pop-up menus)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Horizontal, Vertical pop-up menus

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Measurements pane

The Horizontal and Vertical pop-up menus let you specify the measurement system for the rulers displayed along the top and left of the document window. Horizontal corresponds to the top ruler; Vertical corresponds to the left ruler.

System	Abbreviation	Measurement
Inches	in or "	inches in eighths
Inches decimal	in or " with a decimal	inches in tenths
Picas	p	1/6" or 12 points
Points	pt	1/72"
Millimeters	mm	0.04"
Centimeters	cm	0.39"
Ciceros	c	0.179"
Agates	ag	0.071"
Pixels [WEB]	px	0.014"
•	Several other aspects of the user interface are affected by these two pop-up menus, including the default X and Y coordinates in the Measurements palette. However, no matter what you choose as the default setting, you can usually specify any measurement system in a field by following the numeric value with one of the abbreviations shown above.

•	QuarkXPress automatically converts font size, frame width, and line width to points, regardless of the measurement system you choose.

NOTE: The Pixels measurement option is only available in Web documents.


Points/Inch field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Points/Inch field

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Measurements pane

The Points/Inch field lets you override the default value of 72 points per inch. QuarkXPress uses the value here as the basis for all point and pica measurements, as well as all point- and pica-to-inch conversions. The desktop publishing standard for points per inch is 72. However, the traditional  typographic standard used on most metal typographic rulers is usually approximately 72.27 or 72.307 points per inch.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
60 to 80 pt	points	.001
TIP: If you change the number in the Points/Inch field, the physical size of your text and other QuarkXPress elements is not altered. However, to be consistent with the changed Points/Inch value without altering or reflowing your document, the Measurements palette displays a new numerical value for text size or other values.


Ciceros/cm field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Ciceros/cm field

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Measurements pane

The Ciceros/cm field lets you specify a ciceros-to-centimeter conversion value different from the standard 2.1967.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
2 to 3 c	ciceros	.0001


Item Coordinates buttons [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Item Coordinates buttons [PRINT]

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Measurements pane

The Item Coordinates buttons let you specify whether the increments of the horizontal ruler repeat from zero for each Page or are continuous across a Spread. This setting determines the coordinates of items displayed in fields. The default option is Page. The Item Coordinates buttons are only applicable to print documents.


Paragraph dialog box pane
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Paragraph dialog box pane

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences

The Paragraph pane lets you specify how paragraph formats such as auto leading are calculated in QuarkXPress. The Paragraph pane contains the Auto Leading field, the Maintain Leading check box, the Mode buttons, the Baseline Grid area, and the Method pop-up menu.


Auto Leading field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Auto Leading field

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Paragraph pane

QuarkXPress uses the Auto Leading feature to automatically set line spacing. It can be applied to a paragraph by entering "auto" or "0" in the Leading field of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box (Style --> Leading). Unlike paragraphs with absolute leading (which apply identical line spacing above every line), paragraphs with auto leading may include lines with different leading when fonts and font sizes are mixed in the same paragraph.

Auto leading starts with a base amount of leading, which QuarkXPress calculates by examining the ascent and descent values built into the fonts used in an auto-leaded line and the line above it; however, the user-specified text size (Style --> Size) plays the largest part in determining this base amount. Finally, a value specified by the user in the Auto Leading field is added to the base amount to arrive at the total amount of leading.

•	To specify percentage-based auto leading, enter a value from 0 to 100% in 1% increments. The default value is 20%. This value determines the amount of leading between two lines of text as follows: the largest font size in the line above is multiplied by the percentage value. This outcome is added to the base amount of auto leading between the two lines. Although the design of certain fonts complicates the process, here is a simplified example: 10-point text styled consistently in a "standard" font with Auto Leading set to 20% has 12 points of leading (10 pts + [20% of 10] = 12 pts).

•	To specify incremental auto leading, enter a value preceded by a plus sign (+) or a minus sign (–) from –63 points to +63 points using any measurement system. Entering "+5" will add 5 points of leading to the base amount of auto leading; entering "+5 mm" will add 5 millimeters.

TIP: When you change the value in the Auto Leading field, text baselines in paragraphs with auto leading are automatically re-spaced.


Maintain Leading check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Maintain Leading check box

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Paragraph pane

The Maintain Leading check box lets you control the placement of a line of text that falls immediately below an obstruction in a column or box. If Maintain Leading is checked, the line’s baseline is placed according to its applied leading value. If Maintain Leading is unchecked, the ascent of the line will abut the bottom of the obstruction or any applied runaround value (Item --> Runaround). This option is checked by default.


Mode buttons
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Mode buttons

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Paragraph pane

The Mode buttons let you specify the leading method used to space lines of text.

•	Click Typesetting if you want leading to be measured upward from the baseline on one line of text to the baseline of the line above. This is the method preferred by most typesetters and selected by default.

•	Click Word Processing if you want leading to be measured downward from the top of the ascent on one line of text to the top of the ascent on the line below it.


Baseline Grid area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Baseline Grid area

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Paragraph pane

A baseline grid is a document-wide grid; you can lock the baselines of text in paragraphs to this grid. When you lock text baselines in adjacent columns to the grid, the baselines align across columns. You can display the baseline grid using the Show Baseline Grid command (View menu).

•	Enter a value in the Start field to determine how far from the top of the page the first line of the grid is placed. The default value is 0.5".

•	Enter a value in the Increment field to determine the amount of space between the grid’s baselines. The default value is 12 points.

Increment range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
5 to 144 pt	points	001
TIP: To lock selected paragraphs to the grid, check Lock to Baseline Grid in the Formats tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box (Style --> Formats).


Method pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Method pop-up menu

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Paragraph pane --> Hyphenation area

The Method pop-up menu in the Hyphenation area lets you specify the method QuarkXPress uses to automatically hyphenate paragraphs when there is no corresponding entry found in your Hyphenation Exceptions dictionary. The setting you choose affects only paragraphs for which Auto Hyphenation (Edit --> H&Js) is enabled.

•	Choose Standard to hyphenate using the algorithm built into versions of QuarkXPress prior to 3.1. Documents created in versions of QuarkXPress prior to 3.1 default to Standard when they are opened in version 3.1 or later.

•	Enhanced lets you hyphenate using the algorithm built into QuarkXPress in version 3.1 and later.

•	Expanded, which was added to QuarkXPress in version 4.0, uses the same algorithm as Enhanced but checks any built-in hyphenation dictionaries before resorting to the algorithm. This is the default method for documents created in this version of QuarkXPress.

NOTE: Documents created in previous versions of QuarkXPress maintain their hyphenation method (Standard or Enhanced) when opened in a newer version. If you choose Expanded for these documents, text reflow may occur.


Character dialog box pane
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Character dialog box pane

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences

The Character pane lets you specify how mathematically calculated typographical styles such as Superscript and Subscript are calculated in QuarkXPress. The Character pane contains the Superscript, Subscript, Small Caps, Superior, and Ligatures (Mac OS) areas; the Auto Kern Above and Standard Em Space, and Accents for All Caps check boxes, and the Flex Space Width field.


Superscript area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Superscript area

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Character pane

The Superscript area lets you control the placement and scale (size) of superscript characters.

•	The Offset value determines how far below the baseline QuarkXPress places a superscript character. The Offset value is measured as a percentage of font size. The default value is 33%.

•	The VScale value determines the vertical size of the character and is a percentage of font size. The HScale value determines width and is a percentage of the normal character width (as specified by the font designer). The default value for both scales is 100%.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 100%	percent	.1


Subscript area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Subscript area

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Character pane

The Subscript area lets you control the placement and scale (size) of subscript characters.

•	The Offset value determines how far above the baseline QuarkXPress places a subscript character. The Offset value is measured as a percentage of font size. The default value is 33%.

•	The VScale value determines the vertical size of the character and is a percentage of font size. The HScale value determines width and is a percentage of the normal character width (as specified by the font designer). The default value for both scales is 100%.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 100%	percent	.1


Small Caps area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Small Caps area

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Character pane

The Small Caps area lets you control the scale of characters with the Small Caps type style applied to them. The VScale value determines the vertical size of the character and is measured as a percentage of font size. The HScale value determines width and is measured as a percentage of the normal character width (as specified by the font designer). The default value for both scales is 75%.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 100%	percent	.1


Superior area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Superior area

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Character pane

The Superior area lets you control the scale of superior characters. The VScale value determines the vertical size of the character and is measured as a percentage of font size. The HScale value determines width and is measured as a percentage of the normal character width (as specified by the font designer). The default value for both scales is 50%.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 100%	percent	.1


Ligatures area (Mac OS only)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Ligatures area (Mac OS only)

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Character pane

The Ligatures controls let you use ligatures built into a font. A ligature is a typographic convention in which certain characters are combined into a single character. Most fonts designed for the Mac OS contain ligatures for the characters "f" followed by "i," and "f" followed by "l".

•	Check Ligatures to combine all instances of "f" followed by "i" and "f" followed by "l" into ligatures. You can edit and check the spelling of words containing ligatures as if the ligatures were separate characters. This option is unchecked by default.

•	When you check Ligatures, the Break Above field lets you specify the kerning or tracking value (measured in 1/200 em space increments) above which characters will not be combined into ligatures. For example, a headline with a large tracking value would probably not contain ligatures. The default value is 1.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 10	.005 (1/200) em space	.001
•	To prevent the second two letters in "ffi" and "ffl" (as in office and waffle) from being combined into ligatures, check Not "ffi" or "ffl." Three-character ligatures for these combinations, common in traditional typesetting systems, are not standardized in fonts designed for Mac OS, so some typographers prefer to keep all three letters separate rather than combine only two of them. This option is unchecked by default.


Auto Kern Above (check box and field)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Auto Kern Above check box and field

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Character pane

Checking Auto Kern Above lets QuarkXPress use kerning tables, which are built into most fonts, to control intercharacter spacing. The Auto Kern Above field lets you specify the point size above which automatic kerning should be used. The Auto Kern Above feature also implements custom tracking information specified in the Tracking Values dialog box for a selected font (Utilities --> Edit Tracking). This option is checked by default, with a 4-point threshold.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
2 to 720 pt	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001


Standard em space check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Standard em space check box

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Character pane

An em space is made of two en spaces. You insert an en space in text by pressing Option+space (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Shift+6 (Windows). Checking Standard Em Space specifies an em space equivalent to the point size of the text (for example, 24-point text has a 24-point em space). If Standard Em Space is unchecked, QuarkXPress uses the width of the two zeros in the current font as the em space width. This option is unchecked by default.


Flex Space Width field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Flex Space Width field

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Character pane

A flexible space is a user-modifiable variation of a standard en space, used when a standard space is not aesthetically pleasing. The Flex Space Width field lets you change the 50% default width of a flexible space. To create a breaking flexible space, press Option+Shift+space (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Shift+5 (Windows); to create a nonbreaking flexible space, press Command+Option+Shift+space (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Alt+Shift+5 (Windows).

The Flex Space Width value is expressed as a percentage of the normal en space for a given font and font size.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 400%	percent	.1


Accents for All Caps check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Accents for All Caps check box

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Character pane

The Accents for All Caps check box lets you specify whether to include accent marks on accented characters with the All Caps type style applied. This option is checked by default.

NOTE: The Accents for All Caps feature applies to documents created in QuarkXPress 3.2 or later. To take advantage of improvements such as Accents for All Caps, you can update an earlier document’s text flow by pressing Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) while you click Open in the Open dialog box.


Tools dialog box pane
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Tools dialog box pane

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences

The Tools pane lets you specify default characteristics for the Zoom tool and for the items created by the various item creation tools. You can also access the Tools pane by double-clicking an item creation tool or the Zoom tool in the Tools palette.

The Tools pane includes the Tools list; the Modify, Similar Shapes, Similar Types, Use Default Prefs, and the Default Tools Palette buttons. The Tools pane also lets you change settings for image map tools.


Tools (list)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Tools list

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Tools pane

Choose the tool or tools whose default settings you want to change by clicking their icons in the Tool Defaults list. To choose more than one tool to modify at a time, press Command+click (Mac OS) or Ctrl+click (Windows). You can also Shift+click to select a range of tools. Click Modify to change the default attributes of the selected tools. If you select the Zoom tool and click Modify, the View dialog box displays.


Modify button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Modify button

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Tools pane

Click Modify to change the default attributes for items created by the selected item creation tool(s). For example, if you wanted all future text boxes to have a 3-point border width, you could specify that by selecting the text box creation tool and clicking Modify.

•	All the tools in the Tools list are item creation tools, with the exception of the Zoom tool.

•	Clicking Modify displays the Modify dialog box. This Modify dialog box is the same one that displays for selected items through the Item menu (Item --> Modify); however, some controls (such as those that determine position and size) are omitted. When you click Modify with more than one tool selected, the Modify dialog box may provide a more limited set of options that are common to all selected tools.

NOTE: The Form Box tool has significantly different controls than the Modify dialog box for a form box. Using the Tools pane to modify the default settings for a form box will display the Form Tool Preferences dialog box; enter a value in the Width and Height fields to set the default size of a form box.


View dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

View dialog box

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Tools pane --> Zoom tool --> Modify

The View dialog box is available when you click Modify while the Zoom tool is selected in the Tools list. The View Scale area lets you control the range and the increment of the view change when you click on a document with the Zoom tool.

•	The Minimum field determines the smallest document view the Zoom tool can display.

•	The Maximum field determines the largest document view the Zoom tool can display.

•	The Increment field determines the percent of change in view for each time you click the Zoom tool. The default value is 25%.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
10 to 800%	percent	.1


Image Map tools
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Image Map tools

Using the Tools pane to modify the image map default settings displays the Image Map Properties dialog box. Use the Flatten Shape area to reduce the number of Bézier points your circular or Bézier image map has; click Maximum Points and use the field to enter the maximum number of points you want your image map to contain. Your circular or Bézier image map can contain 3 to 1000 Bézier points. Click Granularity and use the slider to specify how closely the points in your image map should match the curve you drew. Setting the slider to Coarse means that the points in your image map will not be very close to the curve you drew; your image map will have fewer points. Setting the slider to Fine means that the points in the image map will be very close or identical to the curve you drew; your image map will have more points.


Similar Types button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Similar Types button

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Tools pane

To quickly select multiple tools of similar type in the list (for example, all picture box tools when you have a picture box tool selected, or all line tools when you have a line tool selected), select a tool from the list, then click Similar Types. Click Modify to edit preferences common to all the selected tools.


Similar Shapes button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Similar Shapes button

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Tools pane

To quickly select two tools of similar shape in the list (for example, both rectangular box tools), select a tool from the list, then click Similar Shapes. Click Modify to edit preferences common to both tools.


Use Default Prefs button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Use Default Prefs button

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Tools pane

If you have modified the preferences for a tool and want to change them back, select the tool(s) from the list and click Use Default Prefs.


Default Tool palette button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Default Tools palette button

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Tools pane

You can modify the Tools palette by showing and hiding tools. If you have made modifications to the QuarkXPress Tools palette and you want to restore the original palette, click Default Tools Palette. This button affects the palette itself, not the preferences set using the Modify button.


Trapping dialog box pane [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Trapping dialog box pane [PRINT]

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences

The Trapping pane lets you specify default settings for the way QuarkXPress traps colors and objects when you color separate a print document. The Trapping pane includes the Trapping Method area; the Process Trapping and Ignore White check boxes, the Auto Amount and Indeterminate fields; and the Knockout Limit and Overprint Limit fields.


Trapping Method area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Trapping Method area

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Trapping pane

The Trapping Method area lets you specify the method QuarkXPress uses to determine the trapping relationship between object colors and background colors.

•	Click Absolute to trap using the values in the Auto Amount and Indeterminate fields according to the object and background colors involved. If the object color is darker, the background chokes the object color by the Auto Amount value. If the object color is lighter, the object is spread into the background by the Auto Amount value. Absolute is the default option.

•	Click Proportional to trap using the value in the Auto Amount field multiplied by the difference between the luminosity (lightness or brightness) of the object color and background color. Proportional trapping compares the luminosity of the object color and background color to determine how different they are, and applies trapping accordingly.

•	Click Knockout All to turn trapping off.


Process Trapping check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Process Trapping check box

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Trapping pane

When Process Trapping is checked, QuarkXPress traps each process separation plate individually when a page contains overlapping process colors. When you print color separations, QuarkXPress compares the darkness of each process component of an object color to the darkness of the corresponding process component of the background color, then traps accordingly. For example, the shade of cyan in an object color is compared to the shade of cyan in the background color; similar comparisons are made for the other plates that will be output. This option is checked by default.

•	When adjoining process colors have an absolute trapping relationship, and Process Trapping is checked, QuarkXPress divides the Auto Amount trapping value in half, and applies the resulting value to the darker component of the color on each plate (as shown in the table). Dividing the value among plates creates a smoother trap while providing the same area of overlap.

Color	Object	Background	Absolute Trap	Proportional Trap
C	70%	30%	+1/2 trap amount	Auto Amount (70%–30%)÷2
M	30%	50%	–1/2 trap amount	Auto Amount (30%–50%)÷2
Y	70%	80%	–1/2 trap amount	Auto Amount (70%-80%)÷2
K	20%	15%	–1/2 trap amount	Auto Amount(20%–15%)÷2
•	When abutting process colors have a proportional trapping relationship, QuarkXPress multiplies the Auto Amount value specified in the Trapping pane by the difference in darkness between the object color and the background color. The resulting trapping value is then applied as explained above for colors with absolute trapping relationships.

•	When Process Trapping is unchecked, QuarkXPress traps all process components equally using the trapping value associated with the object color relative to the background color.

NOTE: For text up to 24 points and small items (dimensions up to 10 points), QuarkXPress attempts to preserve the item’s shape during process trapping by not allowing automatic spreads or chokes when the item’s shape would be compromised. QuarkXPress does this by comparing the darkness of each process component of an item to the darkness of its entire background. A spread is applied only when the process components of an item are less than or equal to half the darkness of its background. A choke is applied only when the process components of a background are less than or equal to half the darkness of the item in front of it. (Text cannot be choked.)


Ignore White check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Ignore White check box

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Trapping pane

The Ignore White check box lets you specify that an object color in front of multiple background colors — including white — will not take white into account when trapping. This option is checked by default.

•	When Ignore White is unchecked, all items overprint a white background (overprint is treated as an infinite choke). If an object color is in front of both a white background and a background color against which the object color is specified to spread, the object color will trap to the indeterminate color.

•	If an object color is in front of both a white background and two or more background colors to which the object color is specified to choke, the object color will choke (trap) using the smallest choke value.


Auto Amount field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Auto Amount field

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Trapping pane

The Auto Amount field lets you control the amount of trapping that QuarkXPress applies to object and background colors that have an Auto Amount (+/–) relationship specified in the Trap Specifications dialog box (Edit --> Colors --> Edit Trap) or Trap Information palette (View --> Show Trap Information). The default amount is .144 point.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 36 pt	points	.001
You can also choose Overprint from the field’s pop-up menu. This causes object and background colors with Auto Amount (+/–) specified in the Trap Specifications dialog box or Trap Information palette to overprint.


Indeterminate field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Indeterminate field

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Trapping pane

The Indeterminate field lets you specify the amount of trapping QuarkXPress applies to object colors that are in front of indeterminate backgrounds (multiple colors with conflicting trapping relationships or imported pictures). The default amount is .144 point.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
±36 pt	points	.001
You can also choose Overprint from the field’s pop-up menu. This causes object colors to overprint indeterminate backgrounds.


Knockout Limit field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Knockout Limit field

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Trapping pane

The Knockout Limit value (expressed as a percentage of luminosity of the object color compared to the background color) lets you control the point at which an object color knocks out a background color. The default value is 0%.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 100%	percent	.1


Overprint Limit field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Overprint Limit field

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Trapping pane

The Overprint Limit value controls the following:

•	Although the default color Black overprints by default, objects colored black with shade values below the Overprint Limit will not overprint.

•	Any object that has a color that is set to Overprint (in the Trap Specifications dialog box) and that has a shade value below the Overprint Limit will not overprint.

•	If the value of the black component of a rich black is below the overprint limit, rich black trapping will not occur.

For example, if you enter 95% in this field, a 90% shaded object that has a color set to Overprint a background color (in the Trap Specifications dialog box) will not overprint, but will instead trap according to the Auto Amount value specified. The default Overprint Limit is 95%.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 100%	percent	.1


Layer dialog box pane
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Layer dialog box pane

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences

The Layer pane lets you specify the settings used when a new layer is created.


New Layer Settings area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

New Layer Settings area

Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Layer pane

The New Layer Settings area lets you modify default layer preferences.

•	The Visible check box displays and prints items on new layers. Layers that are not visible do not print.

•	The Suppress Printout check box prevents the printing of items on layers. However, you can use the Suppress Printout and Suppress Picture Printout controls in the Modify dialog box (Item menu) to override this setting and print individual items on a layer. Suppress Printout is available only for print documents. [PRINT]

•	The Locked check box locks items on new layers. Items are locked into position on their layers and cannot be moved. However, by changing an item’s Origin Across and Origin Down values (Item --> Modify --> Box tab), a locked item can be moved upon its layer.

•	The Keep Runaround check box maintains runaround so that text on visible layers flows around items on hidden layers.


Color Management command [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Color Management command [PRINT]

Edit --> Preferences

The Color Management command displays the Color Management Preferences dialog box, which lets you customize settings for Quark CMS QuarkXTensions software. The Color Management command is available when the Quark CMS QuarkXTensions software is loaded.

Changes made to Color Management Preferences affect only the open document, but all new documents will inherit the preferences specified while no document is open.


Color Management Preferences dialog box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Color Management Preferences dialog box [PRINT]

Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management

The Color Management Preferences dialog box lets you specify color management preferences for your monitor and output devices, imported pictures, and any colors you use in QuarkXPress. The Color Management Active check box (Mac OS) or Color Management pop-up menu (Windows) let you enable color management. The Color Management Preferences dialog box also contains the Destination Profiles area, the Default Source Profiles area, and the Display Simulation pop-up menu.


Color Management Active check box (Mac OS only) [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Color Management Active check box (Mac OS only) [PRINT]

Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management

The Color Management Active check box lets you enable color management for QuarkXPress. When Color Management Active is checked, the Quark CMS QuarkXTensions software is enabled and the other options in the Color Management Preferences dialog box are available. This option is unchecked by default.


Color Management pop-up menu — Windows only [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Color Management pop-up menu (Windows only) [PRINT]

Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management

The Color Management pop-up menu lets you enable color management for QuarkXPress. When you choose a Color Management Module (CMM) from the Color Management pop-up menu, the Quark CMS QuarkXTensions software is enabled and the other options in the Color Management Preferences dialog box are available. The default option is Disabled.


Destination Profiles area [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Destination Profiles area [PRINT]

Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management

The Destination Profiles area lets you choose International Color Consortium (ICC) profiles that correspond to your devices.

•	The Monitor pop-up menu lets you choose a profile that corresponds to your monitor.

•	The Composite Output pop-up menu lets you choose a profile that corresponds to the output device you will use to print color composite proofs.

•	The Separation Output pop-up menu lets you choose a profile that corresponds to the output device you will use for final separations.


Default Source Profiles area [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Default Source Profiles area [PRINT]

Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management

The Default Source Profiles area lets you define default profiles for the solid color and image source for the RGB, CMYK, and Hexachrome color models. The RGB, CMYK, and Hexachrome tabs are similar, but their pop-up menus contain different options.


RGB dialog box tab [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

RGB dialog box tab [PRINT]

Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management

The pop-up menus in the RGB tab let you define default profiles for solid color and image sources for the RGB color model. The RGB tab is divided into two areas, Solid Colors and Images, and also contains the Color Manage RGB Sources to RGB Destinations check box.


Solid Colors area [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Solid Colors area [PRINT]

Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management --> RGB tab

The Solid Colors area lets you specify RGB color sources for RGB colors created in QuarkXPress. Use the Profile pop-up menu to choose a profile that corresponds to the appropriate RGB color source for RGB colors created in QuarkXPress. Use the Rendering Intent pop-up menu to choose a rendering intent for RGB colors. A rendering intent tells the Color Management Module (CMM) what color properties it should preserve when it translates a color from the source device gamut to the destination device gamut:

•	The Perceptual option scales all the colors in the source gamut so that they all fit within the destination gamut.

•	The Relative Colorimetric option retains colors that are in both the source gamut and the destination gamut. The only source colors that are changed are those that are not within the destination gamut.

•	The Saturation option considers the saturation of source colors, and changes them to colors with the same relative saturation in the destination gamut.

•	The Absolute Colorimetric option retains colors that are in both the source gamut and the destination gamut. Colors that are outside the destination gamut are adjusted in relation to how they would look when printed on white paper.


Images area [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Images area [PRINT]

Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management --> RGB tab

If you routinely scan images with a particular RGB scanner, the Images area lets you choose a color source that corresponds to that scanner. Use the Profile pop-up menu to choose a profile that corresponds to the scanner. Use the Rendering Intent pop-up menu to choose a rendering intent for RGB images. A rendering intent tells the Color Management Module (CMM) what color properties it should preserve when it translates a color from the source device gamut to the destination device gamut:

•	The Perceptual option scales all the colors in the source gamut so that they all fit within the destination gamut.

•	The Relative Colorimetric option retains colors that are in both the source gamut and the destination gamut. The only source colors that are changed are those that are not within the destination gamut.

•	The Saturation option considers the saturation of source colors, and changes them to colors with the same relative saturation in the destination gamut.

•	The Absolute Colorimetric option retains colors that are in both the source gamut and the destination gamut. Colors that are outside the destination gamut are adjusted in relation to how they would look when printed on white paper.


Color Manage RGB Sources to RGB Destinations check box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Color Manage RGB Sources to RGB Destinations check box [PRINT]

Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management --> RGB tab

The Color Manage RGB Sources to RGB Destinations check box lets you specify whether Quark CMS will apply color management when the color space of the color or image is the same as the Monitor or Composite Output profile color space.


CMYK dialog box tab [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

CMYK dialog box tab [PRINT]

Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management

The pop-up menus in the CMYK tab let you choose profiles that correspond to the appropriate process CMYK color sources. The CMYK tab is divided into two areas, Solid Colors and Images, and also contains the Color Manage CMYK Sources to CMYK Destinations check box.


Solid Colors area [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Solid Colors area [PRINT]

Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management --> CMYK tab

The Solid Colors area lets you define default profiles for color and image sources for the CMYK color model. Use the Profile pop-up menu to choose a profile that corresponds to the appropriate CMYK color source for CMYK colors created in QuarkXPress. Use the Rendering Intent pop-up menu to choose a rendering intent for CMYK colors. A rendering intent tells the Color Management Module (CMM) what color properties it should preserve when it translates a color from the source device gamut to the destination device gamut:

•	The Perceptual option scales all the colors in the source gamut so that they all fit within the destination gamut.

•	The Relative Colorimetric option retains colors that are in both the source gamut and the destination gamut. The only source colors that are changed are those that are not within the destination gamut.

•	The Saturation option considers the saturation of source colors, and changes them to colors with the same relative saturation in the destination gamut.

•	The Absolute Colorimetric option retains colors that are in both the source gamut and the destination gamut. Colors that are outside the destination gamut are adjusted in relation to how they would look when printed on white paper.


Images area [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Images area [PRINT]

Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management --> CMYK tab

If you routinely scan images with a particular CMYK scanner, the Images area lets you choose a color source that corresponds to that scanner. Use the Profile pop-up menu to choose a profile that corresponds to the scanner. Use the Rendering Intent pop-up menu to choose a rendering intent for CMYK images. A rendering intent tells the Color Management Module (CMM) what color properties it should preserve when it translates a color from the source device gamut to the destination device gamut:

•	The Perceptual option scales all the colors in the source gamut so that they all fit within the destination gamut.

•	The Relative Colorimetric option retains colors that are in both the source gamut and the destination gamut. The only source colors that are changed are those that are not within the destination gamut.

•	The Saturation option considers the saturation of source colors, and changes them to colors with the same relative saturation in the destination gamut.

•	The Absolute Colorimetric option retains colors that are in both the source gamut and the destination gamut. Colors that are outside the destination gamut are adjusted in relation to how they would look when printed on white paper.


Color Manage CMYK Sources to CMYK Destinationscheck box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Color Manage CMYK Sources to CMYK Destinations check box [PRINT]

Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management --> CMYK tab

The Color Manage CMYK Sources to CMYK Destinations check box lets you specify whether Quark CMS will apply color management when the color space of the color or image is the same as the Separation Output profile color space.


Hexachrome dialog box tab [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Hexachrome dialog box tab [PRINT]

Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management

The pop-up menus in the Hexachrome tab let you choose profiles that correspond to the appropriate Hexachrome color sources. The Hexachrome tab is divided into two areas, Solid Colors and Images.


Solid Colors area [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Solid Colors area [PRINT]

Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management --> Hexachrome tab

The Solid Colors area lets you define default profiles for color and image sources for the Hexachrome color model. Use the Profile pop-up menu to choose a profile that corresponds to the appropriate Hexachrome color source for Hexachrome colors created in QuarkXPress. Use the Rendering Intent pop-up menu to choose a rendering intent for Hexachrome colors. A rendering intent tells the Color Management Module (CMM) what color properties it should preserve when it translates a color from the source device gamut to the destination device gamut:

•	The Perceptual option scales all the colors in the source gamut so that they all fit within the destination gamut.

•	The Relative Colorimetric option retains colors that are in both the source gamut and the destination gamut. The only source colors that are changed are those that are not within the destination gamut.

•	The Saturation option considers the saturation of source colors, and changes them to colors with the same relative saturation in the destination gamut.

•	The Absolute Colorimetric option retains colors that are in both the source gamut and the destination gamut. Colors that are outside the destination gamut are adjusted in relation to how they would look when printed on white paper.


Images area [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Images area [PRINT]

Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management --> Hexachrome tab

The Images area lets you choose a color source that corresponds to a Hexachrome scanner. Use the Profile pop-up menu to choose a profile that corresponds to the scanner. Use the Rendering Intent pop-up menu to choose a rendering intent for Hexachrome colors. A rendering intent tells the Color Management Module (CMM) what color properties it should preserve when it translates a color from the source device gamut to the destination device gamut:

•	The Perceptual option scales all the colors in the source gamut so that they all fit within the destination gamut.

•	The Relative Colorimetric option retains colors that are in both the source gamut and the destination gamut. The only source colors that are changed are those that are not within the destination gamut.

•	The Saturation option considers the saturation of source colors, and changes them to colors with the same relative saturation in the destination gamut.

•	The Absolute Colorimetric option retains colors that are in both the source gamut and the destination gamut. Colors that are outside the destination gamut are adjusted in relation to how they would look when printed on white paper.


Display Simulationpop-up menu [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Display Simulation pop-up menu [PRINT]

Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management

The Display Simulation pop-up menu lets you define the color space you want to simulate on your monitor.

•	The Off (Mac OS) or None (Windows) option deactivates the display simulation feature.

•	The Monitor Color Space option automatically simulates an optimum display based upon the ICC profile selected for your monitor in the Destination Profiles area (and your monitor’s ability to display color).

•	The Composite Output Color Space option automatically simulates an optimum display based on the ICC profiles selected for your composite output and your monitor (Destination Profiles area). The result you see on your monitor is based on its ability to display color.

•	The Separation Output Color Space option automatically simulates an optimum display based upon the ICC profiles selected for your separation output and your monitor (Destination Profiles area). The result you see on your monitor is based on its ability to display color.

NOTE: The Display Simulation option is available only when the monitor is set to display more than 256 colors.


Index command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Index command

Edit --> Preferences --> Index

When the Index QuarkXTensions software is loaded, the Index command displays the Index Preferences dialog box.


Index Preferences dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Index Preferences dialog box

Edit --> Preferences --> Index

The Index Preferences dialog box lets you customize your index marker color , change the style sheet for cross-references, and specify punctuation for built indexes.


Index Marker Color button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Index Marker Color button

Edit --> Preferences --> Index

Clicking the Index Marker Color button displays a color selector. Selecting a new color will change the color of the index markers in your QuarkXPress document.


Separation Characters area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Separation Characters area

Edit --> Preferences --> Index

The Separation Characters settings affect how your built index is punctuated. You can specify punctuation in the Following Entry, Between Page #s, Between Page Range, Before Cross-Reference, and Between Entries fields. You can also specify a character style sheet for cross-references in the Cross-Ref Style pop-up menu.


Following Entry field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Following Entry field

Edit --> Preferences --> Index --> Separation Characters area

Enter characters in the Following Entry field to specify the punctuation that immediately follows each entry in an index. For example, entering a comma and a space in the Following Entry field would generate an entry such as "QuarkXPress, xii, 15–17, 19" when you build your index.


Between Page #s field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Between Page #s field

Edit --> Preferences --> Index --> Separation Characters area

Enter characters in the Between Page #s field to specify the words or punctuation that separate a list of page numbers in an index. For example, entering a comma and a space in the Between Page #s  field would generate an entry such as "QuarkXPress, xii, 12, 19" when you build your index.


Between Page Range field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Between Page Range field

Edit --> Preferences --> Index --> Separation Characters area

Enter characters in the Between Page Range to specify the words or punctuation that separate a range of pages in an index. For example, entering an en dash in the Between Page Range field would generate an entry such as "QuarkXPress, 15–17, 19–21" when you build your index.


Before Cross-Reference field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Before Cross-Reference field

Edit --> Preferences --> Index --> Separation Characters area

Enter characters in the Before Cross–Reference field to specify the words or punctuation that precede a cross-reference (usually a period, semicolon, or space). For example, entering a semicolon and a space in the Before Cross–Reference field would generate an entry such as "QuarkXPress, xii, 15–17, 19; See also Page Layout" when you build your index.


Cross-Ref Style pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Cross-Ref Style pop-up menu

Edit --> Preferences --> Index --> Separation Characters area

The Cross-Ref style pop-up menu allows you to select a character style sheet to apply to your cross-references. This style sheet is applied only to "See," "See Also," or "See Herein," not to the entry or the reference. For example, choosing a character style sheet using an italic font would generate an entry such as "QuarkXPress, xii, 15–17, 19; See also Page Layout" when you build your index.


Between Entries field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Between Entries field

Edit --> Preferences --> Index --> Separation Characters area

Enter characters in the Between Entries field to specify the words or punctuation inserted between entries in a run-in index or at the end of a paragraph in a nested index. For example, entering a semicolon in the Between Entries field would generate an entry such as this when you build your run-in index: "QuarkXPress, xii, 15–17, 19; QuarkXPress Passport, xiii, 25-28, 39."


Style Sheets command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Style Sheets command

Style sheets let you group paragraph formats, character attributes, rules, and tab settings so they can be applied collectively with one action. The Style Sheets command (Shift+F11) displays the Style Sheets dialog box, which lets you create and manage paragraph and character style sheets. You apply style sheets to text using the Paragraph Style Sheet or Character Style Sheet command in the Style menu, keyboard equivalents, or the Style Sheets palette (View --> Style Sheets).

NOTE: Style sheets created when no documents are open are included with all subsequently created documents; style sheets created when a document is active are specific to that document.


Style Sheets dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Style Sheets dialog box

Edit --> Style Sheets

The Style Sheets dialog box lets you create, edit, duplicate, save, and delete paragraph and character style sheets. You can also append style sheets from another document.

There are two lists. The top list displays a list of style sheets according to the option you chose from the Show pop-up menu. The bottom list provides a list of the major attributes contained by a style sheet selected in the top list. Paragraph style sheet names are preceded by a paragraph icon, and character style sheets are preceded by a character icon.


Show pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show pop-up menu

Edit --> Style Sheets

The Show pop-up menu determines which style sheets are displayed in the Style Sheets dialog box list.

•	Choose All Style Sheets to display all the style sheets available to the document. When no document is open, only the default style sheets common to all documents are displayed.

•	Choose Paragraph Style Sheets to display only paragraph style sheets. Paragraph style sheets are style sheets that contain paragraph formatting and are applied to an entire paragraph. Each paragraph style sheet also contains one default character style sheet.

•	Choose Character Style Sheets to display only character style sheets. Character style sheets are style sheets that contain only character formatting and can be applied exclusively to selected text.

•	Choose Style Sheets In Use to display only those style sheets that have been applied to text somewhere in the active document.

•	Choose Style Sheets Not Used to display only those style sheets that are not applied to text in the active document.

NOTE: The Normal paragraph and character style sheets are always available to all documents. QuarkXPress automatically applies the Normal paragraph style and Normal character style sheet to all newly created text boxes. The Normal paragraph style sheet can only contain the Normal character style sheet. Default paragraph formats and character attributes for newly created text boxes are determined by the specifications in the Normal paragraph and character style sheets. You can edit these attributes at any time. To globally change the Normal paragraph and character style sheets so that changes apply to all new documents, edit both style sheets with no document open.


New (pop-up button)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

New (pop-up button)

Edit --> Style Sheets

The New pop-up button lets you create up to 1,000 default or document-specific style sheets. The pop-up button has two options: Paragraph and Character.

•	Choose Paragraph to create a style sheet that contains paragraph attributes. (Paragraph style sheets also contain a default character style sheet.) The Edit Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box displays.

•	Choose Character to create a style sheet that contains only character attributes. The Edit Character Style Sheet dialog box displays.


Edit button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit button

Edit --> Style Sheets

The Edit button displays the Edit Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box or the Edit Character Style Sheet dialog box, depending on what type of style sheet you have selected in the list. When the dialog box displays, it shows the current description for that style sheet. You can also double-click a style sheet in the list to display the dialog box.


Duplicate button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Duplicate button

Edit --> Style Sheets

The Duplicate button creates an identical copy of the selected style sheet. QuarkXPress automatically opens the Edit Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box or the Edit Character Style Sheet dialog box so that you can rename and edit the duplicated style sheet.


Delete button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Delete button

Edit --> Style Sheets

The Delete button removes the selected style sheet(s) from the active document. If the style sheet was used in the document, an alert lets you choose a replacement style sheet. If you choose No Style in the alert dialog box, text to which the deleted style sheet was applied will retain the attributes of the deleted style sheet, but No Style will be checked in the Style Sheet submenu (Style menu) when those paragraphs are selected. If you choose another replacement style sheet in the alert dialog box, any text that the deleted style sheet was applied to will take on the attributes of the new style sheet, with local formatting retained. You cannot delete the Normal style sheets.


Append button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Append button

Edit --> Style Sheets

The Append button lets you import style sheets from another document. A dialog box lets you choose a QuarkXPress document from which to append style sheets.

Selecting a document in the dialog box and clicking Open displays the Append Style Sheets dialog box. This dialog box offers the same controls as the Style Sheets tab of the Append dialog box (File --> Append).


Save button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Save button

Edit --> Style Sheets

The Save button saves changes made to any style sheets in the Style Sheets dialog box. When you click Save, QuarkXPress updates text in the document to match the new style sheet specifications and closes the dialog box.


Edit Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box

Edit --> Style Sheets --> New --> Paragraph

Clicking New --> Paragraph (or clicking Edit or Duplicate when a paragraph style sheet is selected) displays the Edit Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box, which lets you create or edit a paragraph style sheet. Default settings for new style sheets are taken from the selected text.

•	The Name field lets you specify a name for a new style sheet or rename an existing style sheet.

•	Below the Name field are four tabs: General, Formats, Tabs, and Rules. The Formats, Tabs, and Rules tabs let you specify the paragraph formats that will be automatically applied to text whenever you apply a paragraph style sheet. The controls in these three tabs are the same as those found in the Paragraph Attributes dialog box (Style --> Formats).


General dialog box tab
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

General dialog box tab

Edit --> Style Sheets --> New --> Paragraph --> General tab

The Edit Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box General tab lets you specify keyboard equivalents and other attributes, such as Based On, Next Style, and Character Attributes for a pragraph style sheet.


Keyboard Equivalent field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard Equivalent field

Edit --> Style Sheets --> New --> Paragraph --> General tab

The Keyboard Equivalent field lets you specify a keyboard command that will automatically apply the style sheet. On Mac OS, select the Keyboard Equivalent field and then press any combination of Command, Option, Control, Shift, the numeric characters on the keypad, and the F5–F15 keys on the Apple Extended Keyboard. On Windows, select the Keyboard Equivalent field and then press any combination of Ctrl or Ctrl+Alt and a numeric character on the keypad.

NOTE: Mac OS only: if you use one of the function keys (F5–F15) for a style sheet keyboard command, it overrides the QuarkXPress default keyboard command when you are editing text.


Based On pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Based On pop-up menu

Edit --> Style Sheets --> New --> Paragraph --> General tab

The Based On pop-up menu lets you base a new style sheet on an existing style sheet by choosing a style sheet name. The default option is No Style.

TIP: Modifications made to a style sheet upon which another style sheet is based affect both style sheets.


Next Style pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Next Style pop-up menu

Edit --> Style Sheets --> New --> Paragraph --> General tab

The Next Style pop-up menu lets you specify a style sheet to follow the current style sheet when you are entering text. For example, you could specify that a paragraph with a "subheading" style sheet be followed automatically by a paragraph with a "byline" style sheet, which in turn could be followed by a paragraph with a "body copy" style sheet. The style automatically changes to the style specified in the Next Style pop-up menu after Return (Mac OS) or Enter (Windows) is pressed at the end of the paragraph. Choosing a Next Style option does not affect existing text.

•	The pop-up menu lists all style sheets in the Style Sheets dialog box for the active document. When no documents are open, it lists the default style sheets.

•	Choose Self from the Next Style pop-up menu to continue using the same style sheet in the next paragraph.


Character Attributes area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Character Attributes area

Edit --> Style Sheets --> New --> Paragraph --> General tab

Paragraph style sheets also contain a character style sheet. The character style sheet is applied to all the characters in the paragraph whenever you apply a paragraph style sheet.

•	The Style pop-up menu contains a list of all the character style sheets available to the active document and lets you choose the character style used by the paragraph style sheet.

•	Click New to create a new character style sheet in the Edit Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box. This displays the Edit Character Style Sheet dialog box. After you make your edits, click OK to return to the Edit Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box. The new style sheet name will automatically display in the Style pop-up menu.

•	Click Edit to edit the character style sheet chosen in the Style pop-up menu. This displays the Edit Character Style Sheet dialog box. After you make your edits, click OK to return to the Edit Paragraph Style Sheet dialog box.


Edit Character Style Sheet dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit Character Style Sheet dialog box

Edit --> Style Sheets --> New --> Character

Clicking New --> Character (or clicking Edit or Duplicate when a character style sheet is selected) displays the Edit Character Style Sheet dialog box, which lets you create or edit a character style sheet.

•	The Name field lets you specify a name for a new style sheet or rename an existing style sheet.

•	The Keyboard Equivalent field lets you specify a keyboard command that will automatically apply the style sheet. On Mac OS, select the Keyboard Equivalent field and then press any combination of Command, Option, Control, Shift, the numeric characters on the keypad, and the F5–F15 keys on the Apple Extended Keyboard. On Windows, select the Keyboard Equivalent field and then press any combination of Ctrl or Ctrl+Alt and a numeric character on the keypad.

•	The Based On pop-up menu lets you base a style sheet on an existing style sheet by choosing a style sheet name. Modifications made to a style sheet upon which another style sheet is based affect both style sheets. The default option is No Style.

•	The controls below the Based On pop-up menu in the Edit Character Style Sheet dialog box are the same as those found in the Character Attributes dialog box (Style --> Character).

NOTE: Mac OS only: If you use one of the function keys (F5–F15) for a style sheet keyboard command, it overrides the QuarkXPress default keyboard command when you are editing text.


Colors command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Colors command

The Colors command (Shift+F12) displays the Colors dialog box, which lets you create and manage colors. You can also change the way a color traps to other colors. You apply colors to text, items, and box attributes using the Colors palette (View --> Show Colors); you can also apply colors to text using style sheets and the Color submenu of the Style menu.

NOTE: Colors created when no documents are open are included with all subsequently created documents; colors created when a document is active are specific to that document.


Colors dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Colors dialog box

Edit --> Colors

The Colors dialog box lets you create, edit, duplicate, delete, and save colors, as well as specify trapping for the current colors. You can also append colors from another document.

The top of the dialog box displays a list of colors according to the option you chose from the Show pop-up menu, and the bottom displays the composition of the selected color.

When no documents are open, the list displays all default colors. When a document is active, the list only displays colors for the active document. The default color list includes:

•	Red, Green, and Blue: You can edit these colors or delete them from the default color list.

•	Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, and White: You cannot edit or delete these colors.

•	Registration: You can edit the Registration color, but you cannot delete it. Changing the Registration color only changes the way the color displays on-screen.

TIP: You should apply the Registration color to lines when creating your own registration or crop marks. Text, pictures, or items to which the Registration color has been applied will print on all separation plates.


Show pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show pop-up menu

Edit --> Colors

The Show pop-up menu determines which colors are displayed in the Colors dialog box list.

•	Choose All Colors to display all the colors available to the document. When no document is open, colors that are default colors common to all documents display.

•	Choose Spot Colors to display only spot colors (which print on their own separation plate).

•	Choose Process Colors to display only process colors.

•	Choose Multi-Ink Colors to display only those colors that you have built from other process inks or spot colors using the Multi-Ink Color option in the Model pop-up menu of the Edit Color dialog box. (Click New, Edit, or Duplicate to display.)

•	Choose Colors In Use to display only those colors that have been applied somewhere in the active document.

•	Choose Colors Not Used to display only those colors that are not used in the active document.


New button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

New button

Edit --> Colors

The New button displays the Edit Color dialog box, which lets you add, create, or name a new color. You can create up to 1,000 default or document-specific colors.


Edit button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit button

Edit --> Colors

The Edit button displays the Edit Color dialog box to modify the color selected in the Colors list. You can also double-click a color to display the Edit Color dialog box. You cannot edit or delete the following default colors: Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, and White.


Duplicate button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Duplicate button

Edit --> Colors

The Duplicate button creates a new copy of the color selected in the Colors list. QuarkXPress automatically opens the Edit Color dialog box so that you can rename and edit the copied color.


Delete button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Delete button

Edit --> Colors

The Delete button removes the selected color(s) from the active document. If the color was used in the active document, an alert lets you choose a replacement color.


Append button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Append button

Edit -->Colors

The Append button lets you import colors from another QuarkXPress document. A dialog box lets you choose a QuarkXPress document from which to append colors.

Selecting a document in the dialog box and clicking Open displays the Append Colors dialog box. This dialog box offers the same controls as the Colors tab of the Append dialog box (File --> Append).


Edit Trap button [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit Trap button [PRINT]

Edit --> Colors

The Edit Trap button lets you specify trapping values for any item color relative to any background color. Clicking Edit Trap displays the Trap Specifications dialog box for the color selected in the list.


Save button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Save button

Edit --> Colors

The Save button saves changes made to any colors in the Colors dialog box. When you click Save, QuarkXPress updates colors in the document to match the new color specifications and closes the dialog box.


Edit Color dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit Color dialog box

Edit --> Colors --> New, Edit, or Duplicate

Clicking New, Edit, or Duplicate in the Colors dialog box displays the Edit Color dialog box, which lets you create or edit a color using the Name field; the Model pop-up menu; the color wheel, Multi-Ink, or swatchbook options; the Spot Color check box, and the New/Original area. You can set trapping specifications for a specific color in the Trap Specifications dialog box, which displays when you click the Edit Trap button.


Name field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Name field

Edit --> Colors --> New

The Name field lets you specify a name for a new color or rename an existing color.


Model pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Model pop-up menu

Edit --> Colors --> New

The Model pop-up menu lets you choose among various color models for creating and editing colors at any time. For example, you can modify a color created in the RGB model by using either the HSB or CMYK model. You can also edit a spot color such as a PANTONE (TM), TOYO(TM), or DIC(TM) color using one of the other color definition models, but a spot color edited in this manner will no longer match the originally selected version.

•	RGB, an additive color system, is most often used with slide recorders or color video monitors, and also works well for Web pages. Red, green, and blue light is mixed to represent colors on a video screen.

•	HSB resembles the manner in which artists mix colors, using hue, saturation, and brightness. Hue describes color pigment; saturation measures the amount of color pigment; and brightness measures the amount of black in a color.

•	LAB, also referred to as "LAB color space" or "CIELAB," is a standard three-dimensional model for representing colors. LAB is a color space designed to be independent of differing interpretations imposed by monitor or printer manufacturers. The LAB model used in QuarkXPress uses the "D50 illuminant" to be consistent with most usage.

•	CMYK, a subtractive color system, is the color model used by professional printers. Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black inks combine to "subtract" from white and thus reproduce most colors.

•	Multi-Ink is a special model in QuarkXPress that allows you to create a multi-ink color based on screen percentages of existing process inks or spot colors. Before using this feature, consult with your printer or service bureau to make sure that the percentages you choose will not cause ink-coverage problems.

•	Web-safe colors are used for color consistency in Web documents. This color model will not display in the Model pop-up menu unless the corresponding Color Library files remain installed in your "Color" folder. [WEB]

•	Web Named Colors is a model that lets you select a Web-safe color using its assigned color name — for example, "Dark Blue." Not all Web-safe colors are included in the Web Named Colors palette. This color model will not display in the Model pop-up menu unless the corresponding Color Library files remain installed in your "Color" folder. [WEB]

NOTE: The remaining color models listed below, especially PANTONE, are widely used for print documents because each color is standardized and cataloged. These color models will not display in the Model pop-up menu unless the corresponding Color Library files remain installed in your "Color" folder.

•	PANTONE consists of the PANTONE matching system colors in solid colors for printing on coated stock.

•	TOYO and DIC are spot color matching systems popular in Japan.

•	The TRUMATCH (TM) and FOCOLTONE (TM) matching systems let you specify colors that can be built on-press using the four process colors — cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.

•	PANTONE Process uses the three process colors of the PANTONE matching system with varying levels of black to produce more than 3,000 colors.

•	PANTONE ProSim simulates PANTONE colors with four-color separations for printing on coated paper stock.

•	PANTONE Uncoated consists of the PANTONE matching system colors in solid colors for printing on uncoated paper stock.

•	Hexachrome Uncoated and Hexachrome Coated are high-fidelity ("HiFi") color matching systems from Pantone, Inc. that consist of colors printed with six process plates instead of the usual four. Orange and green are added to the CMYK plates to create more impact and increase the range of reproducible colors. You should only choose Hexachrome colors in your document after you have talked to your printer and planned on printing a Hexachrome job.


Color wheel options (color selector)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Color wheel options (color selector)

Edit --> Colors --> New

If you choose HSB, RGB, LAB, or CMYK from the Model pop-up menu, the color wheel, brightness slider, and numeric sliders are displayed.

•	You can use the color wheel to specify a color. Click or drag the pointer inside the wheel; a small square indicates the location of the active color. The New field displays this color. The numeric values for the components of the current color are displayed in the fields below the wheel. You can use the numeric fields to make modifications to colors you picked using the color wheel.

•	The brightness slider to the right of the color wheel lets you quickly change the amount of black present in the colors accessible through the color wheel. Move the slider downward to add more black.

•	To define colors without using the color wheel (or after clicking the general area of the color you want), use the sliders or enter values for each color component in the fields below the wheel.

NOTE: Black-and-white or grayscale monitors use levels of gray with letters (such as R, G, B) to represent the corresponding color areas of the wheel.


Multi-Ink options (color selector)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Multi-Ink options (color selector)

Edit --> Colors --> New

If you choose Multi-Ink from the Model pop-up menu, a list on the right side of the dialog box displays all available spot colors, plus the process inks.

•	The Process Inks pop-up menu lets you include either the CMYK process inks or Hexachrome process inks in the list. You should choose Hexachrome only after you have spoken to your printer and planned to print a six-color Hexachrome job.

•	The Shade pop-up menu lets you apply any screen percentage from 0–100% to the color you select in the list.

•	Specify shades for any number of process inks or spot colors in the list to build your own custom multi-ink color.

NOTE: Before using the Multi-Ink feature, consult with your printer or service bureau to make sure that the percentages you choose will not cause ink-coverage problems.


Swatchbook options (color selector)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Swatchbook options (color selector)

Edit --> Colors --> New

If you choose TOYO, DIC, TRUMATCH, FOCOLTONE, HEXACHROME, Web-safe, Web Named Colors, or one of the PANTONE color models from the Model pop-up menu, the appropriate color selector displays.

•	To specify a color from one of these matching systems, use the scroll bar to move through the color selector, or enter the catalog number in the field below the color selector.

•	When you enter a color’s number in the field, the color that corresponds to that number displays in the color selector and in the New field.

•	The name of a specified color automatically displays in the Name field in the upper left corner of the dialog box. The "CV" that follows the PANTONE No. field indicates that the selected color is a computer video simulation of the actual PANTONE color.


Spot Color check box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Spot Color check box [PRINT]

Edit --> Colors --> New

When you specify a spot color from one of the color selectors, you can uncheck Spot Color to separate the color into cyan, magenta, yellow, and black plates. When Spot Color is checked, the color will only print as a spot color to its own separate printing plate. The Halftone pop-up menu is available when Spot Color is checked.

NOTE: Because the gamut of CMYK process color is limited, any spot color that you try to reproduce using process plates will look different from the actual spot ink that you see in a printed swatch book.


Halftone pop-up menu [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Halftone pop-up menu [PRINT]

Edit --> Colors --> New

The Halftone pop-up menu lets you quickly specify the screen values used when you print a color separation plate that contains a screen for a spot color. A spot color means a color for which Spot Color is checked.

When Spot Color is checked, the Halftone pop-up menu is available. Choose Process Cyan to specify a screen angle of 105 degrees, Process Magenta for 75 degrees, Process Yellow for 90 degrees, and Process Black for 45 degrees. These values may be overridden by values built into an imagesetter or printer description file. You can also override them using the Angle pop-up menu in the Output tab of the Print dialog box (File --> Print).


New/Original area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

New/Original area

Edit --> Colors --> New

The New/Original area displays colors as you create and edit them. The New field displays a new color or an edited version of the chosen color. The Original field is used for comparison; it displays the original color when you are editing an existing color.


Trap Specifications dialog box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Trap Specifications dialog box [PRINT]

Edit --> Colors --> Edit Trap

Clicking Edit Trap in the Colors dialog box displays the Trap Specifications dialog box for the chosen color. The Trap Specifications dialog box lets you specify trapping values for any object color relative to any background color. By specifying Overprint, Knockout, Auto Amount (+) for spreads, Auto Amount (–) for chokes, or custom trap values in the Trap pop-up menu, you can control the trapping relationships for every color except White and Registration.

NOTE: Color-specific trapping values you specify in the Trap Specifications dialog box directly affect color relationships and override all default trapping preferences.

A spread occurs when items with a lighter color enlarge slightly so that they overlap a darker background color. A choke occurs when items with a darker color are trapped by a slight reduction in the size of the "knocked out" area in a lighter background color.

The Trap Specifications dialog box contains the Background Color column and the Trap, Dependent/Independent and Reverse pop-up menus


Background Color column [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Background Color column [PRINT]

Edit --> Colors --> Edit Trap

The Background Color column displays all the colors defined for the document, with the exception of White, Registration, and the object color. When the object color is placed against a background of more than one color with which the object color has conflicting trapping relationships, or against a color QuarkXPress is unable to identify, the program traps according to the value specified for the Indeterminate background color.


Trap pop-up menu [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Trap pop-up menu [PRINT]

Edit --> Colors --> Edit Trap

The Trap pop-up menu determines the trapping relationship when the selected Background Color occurs behind the object color named in the dialog box title. The Trap column displays the current setting. Entries different from the default values are marked with an asterisk (*).

•	The Default option works like the Auto Amount (+/–) settings, but when Default is chosen, a QuarkXPress algorithm determines which colors choke, which colors spread, and which colors overprint or knock out. The amount of a choke or spread is based on the Auto Amount value specified in the Trapping pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences). However, when Default is chosen, black always overprints, and white always knocks out.

•	The Overprint option specifies that the object color named in the dialog box title will overprint the selected background color in all instances where the shade value of the object color is greater than the percentage entered in the Overprint Limit field of the Trapping pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences).

TIP: Even with Overprint specified, overprinting will occur only when an object color has a shade value greater than the Overprint Limit value specified in the Trapping pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences).

•	The Knockout option specifies that the object color named in the dialog box title knocks out the selected background color using no trapping.

•	The Auto Amount (+) option assigns the default spread value (the value specified in the Auto Amount field of the Trapping pane of the Preferences dialog box) to the object color named in the dialog box title.

•	The Auto Amount (–) option assigns the default choke value (the negative of the value specified in the Auto Amount field of the Trapping pane of the Preferences dialog box) to the object color named in the dialog box title.

•	The Custom option displays a dialog box that lets you specify a custom trapping value for the object and background color. Enter a value and click OK. A negative value causes the background color to choke. A positive value causes the object color to spread. A value of zero will knock out the object from the selected background color with no trapping.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
±36 pt	points	.001
TIP: If you specify a negative Custom value between the object color named in the dialog box title and the Indeterminate background color, text to which the object color is applied is not choked, but is instead knocked out of the background without any trapping.


Dependent/Independent pop-up menu [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Dependent/Independent pop-up menu [PRINT]

Edit --> Colors --> Edit Trap

The Dependent/Independent pop-up menu determines whether the Trap and Reverse pop-up menu settings will directly affect each other. The Reverse column indicates how trapping will occur when the selected Background Color takes on the role of object color, and vice versa.

•	Choose Dependent Traps if you want QuarkXPress to calculate a reverse trap value automatically.

•	Choose Independent Traps to specify a custom reverse trap value.


Reverse pop-up menu [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Reverse pop-up menu [PRINT]

Edit --> Colors --> Edit Trap

The Reverse pop-up menu determines how trapping will occur when the selected Background Color takes on the role of object color, and the color identified in the name of the dialog box takes on the role of background color. The Reverse value is calculated automatically when Dependent Traps is chosen. If you change the Reverse value when Dependent Traps is chosen, the corresponding opposite trap will be calculated automatically.

The Reverse column displays the current setting. Entries different from the default values are marked with an asterisk (*). The options available in the Reverse pop-up menu are the same as in the Trap pop-up menu.


H&Js command [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

H&Js command [PRINT]

Hyphenation and justification specifications (H&Js) are sets of automatic hyphenation rules and justification settings that you can apply to paragraphs. The H&Js command Command+Option+H on Mac OS, Ctrl+Shift+F11 on Windows) displays the H&Js dialog box, which lets you create and manage hyphenation and justification specifications. You apply hyphenation and justification specifications to selected paragraphs using the H&J pop-up menu in the Formats tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box (Style --> Formats). Hyphenation and justification specifications are also included in paragraph style sheets.

NOTE: Hyphenation and justification specifications created when no documents are open are included with all subsequently created documents; hyphenation and justification specifications created when a document is active are specific to that document.


H&Js dialog box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

H&Js dialog box [PRINT]

Edit --> H&Js

The H&Js dialog box lets you create, edit, duplicate, save, and delete the current hyphenation and justification specifications. You can also append hyphenation and justification specifications from another document.

The top list displays the available hyphenation and justification specifications, and the bottom displays the specifications for the selected hyphenation and justification specification.


H&Js (list) [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

H&Js list [PRINT]

Edit --> H&Js

When no documents are open, the H&J list displays all default hyphenation and justification specifications. When a document is active, the H&J list displays hyphenation and justification specifications set up for the active document.

All documents contain the Standard hyphenation and justification specification. By default, Standard is the hyphenation and justification specification specified for the Normal paragraph style sheet. The default Standard hyphenation and justification specification is defined as follows:

•	Auto Hyphenation: checked

•	Smallest Word: 6

•	Minimum Before: 3

•	Minimum After: 2

•	Break Capitalized Words: unchecked

•	Hyphens in a Row: unlimited

•	Hyphenation Zone: 0"

•	Space: 85% Min., 110% Opt., 250% Max.

•	Char: 0% Min., 0% Opt., 4% Max.

•	Flush Zone: 0"

•	Single Word Justify: checked


New button [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

New button [PRINT]

Edit --> H&Js

The New button displays the Edit Hyphenation & Justification dialog box, which lets you create a new hyphenation and justification specification. You can create up to 1,000 default or document-specific hyphenation and justification specifications. The Edit Hyphenation & Justification dialog box lets you name and define a hyphenation and justification specification.


Edit button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit button

Edit --> H&Js

The Edit button displays the Edit Hyphenation & Justification dialog box for the hyphenation and justification specification selected in the H&J list. The Edit Hyphenation & Justification dialog box lets you modify a hyphenation and justification specification’s name and definition. You can also double-click a hyphenation and justification specification to display the Edit Hyphenation & Justification dialog box.


Duplicate button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Duplicate button

Edit --> H&Js

The Duplicate button creates a new copy of the hyphenation and justification specification selected in the H&J list. QuarkXPress automatically opens the Edit Hyphenation & Justification dialog box so that you can rename and edit the copied hyphenation and justification specification.


Delete button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Delete button

Edit --> H&Js

The Delete button removes the selected hyphenation and justification specification(s) from the active document. If the hyphenation and justification specification was used in the active document, an alert dialog box lets you choose a replacement hyphenation and justification specification.


Append button [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Append button [PRINT]

Edit --> H&Js

The Append button lets you import hyphenation and justification specifications from another QuarkXPress document. A dialog box lets you choose a QuarkXPress document to append specifications from.

Selecting a document in the dialog box and clicking Open displays the Append H&Js dialog box. This dialog box offers the same controls as the H&Js tab of the Append dialog box (File --> Append).


Save button [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Save button [PRINT]

Edit --> H&Js

The Save button saves changes made to any hyphenation and justification specifications in the H&Js dialog box. When you click Save, QuarkXPress updates the document’s text to match the new specifications and closes the dialog box.


Edit Hyphenation & Justification dialog box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit Hyphenation & Justification dialog box [PRINT]

Edit --> H&Js --> New

Clicking New, Edit, or Duplicate in the H&Js dialog box displays the Edit Hyphenation & Justification dialog box, which lets you create or edit a hyphenation and justification specification. The Edit Hyphenation & Justification dialog box contains the Name field; the Auto Hyphenation area; the Hyphens in a Row and Hyphenation Zone fields; the Justification Method area; the Space, Character, and Flush Zone fields; and the Single Word Justify check box.


Name field [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Name field [PRINT]

Edit --> H&Js --> New

The Name field lets you specify a name for a new hyphenation and justification specification or rename an existing hyphenation and justification specification.


Auto Hyphenation area [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Auto Hyphenation area [PRINT]

Edit --> H&Js --> New

The Auto Hyphenation area lets you determine the way QuarkXPress performs automatic hyphenation.

•	The Auto Hyphenation check box enables automatic hyphenation for paragraphs to which this hyphenation and justification specification is applied. This option is checked by default.

•	The Smallest Word field specifies the minimum number of characters a word must contain to be hyphenated. Enter a value from 3 to 20. The default setting is 6.

•	The Minimum Before field specifies the smallest number of characters that must precede an automatic hyphen. Enter a value from 1 to 6. The default setting is 3.

•	 The Minimum After field specifies the smallest number of characters that must follow an automatic hyphen. Enter a value from 2 to 8. The default setting is 2.

•	The Break Capitalized Words check box enables hyphenation for words that start with an uppercase character (for example, proper nouns and the first words of sentences). This option is unchecked by default.

NOTE: The Auto Hyphenation controls do not affect manual hyphenation (the use of manually inserted hyphens and discretionary hyphens to control word breaks and text flow within documents).


Hyphens in a row field [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Hyphens in a Row field [PRINT]

Edit --> H&Js --> New

The Hyphens in a Row field lets you specify the maximum number of consecutive lines that can end in manually or automatically hyphenated words. You can enter any value from 0 to 7. If you do not want to limit the number of consecutive lines that end with a hyphen, enter "0" or choose unlimited from the field’s pop-up menu. The default setting is unlimited.


Hyphenation Zone field [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Hyphenation Zone field [PRINT]

Edit --> H&Js --> New

The Hyphenation Zone field lets you specify the area within which hyphenation (automatic or manual) can occur. To do so, enter a value in the field. The Hyphenation Zone is measured from the right indentation to the end of a line of text.

•	When you specify a Hyphenation Zone greater than 0", QuarkXPress hyphenates a word only when: (1) the previous word ends before the Hyphenation Zone, and (2) an acceptable hyphenation point falls within the Hyphenation Zone. Hyphenation Zone values apply only to nonjustified text.

•	A Hyphenation Zone value of 0" means that there is no Hyphenation Zone. In this case, QuarkXPress either hyphenates a word according to the other hyphenation criteria or wraps it to the next line if it will not fit completely on the line. This is the default setting.


Justification Method area [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Justification Method area [PRINT]

Edit --> H&Js --> New

Justified lines of text extend from the left to the right indentation within a column or box. Lines are justified by adding or removing space between words and characters. The values entered in the Space and Char fields determine how word space and characters are adjusted to justify a line. The Opt. (Mac OS) or Optimum (Windows) spacing values apply to nonjustified (left-, right-, and center-aligned) text, as well as to justified text.


Space fields [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Space fields [PRINT]

Edit --> H&Js --> New

The Space fields let you specify the amount of space QuarkXPress can add or remove between words in lines of justified text.

•	The values in the Min., Opt., and Max. (Mac OS) or Minimum, Optimum, and Maximum (Windows) fields represent a percentage of the normal interword space for the font and size in use.

•	When justifying lines of text, QuarkXPress first tries to space words according to the Opt. (Mac OS) or Optimum (Windows) value. If the program is unable to justify text using the Opt. (Mac OS) or Optimum (Windows) value, it varies word spacing within the range specified in the Min. and Max. (Mac OS) or Minimum and Maximum (Windows) fields.

•	QuarkXPress never spaces words closer than the Min. (Mac OS) or Minimum (Windows) value. However, the program may exceed the Max. (Mac OS) or Maximum (Windows) value if there is no other way to justify a line.

•	For nonjustified text, QuarkXPress always spaces words according to the Opt. (Mac OS) or Optimum (Windows) value.


Character fields [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Character fields [PRINT]

Edit --> H&Js --> New

The Char fields let you specify the amount of space QuarkXPress can add or remove between the characters in lines of justified text.

•	The values in the Min., Opt., and Max. (Mac OS) or Minimum, Optimum, and Maximum (Windows) fields represent a percentage of an en space for the current font size.

•	When justifying lines of text, QuarkXPress first tries to space characters according to the Opt. (Mac OS) or Optimum (Windows) value. If the program is unable to justify text using the Opt. or Optimum value, it varies character spacing within the range specified in the Min. and Max. (Mac OS) or Minimum and Maximum (Windows) fields.

•	QuarkXPress never spaces characters closer than the Min. (Mac OS) or Minimum (Windows) value. However, the program may exceed the Max. (Mac OS) or Maximum (Windows) value if there is no other way to justify the line.

•	For nonjustified text, QuarkXPress always spaces characters according to the Opt. (Mac OS) or Optimum (Windows) value.

TIP: By default, QuarkXPress defines an en space as the width of a zero in the current font. However, if you check Standard Em Space in the Character pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences), QuarkXPress uses half the width of the current font size for the en space (for example, 24-point text will have a 12-point en space).


Flush Zone field [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Flush Zone field [PRINT]

Edit --> H&Js --> New

The Flush Zone field lets you control whether the last line of text in a justified paragraph automatically extends to the right indentation. When the last line of a justified paragraph ends within the Flush Zone, as measured from the right indentation, space is added between characters and words so that the text extends from the left to the right indentation. If the last line of a paragraph does not fall within the specified Flush Zone (the text ends to the left of the Flush Zone), the last line is not justified.


Single Word Justify check box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Single Word Justify check box [PRINT]

Edit --> H&Js --> New

Checking Single Word Justify specifies that a single word alone on a line in a justified paragraph extends from the left indentation to the right indentation. When Single Word Justify is unchecked, single words are not justified.


Lists command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Lists command

The Lists command displays the Lists dialog box, which lets you create and manage custom lists. A list is a group of one or more paragraph or character style sheets chosen by the user for the purpose of duplicating all the text of this style at another location. For example, a book publisher could specify a "chapter name" style sheet and a "section name" style sheet as a new list, then use the Lists palette (View --> Show Lists) to automatically build a table of contents based on that list.


Lists dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Lists dialog box

Edit --> Lists

The Lists dialog box lets you create, edit, duplicate, save, and delete lists. You can also append lists from another document. There are two lists in the dialog box, the top displaying the available lists, and the bottom displaying the specifications for the selected list.


Lists (list)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Lists list

Edit --> Lists

When no documents are open, Lists displays all default lists. When a document is active, Lists displays lists available to the active document.


New button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

New button

Edit --> Lists

The New button displays the Edit List dialog box, which lets you create a new list. You can create up to 1,000 default or document-specific lists, or both. The Edit List dialog box lets you name and define a list.


Edit button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit button

Edit --> Lists

The Edit button displays the Edit List dialog box for the selected list. The Edit List dialog box lets you modify a list’s name and definition. You can also double-click a list to display the Edit List dialog box.


Duplicate button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Duplicate button

Edit --> Lists

The Duplicate button creates a new copy of the selected list. QuarkXPress automatically opens the Edit List dialog box so that you can rename and edit the copied list.


Delete button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Delete button

Edit --> Lists

The Delete button removes the selected list(s) from the active document.


Append button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Append button

Edit --> Lists

The Append button lets you import lists from another QuarkXPress document. A dialog box lets you choose a QuarkXPress document from which to append lists.

Selecting a document in the dialog box and clicking Open displays the Append Lists dialog box. This dialog box offers the same controls as the Lists tab of the Append dialog box (File --> Append)."


Save button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Save button

Edit --> Lists

The Save button saves changes made to any lists in the Lists dialog box. When you click Save, QuarkXPress saves the new list specifications and closes the dialog box.


Edit List dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit List dialog box

Edit --> Lists --> New

Clicking New, Edit, or Duplicate in the Lists dialog box displays the Edit List dialog box, which lets you create or edit a list. The Edit List dialog box includes the Name field; the Styles in List and Available Styles lists; the Level, Format As, and Numbering pop-up menus, and the Alphabetical check box.


Name field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Name field

Edit --> Lists --> New

The Name field lets you specify a name for a new list or rename an existing list.


Available Styles (list)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Available Styles list

Edit --> Lists --> New

The Available Styles list displays all the style sheets available to the active document. To add a style sheet to the list, double-click its name in the list or select it and click the Add arrow. To remove a style sheet from the list, select its name in Styles in List and click the Remove arrow.


Styles in List (list)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Styles in List list

Edit --> Lists --> New

Styles in List displays all the style sheets included in the list. The Level, Numbering, and Format As pop-up menus let you further customize your list.


Level pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Level pop-up menu

Edit --> Lists --> New

Choose a level from one to eight from the Level pop-up menu to determine how text with the selected style sheet will be indented in the Lists palette (View --> Show Lists). Every level after the first is indented in the Lists palette so that you can visualize your desired hierarchy. Use lower numbers to rank your most important style sheets; use higher numbers to rank style sheets of lesser importance.


Numbering pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Numbering pop-up menu

Edit --> Lists --> New

Choose an option from the Numbering pop-up menu to specify a page numbering style for text in the selected style sheet. The numbering style you choose determines where page numbers will appear in relation to the pieces of text that are copied into your finished table or list.

•	Choose Text only for text to display without a page number.

•	Choose Text...Page # for text to be followed by a page number.

•	Choose Page #...Text for text to be preceded by a page number.


Format As pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Format As pop-up menu

Edit --> Lists --> New

The Format As pop-up menu lets you choose a style sheet to define how text will be styled in the final list. For example, you may want text styled using your "chapter name" style sheet to be reformatted using your "TOC chapter entry" style sheet when you build a table of contents list.


Alphabetical check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Alphabetical check box

Edit --> Lists --> New

Check the Alphabetical check box if you want your list to be generated in alphabetical order rather than in the order in which the list items occur in the document.


Dashes & Stripes command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Dashes & Stripes command

The Dashes & Stripes command displays the Dashes & Stripes dialog box, which lets you create and manage custom line styles that can be applied to lines, text paths, and box frames. Dashes are broken line styles, and stripes are banded line styles.

NOTE: Dashes and stripes created when no documents are open are included with all subsequently created documents; dashes and stripes created when a document is active are specific to that document.


Dashes & Stripes dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Dashes & Stripes dialog box

Edit --> Dashes & Stripes

The Dashes & Stripes dialog box lets you create, edit, duplicate, save, and delete dashes and stripes. You can also append dashes and stripes from another QuarkXPress document. The top list in the dialog box displays the dashes and stripes available from the specified category in the Show pop-up menu, and the bottom list displays the attributes of the selected dash or stripe.


Show pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show pop-up menu

Edit --> Dashes & Stripes

The Show pop-up menu determines which dashes and stripes are displayed in the Dashes & Stripes dialog box list.

•	Choose All Dashes & Stripes to display all the dashes and stripes available to the document. When no document is open, only default dashes and stripes that are common to all documents are displayed.

•	Choose Dashes to display only those line styles that are formed using the dashed "broken line" method.

•	Choose Stripes to display only those line styles that are formed using the "banded" method.

•	Choose Dashes & Stripes In Use to display only those dashes and stripes that have been applied somewhere in the active document.

•	Choose Dashes & Stripes Not Used to display only those dashes and stripes that are unused in the active document.


New (pop-up button)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

New (pop-up button)

Edit --> Dashes & Stripes

The New pop-up button lets you create up to 1,000 default or document-specific dashes and stripes. The pop-up button has two options: Dash and Stripe.

•	Choose Dash to create a "broken" line style. The Edit Dash dialog box displays.

•	Choose Stripe to create a "banded" line style. The Edit Stripe dialog box displays.


Edit button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit button

Edit --> Dashes & Stripes

The Edit button displays the Edit Dash dialog box or the Edit Stripe dialog box, depending on the line style selected in the list. You can also double-click a line style in the list to display the dialog box.


Duplicate button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Duplicate button

Edit --> Dashes & Stripes

The Duplicate button creates an identical copy of the line style selected in the list. QuarkXPress automatically opens the Edit Dash dialog box or the Edit Stripe dialog box so that you can rename and edit the duplicated line style.


Delete button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Delete button

Edit --> Dashes & Stripes

The Delete button removes the selected line style(s) from the active document. If the line style was used in the document, an alert dialog box lets you choose a replacement line style.


Append button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Append button

Edit --> Dashes & Stripes

The Append button lets you import dashes and stripes from another document. A dialog box lets you choose a QuarkXPress document from which to append dashes and stripes.

Selecting a document in the dialog box and clicking Open displays the Append Dashes & Stripes dialog box. This dialog box offers the same controls as the Dashes & Stripes tab of the Append dialog box (File --> Append).


Save button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Save button

Edit --> Dashes & Stripes

The Save button saves changes made to any dashes and stripes in the Dashes & Stripes dialog box. When you click Save, QuarkXPress updates items in the document to match the new line style specifications and closes the dialog box.


Edit Dash dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit Dash dialog box

Edit --> Dashes & Stripes --> New --> Dash

Clicking New --> Dash, or clicking Edit or Duplicate in the Dashes & Stripes dialog box when a dashed line style is selected displays the Edit Dash dialog box, which lets you create or edit a dash. The Edit Dash dialog box contains the Name field and the Ruler, Preview, Dash Attributes, and Segment areas.


Name field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Name field

Edit --> Dashes & Stripes --> New --> Dash

The Name field lets you specify a name for a new dash or rename an existing dash.


Ruler area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Ruler area

Edit --> Dashes & Stripes --> New --> Dash

The ruler area lets you put breaks in your line. Every time you click in the ruler area, an arrow displays. The arrow indicates where a dash should start or stop. If you create several arrows, spaced apart at different distances, you will create a dashed line style with dashes of varying sizes. To make a dash section larger or smaller, drag an arrow. To delete a dash section, drag its arrows off the ruler.


Preview area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Preview area

Edit --> Dashes & Stripes --> New --> Dash

The Preview area shows what your dash will look like. The Preview area lets you drag a slider to view the dash at different widths.


Dash Attributes area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Dash Attributes area

Edit --> Dashes & Stripes --> New --> Dash

The Dash Attributes area lets you determine how your dashed line style appears when applied to a line, text path, or box frame.

•	The Repeats Every field and pop-up menu determines whether the length of the dash’s repeating pattern will be proportional to the width of the line or frame it is used with, or whether it is absolute. Enter a number in the Repeats Every field when times width is chosen from the pop-up menu to create a proportional line style. Enter a number in the Repeats Every field when Points is chosen from the pop-up menu to create an absolute line style that uses points as the measuring system. The repeating pattern consists of everything displayed along the ruler area.

•	Choose an option from the Miter submenu to determine how corners (including the corner points in Bézier items with this dash style applied) will look. You can choose from Sharp, Rounded, and Beveled.

•	Choose an option from the Endcap submenu to determine how the ends of individual dashes look. You can choose from Square, Projecting Round, Projecting Square, or Round.

•	Check Stretch to Corners to make the dash pattern stretch evenly along a frame so that the corner areas look symmetrical.


Segments area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Segments area

Edit --> Dashes & Stripes --> New --> Dash

The Segments area lets you position breaks in the ruler area numerically instead of using the mouse, and it also displays the current position of a selected break point.

•	Enter a value in the Position field to precisely position a new dash break point in the ruler area.

•	Click Add to enter the break point in the ruler area.


Edit Stripe dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit Stripe dialog box

Edit --> Dashes & Stripes --> New --> Stripe

Clicking New --> Stripe or clicking Edit or Duplicate in the Dashes & Stripes dialog box when a striped line style is selected displays the Edit Stripe dialog box, which lets you create or edit a stripe. The Edit Stripe dialog box contains the Name field and the Ruler, Preview, and Segment areas; and the Miter pop-up menu


Name field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Name field

Edit --> Dashes & Stripes --> New --> Stripe

The Name field lets you specify a name for a new stripe or rename an existing stripe.


Ruler area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Ruler area

Edit --> Dashes & Stripes --> New --> Stripe

The ruler area lets you put bands or "stripes" in your line style. Every time you click in the ruler area, an arrow displays. The arrow indicates where a stripe should start or stop. If you create several arrows spaced apart at different distances, you will create a banded line style with stripes of varying sizes. To make a stripe larger or smaller, drag an arrow. To delete a stripe, drag its arrows off the ruler.


Preview area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Preview area

Edit --> Dashes & Stripes --> New --> Stripe

The Preview area shows what your stripe will look like. The Preview lets you drag a slider to view the stripe at different widths.


Miter pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Miter pop-up menu

Edit --> Dashes & Stripes --> New --> Stripe

Choose an option from the Miter submenu to determine how corners (including the corner points in Bézier items with this stripe style applied) will look. You can choose from Sharp, Rounded, and Beveled.


Segments area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Segments area

Edit --> Dashes & Stripes --> New --> Stripe

The Segments area lets you position breaks in the ruler area numerically instead of using the mouse, and it also displays the current position of a selected break point.

•	Enter a percentage value in the Position field to precisely position a new stripe break point in the ruler area.

•	Click Add to enter the break point in the ruler area.


Print Styles command [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Print Styles command [PRINT]

The Print Styles command displays the Print Styles dialog box, which lets you create and manage custom print styles. A print style is a group of print settings that you implement by choosing the name of the print style in the Print Style pop-up menu in the Print dialog box (File --> Print). Using print styles eliminates having to recreate complex or frequently-used print settings every time you print. Print styles are available when printing a print document to a PostScript or non-PostScript printer.


Print Styles dialog box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Print Styles dialog box [PRINT]

Edit --> Print Styles

The Print Styles dialog box lets you create, edit, duplicate, save, and delete print styles. You can also import and export print styles. The top list displays the available print styles, and the bottom displays the attributes of the selected print style.


Print Styles (list) [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Print Styles list [PRINT]

Edit --> Print Styles

The Print Styles list displays all print styles. Print styles are always created as default settings for the application — never for the document.


New button [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

New button [PRINT]

Edit --> Print Styles

The New button displays the Edit Print Style dialog box, which lets you create a new print style. You can create up to 1,000 print styles. The Edit Print Style dialog box lets you name and define a print style.


Edit button [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit button [PRINT]

Edit --> Print Styles

The Edit button displays the Edit Print Style dialog box for the print style selected in the Print Styles list. The Edit Print Style dialog box lets you modify a print style’s name and definition. You can also double-click a print style to display the Edit Print Style dialog box.


Duplicate button [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Duplicate button [PRINT]

Edit --> Print Styles

The Duplicate button creates a new copy of the print style selected in the Print Styles list. QuarkXPress automatically opens the Edit Print Style dialog box so that you can rename and edit the copied print style.


Delete button [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Delete button [PRINT]

Edit --> Print Styles

The Delete button removes the selected print style(s) from the active document. You cannot delete the Default print style.


Import button [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Import button [PRINT]

Edit --> Print Styles

The Import button lets you import a print style file that was created using the Export button. A dialog box lets you select a print style file to import. Selecting a file in the dialog box and clicking Open immediately imports the print styles.


Export button [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Export button [PRINT]

Edit --> Print Styles

The Export button lets you export the selected print styles to a file that can be used by another QuarkXPress user. An exported print style file can be imported using the Import button.

To export, select print styles in the Print Styles list and click Export. A dialog box displays, prompting you to specify the name and the location for the new print styles file. Click Save to complete the export.


Save button [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Save button [PRINT]

Edit --> Print Styles

The Save button saves changes made to any print styles in the Print Styles dialog box and closes the dialog box.


Edit Print Style dialog box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit Print Style dialog box [PRINT]

Edit --> Print Styles --> New

Clicking New, Edit, or Duplicate in the Print Styles dialog box displays the Edit Print Style dialog box, which lets you create or edit print styles.

•	The Name field lets you specify a name for a new print style or rename an existing print style.

•	Below the Name field are four tabs: Document, Setup, Output, and Options. These tabs let you specify the printing settings that will be automatically applied whenever you choose the print style in the Print Style pop-up menu in the Print dialog box (File --> Print). The controls in these four tabs are the same as those found in the Print dialog box (File menu).


Meta Tags command [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Meta Tags command [WEB]

The Meta Tags command displays the Meta Tags dialog box, which lets you create and manage sets of custom meta tags for use in Web documents. A meta tag contains information about an HTML file, but is not displayed in a Web browser. People commonly add meta tags to their Web pages so Web search engines can more easily index their Web pages.


Meta Tags dialog box [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Meta Tags dialog box [WEB]

Edit --> Meta Tags

The Meta Tags dialog box lets you create, edit, duplicate, save, and delete sets of meta tags. You can also append meta tags from other QuarkXPress Web documents. The top list displays the available meta tag sets, and the bottom displays the selected meta tag set as it will look when the document is exported as HTML.


Meta Tags (list) [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Meta Tags list [WEB]

Edit --> Meta Tags

The Meta Tags list displays all sets of meta tags for the active Web document.


New button [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

New button [WEB]

Edit --> Meta Tags

The New button displays the Edit Meta Tag Set dialog box, which lets you create a new set of meta tags.


Edit button [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit button [WEB]

Edit --> Meta Tags

The Edit button displays the Edit Meta Tag Set dialog box for the meta tag set selected in the Meta Tags list. The Edit Meta Tag Set dialog box lets you modify a meta tag set. You can also double-click a meta tag set to display the Edit Meta Tag Set dialog box.


Duplicate button [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Duplicate button [WEB]

Edit --> Meta Tags

The Duplicate button creates a new copy of the meta tag selected in the Meta Tags list. QuarkXPress automatically opens the Edit Meta Tag Set dialog box so that you can rename and edit the copied meta tag.


Delete button [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Delete button [WEB]

Edit --> Meta Tags

The Delete button removes the selected meta tag(s) or meta tag set(s) from the active document. When you delete a set that is used in the active Web document, the Delete Meta Tag Set alert displays; this gives you a chance to choose a replacement set.


Append button [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Append button [WEB]

Edit --> Meta Tags

The Append button lets you import meta tags from another document. Clicking Append displays the Append dialog box; this lets you choose a QuarkXPress document from which to append meta tags. Selecting a file in the Append dialog box and clicking Open immediately imports the meta tags.


Save button [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Save button [WEB]

Edit --> Meta Tags

The Save button saves changes made to any menus in the Meta Tags dialog box and closes the dialog box.


Edit Meta Tag Set dialog box [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit Meta Tag Set dialog box [WEB]

Edit --> Meta Tags --> New or Edit

The Edit Meta Tag Set dialog box lets you create and edit a set of meta tags. The dialog box contains the Name field, the Edit Meta Tag Set list, and the Add, Edit, Duplicate, and Delete buttons.


Name field [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Name field [WEB]

Edit --> Meta Tags --> New or Edit

The Name field lets you specify a name for the selected meta tag set.


Edit meta Tag Set (list) [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit Meta Tag Set list [WEB]

Edit --> Meta Tags --> New or Edit

The Edit Meta Tag Set list displays the tag, name, and content of the meta tags in the selected meta tag set.


Add button [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Add button [WEB]

Edit --> Meta Tags --> New or Edit

The Add button lets you create a meta tag using the New Meta Tag dialog box.


Edit button [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit button [WEB]

Edit --> Meta Tags --> New or Edit

The Edit button lets you edit a meta tag using the Edit Meta Tag dialog box.


Duplicate button [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Duplicate button [WEB]

Edit --> Meta Tags --> New or Edit

The Duplicate button creates a new copy of the meta tag selected in the Edit Meta Tag Set list.


Delete button [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Delete button [WEB]

Edit --> Meta Tags --> New or Edit

The Delete button deletes the meta tag selected in the Edit Meta Tag Set list.


New Meta Tag, Edit Meta Tag (dialog boxes) [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

New Meta Tag, Edit Meta Tag dialog boxes [WEB]

Edit --> Meta Tags --> New or Edit --> Add or Edit

The New Meta Tag and Edit Meta Tag dialog boxes let you create and edit meta tags using the Meta Tag and Name pop-up menus and fields; and the Content field.


Meta Tag (pop-up menu and field) [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Meta Tag (pop-up menu and field) [WEB]

Edit --> Meta Tags --> New or Edit --> Add or Edit

Choose an option from the Meta Tag pop-up menu or enter a value in the Meta Tag field to specify the kind of meta tag you want to create.


Name (pop-up menu and field) [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Name (pop-up menu and field) [WEB]

Edit --> Meta Tags --> New or Edit --> Add or Edit

Choose an option from the Name pop-up menu or enter a value in the Name field to specify a name for the meta tag .


Content field [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Content field [WEB]

Edit --> Meta Tags --> New or Edit --> Add or Edit

The Content field lets you specify the value of the meta tag. You can enter a single value or a list of values separated by commas.


Menus command [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Menus command [WEB]

The Menus command displays the Menus dialog box, which lets you create and manage menus for use in list controls and form pop-up menu controls. A menu contains a series of items, and each item may optionally act as a link to a URL. List controls and pop-up menu controls are components that can be used in forms that are part of Web documents.


Menus dialog box [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Menus dialog box [WEB]

Edit --> Menus

The Menus dialog box lets you create, edit, duplicate, save, and delete menus. You can also append menus from other QuarkXPress documents. The top list displays the available menus, and the bottom displays the contents of the selected menu. The Menus dialog box also contains the Menus list.


Menus (list) [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Menus list [WEB]

Edit --> Menus

The Menus list displays all sets of menus for the active Web document.


New button [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

New button [WEB]

Edit --> Menus

The New button displays the Edit Menu dialog box, which lets you create a new menu.


Edit button [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit button [WEB]

Edit --> Menus

The Edit button displays the Edit Menu dialog box for the menu selected in the Menus list. The Edit Menu dialog box lets you modify a menu’s attributes. You can also double-click a menu name to display the Edit Menu dialog box.


Duplicate button [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Duplicate button [WEB]

Edit --> Menus

The Duplicate button creates a new copy of the menu selected in the Menus list.


Delete button [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Delete button [WEB]

Edit --> Menus

The Delete button removes the selected menu(s) from the active document. When you delete a menu that is used in the active Web document, the Delete Menu alert displays, letting you choose a replacement menu.


Append button [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Append button [WEB]

Edit --> Menus

The Append button lets you import menus from another QuarkXPress Web document. The Append dialog box lets you select a file to import. Selecting a file in the dialog box and clicking Open immediately imports the menus.


Save button [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Save button [WEB]

Edit --> Menus

The Save button saves changes made to any menus in the Menus dialog box and closes the dialog box.


Edit Menu dialog box [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit Menu dialog box [WEB]

Edit --> Menu --> New or Edit

The Edit Menu dialog box lets you create and edit menus. The dialog box contains the Name field; the Navigation Menu check box; the Menu Items list; the Add, Edit, Duplicate, and Delete buttons.


Name field [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Name field [WEB]

Edit --> Menu --> New or Edit

The Name field lets you specify a name for the selected menu.


Navigation Menu check box [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Navigation Menu check box [WEB]

Edit --> Menu --> New or Edit

The Navigation Menu check box lets you specify that choosing an item from the menu causes the reader’s Web browser to open the URL specified in that item’s Value field.


Menu Items (list) [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Menu Items list [WEB]

Edit --> Menu --> New or Edit

The Menu Items list displays the name and value of each menu item associated with the selected menu. The Default column shows which menu item should be selected by default.


Add button [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Add button [WEB]

Edit --> Menu --> New or Edit

The Add button lets you create a menu item using the Menu Item dialog box.


Edit button [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit button [WEB]

Edit --> Menu --> New or Edit

The Edit button lets you edit a menu item using the Menu Item dialog box.


Duplicate button [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Duplicate button [WEB]

Edit --> Menu --> New or Edit

The Duplicate button creates a new copy of the menu item selected in the Menu Items list.


Delete button [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Delete button [WEB]

Edit --> Menu --> New or Edit

The Delete button deletes the menu item selected in the Menu Items list.


Menu Item dialog box [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Menu Item dialog box [WEB]

Edit --> Menu --> New or Edit --> Add or Edit

The Menu Item dialog box lets you create and edit menu items. The Menu Item dialog box contains the Name, Value, and Link fields; and the Use as Default check box.


Name field [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Name field [WEB]

Edit --> Menu --> New or Edit --> Add or Edit

The Name field lets you specify the name of the selected menu item as it will display in the reader’s Web browser.


Value field [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Value field [WEB]

Edit --> Menu --> New or Edit --> Add or Edit

The Value field is displayed when Navigation Menu is unchecked in the Edit Menu dialog box. The contents of this field are sent to the target application if this menu item is selected when the form is submitted.


Link field [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Link field [WEB]

Edit --> Menu --> New or Edit --> Add or Edit

The Link field is displayed when Navigation Menu is checked in the Edit Menu dialog box. This field should contain the URL to be linked to when readers choose this menu item in their Web browsers. You can enter the URL manually or click the Select (Mac OS) or Browse (Windows) button and navigate to the file.


Use as Default check box [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Use as Default check box [WEB]

Edit --> Menu --> New or Edit --> Add or Edit

The Use as Default check box lets you specify whether the selected menu item should be selected by default when the menu is viewed in the reader’s Web browser.


Style menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Style menu

If you want to make your text blue, apply a shade of color to a box, or shorten a line, the QuarkXPress Style menu allows you to make these and many other modifications in boxes, text paths, and lines. You can also modify certain types of pictures, apply style sheets, and flip contents in a box. Style menu options are different for text, pictures, and lines.


Style menu for text
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Style menu for text

When a text box or a text path is active and the Content tool is selected, the Style menu for text is available. The Style menu for text is divided into four sections:

•	The first section lists commands that can change individual characters. They apply to selected text or the text insertion point. These include Font, Size, Type Style, Color, Shade, Horizontal/Vertical Scale, Kern or Track, and Baseline Shift. These controls can also be accessed through the Character command. Character attributes that are grouped into style sheets (Edit --> Style Sheets) can be applied through the Character Style Sheet submenu. The Text to Box command is included in the first section, but is used to transform selected text rather than apply attributes to it.

•	The second section lists paragraph formats, which apply to selected paragraphs or a paragraph containing the text insertion point: Alignment, Leading, Formats, Tabs, and Rules.

The above commands are also consolidated under the Formats command. Paragraph attributes that are grouped into style sheets (Edit --> Style Sheets) can be applied using the Paragraph Style Sheet submenu.

•	The third section lists commands that alter all the text in a selected text box or text path: Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical.

•	The fourth section lists commands that let you create, apply, and delete hyperlinks and anchors.

NOTE: Not all of the options in this menu are available for text in HTML text boxes.


Font submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Font submenu

Style menu

A font is a complete set of characters in one typeface, such as Times Roman. The Font submenu lets you choose from a list of fonts that are installed and available on your system.

TIP: Windows only: By indicating several font types in the Font submenu, QuarkXPress helps you determine what types of fonts you have installed. TrueType font names are preceded by a "TT" icon; Type 1 font names are preceded by a "T1" icon, and OpenType font names are preceded by an "O" icon.


Size submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Size submenu

Style menu

The Size submenu lets you choose from a list of common point sizes for text. The Other option displays the Character Attributes dialog box, which lets you enter a font size for text in the Size field.

Although you can enter a size in any supported measurement system, the font size will be displayed in points the next time you open the dialog box.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
2 pt to 720 pt	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001
If an automatic drop cap is specified, the font size is displayed as a percentage.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
10% to 400%	percent	.1


Type Style submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Type Style submenu

Style menu

The Type Style submenu lets you choose from a list of type styles built into QuarkXPress:

•	Choosing Plain automatically deselects all other type styles.

•	Choosing Bold accesses the bold version of the current font (if installed) or simulates bold type.

•	Choosing Italic accesses the italic version of the current font (if installed) or simulates italic.

•	Choosing Underline underlines all characters and spaces; does not underline tabs.

•	Choosing Word Underline underlines all characters except spaces (space, en space, half-en space, and punctuation space) and tabs. (Not available in HTML text boxes.)

•	Choosing Strike Through draws a 1-point line through characters; does not strike through tabs. The line is placed above the baseline at one third of the ascent height of the largest character on each line. Some fonts define a custom strike-through position, which overrides the QuarkXPress default position.

•	Choosing Outline outlines characters. (This option is not available in HTML text  boxes.)

•	Choosing Shadow creates a drop shadow behind each character that is proportional to the size of the type. (This option is not available in HTML text boxes.)

•	Choosing All Caps changes all lowercase letters to uppercase letters.

•	Choosing Small Caps changes all lowercase letters to smaller versions of uppercase letters. The default scale of small caps characters (75% of normal uppercase letters) can be modified in the Character pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences). (This option is not available in HTML text  boxes.)

•	Choosing Superscript offsets characters above the baseline by the amount specified in the Character pane of the Preferences dialog box. The default offset amount is 33%. The default scale of superscript characters (100% of the current font size) can be modified in the Character pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences).

•	Choosing Subscript offsets characters below the baseline by the amount specified in the Character pane of the Preferences dialog box. The default offset amount is 33%. The default scale of subscript characters (100% of the current font size) can be modified in the Character pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences).

•	Choosing Superior raises characters so their ascents align with the cap height (the distance between the baseline and the top of a capitalized letter) of the current font. The default scale of superior characters (50% of the current font size) can be modified in the Character pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences). (This option is not available in HTML text boxes.)

TIP: You can apply type styles to text in almost any combination. However, Underline and Word Underline, All Caps and Small Caps, and Superscript and Subscript are mutually exclusive styles, meaning only one of the pair can be applied.


Color submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Color submenu

Style menu

The Color submenu lets you choose from a list of colors defined in the Colors dialog box (Edit --> Colors). The list includes custom colors, default colors, and spot colors imported with EPS picture files.


Shade submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Shade submenu

Style menu

The Shade submenu lets you choose a tint value in 10% increments. The Other option displays the Character Attributes dialog box, which lets you enter a value in the selected Shade field.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 100%	percent	.1


Horizontal/Vertical Scale command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Horizontal/Vertical Scale command

Style menu

Scaling compresses or expands characters. The Horizontal/Vertical Scale command displays the Character Attributes dialog box, which lets you choose Horizontal or Vertical scaling from the Scale pop-up menu and enter a value in the Scale field. You can apply either Horizontal or Vertical scaling, but not both. (Horizontal and vertical scaling are not available for HTML text boxes.)

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
25% to 400%	percent	.1


Kern command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Kern command

Style menu

Kerning adjusts the amount of space between two characters. The Kern command displays the Character Attributes dialog box, which lets you enter a value in the selected Kern Amount field. Positive values increase space between characters; negative values decrease it. (Kerning is not available for HTML text boxes.)

NOTE: The Kern command is available when the text insertion point is between two characters. When a range of text is selected, Track replaces Kern in the Style menu.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
±500	.005 (1/200) em space	.001


Track command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Track command

Style menu

Tracking adjusts the amount of space to the right of each character in a selected range. The Track command displays the Character Attributes dialog box, which lets you enter a value in the selected Track Amount field. Positive values increase space between characters; negative values decrease it. (Tracking is not available for HTML text boxes.)

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
±500	.005 (1/200) em space	.001
NOTE: The Track command is available when a range of text is selected. When no text is selected, Kern replaces Track in the Style menu.


Baseline Shift command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Baseline Shift command

Style menu

Baseline shifting moves selected characters above or below their baselines without affecting leading. The Baseline Shift command displays the Character Attributes dialog box, which lets you enter a value in the selected Baseline Shift field. Positive values shift text up; negative values shift text down. (This option is not available in HTML text boxes.)

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
±3 times font size	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001


Character command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Character command

Style menu

The Character command displays the Character Attributes dialog box, which lets you specify multiple character attributes.


Character Attributes dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Character Attributes dialog box

Style --> Character

Each control in the Character Attributes dialog box has the same effect as its corresponding Style menu command. To use the controls:

•	Choose a font from the Font pop-up menu or enter the first few characters of the name in the field until the name is recognized.

•	Choose a size from the Size pop-up menu or enter a value in the field.

•	Choose a color from the Color pop-up menu.

•	Choose a shade from the Shade pop-up menu or enter a percentage value in the field.

•	Choose Horizontal or Vertical from the Scale pop-up menu and enter a percentage value in the field. (This option is not available in HTML text boxes.)

•	Enter a value in the Kern Amount field. (Kern Amount is available when the text insertion point is between two characters.) (This option is not available in HTML text boxes).

•	Enter a value in the Track Amount field. (Track Amount is available when characters are selected.) (This option is not available in HTML text boxes.)

•	Enter a value in the Baseline Shift field. (This option is not available in HTML text boxes.)

•	Check Plain or combinations of the other type style buttons in the Type Style area. A gray button indicates that a style has been applied to at least one character, but not all characters, in selected text.

TIP: Underline and Word Underline, All Caps and Small Caps, and Superscript and Subscript are mutually exclusive type styles, meaning only one of the pair can be applied.


Character Style Sheet submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Character Style Sheet submenu

Style menu

Character style sheets let you apply multiple character attributes in one step. The Character Style Sheet submenu lets you choose from a list of character style sheets defined for the document.

•	No Style is a feature that removes the character style sheet from selected text while retaining character attributes. When you apply a new character style sheet after applying No Style, none of the previous formatting remains.

•	Normal is the default character style sheet that is included in all new paragraph style sheets. You can edit the Normal character style sheet using the Style Sheets dialog box (Edit --> Style Sheets).

•	Custom style sheets are any other character style sheets defined in the Style Sheets dialog box (Edit --> Style Sheets).


Text to Box command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Text to Box command

Style menu

The Text to Box command creates a Bézier picture box shaped just like the selected characters. Text to Box works with PostScript Type 1 fonts (with Adobe Type Manager installed), or with TrueType fonts. Large text sizes work best. You can import a picture into the new box or even turn the new box into a text box to have "text within text."

If you want the box to flow with the surrounding text, press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) while you choose Style --> Text to Box. This replaces the selected characters with an anchored version of your new Bézier box.


Alignment submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Alignment submenu

Style menu

The Alignment submenu lets you choose an alignment for paragraphs:

•	Choosing Left aligns paragraphs with the left indentation.

•	Choosing Centered centers each line between the left and right indentations.

•	Choosing Right aligns paragraphs with the right indentation.

•	Choosing Justified aligns paragraphs with the left and right indentations; the last line may be shorter than the width of the paragraph. (This option is not available in HTML text boxes.)

•	Choosing Forced aligns all lines in a paragraph, including the last line, with the left and right indents. (This option is not available in HTML text boxes.)

NOTE: Paragraphs are aligned within the boundaries established by the First Line, Left Indent, and Right Indent values specified in the Formats tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box (Style --> Formats). If the paragraph alignment is set to Centered, the First Line value is added to any line indentation caused by the centered alignment.


Leading command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Leading command

Style menu

QuarkXPress defines leading as the vertical space between two or more lines of text.

The Leading command displays the Formats tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box, which lets you enter a value in the selected Leading field using one of three types of leading: absolute leading, incremental auto leading, or percentage-based auto leading.

If absolute leading is applied, leading is measured from baseline to baseline, unless you set the Leading Mode to Word Processing in the Paragraph pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences). In Word Processing mode, leading is measured from the tops of ascenders on one line of text to the tops of ascenders on the line above. When incremental or percentage-based leading is applied, leading is always measured from ascender to ascender.

•	Regardless of the fonts and sizes used, absolute leading places the amount of space that you specify in the Leading field between lines of text. Absolute leading is measured from baseline to baseline.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
.001 pt to 1,080 pt	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001
•	Incremental auto leading combines a base amount of auto leading with an absolute value specified in the Leading field. Entering a plus (+) or minus (–) sign before the value adds or subtracts that value from the largest font size in the line. For example, applying a leading value of +2 to 12-point text results in 14-point leading. Incremental auto leading is measured from ascender to ascender.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
± .001 pt to 1,080 pt	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001
•	Entering the word "auto" or a "0" in the Leading field tells QuarkXPress to use the value in the Auto Leading field of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Paragraph pane) to decide whether percentage-based or incremental auto leading occurs. The default —percentage-based — uses a fixed percentage of the largest font size in the selected text or active paragraph. This percentage is added to the base amount of auto leading. The resulting value is the total amount of leading between an auto-leaded line and the line above it. The default value for percentage-based auto leading is 20%. Percentage-based auto leading is measured from ascender to ascender.

NOTE: Auto leading is sometimes called relative leading because it spaces each line separately according to the design and size of the fonts used. If fonts or font sizes are mixed and matched, an auto-leaded paragraph may have a different amount of space between each line. Auto leading starts with a base amount of leading, which QuarkXPress determines by looking at the user-specified font size, then calculating the ascent and descent values built into the fonts used in each line.


Formats command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Formats command

Style menu

The Formats command displays the Formats tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box, which lets you specify formats that affect entire paragraphs.


Formats dialog box tab
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Formats dialog box tab

Style --> Formats

The Paragraph Attributes dialog box Formats tab lets you specify indentations, leading (line spacing), paragraph spacing, drop caps, alignment, H&Js, locking to the baseline grid, and whether to keep lines together or keep them with the next paragraph. Not all of these controls apply to text paths.


Left Indent, First Line, Right Indent fields
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Left Indent, First Line, Right Indent fields

Style --> Formats

The indentation fields let you indent paragraphs from the left and right edges of a text box, column, or text path, and create hanging indentations.

•	The Left Indent field specifies the distance from the left edge of a column, text box, or text path to the left edge of a paragraph.

•	The First Line field specifies the distance from the Left Indent to the beginning of the first line of a paragraph. Enter a positive value to indent the first line to the right of the Left Indent. To indent the first line to the left of the Left Indent (a hanging indentation), enter a negative value in this field after entering a positive value in the Left Indent field. If you are specifying formats for a text path, the field works the same way; however, you cannot have more than one line of text on a text path.

•	The Right Indent field specifies the distance from the right edge of a column, text box, or text path to the right edge of a paragraph.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
column width	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001
NOTE: The Text Inset value in the Text tab of the Modify dialog box (Item --> Modify) is added to the Left Indent and Right Indent values for the edges of a box. The Text Inset value does not affect the inner columns of a text box.

•	Indentations can also be specified visually using the tab ruler that displays at the top of the active column whenever the Paragraph Attributes dialog box is open. Drag the icons at the top of the ruler to adjust the Left Indent, First Line Indent, or Right Indent. (If the active item cannot display the tab ruler, the tab ruler is displayed in the Tabs tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box.)


Leading field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Leading field

Style --> Formats

The Leading field lets you specify the amount of space between lines of text.


Space Before, Space After fields
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Space Before, Space After fields

Style --> Formats

The Space Before and Space After fields let you specify how much space precedes and follows a paragraph. The space between two paragraphs is the sum of the Space After the first paragraph and the Space Before the second paragraph.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 15"	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001
NOTE: Space Before is not applied when a paragraph falls at the top of a column. Space After is not applied when a paragraph falls at the bottom of a column. Neither are applied on text paths.


Alignment pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Alignment pop-up menu

Style --> Formats

The Alignment pop-up menu works exactly like the Alignment submenu (Style menu), letting you choose an alignment for paragraphs:

•	Choosing Left aligns paragraphs with the left indentation.

•	Choosing Centered centers each line between the left and right indentations.

•	Choosing Right aligns paragraphs with the right indentation.

•	Choosing Justified aligns paragraphs with the left and right indentations; the last line may be shorter than the width of the paragraph. (Justified alignment is not available in HTML text boxes.)

•	Choosing Forced aligns all lines in a paragraph, including the last line, with the left and right indentations. (Forced alignment is not available in HTML text boxes.)

NOTE: Paragraphs are aligned within the bounds established by the First Line, Left Indent, and Right Indent values specified in the Formats tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box (Style menu). If the paragraph alignment is set to Centered, the First Line value is added to any line indentation caused by the centered alignment.


H&J pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

H&J pop-up menu

Style --> Formats

H&Js (hyphenation and justification specifications) are specifications that control the hyphenation and spacing of text. The H&J pop-up menu lets you choose from a list of specifications defined in the H&Js dialog box (Edit --> H&Js).

NOTE: Hyphenation and justification specifications cannot be applied in HTML text boxes.


Drop Caps area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Drop Caps area

Style --> Formats

The Drop Caps check box lets you specify an initial cap for a paragraph. Checking Drop Caps lets you use the Character Count and Line Count fields.

•	Enter a value in the Character Count field to specify the number of drop cap characters (from 1 to 127).

•	Enter a value in the Line Count field to specify the number of lines the character(s) drop (from 2 to 16).


Keep Lines Together area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keep Lines Together area

Style --> Formats

The Keep Lines Together check box lets you prevent widows and orphans by specifying how paragraphs break at the bottom of columns. (In QuarkXPress, a widow is defined as the last line of a paragraph that falls at the top of a column; an orphan is defined as the first line of a paragraph that falls at the bottom of a column.) Checking Keep Lines Together lets you use the All Lines in Paragraph and Start/End options.

•	Checking All Lines in Paragraph specifies that a paragraph will not break at the bottom of a column. If all the lines in a paragraph do not fit in one column, the entire paragraph is carried to the next column.

•	The values in the Start and End fields specify the minimum number of lines to remain at the bottom of a column (Start) and the minimum number to be carried over to the next column (End). If there are not enough lines in the paragraph to meet the Start and End criteria, the entire paragraph is carried to the next column.


Keep with Next ¶ check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keep with Next ¶ check box

Style --> Formats

The Keep with Next Paragraph check box lets you force a paragraph to flow with the following paragraph (for example, to ensure that a subheading stays connected with the first related paragraph).


Lock to Baseline Grid check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Lock to Baseline Grid check box

Style --> Formats

Using a baseline grid aligns paragraphs horizontally across columns and text boxes. The Lock to Baseline Grid check box lets you lock selected paragraphs to the grid. (This check box is not available for HTML text boxes.)

NOTE: The grid is defined in the Baseline Grid area in the Paragraph pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences) and displayed using the Show Baseline Grid command (View menu). To see the baseline grid in an active text box, Guides must be set to In Front in the General pane of the Preferences dialog box.


Tabs command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Tabs command

Style menu

QuarkXPress lets you specify an unlimited number of tab stops per column. By default, each text box contains tab stops that occur every half-inch, starting from the farthest-right custom tab stop. If there are no custom tab stops, the invisible default tab stops start one half-inch into the paragraph and continue across. The Tabs command displays the tab ruler and the Tabs tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box. (This option is not available in HTML text boxes.)


Tab ruler area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Tab ruler area

Style --> Tabs

The tab ruler, displayed at the top of the active column whenever the Formats or Tabs tabs of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box are displayed, lets you specify indentations and create and move tab stops visually. If the active item cannot display the tab ruler, the tab ruler is displayed in the Tabs tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box.

Tab stops are displayed with icons that represent the type of tab stop alignment: Left, Center, Right, Decimal, Comma, or Align On. You can use the ruler to:

•	Specify indentations by dragging the icons at the top of the ruler to adjust the Left Indent, First Line Indent, or Right Indent values.

•	Create tab stops by clicking on the ruler to create tab stops; the current alignment button and Fill Characters settings in the Paragraph Attributes dialog box apply to the tab stop.

•	Edit tab stops by clicking a tab stop to select it and dragging the selected tab stop to move it. You can also change the alignment button and Fill Characters settings in the dialog box while the tab stop is selected.

•	Delete tab stops by clicking a tab to select it, then dragging it off the ruler. Option+click (Mac OS) or Alt+click (Windows) the ruler to delete all tab stops.


Tabs dialog box tab
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Tabs dialog box tab

Style --> Tabs

The Tabs tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box lets you specify the alignment, position, and fill character for tab stops. The Set and Clear All buttons let you save or remove the current tab settings.


Alignment buttons
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Alignment buttons

Style --> Tabs

The alignment buttons let you choose an alignment for a tab stop.

•	Choosing Left aligns tabbed text flush left along a tab stop.

•	Choosing Center centers tabbed text along a tab stop.

•	Choosing Right aligns tabbed text flush right along a tab stop. To align characters flush along the right indent of a column, regardless of other tab stops, place the Text Insertion bar immediately to the left of the characters and press Option+Tab (Mac OS) or Shift+Tab (Windows).

•	Choosing Decimal positions tabbed text by aligning decimal points (periods) along a tab stop.

•	Choosing Comma aligns commas in tabbed text along a tab stop.

•	Choosing Align On aligns occurrences of a user-specified character in tabbed text along a tab stop. The Align On option lets you enter this character in the Align On field. You can enter any printing character.

NOTE: If you choose Decimal, Comma, or Align On, and the text (usually a number) doesn’t contain a period, comma, or specified alignment character, the text aligns on the first non-numeric character following the text (such as a tab, space, or carriage return).


Position field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Position field

Style --> Tabs

The Position field lets you numerically specify tab stops. Tab stops are measured from the Text Inset value on the left edge of a box or column. New tab stops are immediately displayed on the tab ruler.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
column width	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001
If you click Set, the tab stop is deselected, allowing you to enter values for the next tab stop. Click Apply to see the effects of a new tab stop on any existing tab characters in the active paragraph(s).


Fill Characters field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Fill Characters field

Style --> Tabs

A fill character, such as a dot leader in a table of contents, "fills" the space between a tab character and the next tab stop. The Fill Characters field lets you specify any character to be repeated, or any two characters to alternate (one of the characters can be a space). Fill characters are aligned flush right with the tab stop position. (Fill characters cannot be invisible characters; they must be printed characters.)


Align On field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Align On field

Style --> Tabs

Available when the Align On button is chosen, the Align On field lets you enter any printing character to align tabbed text along.


Set button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Set button

Style --> Tabs

If a tab stop is selected in the tab ruler displayed above the active column, you can click Set to deselect it. This allows you to move on and enter values for the next tab stop.


Clear All button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Clear All button

Style --> Tabs

The Clear All button deletes all custom tab stops from the active paragraph(s). The invisible default tab stops that QuarkXPress places at half-inch increments are reset to their original positions.


Rules command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Rules command

Style menu

The Rules feature lets you place horizontal lines above or below a paragraph so that the lines always flow with the text. The Rules command displays the Rules tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box.


Rules dialog box tab
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Rules dialog box tab

Style menu

The Rules tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box lets you specify the length, position, offset, style, width, color, and shade of paragraph rules, as well as whether you want a rule above or below selected paragraphs.


Rule Above, Rule Below (areas)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Rule Above, Rule Below areas

Style --> Rules

The Rule Above and Rule Below areas let you specify whether you want horizontal lines above or below a paragraph. Checking Rule Above or Rule Below gives you access to controls for specifying the placement and style of the rules.


Length pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Length pop-up menu

Style --> Rules --> Rule Above, Rule Below checked

The Length pop-up menu lets you specify whether rules fit within the paragraph indentations or match the length of the text.

•	Choosing Indents specifies a rule that extends from the paragraph’s left indentation to its right indentation. Indentations are specified in the Formats tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box (Style --> Formats).

•	Choosing Text specifies a rule above that matches the length of the first line of text in the paragraph and a rule below that matches the length of the last line of text in the paragraph.

NOTE: The From Left and From Right values in the Rules tab of the Paragraph Attributes dialog box apply whether you choose Indents or Text.


From Left, From Right fields
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

From Left, From Right fields

Style --> Rules --> Rule Above, Rule Below checked

The From Left and From Right fields let you specify the placement of a rule in relation to the specified length.

•	The From Left field specifies the distance between the left end of a rule and either the left indentation of the paragraph (Length set to Indents) or the left end of a line of text (Length set to Text).

•	The From Right field specifies the distance between the right end of a rule and either the right indentation of the paragraph (Length set to Indents) or the right end of a line of text (Length set to Text).

•	Larger positive values make a rule shorter. Smaller positive values make a rule longer. (You can enter negative values if an indentation is applied to the paragraph.)

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
column width	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001


Offset field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Offset field

Style --> Rules --> Rule Above, Rule Below checked

The Offset field lets you specify the amount of vertical space between a paragraph and a rule. You can enter an absolute value or a percentage. (The Offset field is not available in HTML text boxes.)

•	Absolute values are measured from the baseline of the first line of a paragraph to the bottom of a rule above, and from the baseline of the last line of a paragraph to the top of a rule below. Positive values move the rule farther away from the text. Negative values move the rule closer to the text. Using an absolute negative offset value for a rule above, you can overlap white text with a dark-colored rule to create reverse type.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 15" or –1/2 rule width	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001
•	Specifying a percentage in the Offset field makes the rule act like an auto-leaded line of text, which prevents text from overlapping. The 100% value in the Offset field is defined by the total distance between paragraphs. For example, a 30% Offset for a Rule Above adds 30% of the total interparagraph space below the center of the rule. The default rule Offset percentage is 0%.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 100%	percent	.1


Style pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Style pop-up menu

Style --> Rules --> Rule Above, Rule Below checked

The Style pop-up menu lets you choose from a list of default and any custom line styles you created in the Dashes & Stripes dialog box (Edit --> Dashes & Stripes). In an HTML text box, only two styles are available: Solid and Solid 3D.


Width (field and Pop-up Menu)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Width (field and pop-up menu)

Style --> Rules --> Rule Above, Rule Below checked

The Width field and pop-up menu lets you choose from a list of line widths or enter a line width in the field. If you choose the Hairline option, QuarkXPress prints the rule at .125 point to a PostScript imagesetter, but wider on a laser printer. Entering a "0" in any line width field specifies a Hairline value.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 864 pt	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001


Color pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Color pop-up menu

Style --> Rules --> Rule Above, Rule Below checked

The Color pop-up menu lets you choose from a list of colors defined in the Colors dialog box (Edit --> Colors). The list includes default colors, custom colors, and spot colors imported with EPS picture files.


Shade field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Shade field

Style --> Rules --> Rule Above, Rule Below checked

The Shade field and pop-up menu let you choose a shade value in 10% increments or enter a value in the field.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 100%	percent	.1


Paragraph Style Sheet submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Paragraph Style Sheet submenu

Style menu

Paragraph style sheets let you apply multiple paragraph attributes in one step. The Paragraph Style Sheet submenu lets you choose from a list of paragraph style sheets defined for the document in the Style Sheets dialog box (Edit --> Style Sheets).

•	No Style is a feature that removes the paragraph style sheet and character style sheet links from a paragraph while retaining the applied paragraph and character attributes. When you apply a new paragraph style sheet after applying No Style, all current character attributes and paragraph formats are stripped from the text.

•	Normal is the default paragraph style sheet for all text boxes and text paths. You can edit the Normal paragraph style sheet using the Style Sheets dialog box (Edit --> Style Sheets).

•	Custom style sheets are any other paragraph style sheets defined in the Style Sheets dialog box (Edit --> Style Sheets).


Flip Horizontal, Flip Vertical, Flip Text commands
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Flip Horizontal, Flip Vertical, Flip Text commands

Style menu

•	The Flip Horizontal command flips all the text in an active text box from right to left, creating a mirror image of the original. (The Flip Horizontal command is not available in HTML text boxes.)

•	The Flip Vertical command flips all the text in an active text box from bottom to top, creating an upside-down mirror image of the original. (The Flip Vertical command is not available in HTML text boxes.)

•	The Flip Text command replaces the Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical commands when a text path is active. Flip Text places text on the opposite side of the line, starting from the opposite endpoint. For example, if you create a circular text path with text flowing on the outside of the circle, Flip Text positions text on the inside of the circle. Text alignment is not affected.


Hyperlink submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Hyperlink submenu

Style menu

When you export a document as a PDF or an HTML page, a hyperlink becomes a clickable area that takes the reader to a particular destination (usually a different document or a different part of the same document). The Hyperlink submenu lets you choose from a list of destinations defined for the document in the Hyperlinks palette (View --> Show Hyperlinks). The list includes:

•	The New command displays the New Hyperlink dialog box. If text is selected when you choose this option, that text becomes a hyperlink pointing to the destination you specify in the New Hyperlink dialog box. If no text is selected when you choose this option, you can create a destination that may be applied to text or a picture later.

•	The Edit command displays the Edit Hyperlink dialog box and lets you edit the destination associated with the selected text.

•	The Delete command removes the destination associated with the selected text.

•	The bottom section of the Hyperlink submenu displays all the destinations and anchors defined in the Hyperlink submenu or the Hyperlinks palette (View --> Show Hyperlinks).


Anchor submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Anchor submenu

Style menu

When you export a document as a PDF or an HTML page, an anchor becomes a destination in the document that a hyperlink can point to. The Anchor submenu lets you assign one of a list of unused anchor names defined for the document in the Hyperlinks palette (View --> Show Hyperlinks) to the selected text, the text insertion point, or selected picture. The list includes:

•	The New command displays the New Anchor dialog box. If text is selected when you choose this option, the new anchor is assigned to the selected text range or the text insertion point.

•	The Edit command displays the Edit Anchor dialog box and lets you edit the name of the anchor associated with the selected text range or text insertion point.

•	The Delete command removes the anchor associated with the selected text or picture box. That anchor can later be assigned to a different range of text or text insertion point.

•	The bottom section of the Anchor submenu displays all the anchors that are not yet associated with a text range or text insertion point.


Style menu for pictures
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Style menu for pictures

When a picture box containing a picture is active and the Content tool or the Item tool is selected, the Style menu for pictures is available. The commands in the Style menu for pictures affect the way pictures display and print; they do not affect the actual picture files. The Style menu for pictures is divided into five sections:

•	The first section lists content attributes, which apply to the picture: Color, Shade, and Negative. Click here to see which picture formats you can apply these attributes to.

•	The second section lets you control the contrast and halftone specifications of your picture. Click here to see which picture formats you can apply these attributes to.

•	The third section lists commands for flipping the contents of an active picture box: Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical.

•	The fourth section lists commands for centering, scaling a picture in the picture box, resizing the picture to fit within the picture box, and resizing the box to fit the picture.

•	The fifth section contains commands that let you create, apply, and delete hyperlinks and anchors.


Modifiable picture file formats
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Modifiable picture file formats

The availability of the commands in the Style menu for pictures varies depending on the file format of the active picture.

Picture Type		Color	Shade	Negative	Contrast	Halftone
EPS/DCS		no	no	no	no	no
GIF		†	†	yes	yes	no
JPEG (*.JPG)
	grayscale	yes	yes	yes	yes	yes
	color		†	yes	yes	no
PhotoCD		no	no	yes	yes	no
PICT (*.PCT)
	1-bit	yes	yes	no	no	yes
	grayscale	yes	yes	yes	yes	yes
	color	†	†	yes	yes	no
TIFF (*.TIF)
	1-bit	yes	yes	yes	no	yes
	grayscale	yes	yes	yes	yes	yes
	color	†	†	yes	yes	no
Windows bitmap (*.BMP)
	1-bit	yes	yes	yes	no	yes
	Grayscale	yes	yes	yes	yes	yes
	Color	†	†	yes	yes	no
WMF		no	no	no	no	no
† Adjustable through the Picture Contrast Specifications dialog box (Style --> Contrast).

NOTE: When a Windows Metafile picture is imported into QuarkXPress for Mac OS, it is transformed into a PICT.


Color submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Color submenu

Style menu

The Color submenu lets you choose from a list of colors defined in the Colors dialog box (Edit --> Colors). The list includes custom colors, default colors, and spot colors imported with EPS picture files.


Shade submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Shade submenu

Style menu

The Shade submenu lets you choose a value in 10% increments. The Other option displays the Picture tab of the Modify dialog box, which lets you enter the maximum shade percentage in the selected Shade field.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 100%	percent	.1


Negative command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Negative command

Style menu

The Negative command creates a true negative of a picture’s contrast. If you have made changes to the contrast curve using the Picture Contrast Specifications dialog box (Style --> Contrast), these changes are calculated before the negative effect is applied.


Contrast command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Contrast command

Style menu

The Contrast command displays the Picture Contrast Specifications dialog box, which shows the picture’s contrast curve and the tools you can use to modify the curve.


Picture Contrast Specifications dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Picture Contrast Specifications dialog box

Style --> Contrast

The Picture Contrast Specifications dialog box lets you modify a picture’s contrast curve using the Contrast Curve area, the Contrast tools, and the Negative check box. The Model and Color options in the dialog box are not available for grayscale pictures.


Contrast curve area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Contrast Curve area

Style --> Contrast

The Contrast Curve area adjusts a picture’s contrast by changing the relationship between input (original) contrast and output (modified) contrast.

•	The Input (horizontal) axis is the contrast value of the original picture. In a grayscale picture, the left side of the Input axis represents highlights (lighter shades) while the right side represents shadows in the input.

•	The Output (vertical) axis is the modified contrast value. In a grayscale picture, the lower portion of the Output axis represents lighter shades while the upper portion represents darker shades.

A combination of the two axes results in a graphical curve. For example, a 10% boost to the darkness of a grayscale picture’s highlights appears as a peak at the lower-left part of the curve.

NOTE: When the curve is a 45-degree line from 0 to 1, input contrast equals output contrast. This is the normal contrast curve, indicating that the picture’s contrast has not been modified in QuarkXPress.


Contrast tools area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Contrast tools area

Style --> Contrast

The contrast tools let you modify the curve in various ways:

•	Use the Hand tool to drag the entire curve on the contrast graph. When you move the curve against one of the graph’s edges, it becomes flattened. You can constrain a curve’s movements horizontally or vertically by pressing Shift while dragging the curve.

•	Use the Pencil tool to draw a new curve or to modify an existing curve in a freehand manner.

•	Use the Line tool to make linear adjustments to a curve. You can constrain modifications to a contrast curve to 0, 45, or 90 degrees by pressing Shift while using the Line tool.

•	Use the Posterizer tool to place handles between the 10% increments marked on the horizontal axis. By dragging the handles up and down, you can increase or decrease the input-to-output relationship in tonal range increments of 10% .

•	Use the Spike tool to place handles on the 10% increments marked on the horizontal axis. You can drag the handles up and down to create spikes.

•	Use the Normal Contrast tool to reset the curve to the unmodified contrast position.

•	Use the High Contrast tool to apply a high contrast curve to the graph automatically.

•	Use the Posterized Contrast tool to apply a posterized curve to the graph automatically.

•	Use the Inversion tool (to flip a curve upside down. Clicking the Inversion tool produces a negative of the curve displayed in the graph. (The Inversion tool does not necessarily create a true negative of the original.)


Negative check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Negative check box

Style --> Contrast

The Negative check box creates a true negative of the dialog box’s final picture output. When you check Negative, you will not see any change in your contrast curve, but you will see the picture preview update on-screen when you click OK or Apply. If you have made changes to the contrast curve, these changes are calculated before the negative effect is applied. Checking this box has the same effect as choosing Negative from the Style menu.


Model pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Model pop-up menu

Style --> Contrast

If the active picture box contains a color picture, the Model and Color areas are available. The Model area lets you select a color model to use when modifying the contrast of a color picture: HSB, RGB, CMY, or CMYK.


Color area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Color area

Style --> Contrast

If the active picture box contains a color picture, the Model and Color areas are available. The Color area displays a check box for each component of the selected model. For example, if RGB is selected, Red, Green, and Blue will be available as check boxes in the Color area.

The graph displays a curve for each of the selected components. When contrast for all components is set to normal, the components’ curves are stacked on top of each other. The front (visible) curve represents the first component listed in the Color area. Checking only one color component lets you modify the curve for that component independently of the others.

When only one color component is checked, a color spectrum or shade strip displays along the graph’s axes. These strips serve as a visual cue to the distribution of ranges on the graph. The appearance of these strips will change according to the selected model and color component.


Halftone command [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Halftone command [PRINT]

Style menu

The Halftone command displays the Picture Halftone Specifications (Mac OS) or Picture Halftone (Windows) dialog box, which lets you define custom screening values for an active picture.


Picture Halftone Specifications (dialog box — Mac OS), Picture Halftone (dialog box — Windows) [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Picture Halftone Specifications (dialog box — Mac OS), Picture Halftone (dialog box — Windows) [PRINT]

Style --> Halftone

The Picture Halftone Specifications (Mac OS) or Picture Halftone (Windows) dialog box lets you control the lines per inch, angle, and dot pattern for a halftone screen.

A halftone is a reproduction of a continuous tone photograph, traditionally created by photographing the picture through a crossline or contact screen that contains grid pattern gradations. Gradations of tone are simulated using dots or other shapes of varying sizes. The dialog box controls let you specify a screen’s angle, pattern, and lines per inch.


Frequency field [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Frequency field [PRINT]

Style --> Halftone

Enter a value for the lines per inch, or frequency, of the printed halftone, or choose one of the common line frequencies from the pop-up menu (Default, 60, 85, 100, 133, and 150). If Default is chosen in the Frequency field, QuarkXPress uses the value specified in the Output tab of the Print dialog box (File --> Print).

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
15 to 400 lpi	lines per inch (lpi)	.001


Angle field [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Angle field [PRINT]

Style --> Halftone

Enter a value for the angle of the screen or choose one of the common angles from the pop-up menu (Default, 0, 15, 45, 75, 90, and 105). If Default is chosen, QuarkXPress uses the value specified in the Output tab of the Print dialog box (File --> Print).

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
±360 degrees	degrees	.001


Function pop-up menu [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Function pop-up menu [PRINT]

Style --> Halftone

Choose one of six patterns for the custom halftone screen:

•	Choosing Default uses the setting specified in the Output tab of the Print dialog box (File --> Print).

•	The Dot pattern uses a round spot to create the halftone screen. This pattern is used in most output.

•	The Line pattern uses straight lines to create the halftone screen. The width of the line varies depending on your Frequency setting. (The Line function is not the same as the line frequency.)

•	The Ellipse pattern uses an oval spot to create the halftone screen.

•	The Square pattern uses a square spot to create the halftone screen. This function may look best at very low screen frequencies.

•	The Ordered Dither pattern is optimized for printing to a laser printer or when you are producing multiple copies by photocopying rather than by printing.

NOTE: If your output device cannot reproduce screen angles or frequencies that match your specifications, it will print halftones at the angle and frequency that are closest to the values you specify in the Frequency and Angle fields.


Flip Horizontal command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Flip Horizontal command

Style menu

The Flip Horizontal command flips the picture in the active box from left to right, creating a mirror image of the original.


Flip Vertical command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Flip Vertical command

Style menu

The Flip Vertical command flips the picture in the active box from bottom to top, creating an upside-down mirror image of the original.


Center Picture command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Center Picture command

Style menu

The Center Picture command places a picture in the middle of the picture box.


Fit Picture To Box command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Fit Picture To Box command

Style menu

The Fit Picture To Box command scales the picture so that it extends to each edge of the picture box.


Fit Picture To Box (Proportionally) command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Fit Picture To Box (Proportionally) command

Style menu

The Fit Picture To Box (Proportionally) command scales the picture to the size of the box while retaining the picture’s original proportions.


Fit Box To Picture command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Fit Box To Picture command

Style menu

The Fit Box To Picture command resizes the picture box to the size of the picture.


Hyperlink submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Hyperlink submenu

Style menu

When you export a document as a PDF or an HTML page, a hyperlink becomes a clickable area that takes the reader to a particular destination (usually a different document or a different part of the same document). The Hyperlinks submenu lets you choose from a list of destinations defined for the document in the Hyperlinks palette (View --> Show Hyperlinks). The list includes:

•	The New command displays the New Hyperlink dialog box. The selected picture or text becomes a hyperlink pointing to the destination you specify in the New Hyperlink dialog box.

•	The Edit command displays the Edit Hyperlink dialog box and lets you edit the destination associated with the selected picture box.

•	The Delete command removes the destination associated with the selected picture box.

•	The bottom section of the Hyperlink submenu lists all the destinations and anchors defined in the Hyperlinks palette (View --> Show Hyperlinks).


Anchor submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Anchor submenu

Style menu

When you export a document as a PDF or an HTML page, an anchor becomes a destination in the document that a hyperlink can point to. The Anchor submenu lets you assign one of a list of unused anchor names defined for the document in the Hyperlinks palette (View --> Hyperlinks) to the selected picture.

•	The New command displays the New Anchor dialog box. When you choose this option, the new anchor is assigned to the selected picture box.

•	The Edit command displays the Edit Anchor dialog box and lets you edit the name of the anchor associated with the selected picture box.

•	The Delete command removes the anchor associated with the selected picture box. That anchor can then be assigned to a different picture box later on.

•	The bottom section of the Anchor submenu displays all the anchors that are not yet associated with a picture box.


 Hand tool


 Pencil tool


 Line tool


 Posterizer tool


 Spike tool


 Normal Contrast tool


 High Contrast tool


 Posterized Contrast tool


 Inversion tool


Style menu for lines
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Style menu for lines

When a line or text path is active and the Item tool is selected, the Style menu for lines is available. (If a line contains text — that is, if it is a text path — and the Content tool is selected, then the Style menu for text is available.) The Style menu for lines is also available when a gridline in a table is selected.

The Style menu for lines includes five menu items that let you modify various aspects of lines: Line Style, Arrowheads, Width, Color, and Shade. All five menu items have submenus that provide a variety of options.


Line Style submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Line Style submenu

Style menu

The Line Style submenu lets you choose from a list of predefined line styles and any custom line styles you create in the Dashes & Stripes dialog box (Edit --> Dashes & Stripes).


Arrowheads submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Arrowheads submenu

Style menu

The Arrowheads submenu lets you choose from a list of six predefined endcap styles (combinations of arrowheads and tail feathers). Arrowheads are not available when gridlines in a table are selected.


Width submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Width submenu

Style menu

The Width submenu lets you choose from a list of default line widths. The Other option displays the Line tab of the Modify dialog box, which lets you enter a value in the selected Line Width field. You can enter Line Width values using any supported measurement system, but values are displayed in points when the dialog box is reopened.

NOTE: QuarkXPress prints a hairline .125 points wide on a PostScript imagesetter, but wider on a laser printer. Entering "0" in the Line Width field automatically defines a hairline.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 864 pt	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001


Color submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Color submenu

Style menu

The Color submenu lets you choose from a list of colors defined in the Colors dialog box (Edit --> Colors). The list includes custom colors, default colors, and spot colors imported with EPS picture files.


Shade submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Shade submenu

Style menu

The Shade submenu lets you choose a tint value in 10% increments. The Other option displays the Line tab of the Modify dialog box, which lets you enter a percentage value in the selected Shade field.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 100%	percent	.1


Item menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Item menu

The QuarkXPress Item menu lets you modify, position, and reshape boxes, lines, text paths, rollovers, tables, and image maps. The Item menu is divided into seven sections:

•	The first section lists commands that display the Modify dialog box, which contains a comprehensive set of controls. These include color, shade, position, size, frame, runaround, and clipping path.

•	The second section lists fundamental item commands such as Duplicate and Delete. The Step and Repeat command in this section lets you perform advanced duplication.

•	The third section lists options that change the way items move, interact, or combine with other items. For example, you can group items so that they do not move apart, or ungroup items. Use the Lock command to lock items in place on the page; the Unlock command undoes this attribute. The Constrain/Unconstrain commands may be useful when working with multiple items. Using the Merge options, you can even create a new item based on existing item shapes. The commands in the Split submenu let you break paths in a multiple-path box into two or more boxes. Some of these commands are only available when multiple items are selected.

•	The fourth section lists commands that affect the relationship between objects, such as their stacking order and relative positions. You can bring an item to the front or bring it forward; you can also send an item to the back or send it backward. The Space/Align command is available when multiple objects are selected.

•	The fifth section lists options that change the shape of an item, clipping path, or runaround path. You can choose a predefined shape or a Bézier option that allows the item to be edited interactively using Bézier points. You can also choose whether your item contains text, a picture, or nothing.

•	The sixth section contains the Point/Segment Type submenu, which lets you change the way a selected Bézier segment or point behaves.

•	The seventh section contains the Rollover submenu for creating and deleting rollovers and the Delete All Hot Areas command (for image maps). This section also contains the Convert Text to Table command (when text is selected), the Table submenu and the Gridlines submenu.


Modify command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Modify command

Item menu

The Modify command (Command+M on Mac OS, Ctrl+M on Windows) displays the Modify dialog box, which lets you set comprehensive specifications for text boxes, picture boxes, boxes with a content of None, tables, lines, and text paths.


Modify dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Modify dialog box

Item --> Modify

The Modify dialog box includes tab options that vary according to the kind of item selected:

Selected item	Tab options available
Picture box in a print document	Box, Picture, Frame, Clipping, Runaround
Picture box in a Web document	Box, Picture, Frame, Clipping, Runaround, Export
Text box in a print document	Box, Text, Frame, Runaround
Text box in a Web document	Box, Text, Frame, Runaround, Export
Box with a content of None	Box, Frame, Runaround, Export
Text path	Line, Text Path, Runaround, Export*
Line	Line, Runaround, Export*
Table (selected with Item tool)	Table, Runaround, Grid, Frame, Export
Text cells in a table (selected with Content tool)	Table, Cell, Text, Export
Picture cells in a table (selected with Content tool)	Table, Cell, Picture , Export
Form boxes and Form Controls	Box, Form
*in Web documents only

NOTE: The same Modify dialog box tab options are available for anchored items, except for the Runaround tab.

A limited set of options is also available for multiple-selected or grouped items in the Modify dialog box. The Group tab has the same basic controls as the Box tab or the Line tab, depending on what is selected.

Multiple-selected items or groups	Tab options available
Picture boxes	Group (Box), Picture, Frame
Text boxes	Group (Box), Text, Frame
Text and picture boxes	Group (Box), Frame
Text paths	Group (Line), Text Path
Lines or lines and text paths	Line
Other combination	Group (Box)
NOTE: The Modify command (Command+M on Mac OS, Ctrl+M on Windows) is unavailable when a group (Item --> Group) is selected along with an item that is not part of that group.


Box dialog box tab
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Box dialog box tab

Item --> Modify --> Box tab

The Modify dialog box Box tab is available whenever a box, or a combination of items that include a box, is selected. The controls in the Box tab let you specify location, size, rotation, skew, and corner radius. You can also specify a background color or background blend for selected items. Some options are unavailable for multiple-selected items. Box tab controls include the Origin Across and Origin Down fields; the Width and Height fields; the Angle,  Skew, and Corner Radius fields; the Suppress Printout check box; and the Align with Text, Box, and Blend areas.


Origin Across, Origin Down fields
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Origin Across, Origin Down fields

Item --> Modify --> Box tab

The Origin Across and Origin Down fields let you specify the location of the item or group in relation to the upper left corner of the page.

•	The Origin Across value specifies the measurement from the zero point on the horizontal ruler to the left edge of the item’s rectangular bounding box.

•	The Origin Down value specifies the measurement from the zero point on the vertical ruler to the top edge of the item’s rectangular bounding box.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
Pasteboard width, height	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001
NOTE: The origin fields accept positive or negative values, unless the value entered will place the box off the pasteboard. Origin values entered for a group or multiple selection affect the bounding box surrounding the entire group. The origin fields are replaced by the Align with Text area when an anchored item is selected.


Align with Text area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Align with Text area

Item --> Modify --> Box tab

The Align with Text area replaces the Origin Across and Origin Down fields when the selected item is an anchored box or line. (To anchor a box or a line to flow with text, copy it to the Clipboard while the Item tool is selected, and paste it into a text box or text path while the Content tool is selected.) The Align with Text options let you control how an anchored box or line is placed in relation to its surrounding text.

•	Ascent aligns the top of the anchored item with the ascent of the character immediately to the right of the anchored item.

•	Baseline places the bottom of the anchored item on the text baseline.

•	When Baseline is chosen, the Offset field is available. The Offset value is similar to a Baseline Shift applied through the Style menu. A negative value lowers the anchored item in relation to its baseline, and a positive value places the anchored item higher.

NOTE: When positioning anchored items, the Offset field is more suitable than the Baseline Shift feature for two reasons. First, the Offset field preserves the positioning of anchored items when local text attributes are overridden by a style sheet. Second, when characters are transformed into anchored boxes by using the Option+Text to Box (Mac OS) or Alt+Text to Box (Windows) command (Style menu), a value is automatically entered in the Offset field to mimic the baseline position originally desired by the font designer.


Width, Height fields
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Width, Height fields

Item --> Modify --> Box tab

The Width and Height fields let you specify the size of the selected box. The values in these fields do not affect the contents of the box. If the selected box or group is nonrectangular, the Width and Height values refer to the size of the rectangular bounding box that surrounds it.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
.001 pt to pasteboard edge	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001
NOTE: The size of the largest box you can specify is limited only by the width and height of the pasteboard. Changing the size of a box does not change its origin values.


Angle field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Angle field

Item --> Modify --> Box tab

The Angle field lets you rotate any item or group of items around the center of the overall selection. The Angle field accomplishes the same task as the Rotation tool.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
±360 degrees	degrees	.001


Skew field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Skew field

Item --> Modify --> Box tab

The Skew field lets you tilt the bounding box of an item to create a slanted visual effect.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
±75 degrees	degrees	.001


Corner Radius field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Corner Radius field

Item --> Modify --> Box tab

The Corner Radius field lets you change the size of the corner area for a rounded-corner, beveled-corner, or concave-corner box. Rectangle boxes are treated as rounded-corner boxes with a Corner Radius value of zero. The field is not available for elliptical (oval) boxes, Bézier boxes, or groups.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 2"	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001
NOTE: The maximum Corner Radius value is two inches, or the equivalent amount in any of the various measurement systems.


Suppress Printout check box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Suppress Printout check box [PRINT]

Item --> Modify --> Box tab

Checking Suppress Printout in the Box tab prevents an item and its contents from printing with the rest of the page.


Box area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Box area

Item --> Modify --> Box tab

The Box area lets you specify background colors and tint percentages for selected items using the Color pop-up menu and Shade field.

•	The Color pop-up menu lets you choose a color for the background of selected items from your list of colors defined in the Colors dialog box (Edit --> Colors). The list includes custom colors, default colors, and colors imported with EPS picture files. Choose None to make the background transparent. If multiple items with differing colors are selected when you open the dialog box, the Color pop-up menu defaults to Mixed Colors.

•	The Shade field lets you enter a tint percentage for the specified color. You can also choose a percentage from the field’s pop-up menu. When None or White is chosen in the Color pop-up menu, the Shade field is not available.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 100%	percent	.1
NOTE: The Color and Shade pop-up menus are not available for table backgrounds; you can only apply color to individual cells.

If varying item types are multiple-selected when you open the Modify dialog box, the Box area controls will affect line color as well as box background color.


Blend area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Blend area

Item --> Modify --> Box tab

The Blend area of the Box tab lets you specify a blend (a two-color gradient) for the background of the selected box or boxes. You can specify a Style, Angle, Color, and Shade for the blend.

•	The Style pop-up menu lets you specify a type of blend. The default is Solid, which means the blend feature is turned off. The Linear option produces a standard blend that moves in a straight line from one color to the other. The other blend choices are Mid-Linear, Rectangular, Diamond, Circular, and Full Circular. The size of the blend is determined by the size of the item to which it is applied.

•	The Angle field lets you specify the rotation of the blend, in degrees. You can also choose an angle from the field’s pop-up menu.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
±360 degrees	degrees	.1
•	The Color pop-up menu in the Blend area lets you choose the second color in the blend. (The first color is determined by the Color and Shade settings in the Box area.)

•	The Shade field lets you enter the maximum tint percentage of the second color in the blend. You can also choose a Shade from the field’s pop-up menu.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 100%	percent	.1
NOTE: You cannot apply a blend to a table background; you can only apply a blend to individual cells.

A blend applied to multiple-selected boxes will create multiple blends, just as if each box had been modified individually.


Table dialog box tab
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Table dialog box tab

Item --> Modify (with a table selected)

The Modify dialog box Table tab is available whenever a table is selected with the Item tool. The controls in the Table tab let you specify location, size, and Maintain Geometry settings. You can also suppress the printout of a table.


Origin Across, Origin Down fields
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Origin Across, Origin Down fields

Item --> Modify --> Table tab

The Origin Across and Origin Down fields let you specify the location of the table in relation to the upper left corner of the page.

•	The Origin Across value specifies the measurement from the zero point on the horizontal ruler to the left edge of the table’s rectangular bounding box.

•	The Origin Down value specifies the measurement from the zero point on the vertical ruler to the top edge of the table’s rectangular bounding box.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
Pasteboard width, height	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001
NOTE: The origin fields accept positive or negative values, unless the value entered would place the table off the pasteboard. Origin values entered for a group or multiple selection affect the bounding box surrounding the entire group. The origin fields are replaced by the Align with Text area when an anchored item is selected.


Width, Height fields
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Width, Height fields

Item --> Modify --> Table tab

The Width and Height fields let you specify the size of the selected table. The values in these fields do not affect the contents of the table cells.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
.001 pt to pasteboard edge	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001
NOTE: The size of the largest table you can specify is limited only by the width and height of the pasteboard. Changing the size of a table does not change its origin.


Maintain Geometry (check cox)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Maintain Geometry check box

Item --> Modify --> Table tab

The Maintain Geometry check box in the Table tab lets you determine whether the table is resized when you insert or delete rows and columns. When Maintain Geometry is checked, the table’s bounding area remains the same; rows and columns are resized proportionally to accommodate changes. If Maintain Geometry is unchecked, the table’s bounding area increases or decreases as you insert or delete rows or columns.


Suppress Printout check box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Suppress Printout check box [PRINT]

Item --> Modify --> Table tab

Checking Suppress Printout in the Table tab prevents a table from printing with the rest of the page.


Line dialog box tab
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Line dialog box tab

Item --> Modify --> Line tab

The Modify dialog box Line tab is available whenever lines, text paths, or a combination of these are selected. The controls in the Line tab let you specify style, width, position, arrowheads, color, and shade for selected lines. Some options are unavailable for groups, multiple-selected lines, and text paths. Controls include the Line Width field; the Style, Arrowheads, and Mode pop-up menus; the Origin Across, Origin Down, Width, Height, Angle, and Skew fields; the Suppress Printout check box; the Align with Text, Line and Gap areas.


Style pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Style pop-up menu

Item --> Modify --> Line tab

The Style pop-up menu lets you choose an option (such as Solid or Dotted) from your list of default and custom line styles. You can customize these line styles using the Dashes & Stripes dialog box (Edit --> Dashes & Stripes).


Line Width field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Line Width field

Item --> Modify --> Line tab

The Line Width field and pop-up menu let you choose a standard thickness for the selected lines — from Hairline to 12 pt — or enter a custom value. If you choose the Hairline option, QuarkXPress prints the rule at .125 point to a PostScript imagesetter, but wider to a laser printer. Entering a 0 in any line width field specifies a hairline.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 864 pt	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001


Arrowheads pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Arrowheads pop-up menu

Item --> Modify --> Line tab

The Arrowheads pop-up menu lets you choose whether your line has an arrowhead attached to it. Five arrowhead options let you determine the direction of the arrow points, whether a tail feather is included, or whether an arrow is attached to both ends.

NOTE: Arrowheads cannot be applied to gridlines in a table.


Mode pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Mode pop-up menu

Item --> Modify --> Line tab

The Mode pop-up menu is available when you have a single, straight text path or line selected. Mode is not available for lines drawn using the Bézier line tool. The Mode pop-up menu lets you choose from one of four strategies for positioning, rotating, or resizing a straight line. These include Endpoints, Left Point, Midpoint, and Right Point.

NOTE: If your line was converted to a straight line from a Bézier line using the Item --> Shape submenu, Left Point refers to the end-point that was closest to the left side of your page when you converted the line.

•	When Endpoints is chosen, the Left Across, Left Down, Right Across, and Right Down fields are available in the Line tab. The Left Across and Left Down fields specify the distance from the page’s left edge and top edge to the first point of your line. The page coordinates for the second point in your line are specified in the Right Across and Right Down fields. Angle and length cannot be directly specified in this mode.

•	When Left Point is chosen, the Left Across, Left Down, Angle, and Length fields are available in the Line tab. These fields let you rotate the line around the first end-point and precisely specify line length.

•	When Midpoint is chosen, the Midpoint Across, Midpoint Down, Angle, and Length fields are available in the Line tab. These fields let you rotate the line around the midpoint and precisely specify line length.

•	When Right Point is chosen, the Right Across, Right Down, Angle, and Length fields are available in the Line tab. These fields let you rotate the line around the second end-point and precisely specify line length.


Origin Across, Origin Down, Width, Height, Angle, Skew fields
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Origin Across, Origin Down, Width, Height, Angle, Skew fields

Item --> Modify --> Line tab

The Line tab Origin Across, Origin Down, Width, Height, Angle, and Skew fields are available when a Bézier line or Bézier text path is selected. These fields work just like those (with the same names) that appear in the Box tab of the Modify dialog box when a box is selected. Measurements and coordinates in these fields refer to the rectangular bounding box of the Bézier line.

NOTE: If you resize a Bézier line or Bézier text path using the Width or Height fields, the Line Width or weight is unaffected.


Suppress Printout check box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Suppress Printout check box [PRINT]

Item --> Modify --> Line tab

Checking Suppress Printout in the Line tab prevents the line from printing with the rest of the page. If the item is a text path, both the path and its text will be suppressed from printing.


Align with Text area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Align with Text area

Item --> Modify --> Line tab

The Align with Text area is available in the Line tab when the selected line is anchored in text. These controls work just like those (with the same name) that appear in the Box tab of the Modify dialog box when an anchored box is selected.

NOTE: Text paths cannot be anchored in text.


Line area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Line area

Item --> Modify --> Line tab

The Line area lets you specify colors and tint percentages for selected lines using the Color pop-up menu and Shade field.

•	The Color pop-up menu lets you choose a color for selected lines from the list of colors defined in the Colors dialog box (Edit --> Colors). The list includes custom colors, default colors, and spot colors imported with EPS picture files. Choose None to make the line transparent. If multiple lines with differing colors are selected when you display the dialog box, the Color pop-up menu defaults to Mixed Colors.

•	The Shade field lets you enter a tint percentage for the specified color. You can also choose a percentage from the field’s pop-up menu. The Shade field is not available when None or White is chosen from the Color pop-up menu.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 100%	percent	.1


Gap area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Gap area

Item --> Modify --> Line tab

The Gap area lets you specify a color and shade for the breaks or gaps in lines when a style other than Solid is chosen from the Style pop-up menu.

•	The Color pop-up menu lets you choose a color for the gap of selected lines from the list of colors defined in the Colors dialog box (Edit --> Colors). The list includes custom colors, default colors, and spot colors imported with EPS picture files. Choose None to make the gap transparent. If multiple lines of differing gap colors are selected when you open the dialog box, the Color pop-up menu defaults to Mixed Colors.

•	The Shade field lets you enter a tint percentage for the specified color. You can also choose a percentage from the field’s pop-up menu. When None or White is chosen from the Color pop-up menu, the Shade field is not available.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 100%	percent	.1


Text Path dialog box tab
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Text Path dialog box tab

Item --> Modify --> Text Path tab

The Modify dialog box Text Path tab is available if you have one or more text paths selected. The controls in the Text Path tab let you change the way text rides along a path. Controls include the Text Orientation area, the Text Alignment area, and the Flip Text check box.


Text Orientation area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Text Orientation area

Item --> Modify --> Text Path tab

The four radio buttons in the Text Orientation area let you choose how QuarkXPress rotates or skews characters on a text path.

•	The upper-left button is the default option. Characters are rotated, but not skewed, to sit at the angle determined by the path.

•	The upper-right button produces a 3-D ribbon-like effect. Characters are rotated, skewed, and sometimes flipped to produce the effect.

•	The lower-left button produces a warped appearance. Characters are skewed but not rotated.

•	The lower-right button produces a stair-step appearance. Characters are neither rotated nor skewed.


Text Alignment area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Text Alignment area

Item --> Modify --> Text Path tab

The two pop-up menus in the Text Alignment area let you choose whether text sits above, below, or directly in front of the line. You can also choose which portion of the font is used for alignment.

•	The Align Text pop-up menu lets you choose which part of a font is used to position characters on the line. You can align text using the Ascent, Center, Baseline, or Descent settings.

•	The Align with Line pop-up menu lets you choose which part of the line is aligned with the choice in the Align Text pop-up menu. You can choose Top, Center, or Bottom. For example, if Baseline is chosen in the Align Text pop-up menu, and Center is chosen in the Align with Line pop-up menu, the baseline of each character will sit on the line’s center.


Flip Text check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Flip Text check box

Item --> Modify --> Text Path tab

The Flip Text check box in the Text Path tab places text on the opposite side of the line, starting from the opposite end-point. For example, if you create a circular text path with text flowing on the outside of the circle, the Flip Text feature positions text on the inside of the circle. Text alignment is not affected.


Text dialog box tab
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Text dialog box tab

Item --> Modify --> Text tab

The Modify dialog box Text tab is available whenever one or more text boxes are selected. The controls in the Text tab let include the Columns, Gutter Width, Text Angle, and Text Skew fields; the First Baseline, Text Inset, and Vertical Alignment areas; the Inter Paragraph Max field; and the Multiple Insets, Run Text Around All Sides, Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical check boxes.

The controls in the Text tab may differ when a table is selected.


Columns field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Columns field

Item --> Modify --> Text tab

The Columns field lets you specify the number of columns contained in a text box. You can specify up to 30 columns in a text box.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
1 to 30	integers	1


Gutter Width field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Gutter Width field

Item --> Modify --> Text tab

The Gutter Width field lets you specify the space between columns in a text box.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
3 to 288 pt	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001


Text Angle field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Text Angle field

Item --> Modify --> Text tab

The Text Angle field rotates all the text and the columns in a selected text box according to the angle you specify. The box borders are not rotated.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
±360 degrees	degrees	.001


Text Skew field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Text Skew field

Item --> Modify --> Text tab

The Text Skew field tilts all the characters in a selected text box to create a slanted visual effect. The box itself is not affected.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
±75 degrees	degrees	.001


Text Inset area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Text Inset area

Item --> Modify --> Text tab

The Text Inset area lets you specify the space that extends from the inside edge of a selected text box to the outside edge of the text. The maximum allowable text inset varies with the size of the text box. The default value is 1 point. Inset values do not affect gutter width.

You can choose to use the same inset value for all four sides of a square text box, or you can use the Multiple Insets check box to specify different inset values for each edge.


Multiple Insets check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Multiple Insets check box

Item --> Modify --> Text tab --> Text Inset area

The Multiple Insets check box lets you control text inset. When this box is checked, you can specify different inset values for each edge of the text box by entering values in the Top, Left, Bottom, and Right fields. When this box is unchecked, you can specify the same inset value for all four sides of a square text box by entering a value in the All Edges field.


First Baseline area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

First Baseline area

Item --> Modify --> Text tab

The Minimum and Offset controls in the First Baseline area let you position the first baseline of text in a selected text box.

The Minimum pop-up menu gives you three options for specifying the minimum distance between the first line of text and the top of each column:

•	The Cap Height option adds the height of a capital letter in the first line’s largest font to the Text Inset value for the top of the column.

•	The Cap + Accent option places the extra space needed for accent marks (above uppercase letters) in the first line’s largest font, adding the space to the Text Inset value for the top of the column.

•	The Ascent option adds the ascent value (specified by the font designer) of the first line’s largest font to the Text Inset value for the top of the column. The result may resemble one of the previous two settings or may place the line somewhere in between, depending on the font design. Ascent is the default option.

The Offset field lets you control the space between the first baseline and the top edge of a text box, using an absolute value that you specify. Regardless of the value you enter, the first baseline will never be placed closer to the specified Text Inset than the Minimum value. The default value is zero.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
First baseline to top of box	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001


Vertical Alignment area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Vertical Alignment area

Item --> Modify --> Text tab

Selections in the Vertical Alignment area control positioning of all the text relative to the First Baseline setting and the bottom Text Inset value. The Type pop-up menu lets you choose how to align the text vertically:

•	The Top option places the first line of text on the first baseline, and distributes all the text according to the leading value. This is the default setting.

•	The Centered option centers the text top-to-bottom between the First Baseline ascent and the bottom of the text box, distributing lines according to the leading value.

•	The Bottom option aligns the bottom of the descenders of the last line of text with the bottom text inset, distributing the lines above according to the leading value.

•	The Justified option places the first line of text on the first baseline, the last line near the bottom text inset, and evenly distributes all lines in between, overriding the leading value. When Justified is selected, the Inter Paragraph Max field is available.


Inter Paragraph Max field

Item --> Modify --> Text tab

The Inter Paragraph Max field, which is only available when Justified is selected in the Type pop-up menu, is used to specify the maximum amount of space QuarkXPress can insert between vertically justified paragraphs. If the paragraphs are spaced as far apart as the Inter Paragraph Max field allows and text still does not extend from the top of the box to the bottom, QuarkXPress will override the specified leading values and insert an equal amount of additional space between lines.


Run Text Around All Sides check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Run Text Around All Sides check box

Item --> Modify --> Text tab

The Run Text Around All Sides feature lets you surround objects with text on all sides. Check Run Text Around All Sides to cause lines of text to continue from the left side to the right side of an item that overlaps the text, without starting a new line. Use this setting to control text that would otherwise be obscured by an overlapping item or items.

TIP: Run Text Around All Sides is best used in layouts where readability is not crucial.


Flip Horizontal, Flip Vertical check boxes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Flip Horizontal, Flip Vertical check boxes

Item --> Modify --> Text tab

The Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical check boxes let you create a mirror image of all the text in a selected text box. The direction in which text reads is also flipped. These check boxes work just like the Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical commands in the Style menu.


Text dialog box tab, table selected
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Text dialog box tab, table selected

Item --> Modify --> Text tab

When text cells in a table are selected, the Modify dialog box Text tab works the same way as it does with a text box, with a few exceptions:

•	Because text cells cannot contain columns, the Columns and Gutter Width fields are unavailable.

•	Text Inset values can be set for All Edges, Left, Bottom or Right. The value in the All Edges field will be applied to all sides of the text cell. The Multiple Insets check box activates the Left, Bottom, and Right fields. You can enter different values in each field.


Picture dialog box tab
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Picture dialog box tab

Item --> Modify --> Picture tab

The Modify dialog box Picture tab is available whenever one or more picture boxes (or picture cells in a table) are selected. The controls in the Picture tab let you specify how a picture is positioned within its box, and how it is angled, scaled, and colored. Controls include the Offset Across and Offset Down fields; the Scale Across and Scale Down fields; the Picture Angle and Picture Skew fields; the Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical check boxes; the Suppress Picture Printout check box; and the Picture area.


Offset Across, Offset Down fields
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Offset Across, Offset Down fields

Item --> Modify --> Picture tab

The Offset Across and Offset Down fields in the Picture tab let you specify the position of a picture relative to its box. You can enter negative or positive values for either field. The default value for both is zero.

•	The Offset Across value specifies the distance between the left edge of the rectangular bounding box and the left edge of the picture.

•	The Offset Down value specifies the distance between the top edge of the rectangular bounding box and the top edge of the picture.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
– picture size to + box size	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001


Scale Across, Scale Down fields
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Scale Across, Scale Down fields

Item --> Modify --> Picture tab

The Scale Across and Scale Down fields let you specify proportionate or disproportionate scaling for a picture within a picture box. The Scale Across percentage scales pictures horizontally; the Scale Down percentage scales a picture vertically. If you want to maintain existing proportions, enter equivalent values.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
10 to 1,000%	percent	.1


Picture Angle, Picture Skew fields
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Picture Angle, Picture Skew fields

Item --> Modify --> Picture tab

The Picture Angle and Picture Skew fields let you rotate and skew a picture independently of the selected picture box that contains it.

•	The Picture Angle field specifies the rotation of a picture around its center.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
±360 degrees	degrees	.001
•	The Picture Skew field lets you tilt a picture’s sides to create a slanted visual effect.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
±75 degrees	degrees	.001


Flip Horizontal, Flip Vertical check boxes
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Flip Horizontal, Flip Vertical check boxes

Item --> Modify --> Picture tab

The Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical check boxes let you create a mirror image of the picture in a selected picture box. These check boxes work just like the Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical commands in the Style menu.


Suppress Picture Printout check box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Suppress Picture Printout check box [PRINT]

Item --> Modify --> Picture tab

Checking Suppress Picture Printout in the Picture tab prevents the picture in a selected picture box from printing with the rest of the page. Any visible attributes of the box itself (frame, background color, or blend) will print normally.


Picture area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Picture area

Item --> Modify --> Picture tab

The Picture area lets you use the Color pop-up menu and Shade field to specify a color and shade for most grayscale or black-and-white pictures.

•	The Color pop-up menu lets you choose a color to be used in place of black in the grayscale or black-and-white picture in a selected picture box. You can choose from the list of colors defined in the Colors dialog box (Edit --> Colors). The list includes custom colors, default colors, and spot colors imported with EPS picture files.

•	The Shade field lets you enter the maximum tint percentage of the color that will be applied to the grayscale or black-and-white picture. You can also choose a percentage from the field’s pop-up menu.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 100%	percent	.1


Frame command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Frame command

Item menu

The Frame command (Command+B on Mac OS, Ctrl+B on Windows) is available for selected boxes. The command displays the Frame tab of the Modify dialog box, which lets you choose from a variety of line styles to apply to box borders.


Frame dialog box tab
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Frame dialog box tab

Item --> Frame

The Modify dialog box Frame tab lets you specify a width, style, gap color, color and shade for your frame. The dialog box includes a Preview area that displays a rectangular representation of the specified frame.

TIP: A frame applied to a box always resides inside the box borders. However, you can use the Framing area in the General pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences) to specify whether QuarkXPress automatically outsets these borders when a frame is applied (click Outside), or whether QuarkXPress keeps the current box size, forcing the frame to overlap or reflow the contents (click Inside).

NOTE: [PRINT] A frame cannot be applied to a table in a print document. You can apply dashes and stripes to the gridlines, but not to the bounding box of a table.


Width field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Width field

Item --> Frame

The Width field and pop-up menu lets you choose a standard thickness for the frame of selected boxes — from 0 to 12 pt — or enter a custom value. The default width is zero, which applies no frame.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
determined by box size	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001


Style pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Style pop-up menu

Item --> Frame

The Style pop-up menu lets you choose a frame style (such as Solid or Dotted) from the list of default and custom line styles. You can customize these line styles using the Dashes & Stripes dialog box (Edit menu).


Frame area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Frame area

Item --> Frame

The Frame area lets you use the Color pop-up menu and Shade field to specify colors and tint percentages for frames.

•	The Color pop-up menu lets you choose a frame color from the list of colors defined in the Colors dialog box (Edit --> Colors).

•	The Shade field lets you enter a tint percentage for the specified color. You can also choose a percentage from the field’s pop-up menu. The Shade field is not available when White is chosen in the Color pop-up menu.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 100%	percent	.1


Gap area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Gap area

Item --> Frame

When a style other than Solid is chosen from the Style pop-up menu, the Gap area lets you specify a color and shade for the breaks or gaps in frames.

•	The Color pop-up menu lets you choose a color for the gap area of the frame from the list of colors defined in the Colors dialog box (Edit --> Colors). The list includes custom colors, default colors, and spot colors imported with EPS picture files. Choose None to make the gap transparent.

•	The Shade field lets you enter a screen tint percentage for the specified color. You can also choose a percentage from the field’s pop-up menu. When None or White is chosen in the Color pop-up menu, the Shade field is not available.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 100%	percent	.1


Clipping command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Clipping command

Item menu

The Clipping command (Command+Option+T on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+T on Windows) is available whenever a picture box containing a picture is selected. The command displays the Clipping tab of the Modify dialog box, which lets you create or modify a QuarkXPress clipping path.

A clipping path tells QuarkXPress which areas of a picture should be visible and which areas should be transparent. This is especially useful when you are attempting to isolate the picture’s subject from its surrounding background.


Clipping dialog box tab
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Clipping dialog box tab

Item --> Clipping

The Modify dialog box Clipping tab lets you create or make simple modifications to a QuarkXPress clipping path. You can base this clipping path on a path or alpha channel embedded in the original picture, or on the white areas of the image. Changes made to a picture’s position, scale, angle, rotation, or skew will cause its associated clipping path to update automatically. You can further edit clipping paths by checking Clipping Path in the Item --> Edit submenu and then manually reshaping the path.

NOTE: QuarkXPress 5.0 Help uses the term clipping path to refer to a QuarkXPress clipping path, which is based on the high-resolution image but created and stored with the QuarkXPress document. Clipping paths created in image-editing or illustration programs are referred to as embedded paths. Changes made in QuarkXPress are stored exclusively in the document as a specification for an individual picture box. Each picture box in a QuarkXPress document may contain several clipping specifications for the same imported picture.

You do not have to use an embedded path, but since it is stored with the picture, it will always be available.

Controls in the Clipping tab include the Preview area; the Rescan and Crop to Box buttons, the Information area; the Type pop-up menu; and the Invert, Outside Edges Only, and Restrict to Box check boxes. Additional controls may be available when specific options are selected.


Preview area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Preview area

Item --> Clipping

The Preview area displays a small-scale representation of how the picture in the selected box will look in the actual document. On color monitors, the picture box border is colored blue by default, and the clipping path is colored green. On grayscale monitors, the picture box border is a darker shade than the clipping path. Colors can be changed using the Margin and Ruler buttons in the Display pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences).


Rescan button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Rescan button

Item --> Clipping

Clicking Rescan rebuilds the clipping path and its preview using whatever specifications are currently entered in the pop-up menus, fields, or check boxes of the Clipping tab. If a high-resolution picture file can be found, QuarkXPress accesses it when you click Rescan.

NOTE: Clicking Rescan undoes the Crop to Box feature.


Crop to Box button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Crop to Box button

Item --> Clipping

The Crop to Box button cuts portions of a clipping path that fall outside the current box borders. Picture areas outside the clipping path appear transparent on screen and are not rendered at output.


Information area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Information area

Item --> Clipping

The Information area displays the number of alpha channels and embedded paths in your picture file. The number of Bézier points used in the current QuarkXPress clipping path is also displayed.


Type pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Type pop-up menu

Item --> Clipping

The Type pop-up menu lets you choose the source used to create a QuarkXPress clipping path. You can choose Item, Picture Bounds, Embedded Path, Alpha Channel, or Non-White Areas.


Item
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Item

Item --> Clipping --> Type pop-up menu

When Item is chosen, no clipping path is applied. The picture box borders alone dictate which parts of a picture are visible.


Embedded Path
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Embedded Path

Item --> Clipping --> Type pop-up menu

The Embedded Path option creates a new clipping path based on an embedded clipping path drawn in an image-editing application. When Embedded Path is chosen, the Path, Outset, and Tolerance controls become available for customizing the QuarkXPress clipping path. If the picture file contains more than one embedded path, choose a path from the Embedded Path pop-up menu.


Alpha Channel
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Alpha Channel

Item --> Clipping --> Type pop-up menu

The Alpha Channel option clips a picture around an alpha channel that is already embedded in a picture file. If the picture file contains more than one embedded alpha channel, choose an alpha channel from the Alpha pop-up menu.

When Alpha Channel is chosen, the Alpha, Outset, and Tolerance controls are available for customizing the QuarkXPress clipping path. The Threshold field in the Tolerance area determines the amount an alpha channel area may deviate from black before it falls inside the initial clipping path. A Tolerance of 10% specifies that darkness values of 91% to 100% in the alpha channel will fall outside the initial path, while anything lighter (0–90%) will fall inside. (The values in the picture itself may be entirely different, because an alpha channel possesses its own values.)


Non-White Areas
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Non-White Areas

Item --> Clipping --> Type pop-up menu

The Non-White Areas option creates a new clipping path based on the picture’s subject. When Non-White Areas is chosen, the Outset and Tolerance controls are available for customizing the QuarkXPress clipping path. The Threshold field in the Tolerance area determines the amount a picture area may deviate from white before it is included inside the initial clipping path. The default Tolerance of 10% specifies that darkness values of zero to 10% will initially fall outside the path, while anything darker (11%–100%) will be included in the initial clipping path. When you choose Non-White Areas for a color picture, areas are clipped according to how they would appear if converted to grayscale.


Picture Bounds
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Picture Bounds

Item --> Clipping --> Type pop-up menu

The Picture Bounds option creates a new clipping path based on the rectangular canvas area of the imported picture file. This includes any white background saved with your original picture file. When Picture Bounds is chosen, the Top, Left, Bottom, and Right fields are available for changing the size of the clipping path. These fields are replaced by other controls if you choose a different clipping path from the Type pop-up menu.

TIP: If you make edits to a clipping path using point-by-point Bézier editing, the Type pop-up menu displays User-Edited Path the next time you open the Modify dialog box. This lets you adjust the outset and other values of your edited path while retaining its basic shape. If you choose a new Type option when User-Edited Path is displays, you must click Cancel to restore the user-edited path. If you choose a new Type option and click OK, Bézier edits are lost.


Top, Left, Bottom, Right fields
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Top, Left, Bottom, Right fields

Item --> Clipping

Available when Picture Bounds is chosen, the Top, Left, Bottom, and Right fields let you specify the distance between the rectangular picture edges and a rectangular clipping path’s edges. Negative values place the clipping path edges within the picture bounds.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
±288 pt	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001


Path, Alpha (pop-up menus)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Path, Alpha pop-up menus

Item --> Clipping

When Embedded Path is chosen in the Type pop-up menu, the Path pop-up menu lets you choose a path from the picture file. When Alpha Channel is chosen in the Type pop-up menu, the Path pop-up menu is replaced by the Alpha pop-up menu. The Alpha pop-up menu lets you choose an alpha channel to use.


Outset field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Outset field

Item --> Clipping

When you have a nonrectangular clipping path, the Outset field specifies the exact distance (in points) by which you want the current clipping path to grow or shrink. A positive value makes the clipping path grow to include more of the picture; a negative value makes the clipping path shrink to include less.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
±288 pt	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001


Tolerance area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Tolerance area

Item --> Clipping

The Tolerance area is available when Embedded Path, Alpha Channel, or Non-White Areas are chosen in the Type pop-up menu. The Noise, Smoothness, and Threshold values in the Tolerance area let you fine-tune your picture-based clipping path.

•	The Noise field specifies the smallest allowable closed path. Any closed path or artifact smaller than the noise value will be deleted. For example, if you are generating a clipping path for a picture of the moon and stars and you find that each star has a tiny path drawn around it, you could choose to specify a Noise value large enough to exclude these small paths but small enough to include the path around the moon.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
±288 pt	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001
•	The Smoothness field allows you to specify clipping path accuracy. A lower value creates a more complex path with a greater number of points because it moves the path closer to each exact pixel. A higher number creates a simpler (and less accurate) path that is less likely to produce an error on output.

NOTE: If your clipping path has too many points to output the document, QuarkXPress attempts to decrease the path complexity by automatically raising the Smoothness setting during printing.

•	The Threshold field is available when Alpha Channel or Non-White Areas is chosen in the Type pop-up menu. When Alpha Channel is chosen, the Threshold value determines the amount that an alpha channel area may deviate from black before it falls inside the initial clipping path. Values in the actual picture are not considered when Alpha Channel is chosen. When Non-White Areas is chosen, the Threshold value determines the amount that an actual picture area may deviate from white before it is included within the path. Areas in color pictures are clipped according to how they would appear if converted to grayscale. The initial results of the Threshold setting are further affected by the other settings in the Clipping tab.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 100%	percent	.1


Invert check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Invert check box

Item --> Clipping

When Embedded Path, Alpha Channel, or Non-White Areas is chosen in the Type pop-up menu, the Invert check box is available. Checking Invert swaps the interior of your clipped path with the exterior.


Outside Edges Only check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Outside Edges Only check box

Item --> Clipping

The Outside Edges Only check box determines whether QuarkXPress will allow paths within paths. For example, if Outside Edges Only is checked, QuarkXPress might create two paths for an apple and a bagel (one path for each) but it will not clip out the hole within the bagel; only the outside paths are drawn. In order for paths to be drawn within the larger paths, uncheck Outside Edges Only.


Restrict to Box check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Restrict to Box check box

Item --> Clipping

If Restrict To Box is unchecked in the Clipping tab, unclipped portions of the image that fall outside the picture box will be visible in the document.


Runaround command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Runaround command

Item menu

The Runaround command (Command+T on Mac OS, Ctrl+T on Windows) is available whenever a nonanchored item is selected. The command displays the Runaround tab of the Modify dialog box, which lets you create or modify a QuarkXPress runaround path for a picture, or change the runaround outset for any other item.

Runaround is a term used to describe how text flows around items that are placed in front of it. Editing an item’s runaround path changes the way text behaves when the edited item is placed in front of text. Runaround specifications can be created for an item, or for the picture in a picture box. A picture-based runaround path tells QuarkXPress which picture areas push away text positioned behind it, and which picture areas allow text to flow unimpeded behind the item.

Options in the Runaround tab vary depending what is selected: picture box; text box or box with a content of None; line or text path; or a table.


Runaround dialog box tab, picture box selected
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Runaround dialog box tab, picture box selected

Item --> Runaround

When a picture box is selected, the Modify dialog box Runaround tab works like the Clipping tab, but with a few exceptions:

•	Paths created in the Runaround tab are called runaround paths. These paths force text in text boxes stacked behind the picture box to adjoin and flow around the "included" areas of the path. The areas outside the runaround path allow the text to flow unimpeded in back. A runaround path does not determine which areas of a picture are visible.

•	On color monitors, the runaround path displays in the Preview area as a magenta path (by default). A series of horizontal gray bars represents the text.

•	When the Runaround tab is displayed, the None option is available in the Type pop-up menu. Although choosing Item from the Type pop-up menu of the Clipping tab turns clipping off, you must choose None from the Type pop-up menu to turn runaround off. Choosing Item in the Runaround tab causes the selected picture box to push away text according to a runaround outset measured from the picture box borders. This outset is specified using the Top, Left, Bottom, and Right fields when a rectangular box is selected, and by the Outset field when a nonrectangular box is selected. The Item runaround does not produce an editable Bézier runaround path.

•	The Same As Clipping option is available in the Type pop-up menu when the Runaround tab is displayed. Choose this option if you want text to run around the QuarkXPress clipping path you have specified in the Clipping tab. Although you may specify unique Outset and Smoothness settings when Same As Clipping is chosen, any Bézier edits to the runaround area must be made to the clipping path.

•	To edit an applied runaround path using Béziers, Runaround must be checked instead of Clipping Path in the Item --> Edit submenu — except when Same As Clipping is chosen in the Type pop-up menu.

•	The Restrict To Box check box does not affect picture visibility as it does in the Clipping tab. When Restrict To Box is checked in the Runaround tab, text ignores any portion of the runaround path that falls outside the picture box borders. This achieves the same result as clicking Crop to Box in the Runaround tab, but the runaround path itself is not redrawn.

•	The default setting in the Type pop-up menu of the Runaround tab is Item with a 1-point outset.


Runaround dialog box tab, text box or box with a content of None selected
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Runaround dialog box tab, text box or box with a content of None selected

Item --> Runaround

When the selected item is a text box (or a box to which Item --> Content --> None has been applied), the Runaround tab lets you choose None or Item from the Type pop-up menu. If you choose None, text in text boxes stacked behind the selected box will be allowed to flow unimpeded behind the selected text box. If you choose Item, you can specify a runaround outset as measured from the text box borders. This outset is specified using the Top, Left, Bottom, and Right fields when a rectangular box is selected, and by the Outset field when a nonrectangular box is selected. These fields accept positive or negative values. Negative values place the runaround area within the text box borders. The Item runaround does not produce an editable Bézier runaround path.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
±288 pt	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001


Runaround dialog box tab, line or text path selected
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Runaround dialog box tab, line or text path selected

Item --> Runaround

When a line or text path is selected, the Runaround tab lets you choose None, Item, or Manual from the Type pop-up menu. If you choose None as the runaround type, text from other text boxes stacked behind the line or text path will flow unimpeded behind the selected item. The Item runaround does not produce an editable Bézier runaround path. Choose Manual to create a new, editable runaround path for the selected line or text path. The runaround path can be edited by choosing Item --> Edit --> Runaround while the item is selected.

If you choose Item or Manual, you can specify an Outset value as measured from the selected line. This field accepts positive values only.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 288 pt	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001


Runaround dialog box tab, table selected
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Runaround dialog box tab, table selected

Item --> Runaround

When the selected item is a table, the Type pop-up menu contains only the Item option. You can specify a runaround outset as measured from the table borders. This outset is specified using the Top, Left, Bottom, and Right fields. These fields accept positive or negative values. Negative values place the runaround area within the table bounding area.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
±288 pt	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001
NOTE: You cannot apply a runaround of None to a table.


Cell dialog box tab
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Cell dialog box tab

Item --> Modify --> Cell tab

The Modify dialog box Cell tab is available when a table is selected with the Content tool. The controls in the Cell tab let you specify cell width, height, color, and blend settings.


Width field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Width field and Distribute Evenly button

Item --> Modify --> Cell tab

The Width field lets you specify a width for the selected table columns. The Distribute Evenly button automatically resizes inequal table column widths so that each selected column is the same width and all the columns fit within the width of the table.


Height field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Height field and Distribute Evenly button

Item --> Modify --> Cell tab

The Height field lets you specify a height for the selected rows. The Distribute Evenly button automatically resizes inequal row heights so that each selected row is the same height and all the rows fit within the height of the table.


Cell area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Cell area

Item --> Modify --> Cell tab

The Cell area lets you specify tint percentages of  background colors for selected cells using the Color pop-up menu and Shade field.

•	The Color pop-up menu lets you choose a color for the background of the selected cell or cells from your list of colors defined in the Colors dialog box (Edit --> Colors). The list includes custom colors, default colors, and spot colors imported with EPS picture files.

NOTE: Cells cannot have a background color of None.

•	The Shade field lets you enter a tint percentage for the specified color. You can also choose a percentage from the field’s pop-up menu. When White is chosen in the Color pop-up menu, the Shade option is not available.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 100%	percent	.1


Blend area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Blend area

Item --> Modify --> Cell tab

The Blend area of the Cell tab lets you specify a blend (a two-color gradient) for the background of the selected cell or cells. You can specify Style, Angle, Color, and Shade settings for the blend.

•	The Style pop-up menu lets you specify a type of blend. The default is Solid, which means the blend feature is turned off. The Linear option produces a standard blend that moves in a straight line from one color to the other. The other blend choices are Mid-Linear, Rectangular, Diamond, Circular, and Full Circular. The size of the blend is determined by the size of the item to which it is applied.

•	The Angle field lets you specify the rotation of the blend in degrees. You can also choose an angle from the field’s pop-up menu.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
±360	degrees	.1
•	The Color pop-up menu in the Blend area lets you choose the second color in the blend. (The first color is determined by the Color and Shade settings in the Box area.)

•	The Shade field lets you enter the maximum tint percentage for the second color in the blend. You can also choose a shade from the field’s pop-up menu.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 100%	percent	.1


Grid dialog box tab
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Grid dialog box tab

Item --> Modify --> Grid tab

The Modify dialog box Grid tab is available when a table is selected with the Item tool or when individual gridlines are selected with the Content tool. Change the appearance of cell gridlines using the controls in the Grid tab, which include the Preview area, the Width field and pop-up menu, the Style pop-up menu, the Gap area, and the Line area.


Preview area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Preview area

Item --> Modify --> Grid tab

The Preview area gives you a preview of the gridlines you are formatting. To specify which gridlines to format, click the appropriate buttons.

The Preview area displays a proxy of the gridlines for the table. To specify which gridlines to format, click a gridline button. The buttons work as follows:

Horizontal and vertical gridlines

Horizontal gridlines only

Vertical gridlines only

Once the desired button is selected, use the controls in the Grid tab to format the gridlines.


 Horizontal and vertical gridlines button


 Horizontal gridlines button


 Vertical gridlines button


WIdth (field and pop-up menu)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Width (field and pop-up menu)

Item --> Modify --> Grid tab

Use the Width field and pop-up menu to choose a standard thickness for the gridlines of selected cells. Its range, measurements, and increments are the same as the Width field for a line.


Style pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Style pop-up menu

Item --> Modify --> Grid tab

The Style pop-up menu lets you choose a style for the gridlines of selected cells. Its range, measurements, and increments are the same as the Style field for a line.


Line area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Line area

Item --> Modify --> Grid tab

The Line area works the same way as the Frame area in the Modify dialog box Frame tab, but the line color and shade are applied to the gridlines of selected cells.


Gap area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Gap area

Item --> Modify --> Grid tab

The Gap area works the same way as the Gap area in the Modify dialog box Frame tab, but the gap color and shade are applied to the gridlines of selected cells.


Export dialog box tab [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Export dialog box tab [WEB]

Item --> Modify --> Export tab

The Modify dialog box Export tab is available when a picture box is selected. This tab is also available when a text box, a box with a content of None, a table, or a line is selected and the Convert to Graphic on Export box is checked. The controls in the Export tab let you control the file format and other attributes of the file that will be created for this item when the selected Web document is exported. Static controls include the Export As pop-up menu and the Alternate Text field. Options in the Export tab will vary depending on which picture format is selected in the Export As pop-up menu:

•	When JPEG is selected, Image Quality and Progressive controls are available.

•	When GIF is selected, Use Dithering, Palette, and Use Interlacing controls are available.

•	When PNG is selected, True Color, Indexed Color, Use Dithering, Palette, and Use Interlacing controls are available.


Export As pop-up menu [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Export As pop-up menu [WEB]

Item --> Modify --> Export tab

The Export As pop-up menu lets you specify the format in which the selected item is exported.

•	The GIF option indicates that the selected box should be exported in GIF format. If an imported file is in GIF format already, the Export tab settings default to the attributes of the imported file.

•	The JPEG option indicates that the selected box should be exported in JPEG format. If an imported file is in JPEG format already, the Export tab settings default to the attributes of the imported file.

•	The PNG option indicates that the selected box should be exported in JPEG format. If an imported file is in PNG format already, the Export tab settings default to the attributes of the imported file.

NOTE: The PNG filter must be loaded for QuarkXPress to export pictures in PNG format from a Web document.


Alternate Text field [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Alternate Text field [WEB]

Item --> Modify --> Export tab

If the pictures cannot be downloaded, the alternate text displays in its place; however, this behavior may vary with different browsers or browser versions.

Windows only: Text in the Alternate Text field will display as a pop-up window when the pointer is moved over the picture.


Image Quality pop-up menu [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Image Quality pop-up menu [WEB]

Item --> Modify --> Export tab --> Export As JPEG

The Image Quality pop-up menu lets you specify the level of quality for the exported picture. The higher the image quality is, the larger the picture file will be; the lower the image quality is, the smaller the picture file will be.


Progressive check box [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Progressive check box [WEB]

Item --> Modify --> Export tab --> Export As JPEG

The Progressive check box lets you specify that when the exported picture is viewed in a Web browser, it will display quickly in low resolution, with the details filling in gradually.


Use Dithering check box [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Use Dithering check box [WEB]

Item --> Modify --> Export tab --> Export As GIF

The Use Dithering check box lets you specify that the exported picture should simulate a wider range of colors by dithering, which smooths the edges between different colors.

NOTE: Dithered picture files are generally larger than nondithered picture files.


Palette pop-up menu [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Palette pop-up menu [WEB]

Item --> Modify --> Export tab --> Export As GIF

The Palette pop-up menu lets you choose which color palette to use with the exported GIF file:

•	The Web-safe option will create a picture that displays colors identically on both Mac OS and Windows Web browsers.

•	The Adaptive option will create a picture with high color fidelity, but that picture will display properly only if the monitor it is viewed on supports 16-bit color or higher.

•	The Windows option will create a picture optimized for the Windows color palette. Use this option if only Windows users will be viewing the picture.

•	The Mac OS option will create a picture optimized for the Mac OS color palette. Use this option if only Mac OS users will be viewing the picture.


Use Interlacing check box [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Use Interlacing check box [WEB]

Item --> Modify --> Export tab --> Export As GIF

The Use Interlacing check box lets you specify that when the exported picture is viewed in a Web browser, it will display quickly in low resolution, with the details filling in gradually.


True Color (radio button) [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

True Color (radio button) [WEB]

Item --> Modify --> Export tab --> Export As PNG

The True color radio button lets you specify that the exported PNG should use 24-bit color.


Indexed Color (radio button) [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Indexed Color (radio button) [WEB]

Item --> Modify --> Export tab --> Export As PNG

The Indexed color radio button lets you specify that the exported picture should use indexed color. Pixels in indexed color pictures are assigned an index number, which is compared to a look-up table in the application reading the image. The values in the look-up table are then used to display the color.


Use Dithering check box [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Use Dithering check box [WEB]

Item --> Modify --> Export tab --> Export As PNG --> Indexed Color selected

When Indexed color is selected, the Use Dithering check box is available. Use Dithering lets you specify that the edges between different colors are smoothed (for a less pixelated appearance).

NOTE: Dithered picture files are generally larger than nondithered picture files.


Palette pop-up menu [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Palette pop-up menu [WEB]

Item --> Modify --> Export tab --> Export As PNG --> Indexed color selected

The Palette pop-up menu is available when Indexed color is selected. The Palette pop-up menu lets you choose which color palette to use with the exported PNG file:

•	The Web-safe option will create a graphic that displays colors identically on both Mac OS and Windows Web browsers.

•	The Adaptive option will create a graphic with high color fidelity, but that graphic will display properly only if the monitor it is viewed on supports 16-bit color or higher.

•	The Windows option will create a graphic optimized for the Windows color palette. Use this option if only Windows users will be viewing the graphic.

•	The Mac OS option will create a graphic optimized for the Mac OS color palette. Use this option if only Mac OS users will be viewing the graphic.


Use Interlacing check box [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Use Interlacing check box [WEB]

Item --> Modify --> Export tab --> Export As PNG

The Use Interlacing check box lets you specify that when the exported picture is viewed in a Web browser, it will display quickly in low resolution, with the details filling in gradually.


Form dialog box tab
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Form dialog box tab

The Form tab displays in the Modify dialog box when a form box or form control is selected; options in the Form tab vary according to the selected form control: form boxes, text field, button, menu, check box, radio button, or file submission.


Form dialog box tab for form boxes [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Form dialog box tab for form boxes [WEB]

Item --> Modify --> Form tab with form box selected

When a form box is selected, this version of the Modify dialog box Form tab is available. The controls in this tab let you control the attributes of the selected form. The tab also contains the Form Validation area.

•	The Name field lets you specify the name of the selected form.

•	The Type field displays Form Box.

•	The Method pop-up menu lets you choose whether the form is submitted as part of a URL (Get) or separately from the URL (Post).

•	The Action field lets you specify the URL to which the form should be submitted.

•	The Encoding pop-up menu lets you choose the encryption to be used with the form. The options are urlencoded, form-data, and plain.

•	The Target pop-up menu lets you choose a target frame for the server reply. The options are None, Blank, Self, Parent, and Top.


Form Validation area [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Form Validation area [WEB]

Item --> Modify --> Form tab

The Form Validation area in the Form tab of the Modify dialog box (Item --> Modify) lets you specify what happens if a reader tries to submit a form without entering information in a required field.

•	Choose Error Page to specify that a different HTML page should display; enter the URL of the page, or click Select (Mac OS) or Browse (Windows) to locate the page file manually.

•	Choose Dialog Message to specify that an alert should be displayed; enter an alert message in the text box. To include the name of the first empty required field in the alert, use <missing field>. When the alert displays, this tag will be replaced with the names of the empty required fields.

NOTE: If you’re not sure which settings to use in the Form tab, contact your Webmaster.


Form dialog box tab for text field form controls [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Form dialog box tab for text field form controls [WEB]

Item --> Modify --> Form tab with text field form control selected

When a text field form control is selected, this version of the Modify dialog box Form tab is available. The controls in this tab let you control the attributes of the selected form control.

•	The Name field lets you specify the name of the selected text field form control.

•	The Type pop-up menu lets you specify which type of text field control the selected item is. The options are Text - Single Line, Text - Multi-Line, Password, and Hidden Field.

•	The Max Chars field lets you specify the maximum number of characters that may be entered in the text field control. This field is not available when Hidden Field is chosen in the Type pop-up menu.

•	The Wrap Text check box lets you specify whether text wraps automatically in the text field control. This check box is available only when Text - Multi-Line is chosen in the Type pop-up menu.

•	The Read-Only check box lets you specify whether users can enter text in the text field control. This check box is not available when Hidden Field is chosen in the Type pop-up menu.

•	The Required check box lets you specify whether a user must enter a value in this text field control in order to submit the form. This check box is unavailable if the Read-Only check box is checked. This check box is unavailable when Hidden Field is chosen.

NOTE: If you’re not sure which settings to use in the Form tab, contact your Webmaster.


Form dialog box tab for button controls [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Form dialog box tab for button controls [WEB]

Item --> Modify --> Form tab with button control selected

When a button form control is selected, this version of the Modify dialog box Form tab is available. The controls in this tab let you control the attributes of the selected form control.

•	The Name field lets you specify the name of the selected form control.

•	The Type pop-up menu should be set to Submit for submit button form controls or to Reset for reset button form controls.

NOTE: If you’re not sure which settings to use in the Form tab, contact your Webmaster.


Form dialog box tab for menu Form controls [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Form dialog box tab for menu form controls [WEB]

Item --> Modify --> Form tab with menu form control selected

When a menu form control is selected, this version of the Modify dialog box Form tab is available. The controls in this tab let you control the attributes of the selected form control.

•	The Name field lets you specify the name of the selected form control.

•	The Type pop-up menu lets you choose between a Pop-Up Menu form control and a List form control.

•	The Menu pop-up menu lets you choose the list of items to be included in the menu control. The New button next to this field displays the Edit Menu dialog box, which lets you create lists of items.

•	The Allow Multiple Selections check box (available only for list controls) lets you specify whether users can select more than one item at a time in the list control.

•	The Required check box lets you specify whether a user must choose an option from the menu control before they submit the form.

NOTE: If you’re not sure which settings to use in the Form tab, contact your Webmaster.


Form dialog box tab for check box form controls [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Form dialog box tab for check box form controls [WEB]

Item --> Modify --> Form tab with check box form control selected

When a check box form control is selected, this version of the Modify dialog box Form tab is available. The controls in this tab let you control the attributes of the selected form control.

•	The Name field lets you specify the name of the selected check box form control.

•	The Type pop-up menu should be set to Check box for check box form controls.

•	The Value field lets you specify the value that is submitted for the check box form control if this particular check box control is selected.

•	The Initially Checked check box lets you specify whether the check box is initially checked when the form displays in a Web browser.

•	The Required check box lets you specify whether a user must check this box in order to submit the form.

NOTE: If you’re not sure which settings to use in the Form tab, contact your Webmaster.


Form dialog box tab for radio button form controls [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Form dialog box tab for radio button form controls [WEB]

Item --> Modify --> Form tab with radio button form control selected

When a radio button form control is selected, this version of the Modify dialog box Form tab is available. The controls in this tab let you control the attributes of the selected form control.

•	The Group field lets you specify the name of the group that the selected radio button form control belongs to.

•	The Type pop-up menu should be set to Radio button for radio button form controls.

•	The Value field lets you specify the value that is submitted for the radio button form control group if this particular radio button control is selected.

•	The Use as Default check box lets you specify that the selected radio button form control should be initially selected when the form displays in a Web browser. Checking this box for a radio button control unchecks it for all other radio button controls in the group (that is, all radio button controls with the same name).

•	The Required check box lets you specify whether a user must check one of the radio buttons with this name in order to submit the form. Checking this box for a radio button control checks it for all other radio button controls in the group (that is, all radio buttons with the same name).

NOTE: If you’re not sure which settings to use in the Form tab, contact your Webmaster.


Form dialog box tab for file selection controls [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Form dialog box tab for file submission controls [WEB]

Item --> Modify --> Form tab with file submission control selected

When a file submission control is selected, this version of the Modify dialog box Form tab is available. The controls in this tab let you control the attributes of the selected form control.

•	The Name field lets you specify the name of the selected form control.

•	The Type field displays File.

•	The Accept field lets you specify which types of files may be uploaded.

•	The Required check box lets you specify whether a file must be selected (using this control) before the reader submits the form. The reader can enter a file path and file name, or they can click the Browse button that is created with the file submission control and navigate to the file.

NOTE: If you’re not sure which settings to use in the Form tab, contact your Webmaster.


Duplicate command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Duplicate command

Item menu

The Duplicate command (Command+D on Mac OS, Ctrl+D on Windows) automatically places a copy of selected items in front of all other items. The placement of the copy is determined by the offset values specified in the Step and Repeat dialog box (Item --> Step and Repeat). The default horizontal and vertical offset value is .25".

When you duplicate boxes, their contents are duplicated as well. Duplicating a linked text box duplicates the selected box, the text contained by the selected box, plus any succeeding text in the text chain. An overflow symbol displays in the duplicated text box to represent the additional text in the chain.

NOTE: The Duplicate feature cannot place a copy outside an original item’s constraining box or the pasteboard.


Step and Repeat command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Step and Repeat command

Item menu

The Step and Repeat command (Command+Option+D on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+D on Windows) displays the Step and Repeat dialog box, which lets you create multiple copies of selected items and specify where QuarkXPress places the copies.

When you use the Step and Repeat feature with boxes, their contents are duplicated as well. Duplicating a linked text box duplicates the selected box, the text contained by the selected box, plus any succeeding text in the text chain. An overflow symbol is displayed in the duplicated text box to represent the additional text in the chain.

NOTE: The Step and Repeat feature cannot place a copy outside an original item’s constraining box or the pasteboard.


Step and Repeat dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Step and Repeat dialog box

Item menu

The Step and Repeat dialog box lets you enter values in the Repeat Count, Vertical Offset, and Horizontal Offset fields to place duplicates of selected items.

•	The Repeat Count field lets you specify the number of duplicates you want made of the original item.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
1 to 99	integers	1
•	The Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset fields let you specify where copies are placed (relative to the original). A positive horizontal value places copies to the right of the original; a negative horizontal value places copies to the left of the original. A positive vertical value places copies below the original; a negative vertical value places copies above the original. The values entered in the Step and Repeat dialog box become the default Step and Repeat offset values, as well as the offset values used by the Duplicate feature, until you quit QuarkXPress.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
±24"	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001


Delete command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Delete command

Item menu

The Delete command (Command+K on Mac OS, Ctrl+K on Windows) removes selected items. When a box is selected, choosing Delete removes contents along with the box.

When you delete a text box that is part of a linked chain, the other links are maintained around the deleted box, and the text is reflowed through the other text boxes of the chain.

TIP: To delete one or more selected points in a Bézier item without deleting the entire item, make sure the Item tool is selected, and press Delete (Mac OS) or Backspace (Windows) instead of using the Delete command.


Group command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Group command

Item menu

The Group command (Command+G on Mac OS, Ctrl+G on Windows) combines two or more selected items so that they can be selected and moved as a single item. A selected group is contained within a bounding box, indicated by a dotted line when the group is selected. A group is activated by clicking one of its items with the Item tool or multiple-selecting more than one of its items with the Content tool. The bounding box does not display if all items in a group are within a rectangular text or picture box.

You can perform many of the same basic operations on a group that you can on a single item, such as Cut, Copy, Duplicate, or Lock. You cannot resize a group. A group can contain other groups.

TIP: When the Content tool is selected, you can move and resize individual items within a group. You move items within a group by pressing Command (Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) while clicking and dragging.


Ungroup command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Ungroup command

Item menu

The Ungroup command (Command+U on Mac OS, Ctrl+U on Windows) dissociates grouped items. The Ungroup command is available when a group is selected. A group is activated by clicking one of its items with the Item tool or by multiple-selecting more than one of its items with the Content tool.

When a selected group contains other groups, choosing Ungroup ungroups only the most recently established group.


Constrain/Unconstrain command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Constrain/Unconstrain command

Item menu

The Constrain command changes a selected group to a constrained group. Items in a constrained group are contained within a constraining box. Items within a constraining box are referred to as "constrained items;" these items cannot be moved or resized beyond their constraining box. The Constrain command is available when the back item of a selected group has box borders that encompass all the other items in the group.

You can perform most of the same operations on a constrained group that you can on a group. When the Content tool is selected, you can move and resize individual items within a constrained group. You can move individual items by pressing Command (Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) while clicking and dragging. You cannot reduce the size of a constraining box so that it can no longer contain its constrained items. You also cannot move or resize constrained items beyond their constraining box.

When a constrained group is selected, the Unconstrain command is available and replaces the Constrain command in the Item menu. Choosing Unconstrain removes the constraining relationship among grouped items.


Lock/Unlock command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Lock/Unlock command

Item menu

The Lock command (F6) prevents you from moving, resizing, reshaping, or rotating items with the pointer. The Lock command is available when unlocked items are selected. You can still move and modify locked items using the Modify dialog box (Item --> Modify) or the Measurements palette.

When you move a pointer over a selected, locked item’s resize handles, Bézier points, Bézier segments, or picture contents, the pointer changes to the Padlock pointer. The Padlock pointer also displays when you move the Mover pointer or the Rotation pointer over any selected locked item. When locked items are selected, the Unlock command is available and replaces the Lock command in the Item menu.


 Padlock pointer


Merge submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Merge submenu

Item menu

The Merge submenu is available when more than one item is selected. The commands in the Merge submenu allow you to create complex Bézier shapes more efficiently than drawing them. The new box replaces the items originally selected. The shape of the new box is synthesized in various ways from the original item shapes.

The original items selected may include lines mixed with boxes. Some of the Merge commands require overlap among selected objects. In most cases, the only contents or attributes preserved (such as text, pictures, or background colors) are those of the back item in the stack.

The Merge commands are Intersection, Union, Difference, Reverse Difference, Exclusive Or, Combine, and Join Endpoints.


Intersection command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Intersection command

Item--> Merge

The Intersection command retains any areas that overlap the shape in back, but cuts out the rest. Choosing Intersection creates one box.


Union command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Union command

Item--> Merge

The Union command combines all the selected item shapes into one shape, retaining all overlapped and nonoverlapped areas. Items need not overlap for this command to be effective. Any shapes that do not overlap will appear to be separate boxes, but they are all part of the same box and behave accordingly.


Difference command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Difference command

Item--> Merge

The Difference command removes all the item shapes except for the item shape at the back of the stack. Any overlapping areas are cut out. The Difference command is useful for punching holes in an existing item shape, or for deleting or cropping parts of a Bézier illustration. Choosing Difference results in one box.


Reverse Difference command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Reverse Difference command

Item--> Merge

The Reverse Difference command deletes all the back items from a group of stacked item shapes, but retains any items at the very front of the stack, resulting in one box. Any overlapping areas are cut out. Choosing Reverse Difference results in one box.


Exclusive Or command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Exclusive Or command

Item--> Merge

The Exclusive Or command retains all the item shapes but cuts out any areas that overlap. If you edit the points surrounding the cut-out area, you will notice that there are two corner points at every location where two lines originally crossed. Choosing Exclusive Or may result in several boxes.


Combine command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Combine command

Item--> Merge

The Combine command is similar to the Exclusive Or command in that it keeps all selected item shapes and any areas that overlap are cut out; however, no corner points are added anywhere that two lines cross. Choosing Combine may result in several boxes.


Join Endpoints
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Join Endpoints command

Item--> Merge

The Join Endpoints command is unique among Merge commands because it creates a Bézier line instead of a Bézier box. The Join Endpoints command is available only when two lines or text paths are selected. An end-point from one selected line must overlap an end-point from the other selected line. (End-points can also be joined if the distance between them is equal to or less than the Snap Distance specified in the General pane of the Preferences dialog box.) Midpoints cannot be joined. The Join Endpoints feature creates a single Bézier corner point to replace the two overlapping end-points. Choosing Join Endpoints creates a single Bézier line or text path.

TIP: The Join Endpoints feature works best when the two end-points are perfectly overlapped. This is easily accomplished by snapping both points to a horizontal and vertical guide pair. If the overlapping points are not perfectly equal in position, QuarkXPress will still join them, but must interpolate the distance between their positions.


Split submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Split submenu

Item menu

The Split submenu is available only when the selected item is a single box that contains more than one closed path or consists of a closed path that crosses over itself (for example, a figure eight). The commands in the Split submenu let you break paths in a multiple-path box into two or more boxes. Both of the commands in the Split submenu produce multiple Bézier boxes. The new boxes replace the box that was originally selected. The contents or attributes of the original box (such as text, pictures, or background colors) are reproduced for all the resulting boxes.

•	The Outside Paths command splits a box that consists of two or more closed paths that are separated in space, but does not split closed paths contained within these paths. For example, if you choose Outside Paths when a box shaped like a bagel near an apple is selected, two boxes result — one for the bagel and one for the apple. No box is created for the hole in the bagel. The Outside Paths feature also works on paths that cross over themselves. A figure eight shape, for example, is split into two boxes.

•	The All Paths command splits all closed paths in the selected item, including paths contained within other paths. The All Paths feature splits a box shaped like two bagels into four boxes — two boxes representing the outsides of the bagels, and two boxes representing the holes in the bagels. The All Paths feature also works on paths that cross over themselves. A figure eight shape, for example, is split into two boxes.


Stacking order commands
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Stacking order commands

The stacking order commands include Send to Back, Send Backward, Bring to Front, and Bring Forward.


Send to Back command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Send to Back command

Item menu

The Send to Back command reorders the stacking of items by placing selected items at the back of the stack. The Send to Back command is available when selected items are not at the back of the stack. The stacking order of items affects the following:

•	Stacking is initially determined by the order in which items are created. The most recently created item is placed in front of previous items.

•	Boxes with background colors applied to them always obscure text, pictures, and items that are behind them. To make a box’s background transparent (so that items behind it are visible), apply a box background color of None (Item --> Modify --> Box tab). The picture or text contents of a box with a background of None may be opaque, but the box background itself will be transparent.

•	If the overlapping items have a runaround type other than None, items stacked in front of a box containing text will cause text to reflow.

•	A constraining box must remain behind the boxes it constrains. If you choose Send to Back for a constrained item, it will be placed immediately in front of its constraining box and behind all other constrained items.

On Mac OS, pressing Option while displaying the Item menu replaces Send to Back with Send Backward. On Windows, the Send Backward command is a default command in the Item menu.


Send Backward command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Send Backward command

Item menu

On Mac OS, pressing Option while displaying the Item menu replaces Send to Back with Send Backward. On Windows, the Send Backward command is a default command in the Item menu. The Send Backward command places the selected items one level back in the stacking order. The selected item is moved behind the item that was positioned behind it. The Send Backward command is available when selected items are not at the bottom of the stack.

TIP: To select an item that is completely hidden by another item, press Command+Option+Shift (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Alt+Shift (Windows) and click at the location of the hidden item. When there are many layers of items, repeatedly clicking at the point where items overlap will successively select items from the top of the stack down to the bottom.


Bring to Front command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Bring to Front command

Item menu

The Bring to Front command reorders the stacking of items by placing selected items at the top of the stack. The Bring to Front command is available when selected items are not at the top of the stack. It is not available when a constraining box is selected independently of its group.

On Mac OS, pressing Option while displaying the Item menu replaces the Bring to Front command with the Bring Forward command. On Windows, Bring Forward is a default command in the Item menu.


Bring Forward command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Bring Forward command

Item menu

On the Mac OS, pressing Option while displaying the Item menu replaces the Bring to Front command with the Bring Forward command. On Windows, Bring Forward is a default command in the Item menu. The Bring Forward command brings the selected item one level forward in the stacking order. The selected item is moved in front of the item that was positioned on top of it. The Bring Forward command is available when selected items are not at the top of the stack. The Bring to Front and Bring Forward commands  are not available when a constraining box is selected independently of its group.

NOTE: In a document with layers, the layers themselves are in a particular stacking order; within each layer, each item has its own relationship to the stacking order. When you use the Send to Back, Send Backward, Bring to Front, and Bring Forward commands (Item menu), the stacking order of the items is altered within the layer. The Send and Bring commands do not move items to different layers.

Form controls always reside on the bottom layer, so if you select a form control, the Send to Back, Send Backward, Bring to Front and Bring Forward commands will be unavailable. [WEB]


Space/Align command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Space/Align command

Item menu

The Space/Align command (Command+, on Mac OS, Ctrl+, on Windows) displays the Space/Align dialog box, which lets you control the amount of horizontal or vertical space between multiple-selected items. The Space/Align command is available when two or more items are selected.


Space/Align items dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Space/Align Items dialog box

Item --> Space/Align

The Space/Align Items dialog box consists of the Horizontal and Vertical areas. To enable the controls in either area, check Horizontal or Vertical. You can specify horizontal spacing and alignment alone, vertical spacing and alignment alone, or a combination of the two.


Horizontal area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Horizontal area

Item --> Space/Align

The Horizontal check box lets you control horizontal spacing and alignment among the selected items. Checking Horizontal enables the Space, Distribute Evenly, and Between controls in the Horizontal area.

The horizontal space between selected items can be controlled three ways: You can specify an absolute amount of space between items; you can specify a percentage of the space currently between items; or you can distribute space evenly between items. By choosing an option from the Between pop-up menu, you can specify whether QuarkXPress measures the space from the center or from the edge of an item.


Space (radio button)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Space (radio button)

Item --> Space/Align --> Horizontal checked

When you click Space and enter a value in the Space field in the Horizontal area, QuarkXPress spaces items relative to the left selected item, which does not move. The left item is defined as the item with a left bounding box edge (or line portion including line width and text on a path) that extends closest to the left side of the pasteboard. If two or more items have the same left edge position, QuarkXPress spaces selected items with respect to the item closest to the top of the pasteboard.

•	To specify an absolute amount of horizontal space between selected items, enter a value from 0 to 10" in the Space field.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 10"	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001
•	To position selected items according to a percentage of their current horizontal spacing relative to one another, enter a value from 0 to 1,000%. For example, for selected items horizontally spaced 2" apart from center to center, a value of 50% reduces space between centers to 1".

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 1,000%	percent	.1


Distribute Evenly (radio button)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Distribute Evenly (radio button)

Item --> Space/Align --> Horizontal checked

To place an equal amount of horizontal space between selected items, click Distribute Evenly. The Distribute Evenly option is available when three or more items are selected. When you specify Distribute Evenly, the left and right items do not move. Only items between move. Values entered in the Space field are ignored when you click Distribute Evenly.


Between pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Between pop-up menu

Item --> Space/Align --> Horizontal checked

The Between pop-up menu displays four methods for horizontally aligning selected items: Items, Left Edges, Centers, and Right Edges. The method you choose from the Between pop-up menu determines how QuarkXPress implements the value or percentage you enter in the Space field, or how horizontal space is distributed evenly.

When horizontally spacing and aligning a rectangular box, QuarkXPress measures from the sides of the box. When spacing and aligning a group or an item that is not rectangular, such as an oval or a Bézier box, QuarkXPress measures from the group’s or the item’s bounding box. When spacing and aligning a line, QuarkXPress considers all parts of the line, including its width and text on a path.

•	Choosing Items places the amount of space or percentage entered in the Space field between the right edge of one selected item and the left edge of the item to the right of it, and so on.

•	Choosing Left Edges places the amount of space or percentage entered in the Space field between the left edges of selected items.

•	Choosing Centers places the amount of space or percentage entered in the Space field between the centers of selected items.

•	Choosing Right Edges places the amount of space or percentage entered in the Space field between the right edges of selected items.


Vertical area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Vertical area

Item --> Space/Align

The Vertical check box lets you control vertical spacing and alignment among the selected items. Checking Vertical enables the Space, Distribute Evenly, and Between controls in the Vertical area.

The vertical space between selected items can be controlled in three ways: You can specify an absolute amount of space between items, you can specify a percentage of the space currently between items, or you can distribute space evenly between items. By choosing an option from the Between pop-up menu, you can specify whether QuarkXPress measures the space from the center or from the edge of an item.


Space (radio button)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Space (radio button)

Item --> Space/Align --> Vertical checked

When you choose Space and enter a value in the Space field in the Vertical area, QuarkXPress spaces items relative to the top selected item, which does not move. The top item is defined as the item with a top bounding box edge (or line portion including line width and text on a path) that extends closest to the top of the pasteboard. If two or more items have the same top edge position, then QuarkXPress spaces selected items with respect to the left item.

•	To specify an absolute amount of vertical space between selected items, enter a value from 0 to 10" in the Space field.

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 10"	various (", pt, cm, etc.)	.001
•	To position selected items according to a percentage of their current vertical spacing relative to one another, enter a value from 0 to 1,000% in the Space field. For example, for selected items vertically spaced 2" from center to center, a value of 50% reduces space between centers to 1".

Range	Measurement system	Smallest increment
0 to 1,000%	percent	.1


Distribute Evenly (radio button)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Distribute Evenly (radio button)

Item --> Space/Align --> Vertical checked

To place an equal amount of vertical space between selected items, click Distribute Evenly. The Distribute Evenly option is available when three or more items are selected. When you specify Distribute Evenly, the upper and lower items do not move. Values you enter in the Space field are ignored when you click Distribute Evenly.


Between pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Between pop-up menu

Item --> Space/Align --> Vertical checked

The Between pop-up menu displays four methods for vertically aligning selected items: Items, Top Edges, Centers, and Bottom Edges. The method you choose from the Between pop-up menu determines how QuarkXPress implements the value or percentage you enter in the Space field, or how space is distributed evenly.

When vertically spacing and aligning a rectangular box, QuarkXPress measures from the top and bottom of the box. When spacing and aligning a group or an item that is not rectangular, such as an oval or a Bézier box, QuarkXPress measures from the bounding box. When spacing and aligning a line, QuarkXPress considers all parts of the line, including its width.

•	Choosing Items places the amount of space or percentage entered in the Space field between the bottom edge of one selected item and the top edge of the item beneath it, and so on.

•	Choosing Top Edges places the amount of space or percentage entered in the Space field between the top edges of selected items.

•	Choosing Centers places the amount of space or percentage entered in the Space field between the centers of selected items.

•	Choosing Bottom Edges places the amount of space or percentage entered in the Space field between the bottom edges of selected items.


Shape submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Shape submenu

Item menu

The Shape submenu lets you change the shape type of a selected item. For example, you can change a circle into a square or vice versa. You can also change the type of item. For instance, lines can be changed into boxes or boxes into lines. Two of the options in the Shape submenu are arbitrary shapes that allow free-form Bézier editing. The Shape submenu is not available for multiple-selected items.

•	Choosing the rectangle box changes the selected item into a rectangular box that cannot be edited using Bézier points.

•	Choosing the rounded-corner box changes the selected item into a rounded-corner box that cannot be edited using Bézier points.

•	Choosing the concave-corner box changes the selected item into a concave-corner box that cannot be edited using Bézier points.

•	Choosing the beveled-corner box changes the selected item into a beveled-corner box that cannot be edited using Bézier points.

•	Choosing the oval box changes the selected item into an elliptical box that cannot be edited using Bézier points..

•	Choosing the Bézier shape does not visibly change the shape, but does allow interactive Bézier editing whenever Item --> Edit --> Shape is checked. If you choose the Bézier box option when a line is selected, QuarkXPress traces around the actual line width (along with any arrowhead and dash pattern applied to the line) to convert the line into an elongated Bézier box. However, if the line is a Bézier line, it may be preferable to make this transformation by simply joining or connecting the end-points of the line without tracing around its width. To join or connect the end-points of a Bézier line to form a Bézier box, press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) while choosing the Bézier box option. If the end-points sit on top (or almost on top) of each other, they are joined into one point. Otherwise, a new line segment is added that connects the two end-points.

•	Choosing the diagonal line changes the selected item into a straight line (of any angle) that cannot be edited using Bézier points.

•	Choosing the straight line changes the selected item into a straight line that is only horizontal or vertical, and cannot be edited using Bézier points.

•	Choosing the Bézier line changes the selected item shape into a Bézier line based on the original box or line shape, and allows interactive Bézier editing whenever Item --> Edit --> Shape is checked. If the original shape is a multiple-path box, only one of the paths in the box will be retained when you convert to a line.

TIP: A Bézier line in QuarkXPress is a single open path. If you want an item to include closed paths or multiple paths, you must work with Bézier box items.


Content submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Content submenu

Item menu

The Content submenu lets you change the content type of a selected item. For example, you can change a text box into a picture box or a line into a text path, or vice versa. An item can contain only one type of content, so changes made using the Content submenu delete the current contents of the selected item. The Content submenu is not available for multiple-selected items.

•	Choose Picture if you want the selected box to contain a picture. The Picture command is not available when the selected item is a line or text path.

•	Choose Text if you want the selected box or line to contain text.

•	Choose None if you want the selected box to contain neither picture nor text. This type of box can contain color, shade, or a blend.


Edit submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit submenu

Item menu

The Edit submenu is available when the selected item is a Bézier item or an item that contains an editable clipping path or runaround path. The options in the Edit submenu let you choose which aspect of the selected item you can access. The Edit submenu is not available for multiple-selected items.

•	When none of the items in the Edit submenu are checked, only the bounding box of the selected item is accessible. You can resize or move it, but you cannot reshape it.

•	When Shape is checked (Shift+F4 on Mac OS, F10 on Windows), the bounding box of the item is inaccessible. Instead, you have access to the individual Bézier points that define the item’s shape. The Shape command is available only for selected Bézier items. To change a box into a Bézier box, choose Item --> Shape --> Bézier shape option. To change a line or text path into a Bézier line or text path, choose Item --> Shape --> Bézier line option.

TIP: When Shape is checked, you can still move a Bézier line without reshaping it. To do so, first select all the points in the selected line by pressing Command+Shift+A (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Shift+A (Windows) or by double-clicking any of the Bézier points in the line. With all the points selected, drag any point to move the entire line. Make sure that the Point pointer is displayed before you drag, or you may accidentally reshape the line by moving a segment or curve handle.

•	The Runaround command is available when a picture-based runaround path — or a manual runaround path for a text path — has been created for the selected item using the Runaround tab of the Modify dialog box (Item menu). When Runaround is checked (Option+F4 on Mac OS, Ctrl+F10 on Windows), the runaround path displays (the default color is magenta), and can be edited using Bézier points.

•	The Clipping Path command is available when a picture-based clipping path has been created for a selected picture box using the Clipping tab of the Modify dialog box. When Clipping Path is checked (Option+Shift+F4 on Mac OS, Ctrl+Shift+F10 on Windows), the clipping path displays (the default color is green), and can be edited using Bézier points.


Point/Segment Type submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Point/Segment Type submenu

Item menu

The Point/Segment Type submenu lets you convert selected Bézier points and segments. The top half of the Point/Segment Type submenu lists point types (Corner Point, Smooth Point, and Symmetrical Point). The bottom half of the submenu lists segment types (Straight Segment and Curved Segment). To access Bézier points and segments, one of the options in the Item --> Edit submenu must be checked.

A Bézier point is selected by clicking it. You can multiple-select Bézier points by Shift+clicking each one. You can select all Bézier points in a selected item by pressing Command+Shift+A (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Shift+A (Windows) or by triple-clicking any of the Bézier points in the item. Double-clicking a point suffices if the item contains only one path. When multiple points are selected, the Point commands in the Point/Segment Type submenu affect all selected points, and the Segment commands in the submenu affect all segments between adjacent selected points.

Whenever two adjacent points are selected, the segment between them is selected. You can select an individual segment and its two associated points by clicking the segment or by clicking both points on either end of it. When all points in an item are selected (Command+Shift+A on Mac OS, Ctrl+Shift+A on Windows), all segments are selected as well.


Corner Point command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Corner Point command

Item --> Point/Segment Type

The Corner Point command (Option+F1 on Mac OS, Ctrl+F1 on Windows) changes selected Bézier points into corner points. A corner point is a Bézier point that connects two straight lines, a straight line and a curved line, or two noncontinuous curved lines. In the case of curved lines, the corner point’s curve handles can be manipulated independently of one another, usually to form a sharp transition between the two segments.


Smooth Point command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Smooth Point command

Item --> Point/Segment Type

The Smooth Point command (Option+F2 on Mac OS, Ctrl+F2 on Windows) changes selected points into smooth points. A smooth point is a Bézier point that connects two curved lines to form a continuous curve. The curve handles always rest on a straight line through the point but can be distanced independently, which lets you create an asymmetrical curve.


Symmetrical Point command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Symmetrical Point command

Item --> Point/Segment Type

The Symmetrical Point command (Option+F3 on Mac OS, Ctrl+F3 on Windows) changes selected points into symmetrical points. A symmetrical point is a Bézier point that connects two curved lines to form a continuous curve. The result is similar to a smooth point, but the curve handles always rest on a straight line through the point and are always equidistant from the point.


Straight Segment command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Straight Segment command

Item --> Point/Segment Type

The Straight Segment command (Option+Shift+F1 on Mac OS, Ctrl+Shift+F1 on Windows) changes selected segments into straight segments. A straight segment is a Bézier segment that cannot be curved. A point attached to a straight segment displays no curve handle for the straight segment. When you drag a straight segment, its associated points move with it. Straight segments are created by default when you click (without dragging) to create points in a new Bézier item.


Curved Segment command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Curved Segment command

Item --> Point/Segment Type

The Curved Segment command (Option+Shift+F2 on Mac OS, Ctrl+Shift+F2 on Windows) changes selected segments into curved segments. A curved segment may look straight if its associated curve handles are positioned in a certain way, but it behaves differently from a straight segment.

Points attached to a curved segment display a curve handle for the curved segment. When you drag a curved segment, its associated points remain in place while the segment itself bends, bringing the curve handles along with it. Depending on the type of points attached to the segment (Corner, Smooth, or Symmetrical), the adjoining segments may also bend. When you drag the mouse to create points in a new Bézier item, curved segments are created by default.

TIP: A curved segment in QuarkXPress bends differently depending on which part of it you drag. This lets you shape the segment like a piece of wire, by pushing or pulling on the parts that require adjustment. You do not have to drag curve handles directly.


Convert Text to Table command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Convert Text to Table command

Item menu

The Convert Text to Table command displays the Convert Text to Table dialog box, which allows you to convert selected text into a table. You can specify the way the text is flowed into the table.


Convert Text to Table dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Convert Text to Table dialog box

Item --> Convert Text to Table

Choosing Convert Text to Table displays the Convert Text to Table dialog box; choose options from the Separate Rows with and Separate Columns with pop-up menus; enter values in the Rows and Columns fields;  and choose a Cell Fill Order to determine how the selected text is arranged when it is converted to a table.


Separate rows with pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Separate rows with pop-up menu

Item --> Convert Text to Table

Separate Rows with lets you choose whether rows are created at paragraph returns, tabs, spaces, or commas. By default, rows will be separated by paragraph returns.


Separate columns with pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Separate columns with pop-up menu

Item --> Convert Text to Table

Separate Columns with lets you choose whether columns are created at paragraph returns, tabs, spaces, or commas. By default, columns will be separated by tabs.


Rows field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Rows field

Item --> Convert Text to Table

The Rows field displays the number of rows your table will have. The default value is the number of rows that automatically result from the separation characters you chose. Entering a value higher than the displayed value will create empty rows at the end of the table; entering a value lower than the displayed value will create fewer rows than data, thus cutting off the table.


Columns field
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Columns field

Item --> Convert Text to Table

The Columns field displays the number of columns your table will have. The default value is the number of columns that automatically result from the separation characters you chose. Entering a value higher than the displayed value will create empty columns at the right side of the table; entering a value lower than the displayed value will create fewer columns than data, thus cutting off the table.


Cell Fill Order pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Cell Fill Order pop-up menu

Item --> Convert Text to Table

The Cell Fill Order pop-up menu determines what order the cells will be filled in. The default order is Left to Right, Top Down. You can also choose Right to Left, Top Down; Top Down, Left to Right; or Top Down, Right to Left.


Table submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Table submenu

Item menu

The Table submenu lets you delete rows or columns, insert rows, insert columns, combine cells, split cells, or convert tables to text.


Combine cells command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Combine cells command

Item --> Table

The Combine Cells command will turn two or more selected cells into one larger cell. You can only combine adjacent cells; if you Shift+select nonadjacent cells, the Combine Cells command will be unavailable. The Combine Cells command changes to Split Cells when you have combined cells and the combined cells are selected.


Split Cell command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Split Cell command

Item --> Table

The Split Cell command will turn a cell that was modified using the Combine Cells command into its original separate cells. You can only split cells that were combined. The Split Cell command changes to Combine Cells when you have split cells and the split cells are selected.


Insert Rows command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Insert Rows command

Item --> Table

The Insert Rows command will insert rows into the table. You can specify the number of rows and specify whether they should be placed above or below the selected cell.


Insert Columns command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Insert Columns command

Item --> Table

The Insert Columns command will insert columns into the table. You can specify the number of columns and specify whether they should placed to the left or right of the currently selected cell.


Delete command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Delete command

Item --> Table

The Delete command will delete rows or columns from the table. The Delete command will change to Delete Row(s) or Delete Column(s) depending on whether you have rows or columns selected. You must have a row or column selected to use the Delete command.


Convert Table to Text command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Convert Table to Text command

Item --> Table

The Convert Table to Text command displays the Convert Table to Text dialog box, which lets you convert a selected table to text.


Convert Table to Text dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Convert Table to Text dialog box

Item --> Convert Table to Text

Choosing Convert Table to Text displays the Convert Table to Text dialog box; choose options from the Separate Rows with and Separate Columns with pop-up menus and choose a Text Extraction Order to determine how the selected table is arranged when it is converted to text.


Separate rows with pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Separate rows with pop-up menu

Item --> Table --> Convert Table to Text

The Separate Rows with pop-up menu lets you choose whether rows are separated with paragraph returns, tabs, spaces, or commas when the table is converted to text. By default, rows will be separated with paragraph returns.


Separate columns with pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Separate columns with pop-up menu

Item --> Table --> Convert Table to Text

The Separate Columns with pop-up menu lets you choose whether columns are separated with paragraph returns, tabs, spaces, or commas when the table is converted to text. By default, columns will be separated with tabs.


Text Extraction Order pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Text Extraction Order pop-up menu

Item --> Table --> Convert Table to Text

The Text Extraction Order pop-up menu determines what order the cell data will be arranged in when it is converted to text. The default is Left to Right, Top Down. You can also choose Right to Left, Top Down; Top Down, Left to Right; or Top Down, Right to Left.


Gridlines submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Gridlines submenu

Item --> Gridlines

When a table is selected with the Content tool, the Gridlines submenu is available. The Gridlines submenu lets you select groups of gridlines to modify.

•	The Select Horizontal option selects all horizontal gridlines.

•	The Select Vertical option selects all vertical gridlines.

•	The Select Borders option selects the four grids that contain the table (not the gridlines of individual cells).

•	The Select All option selects all gridlines, including the grids that contain the table.

Once the desired gridlines are selected, you can then choose Item --> Modify to format the gridlines. You can also use the Measurements palette or Colors palette to format the gridlines.


Rollover submenu [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Rollover submenu [WEB]

Item --> Rollover

The Rollover submenu lets you create and delete rollover items.


Create Rollover command [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Create Rollover command [WEB]

Item --> Rollover --> Create Rollover

The Create Rollover command displays the Rollover dialog box. You can also display the Rollover dialog box by choosing Create Rollover from the picture box context menu.


Rollover dialog box [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Rollover dialog box [WEB]

Item --> Rollover --> Create Rollover

The Rollover dialog box lets you turn the active picture box into a rollover.

•	The Default Image field lets you specify which picture displays in the box when the page is initially loaded. Enter the path to the desired picture file or use the Select button (Mac OS) or Browse button (Windows) to manually locate it.

•	The Rollover Image field lets you specify which picture displays in the box when the pointer is over the box. Enter the path to the desired picture file or use the Select button (Mac OS) or Browse button (Windows) to manually locate it.

•	The Hyperlink field and pop-up menu lets you specify a URL to be linked to when the reader clicks the rollover. The Hyperlink pop-up menu displays a list of hyperlinks already used in the selected Web document; choose one of these options, enter a new one in the field, or use the Select button (Mac OS) or Browse button (Windows) to manually locate it.


Delete Rollover command [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Delete Rollover command [WEB]

Item --> Rollover --> Delete Rollover

The Delete Rollover command deletes any rollover attached to the selected picture box. You can also delete a rollover by choosing Delete Rollover from the picture box context menu.


Delete All Hot Areas command [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Delete All Hot Areas command [WEB]

Item --> Delete All Hot Areas

The Delete All Hot Areas command deletes any hot areas attached to the selected picture box. You can also delete a hot area by selecting the hot area with the Content tool and then pressing Delete.


Page menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Page menu

Every QuarkXPress document uses pages, so controlling their placement and navigating through them is especially important. The QuarkXPress Page menu lets you perform these and other page-related tasks. The QuarkXPress Page menu gives you options for adding, deleting, arranging, and sectioning pages in a document and for navigating through a document. The Page menu is divided into four sections:

•	The first section lets you insert, delete, and move pages within an open document. The Insert command is available when a document contains fewer than 2,000 pages. The Delete and Move commands are available when a document contains two or more pages.

•	The second section lets you modify the placement of page guides and change the numbering system for a document or a range of pages in a print document, or change the background and other properties on master pages in a Web document. The Master Guides command is available in a print document when a master page is displayed in the document window. The Page Properties command is available in a Web document when a document page is displayed in the document window. (This command changes to Master Page Properties when a master page is displayed.) [PRINT]: The Section command is available when a page is displayed.

•	The third section lets you navigate through a document. The availability of specific commands depends on the number of pages in the document and the displayed page. Commands may include Previous, First, Next, Last, and Go to.

•	The fourth section lets you view master pages or document pages. The Display command and submenu is available when a document is active.


Insert command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Insert command

Page -->Insert

The Insert command (Page menu) displays the Insert Pages dialog box, which lets you add pages to a document.


Insert Pages dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Insert Pages dialog box

Page -->Insert

The Insert Pages dialog box lets you specify how many pages to add, where to add them, which master page to base them on, and whether the text boxes should be linked to current document pages. When you insert pages, QuarkXPress automatically updates page numbers up to the start of the next section.

•	Insert page(s) field: To specify the number of pages to add to the document, enter a value between 1 and 100. A document can contain up to 2,000 pages.

•	Before page, after page, and at end of document radio buttons: Click a button to specify where to add the new pages. If you click before page or after page, enter the number of the page that the new pages will precede or follow. (In a Web document, you can also enter the page name in this field. [WEB]) The current page number displays by default.

TIP: Print documents only: If you designated a prefix and page number style in the Section dialog box (Page --> Section), you must use that prefix and style when you enter page numbers in fields. You can also enter an absolute page number, which represents the page’s sequential order in the document, regardless of its numbering. To specify an absolute page number, enter a plus sign (+) before the number.


Link to Current Text Chain check box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Link to Current Text Chain check box [PRINT]

Page -->Insert

The Link to Current Text Chain check box lets you link automatic text boxes on inserted pages to the active text chain in the document. No matter where you add the pages, the text boxes on the new pages are linked to the end of the active text chain.

•	The Link to Current Text Chain check box is available if the master page chosen from the Master Page pop-up menu contains an automatic text box (as indicated by the Intact Chain icon in the upper left corner of the master page) and an automatic text box is active on a document page.

•	The Link to Current Text Chain check box is unavailable when there is no active automatic text box on a document page, or when the Broken Chain icon is displayed in the upper left corner of the chosen master page.


Master Page pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Master Page pop-up menu

Page -->Insert

The Master Page pop-up menu lets you choose which master page will be applied to the inserted pages. The pop-up menu lists all the master pages established for the active document, including Blank Single page and Blank Facing Page master pages. Blank Facing Page is unavailable for documents without facing pages, or for Web documents.


Delete command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Delete command

Page -->Delete

The Delete command displays the Delete Pages dialog box, which lets you remove a page or a range of pages from the active document.


Delete Pages dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Delete Pages dialog box

Page -->Delete

The Delete Pages dialog box lets you specify a page or range of pages to delete. When you delete pages in a print document, QuarkXPress automatically updates page numbers up to the start of the next section. You can specify page numbers in four ways:

•	Document page number based on automatic page number characters: Enter a document page number the same way it displays on the document page. For example, if the page is numbered "2.1," you must enter "2.1."

•	Absolute page number representing the page’s sequential order in the document: Enter a plus sign before the page number. For example, the third page in a document is always page "+3" even if the document page number is "iii."

•	To the end of a document: Enter a page number as described above for the beginning of the range and then enter "end" in the thru field. All the pages from the beginning of the range to the end of the document will be deleted.

•	Document page name: Enter a page name the same way it displays in the Document Layout palette. [WEB]

When you delete pages, you can expect these results:

•	When there are links between text boxes on deleted pages and text boxes on remaining pages, QuarkXPress does not delete text; the last page containing a text box will display an overflow symbol. If an entire text chain is contained within the deleted pages, the text is deleted. [PRINT]

•	Pictures and other items that are not anchored to text are deleted.

•	If Auto Page Insertion is enabled (Edit -->Preferences -->Preferences -->General pane) and the text boxes on remaining pages cannot contain the text from the deleted pages, QuarkXPress automatically re-inserts the number of pages necessary to display all the text. If you do not want the program to insert pages automatically, disable Auto Page Insertion. [PRINT]

•	Automatically inserted pages are based on the master page of the page preceding them. For example, if you specify auto page insertion At End of Document, newly inserted pages are based on the master page of the last page in the document. QuarkXPress inserts pages automatically only if the master page chosen contains the automatic text box (as indicated by the Intact Chain icon in the upper left corner of the master page). [PRINT]


Move command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Move command

Page menu

The Move command displays the Move Pages dialog box, which lets you rearrange pages within your document.


Move Pages dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Move Pages dialog box

Page -->Move

The Move Pages dialog box lets you rearrange pages in a document. When you move pages, QuarkXPress automatically updates page numbers if you used the automatic page number characters (Command+2, Command+3, or Command+4 on Mac OS; Ctrl+2, Ctrl+3, or Ctrl+4 on Windows). However, QuarkXPress does not change links between text boxes. [PRINT]

•	Move page(s) fields: Enter page number(s) for the page(s) to be moved, or page name(s) in a Web document.

•	Before page, after page, and to end of document buttons: Click a radio button to specify a new location for the moved pages.

TIP: Print documents only: If you designated a prefix and page number style in the Section dialog box (Page --> Section), you must use that prefix and style when you enter page numbers in fields. You can also enter an absolute page number, which represents the page’s sequential order in the document. To specify an absolute page number, enter a plus sign (+) before the number.


Master Guides command [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Master Guides command [PRINT]

Page menu

The Master Guides command, which is available when a master page is displayed in the document window, displays the Master Guides dialog box, which lets you change the position of page guides. Page guides are nonprinting lines you can use to position boxes and other items in QuarkXPress documents. The page guides also control the size, placement, and number of columns of automatic text boxes on master pages.


Master Guides dialog box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Master Guides dialog box [PRINT]

Page -->Master Guides

The Master Guides dialog box lets you change the positions of page guides for columns and margins on the displayed master page. Any changes you make to page guides in the Master Guides dialog box, including changes that affect any automatic text boxes, are applied to all document pages based on the displayed master page.


Column Guides area [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Column Guides area [PRINT]

Page -->Master Guides

The Column Guides area lets you change the number of column guides and the amount of space between them for the automatic text box on the displayed master page.

•	Columns field: Enter a value between 1 and 30 to specify the number of columns on the page.

•	Gutter Width field: Enter a value from 0.042" to 4" to specify the amount of space between columns.

•	The gutter width and the number of columns specified must fit within the area defined by the values in the Margin Guides fields.

TIP: When you modify the column guides, QuarkXPress divides any automatic text boxes into the specified number of columns and adjusts the gutter width as necessary (if you have not moved or resized the box).


Margin Guides area [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Margin Guides area [PRINT]

Page -->Master Guides

The Margin Guides area lets you enter new values for the margin guides for the displayed master page, and for document pages based on that master page. You can enter values in any supported measurement system in the Top, Bottom, Left, and Right fields. If a facing-page master page is displayed in the document window, the Left and Right margin fields are replaced by Inside and Outside.


Section command [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Section command [PRINT]

Page menu

A section is a group of sequentially numbered pages within a document. The Section command displays the Section dialog box, which lets you divide a document into individually numbered sections.

The page number shown in the lower left corner of the document window reflects any sectioning and page number format modifications. An asterisk (*) displayed on a document page icon in the Document Layout palette (View menu) indicates the start of a new section.

TIP: Print documents only: You can also access the Section dialog box from the Document Layout palette (View menu); click a page icon, then click the page number indicator in the lower left corner of the palette.


Section dialog box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Section dialog box [PRINT]

Page -->Section

The Section dialog box lets you designate the current page as the start of a section and specify a prefix for the page numbers, the first page number of the section, and the format of the page numbers. The Book Chapter Start check box displays when you are working in a book chapter.


Section Start check box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Section Start check box [PRINT]

Page -->Section

Checking Section Start lets you define the current page as the first page of a section. The page number displayed in the lower left corner of the document window is the current page.


Book Chapter Start check box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Book Chapter Start check box [PRINT]

Page -->Section

The Book Chapter Start check box applies to documents that are chapters in an open book (File -->New -->Book). QuarkXPress places a book chapter start at the beginning of each chapter. A book chapter start tells a chapter where to start its page numbering. You cannot turn a book chapter start on or off, but you can override it by creating a section start.


Page Numbering area [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Page Numbering area [PRINT]

Page -->Section

The Page Numbering area lets you specify the numbering and style of pages in a section. Any automatic page numbers placed using the automatic page number characters (Command+2, Command+3, or Command+4 on Mac OS; Ctrl+2, Ctrl+3, or Ctrl+4 on Windows) will reflect the specified section numbering format.

•	Prefix field: Enter up to four characters to precede page numbers in a section. For example, you might precede the page number of an appendix with the prefix "app-."

•	Number field: Enter the number you want to assign to the first page of a new section. You must enter Arabic numerals (for example, 1, 2, 3) in the Number field, regardless of the Format setting of the section page numbers. For example, if you are using lowercase Roman numerals for the front matter in a book and want the section to start with v, enter 5 in the Number field.

•	Format pop-up menu: Choose a style for page numbers in a section. Options include numeric (1, 2, 3, 4), uppercase Roman (I, II, III, IV); lowercase Roman (i, ii, iii, iv); uppercase alphabetic (A, B, C, D); and lowercase alphabetic (a, b, c, d).


Page Properties command [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Page Properties command [WEB]

Page menu

The Page Properties command displays the Page Properties dialog box, which lets you configure controls for exported HTML documents that are based on the active page.


Page Properties dialog box [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Page Properties dialog box [WEB]

Page -->Page Properties

The Page Properties dialog box lets you control a variety of settings for HTML documents that are exported from the active page. To control these settings for pages based on a specific master page, display that master page and choose Page --> Master Page Properties. Changes made in the Page Properties dialog box will override master page settings for that page; to revert to the master page settings, reapply the master page to the document page.

Controls in the Page Properties dialog box include the Page Title field; the Export File Name field; the Meta Tag Set pop-up menu; the Colors area; the Page Width pop-up menu and field; the Variable Width area; the Background Image check box; the Select (Mac OS) and Browse (Windows) buttons; and the Repeat pop-up menu.


Page Title field [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Page Title field [WEB]

Page -->Page Properties

The Page Title field lets you enter a name for the exported HTML document. This name becomes the <TITLE> tag in the exported HTML document’s <HEAD> section, and displays as the name of the Web browser window in which the HTML document displays.


Export File Name field [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Export File Name field [WEB]

Page -->Page Properties

The Export File Name field lets you specify the name of the file that will be created when you export the active page in HTML format. The suffix ".htm" is automatically added to the end of the file name at export. Because each page in a Web document is exported as a separate HTML file, you must name each page individually.


Meta Tag Set pop-up menu [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Meta Tag Set pop-up menu [WEB]

Page -->Page Properties

The Meta Tag Set pop-up menu lets you specify which set of meta tags (if any) you want to include in the exported HTML page.


Colors area [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Colors area [WEB]

Page -->Page Properties

The Colors area lets you specify the default colors for the page background and for hyperlinks:

•	Choose an option from the Background pop-up menu to specify the page background color.

•	Choose an option from the Link pop-up menu to specify the default color of hyperlinks.

•	Choose an option from the Visited Link pop-up menu to specify the color of hyperlinks that have been clicked.

•	Choose an option from the Active Link pop-up menu to specify the color of hyperlinks that the reader is clicking on.


Page Width (pop-up menu and field) [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Page Width (pop-up menu and field) [WEB]

Page -->Page Properties

The Page Width pop-up menu and field let you specify the position of the page width guide, a vertical guide that helps you estimate where the reader’s browser window ends horizontally.


Variable Width Page area [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Variable Width Page area [WEB]

Page -->Page Properties

In a variable width page, text boxes that have been specified as variable-width boxes (Item -->Modify) can expand and contract to fit the width of the reader’s Web browser. To make the page a variable width page, check Variable Width Page and then enter values for the following fields:

•	The Width field lets you specify the percentage of the viewable browser area that the page will occupy.

•	The Minimum field lets you specify a minimum page width. If the reader’s browser window is made smaller than this width, items will stop being resized.


Background Image check box [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Background Image check box [WEB]

Page -->Page Properties

The Background Image check box lets you choose a background picture for the Web document. When Background Image is checked, the Select button (Mac OS) or Browse button (Windows) and the Repeat pop-up menu become available.


Select (button — Mac OS), Browse (Button — Windows) [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Select (button — Mac OS), Browse (Button — Windows) [WEB]

Page -->Page Properties

The Select button (Mac OS) or Browse button (Windows) displays a dialog box that lets you select a picture file for use as a background image.


Repeat pop-up menu [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Repeat pop-up menu [WEB]

Page -->Page Properties

The Repeat pop-up menu lets you specify how the background image is displayed:

•	Choose Tile to continuously repeat the graphic both horizontally and vertically.

•	Choose Horizontal to continuously repeat the graphic horizontally but not vertically.

•	Choose Vertical to continuously repeat the graphic vertically but not horizontally.

•	Choose None to show the graphic only once, in the upper left corner of the browser window.


Master Page Properties command [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Master Page Properties command [WEB]

Page menu

The Master Page Properties command displays the Master Page Properties dialog box, which lets you configure controls for master pages.


Master Page Properties dialog box [WEB]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Master Page Properties dialog box [WEB]

Page -->Master Page Properties

The Master Page Properties dialog box lets you control a variety of settings for master pages for HTML documents. To control these settings for specific master pages, display that master page and choose Page -->Master Page Properties. The Master Page Properties dialog box is almost identical to the Page Properties dialog box; the only exception is that the Master Page Properties dialog box does not contain the Page Title or Export File Name fields.


Previous, Next, First, Last commands
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Previous, Next, First, Last commands

Page menu

The Previous, Next, First, and Last commands let you display the specified page. The Previous and Next commands are relative to the page currently displayed. The First and Last commands display the absolute first and last pages of the document.


Go to command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Go to command

Page menu

The Go to command displays the Go to Page dialog box, which lets you jump to any page in a document.


Go to Page dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Go to Page dialog box

Page -->Go to

The Go to Page dialog box lets you enter the number of the page you want to display, or the name of the page in a Web document. If two pages in a document have the same section or page number, including prefix, QuarkXPress displays the first occurrence of that page number. You can also jump to another page using the go-to-page pop-up menu in the lower left corner of the document window (click the page pop-up arrow, near the page field in the lower left corner of the document window).


Display submenu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Display submenu

Page menu

The Display submenu lets you choose a master page to display in the document window. (A master page serves as the basis for document-page formatting.) The submenu lists all the master pages for the document, and an item that lets you return to the page previously displayed in the document.


View menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

View menu

Arranging your work environment to suit your needs allows you to work comfortably and efficiently. The QuarkXPress View menu lets you arrange your on-screen work environment in whatever way best meets your needs; for example, you can change your document percentage view and choose which palettes to open. The QuarkXPress View menu gives you options for viewing documents, working with rulers and guides, and opening and closing palettes. The View menu is divided into four sections on Mac OS, and three sections on Windows:

•	The first section lets you change the size at which you view the active document on-screen. The commands in this section are available when a document is open. Commands include Fit in Window; 50%, 75%, Actual Size, 200%; and Thumbnails.

•	Mac OS only: The next section lets you organize documents on-screen and switch between open document windows. The Windows submenu is available when a document is open.

•	The next section lets you use various layout tools such as rulers and guides. With the exception of Snap to Guides, when you select a command in this section, it changes from Show to Hide, or vice versa. The commands in this section are available when a document is active. You can show or hide guides, the baseline grid, rulers, invisible characters, and visual indicators.

•	The final section lets you open and close palettes. When you choose a command from this section, it changes from Show to Hide, or vice versa. The commands in this section are always available. You can show or hide the following palettes: Tools, Web Tools, Measurements, Document Layout, Style Sheets, Colors, Trap Information, Lists, Layers, Profile Information, Hyperlink, and Index.


Fit in Window command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Fit in Window command

View menu

The Fit in Window command automatically scales the view to fit an entire page in the center of the document window. To fit the largest spread and its pasteboard in the document window, press Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) while you choose View --> Fit in Window.


50%, 75%, Actual Size, 200% commands
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

50%, 75%, Actual Size, 200% commands

View menu

The 50%, 75%, Actual Size, and 200% commands scale the document view to the chosen size. The View Percent field in the lower left corner of the document window displays the current view scale percentage. You can also access the View Percent field by pressing Control+V (Mac OS) or Ctrl+Alt+V (Windows). On Mac OS, you can enter a value between 10% and 800%. On Windows, if the Display DPI Value field (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Display pane) is set higher than 72 dpi, the maximum zoom percentage decreases. For example, if your display value is set to 96 dpi, then the maximum zoom is only 711%.

NOTE: When an item is active, changing the view percentage centers the active item in the document window if (1) the item is on a page and any part of that page is displayed in the document window or (2) the active item is on the pasteboard and any part of the spread containing the active item is displayed in the document window.


Thumbnails command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Thumbnails command

View menu

The Thumbnails command displays small representations of document pages that you can rearrange and copy between documents. To change a document to Thumbnails view, you can also enter a "t" in the View Percent field in the lower left corner of the document window.


Windows submenu (Mac OS only)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Windows submenu (Mac OS only)

View menu

The Windows submenu lets you control the way open windows are displayed on-screen. The first section of the submenu lets you specify how open documents are displayed:

•	Stack Documents: Layers multiple open documents so a small portion of each document’s menu bar is displayed.

•	Tile Documents: Resizes document windows so equal portions of all open documents are displayed on-screen. The active document is always displayed in the upper left part of the main monitor; the most recently active documents are displayed from left to right and top to bottom. If Tile to Multiple Monitors is checked in the Display pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences), you can use more than one monitor for tiling documents.

The second section of the submenu lists all open documents and lets you choose which one to display. You can also display the Clipboard.

You can also use keyboard commands with the Windows submenu.


Keyboard commands
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for the Windows submenu (Mac OS only)

You can change all documents to the same view when stacking or tiling by pressing a modifier key while you choose View --> Windows --> Stack Documents or Tile Documents. You must press the modifier key before you click the menu bar to select View.

Stack or Tile to document view	Keyboard command
Actual Size	Control
Fit in Window	Command
Thumbnails	Option
TIP: Pressing Shift while clicking the active window’s title bar also displays the Windows submenu. You can use the keyboard commands listed above while Shift-clicking a document’s title bar.


Show Guides, Hide Guides command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show Guides, Hide Guides command

View menu

The Show Guides command displays nonprinting lines used to position items on pages. Guides include margin guides, the outlines of boxes, the "X" in empty picture boxes, and ruler guides. The Hide Guides command hides guides so you can see how your finished document looks. By default, Guides are showing.

When the ImageMap QuarkXTensions software is loaded, the Show Guides command displays hot areas associated with picture boxes as semitransparent shapes. The Hide Guides command hides hot areas.

NOTE: Guides display In Front of or Behind items on document pages depending on the Guides setting in the General pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences).

The Show Guides and Hide Guides commands also show and hide the page width reference guide in Web documents.


Show Baseline Grid, Hide Baseline Grid command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show Baseline Grid, Hide Baseline Grid command

View menu

A baseline grid is a horizontal grid that can be used to align text horizontally across columns and text boxes. The Show Baseline Grid command displays the nonprinting grid. The Hide Baseline Grid command hides the grid so you can more easily view text. By default, the Baseline Grid is hidden.

TIP: The spacing for a baseline grid is specified in the Paragraph pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences). To make selected paragraphs conform to a baseline grid, check Lock to Baseline Grid in the Paragraph Attributes dialog box (Style --> Formats).


Snap to Guides command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Snap to Guides command

View menu

The Snap to Guides command lets you quickly align items with guides. When Snap to Guides is checked and you drag an item near a guide, the item aligns automatically with the guide. If you’re creating a new item, the tool’s pointer will snap to the nearest guide. By default, Snap to Guides is checked.

NOTE: The distance at which an item aligns automatically with a guide is specified in the Snap Distance field in the General pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences).


Show Rulers, Hide Rulers command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show Rulers, Hide Rulers command

View menu

The Show Rulers command displays rulers, which are used to position items and guides, along the top and left edges of the document window. The Hide Rulers command hides the rulers so you can see more of the document window. By default, rulers are showing.

NOTE: In the Measurements pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences), use the Horizontal and Vertical pop-up menus to specify the measurement system displayed on the rulers. In print documents, use the Item Coordinates buttons in the Measurements pane of the Preferences dialog box to specify whether the horizontal ruler spans a spread or repeats from zero at the start of each page on a spread.


Show Invisibles, Hide Invisibles command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show Invisibles, Hide Invisibles command

View menu

The Show Invisibles command displays editable, nonprinting characters such as spaces, tabs, and paragraph returns in text. The Hide Invisibles command hides the characters so you can more easily view text. Invisible characters are hidden by default. Invisible characters are displayed as follows:

Invisible character	Mac OS command	Windows command	Displays as
Word space	space bar	space bar
New paragraph	Return	Enter
New line	Shift+Return	Shift+Enter
New column	Enter	Keypad enter
New box	Shift+Enter	Shift+Keypad Enter
Tab	Tab	Tab
Indent Here	Command+\	Ctrl+\


Show Visual Indicators, Hide Visual Indicators command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show Visual Indicators, Hide Visual Indicators command

View menu

The Show Visual Indicators command shows visual indicators. The Hide Visual Indicators command hides visual indicators. A visual indicator is a small colored square that displays on the upper right side of the item. Visual indicators on layers correspond to the layer color. In other words, if the layer color is red, all items placed on that layer will have a red visual indicator.

Visual indicators are also used in Web documents when you create a non-rectangular HTML text box. The indicator serves to alert you that the non-rectangular text box will be converted to a rectangular text box when you export that page as HTML. (Visual indicators also alert you if a rectangular HTML text box has been set to rasterize at export.)


Show Tools, Hide Tools command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show Tools, Hide Tools command

View menu

The Show Tools command displays the Tools palette, which provides tools for creating and modifying items. The Hide Tools command closes the Tools palette.


Show Web Tools, Hide Web Tools command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show Web Tools, Hide Web Tools command

View menu

The Show Web Tools command displays the Web Tools palette, which provides tools for creating and modifying Web document items. The Hide Web Tools command closes the Web Tools palette.


Show Measurements, Hide Measurements command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show Measurements, Hide Measurements command

View menu

The Show Measurements command displays the Measurements palette, which lets you edit many item and content specifications. The controls available in the Measurements palette vary according to the active items. The Hide Measurements command closes the Measurements palette.


Show Document Layout, Hide Document Layout command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show Document Layout, Hide Document Layout command

View menu

The Show Document Layout command displays the Document Layout palette, which lets you manipulate document and master pages. The Hide Document Layout command closes the Document Layout palette.


Show Style Sheets, Hide Style Sheets command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show Style Sheets, Hide Style Sheets command

View menu

The Show Style Sheets command displays the Style Sheets palette, which lets you apply character and paragraph style sheets. The Hide Style Sheets command closes the Style Sheets palette.


Show Colors, Hide Colors command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show Colors, Hide Colors command

View menu

The Show Colors command displays the Colors palette, which lets you apply colors to text, pictures in specific file formats, and items. The Hide Colors command closes the Colors palette.


Show Trap Information, Hide Trap Information command [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show Trap Information, Hide Trap Information command [PRINT]

View menu

The Show Trap Information command displays the Trap Information palette, which lets you specify trapping relationships for adjacent colors on an object-by-object basis. The Hide Trap Information command closes the Trap Information palette.


Show Lists, Hide Lists command [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show Lists, Hide Lists command [PRINT]

View menu

The Show Lists command displays the Lists palette, which lets you generate and update lists (based on style sheets) for documents and books. The Hide Lists command closes the Lists palette.


Show Layers, Hide Layers command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show Layers, Hide Layers command

View menu

The Show Layers command displays the Layers palette, which lets you create and manipulate layers. The palette provides buttons and a pop-up menu of options for performing various layer functions. The Hide Layers command closes the Layers palette.


Show Profile Information, Hide Profile Information command [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show Profile Information, Hide Profile Information command [PRINT]

View menu

When the Quark CMS QuarkXTensions software is loaded, the Show Profile Information command displays the Profile Information palette, which lets you see color management information for the active picture. The Hide Profile Information command closes the Profile Information palette.


Show Hyperlinks, Hide Hyperlinks command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show Hyperlinks, Hide Hyperlinks command

View menu

The Show Hyperlinks command displays the Hyperlinks palette, which lets you create hyperlinks for use in exported PDF and HTML documents. The Hide Hyperlinks command closes the Hyperlinks palette.


Show Index, Hide Index command [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show Index, Hide Index command [PRINT]

View menu

When the Index QuarkXTensions software is loaded, the Show Index command displays the Index palette, which lets you generate index entries and build an index. The Hide Index command closes the Index palette.


Utilities menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Utilities menu

Sometimes it’s convenient to verify document elements in groups instead of individually. For example, reviewing the fonts used in a document is more efficient when you allow QuarkXPress to provide you with a list of fonts used rather than examining the specifications for each style sheet. The Utilities menu lets you check spelling and hyphenation, confirm the fonts and pictures used in a document, control which XTensions and PostScript Printer Descriptions (PPDs) are used, and customize automatic kerning and tracking controls. The Utilities menu also displays entries for many XTensions modules. The Utilities menu is divided into five sections:

•	The first section lets you check spelling or create and edit custom spelling dictionaries. The Check Spelling commands are available when a document is open and the Content tool is selected. The Auxiliary Dictionary command is always available; the Edit Auxiliary command is available when an auxiliary dictionary is open.

•	The second section lets you obtain hyphenation suggestions for words and create a list of hyphenation exceptions. The Suggested Hyphenation command is available when the Content tool is selected and a text box is active. The Hyphenation Exceptions command is always available.

•	The third section lets you list and replace all the fonts used in a document, and list and update all pictures used in a document. The Usage command is available when a document is open.

•	The fourth section lets you create and choose sets of XTensions software and PPDs to use with QuarkXPress, as well as check the status of required components. The XTensions Manager command is always available. The PPD Manager command is always available in print documents; this command is unavailable in Web documents. The Component Status command is always available.

•	The last section lets you edit color management profiles, build indexes, and edit tracking and kerning information for fonts. The Profile Manager command is available when the Quark CMS QuarkXTensions software is loaded. The Build Index features are available when the Index QuarkXTensions software is loaded and the Index palette is displayed. The Tracking Edit and Kerning Edit commands are available when the Kern-Track Editor QuarkXTensions software is loaded.


Spell checking commands
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Spell checking commands

Utilities menu

The Check Spelling submenu lets you choose whether to check a word, a selection of text, a story, a document, or master pages. When text is selected, the Word command changes to Selection. When a master page is displayed, the Document command changes to Masters. The text is compared with the QuarkXPress dictionary file and any open auxiliary dictionary.

NOTE: To check spelling, a copy of the appropriate dictionary file (included with your QuarkXPress application) must be available in the same folder as the QuarkXPress application.


Word command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Word command

Utilities --> Check Spelling

When the text insertion point is placed within or immediately next to a word, the Word command (Command+L on Mac OS, Ctrl+W on Windows) is available. Choosing the Word command displays the Check Word dialog box, which lets you check the spelling of the word.


Check Word dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Check Word dialog box

Utilities --> Check Spelling --> Word

The Check Word dialog box displays the word you are checking (the Suspect Word) and lets you choose from a list of alternative words or enter a different word.

•	The Replace with field lets you enter the correct spelling of the suspect word.

•	A list below the Replace with field displays words similar to the suspect word. If the suspect word matches a word in the QuarkXPress dictionary or any open auxiliary dictionary, the matching word is selected in the list. If the suspect word is not similar to any word in the open dictionaries, QuarkXPress displays the message: "No similar words found." To replace the suspect word with a word from the list, select the word in the list and click Replace or double-click a word in the list.

•	Clicking the Replace button lets you replace the suspect word with the word entered in the Replace with field, and then closes the Check Word dialog box.

•	The Add button (Command+A on Mac OS, Alt+W on Windows) lets you add the suspect word to the open auxiliary dictionary. The Add button is available when an auxiliary dictionary is open for use with the document. When you click Add, the Check Word dialog box closes.

•	The Done button lets you close the Check Word dialog box without changing the spelling of the suspect word.


Selection, Story, Document, and Masters commands
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Selection, Story, Document, and Masters commands

Utilities --> Check Spelling

•	The Selection command (Command+L on Mac OS, Ctrl+W on Windows) is available when text is selected. This command lets you check the spelling of the selected text.

•	The Story command (Command+Option+L on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+W on Windows) lets you check the spelling of the text chain containing selected text or the text insertion point.

•	The Document command (Command+Option-Shift+L on Mac OS, Ctrl+Alt+Shift+W on Windows) is available when a document page is displayed. This command lets you check the spelling of all the text in a document.

•	When a master page is displayed, the Document command changes to Masters. The Masters command lets you check the spelling of all the text on all the master pages. When you check the spelling of document pages, master pages are not included, and vice versa.

All these commands display the Word Count dialog box. Click OK to initiate the spell check of the selected text, story, document, or master pages.


Word Count dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Word Count dialog box

Utilities --> Check Spelling --> Selection, Story, or Document

The Word Count dialog box displays information about the words in the active story.

•	Total displays a count of all words in the story.

•	Unique displays the total number of different words in the story.

•	Suspect displays the number of unique words that QuarkXPress cannot find in either the QuarkXPress dictionary or the open auxiliary dictionary.

•	If any suspect words are found, clicking OK displays the Check Selection, Check Story, Check Document, or Check Masters dialog box. If no suspect words are found, clicking OK in the Word Count dialog box returns you to the document.

•	The Cancel button lets you cancel the spell check and closes the Word Count dialog box.


Check Selection, Check Story, Check Document, and Check Masters (dialog boxes)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Check Selection, Check Story, Check Document, and Check Masters dialog boxes

Utilities --> Check Spelling --> Selection, Story, Document, or Masters

If there are suspect words in the story, clicking OK in the Word Count dialog box displays the Check Selection, Check Story, Check Document, or Check Masters dialog box. These dialog boxes let you view the suspect words and selectively replace them with words from a dictionary or words that you enter.

•	The Suspect Word field displays the suspect words one at a time, in the order in which they were found. The number of times the word is used in the document is displayed in parentheses after the suspect word. The suspect word is automatically entered in the Replace with field so you can edit it. Clicking the suspect word also places it in the Replace with field.

•	The Look up button (Command+L on Mac OS, Alt+L on Windows) lets you check the QuarkXPress dictionary and an open auxiliary dictionary for words spelled similarly to the word in the Replace with field. QuarkXPress lists similar words in the dialog box. Click the correctly spelled word in the list to enter it in the Replace with field.

•	If QuarkXPress is unable to locate any similar words in the dictionary file or an open auxiliary dictionary when you click Look up, the message "No similar words found" displays. Proper names and words in other languages often cause this message to display.

•	The Replace button lets you replace all instances of the Suspect Word with the word entered in the Replace with field. QuarkXPress replaces the current suspect word with the new word, then displays the next suspect word in the Suspect Word field. When all the suspect words have been displayed, the dialog box closes.

•	The Add button (Command+A on Mac OS, Alt+A on Windows) lets you add the current suspect word to the open auxiliary dictionary. The Add button is active when an auxiliary dictionary is open for use with the document.

•	The Skip button (Command+S on Mac OS, Alt+S on Windows) lets you proceed to the next suspect word without changing the spelling of the current one.

•	The Done (Mac OS) or Close (Windows) button (Command+period on Mac OS) lets you stop the spell check and keep any changes that have already been made.

Instance of Suspect Word is	Replacement word will be
all lowercase	all lowercase
ALL UPPERCASE	ALL UPPERCASE
Capitalized (first character)	Capitalized (first character)
Other capitalization pattern	Same case as text in Replace with field
NOTE: When spell checking a document or story, QuarkXPress searches all layers in the document or selected story for misspellings. If questionable spelling is encountered on a hidden layer, QuarkXPress displays the hidden text box or text path temporarily, to allow you to determine if the word needs to be replaced.


Auxiliary Dictionary command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Auxiliary Dictionary command

Utilities menu

An auxiliary dictionary is a custom spelling dictionary that you create to contain words specific to your needs. The open auxiliary dictionary is used together with the QuarkXPress dictionary when you use any of the Check Spelling commands.

When no documents are open, the Auxiliary Dictionary command displays the Default Auxiliary Dictionary dialog box, which lets you create or open an auxiliary dictionary for all subsequently created documents. When a document is open, the Auxiliary Dictionary command displays the Auxiliary Dictionary dialog box, which lets you create, open, or close an auxiliary dictionary for the active document.


Auxiliary Dictionary dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Auxiliary Dictionary dialog box

Utilities --> Auxiliary Dictionary

The Auxiliary Dictionary dialog box lets you create or open an auxiliary dictionary for the active document or for all new documents (when no documents are open).

•	The Current Auxiliary Dictionary field displays the name of the open auxiliary dictionary. If <None> displays in this field, there is no open auxiliary dictionary. Opening or creating a new auxiliary dictionary changes the information in the Current Auxiliary Dictionary field.

The New button lets you create a new auxiliary dictionary. Enter a name for the new auxiliary dictionary in the name field (Mac OS) or the File Name field (Windows), and then click New.

New auxiliary dictionaries are empty. To add words to an auxiliary dictionary, use the Edit Auxiliary command (Utilities menu) or use the Add button in the Check Word, Check Selection, Check Story, Check Document, or Check Masters dialog boxes (Utilities --> Check Spelling).

•	The Close button lets you close the default current auxiliary dictionary so it is no longer associated with the active document or with all new documents.

•	The Open button lets you open an existing auxiliary dictionary that is selected in the list. Only one auxiliary dictionary at a time can be open for use with a document.

TIP: Auxiliary dictionaries are saved as separate files on your hard drive. The path to the auxiliary dictionary is saved with the document. If you move an open auxiliary dictionary to another folder or disk, QuarkXPress will be unable to find it. To check the spelling of a document associated with a missing auxiliary dictionary, choose Utilities --> Auxiliary Dictionary, then locate and open the auxiliary dictionary. If you cannot locate the auxiliary dictionary, click Close to break the link to that auxiliary dictionary.


Edit Auxiliary command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit Auxiliary command

Utilities menu

The Edit Auxiliary command displays the Edit Auxiliary Dictionary dialog box, which lets you modify the contents of the open auxiliary dictionary.


Edit Auxiliary Dictionary dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Edit Auxiliary Dictionary dialog box

Utilities --> Edit Auxiliary

The Edit Auxiliary Dictionary dialog box lets you add words to or delete words from the auxiliary dictionary.

•	The list displays all the words in the auxiliary dictionary.

•	The blank field lets you enter words to add to the auxiliary dictionary; you cannot enter spaces or punctuation.

•	The Add button lets you add the word in the field to the auxiliary dictionary. You must enter every variation of a word (for example, the singular and plural forms) separately.

•	The Delete button lets you delete the selected word from the auxiliary dictionary.

•	To edit the spelling of a word, delete it and then enter the correct spelling.

•	The Save button saves changes made to the auxiliary dictionary.

TIP: You can also add words to an auxiliary dictionary by clicking Add in the Check Word, Check Selection, Check Story, Check Document, or Check Masters dialog boxes  (Utilities --> Check Spelling).


Suggested Hyphenation command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Suggested Hyphenation command

Utilities menu

If you need to add hyphens to words to change line breaks, QuarkXPress can help you break words properly by suggesting hyphenation. The Suggested Hyphenation command (Utilities menu) (Command+H on Mac OS, Ctrl+H on Windows) displays the Suggested Hyphenation dialog box, which lets you view syllable breaks for the selected word. To check a word, place the Text Insertion bar within it, or place the Text Insertion bar immediately next to the word. If more than one word is selected, the Suggested Hyphenation command displays syllable breaks for the first word in the selected range.


Suggested Hyphenation dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Suggested Hyphenation dialog box

Utilities menu

The Suggested Hyphenation dialog box displays syllable breaks for the selected word based on the following:

•	First, QuarkXPress checks the paragraph’s hyphenation and justification specification to see if the word should be hyphenated at all. For example, if the hyphenation and justification specification Minimum Before (Edit --> H&Js --> New) value is 4, the word "multimedia" would not be broken after "mul" in the Suggested Hyphenation dialog box.

•	Second, QuarkXPress checks your list of hyphenation exceptions. If the word is in your list, then that hyphenation is displayed.

•	Next, QuarkXPress checks its internal dictionary containing preferred hyphenation for thousands of words. If the word is in this dictionary, then that hyphenation is displayed. The internal dictionary is checked only when Expanded is chosen from the Hyphenation Method pop-up menu in the Paragraph pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences).

•	If the word is not in your hyphenation exceptions list or in the internal dictionary, QuarkXPress uses an algorithm to hyphenate words. If the algorithm results in undesirable hyphenations, add those words to your list of hyphenation exceptions (Utilities --> Hyphenation Exceptions).

TIP: The Suggested Hyphenation feature does not alter the selected word. If you decide to add hyphens to a word, try adding discretionary hyphens (Command+- on Mac OS, Ctrl+- on Windows), which are used only when line endings force a word to break.


Hyphenation Exceptions command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Hyphenation Exceptions command

Utilities menu

If you want certain words to hyphenate only in certain ways, you can enter the words and your preferred syllable breaks in a list of hyphenation exceptions. The Hyphenation Exceptions command displays the Hyphenation Exceptions dialog box, which lets you enter preferred hyphenation for specific words. QuarkXPress checks your list of hyphenation exceptions when paragraphs are hyphenated automatically and when it displays the Suggested Hyphenation dialog box).


Hyphenation Exceptions dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Hyphenation Exceptions dialog box

Utilities --> Hyphenation Exceptions

The Hyphenation Exceptions dialog box lets you enter words and specify their hyphenation, change the hyphenation of words, and delete words from the list.

•	The list displays all the words with hyphenation exceptions.

•	The field lets you enter words with hyphens at specific points. You cannot enter spaces or other punctuation. For example, enter "pro-cess-ing" to allow hyphenation between the three syllables; enter "pro-cessing" to allow hyphenation only after "pro;" and enter "processing" to prevent automatic hyphenation.

•	The Add button lets you add the word in the field to the hyphenation exceptions. You must enter every variation of a word (for example, the singular and plural forms) separately.

•	When you select a word in the list, the Add button changes to Replace, which lets you enter different hyphenation for the word.

•	The Delete button lets you remove the selected word from the list of hyphenation exceptions.


Usage command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Usage command

Utilities menu

The Usage command displays the Usage dialog box, which includes a Fonts tab and a Pictures tab. The controls in the Usage dialog box let you find and verify the fonts and pictures used in a document. When Quark CMS QuarkXTensions software is installed, the Profiles tab is available.


Fonts dialog box tab
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Fonts dialog box tab

Utilities --> Usage

The Fonts tab of the Usage dialog box lists all the fonts used in a document and lets you replace a font with another font. When you replace the fonts used on document pages, master pages are not included, and vice versa.

•	The Name column lists the menu names of all the fonts used on document pages or master pages (whichever is displayed in the document window).

•	Before you replace a font, you can view the font in the document. The Show First button displays the first use of the selected font. If the document has subsequent uses of the font, Show First changes to Show Next. Pressing Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) changes Show Next back to Show First.

•	Clicking the Replace button displays the Replace Font dialog box, which lets you choose a font to replace all uses of the selected font. (You can also double-click a font name to display the Replace Font dialog box.) The Replacement Font pop-up menu lets you select from all the fonts available to your system; the type style buttons let you choose the appropriate style for the replacement text. To ensure that a font is not used in a document, check the fonts on both the document pages and the master pages.

•	Checking More Information displays additional information from the font’s header file, including the font’s file name and type (for example, Type 1, TrueType, or OpenType).


Pictures dialog box tab
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Pictures dialog box tab

Utilities --> Usage

The Pictures tab of the Usage dialog box lists all the pictures on document pages, master pages, and the pasteboard. You can determine the status of pictures, view them, locate their disk files for printing, and control whether they print or not.

NOTE: For documents created in versions of QuarkXPress prior to version 3.0, the Pictures tab lists only high-resolution pictures (TIFF, RIFF, and EPS).

The controls in the Pictures tab include the Print, Name, Page, Type, and Status columns; the Show and Update buttons; and the More Information check box.


Print column
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Print column

Utilities --> Usage --> Pictures tab

QuarkXPress lets you prevent an active picture from printing by checking Suppress Picture Printout in the Picture tab of the Modify dialog box (Item menu). You can also prevent a picture and its frame from printing by checking Suppress Printout in the Box tab of the Modify dialog box (Item menu). The Print column and pop-up menu in the Pictures tab of the Usage dialog box let you change which pictures will print:

•	A checkmark indicates that the picture and its frame will print normally (neither Suppress Picture Printout or Suppress Printout is checked).

•	No checkmark indicates that the picture, or the frame and picture, will not print (either Suppress Picture Printout or Suppress Printout is checked).

•	To suppress a picture that is set to print, click in the Print column to remove the checkmark. This will check Suppress Picture Printout for the picture (preventing the picture from printing). You can also click the Print pop-up menu and choose No.

•	To print a picture that is suppressed, click in the Print column to add a checkmark. This will uncheck Suppress Picture Printout and Suppress Printout and print the picture and its frame normally. You can also click the Print pop-up menu and choose Yes.

TIP: You can multiple-select pictures and change their print status all at once. To select a range of pictures, click the first picture and press Shift while you click the last picture in the range. To select nonconsecutive pictures, press Command (Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) while you click each picture.


Name, Page, Type columns
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Name, Page, Type columns

Utilities --> Usage --> Pictures tab

The Name, Page, and Type columns help identify picture files.

•	The Name column displays the name of the picture file and the path to the picture file (when the picture was first imported or its last updated location). If you paste a picture into a picture box rather than importing it through the Get Picture dialog box (File menu), the Name is listed as No Disk File (Mac OS) or Static object (Windows).

•	Windows only: If you create the picture by using the Insert Object command (Edit menu), the Name is listed as Embedded object.

•	The Page column displays the number of the page where the picture is located. A dagger (Mac OS) or "PB" (Windows) indicates that the picture lies entirely on the pasteboard next to the listed page. [PRINT]

•	The Type column displays the file format of the picture.


Status column
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Status column

Utilities --> Usage --> Pictures tab

To print high-resolution pictures, QuarkXPress needs access to the actual picture files. The Status column indicates whether QuarkXPress can find the picture file and whether the picture file has been modified since it was imported.

The status can be:

•	OK: The picture file has not been moved or edited

•	Modified: The picture file has been edited in another application since it was imported into QuarkXPress, but it has not been moved

•	Missing: The picture file has been renamed or moved

•	Wrong Type: The file type has changed, but the picture file was not updated

•	No XTension: The picture file was imported using XTensions software that is no longer enabled or present (for example, the LZW Import filter)

•	In Use: The picture file is open in another application

•	No Access: The current user does not have privileges to open the file

•	Can’t Open: The computer has too many files open

NOTE: When you print a document that has picture files listed as modified or missing, QuarkXPress prompts you to update them. If you do not update a missing picture file, QuarkXPress prints the low-resolution picture preview rather than the original picture file. If you do not update a modified picture file, QuarkXPress still prints the modified picture file, but it may not match the preview displayed in the document.


Show button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Show button

Utilities --> Usage --> Pictures tab

The Show button displays the selected picture to help you determine whether to update it.


Update button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Update button

Utilities --> Usage --> Pictures tab

The Update button lets you update modified pictures and locate missing pictures. If a selected picture is modified, the Update button reimports the picture with a new picture preview. If a selected picture is missing, the Update button displays the Find dialog box, which lets you locate and open the missing picture file.

TIP: When you update a picture, and other missing picture files are found in the same location, an alert gives you the option to update those pictures as well.


More Information check box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

More Information check box

Utilities --> Usage --> Pictures tab

Checking More Information displays the picture’s full path, file size, modification date, dimensions, resolution, and colors.


Profiles dialog box tab [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Profiles dialog box tab [PRINT]

Utilities --> Usage

The Profiles tab of the Usage dialog box provides information about every profile used in the active document or specified in the Color Management Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Color Management). It also lets you replace profiles.

•	The Profiles pop-up menu lets you get information about how a profile is used in the active document.

•	The Status field indicates whether the profile chosen in the Profile pop-up menu is available to Quark CMS.

•	The Color Space field indicates the color space of the profile chosen in the Profile pop-up menu.

•	The Object list displays all the properties in the active document that use the profile chosen in the Profile pop-up menu.

•	The More Information button displays detailed information about the profile chosen in the Profile pop-up menu. It includes information about the profile’s preferred Color Management Module (CMM), as well as the profile’s type and manufacturer.

•	The Replace button opens the Replace Profile dialog box, which lets you replace the profile of a property with another profile that is appropriate for that property. The Replace button is available when a property is selected in the Object list.


XTensions Manager
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

XTensions Manager command

Utilities menu

The XTensions Manager command (Utilities menu) displays the XTensions Manager dialog box, which lets you control which XTensions modules load when you launch QuarkXPress. XTensions modules that are enabled are stored in your "XTension" folder within your QuarkXPress application folder. When you disable an XTensions module, the XTensions Manager moves it to the "XTension Disabled" folder.

You can display the XTensions Manager dialog box by pressing the space bar while QuarkXPress is launching. You can also set a preference to display the XTensions Manager dialog box at startup in the XTensions pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences).


XTensions Manager dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

XTensions Manager dialog box

Utilities --> XTensions Manager

The XTensions Manager dialog box lists all the XTensions modules available to QuarkXPress. Using the XTensions Manager dialog box, you can save, import, and export sets of specific XTensions modules, and you can specify which XTensions modules should load.

The XTensions Manager dialog box controls include the Set pop-up menu; the Save As, Delete, Import, Export, and About buttons; and the Enable, Name, and Status columns.


Set pop-up menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Set pop-up menu

Utilities --> XTensions Manager

A set is a group of specific XTensions modules that load together. For example, you might make sets of third-party XTensions modules that are required only for specific documents or for certain clients. The Set pop-up menu lets you choose an XTensions set to load:

•	All XTensions Enabled loads all your XTensions software

•	All XTensions Disabled does not load any XTensions software

•	The Set pop-up menu also lets you choose from the XTensions sets you created using the Save As button


Save As, Delete, Import, Export buttons
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Save As, Delete, Import, Export, About buttons

Utilities --> XTensions Manager

The Save As, Delete, Import, and Export buttons let you create and manipulate your XTensions sets.

•	The Save As button lets you create a new set from the XTensions modules that are currently checked in the Enable column. The Save As button displays the Save Set dialog box, which lets you name and save the new XTensions set. XTensions sets are saved in the "XPress Preferences" file.

•	The Delete button deletes the set displayed in the Set pop-up menu.

•	The Import button displays the Import XTensions Set dialog box, which lets you import a set from another user.

•	The Export button displays the Export XTensions Set dialog box, which lets you export the set displayed in the Set pop-up menu.

•	Clicking the About button displays detailed information about the selected XTensions software.

NOTE: When you create an XTensions set, you create a file that describes which XTensions modules should load. The XTensions set does not include actual XTensions software. On Windows, XTensions sets are saved with a "*.xts" file extension.


Enable column
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Enable column

Utilities --> XTensions Manager

The Enable column and pop-up menu let you change which XTensions modules will load. Changes take effect the next time you launch QuarkXPress.

•	A checkmark indicates that the XTensions software will load. No check mark indicates that the XTensions software will not load.

•	To change the status of a specific XTensions module, click in the Enable column to add or remove a checkmark. You can also click the Enable pop-up menu and choose Yes or No.

TIP: You can multiple-select XTensions modules and change their status all at once. To select a range of XTensions modules, click the first one and press Shift while you click the last one in the range. To select nonconsecutive XTensions modules, press Command (Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) while you click each one.


Name, Status columns
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Name, Status columns

Utilities --> XTensions Manager

The Name column lists all the XTensions modules in your "XTension" folder or your "XTension Disabled" folder within your QuarkXPress application folder. The Status column lists whether the XTensions software is Active (currently loaded) or Inactive (disabled). If QuarkXPress could not load the XTensions module, the Status is Error.


Component Status command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Component Status command

Utilities menu

Components are software modules that are required for you to launch QuarkXPress and access all its features. Components reside in the "Required Components" folder in your QuarkXPress application folder. If a component is not loading correctly, the Component Status dialog box displays to indicate which component is preventing QuarkXPress from launching.

The Component Status command displays the Component Status dialog box, so you can verify the versions of your components.

What are required components?


Component Status dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Component Status dialog box

Utilities --> Component Status

If QuarkXPress fails to launch as a result of a component that is not loading correctly, the Component Status dialog box displays to indicate which component is not loading.

You can access the Component Status dialog box while QuarkXPress is running to review the versions of the components in your "Required Components" folder.

The Component Status dialog box controls include the Component, Current Version, Compatible Versions, and Status columns; the Status Details area; the Save Status to File button; and the Close button.


Component column
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Component column

Utilities --> Component Status

The Component column lists the names of the components in the "Required Components" folder.


Current Version column
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Current Version column

Utilities --> Component Status

The Current Version column lists the versions of the components in the "Required Components" folder.


Compatible Versions column
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Compatible Versions column

Utilities --> Component Status

The Compatible Versions column lists the versions of QuarkXPress that the selected component is compatible with. The component will not work with any version of QuarkXPress that is earlier than the version listed in the Compatible Versions column.


Status column
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Status column

Utilities --> Component Status

The Status column indicates whether each component in the "Required Components" folder is loading or if QuarkXPress is having trouble loading a component.


Status Details area
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Status Details area

Utilities --> Component Status

The Status details area provides extra information about a selected component.

•	If a component is loading normally, the Status details area displays the message: "This component is functioning normally."

•	If a component is incompatible with the current version of QuarkXPress, the Status details area displays one of two messages: "This component can only be used with application versions <version number> and older," or "This version of this component is not compatible with this application."

If there is a problem loading a particular component, the Component Status dialog box displays when you launch QuarkXPress. You will see one of the following alerts:

•	If the component is missing, the Status details area displays the message: "This component was not found in the ‘Required Components’ folder."

•	If the component is damaged or cannot be loaded, the Status details area displays the message: "This component is damaged or corrupt and could not be loaded."

•	If an item in the "Required Components" folder is not a component, the Status details area displays the message: "This component cannot be used with the current application and has been disabled."

•	If a component is incompatible with the current version of QuarkXPress, the Status details area displays one of two messages: "This component can only be used with application versions <version number> and older," or "This version of this component is not compatible with this application."


Save Status to File button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Save Status to File button

Utilities --> Component Status

Clicking the Save Status to File button allows you to save the component list and current status as an ASCII text file. The file’s default name is "CompStat"; you can change the name if you prefer. The resulting text file can be used in troubleshooting or in determining which components need to be updated.


Close button
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Close button

Utilities --> Component Status

Clicking the Close button closes the Component Status dialog box.


PPD Manager [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

PPD Manager command [PRINT]

Utilities menu

PostScript Printer Description files (PPDs) are supplied by printer manufacturers to provide access to additional features of PostScript printers. PPDs are accessed through the Printer Description pop-up menu in the Setup tab of the Print dialog box (File menu). Depending on how many PPDs are available to your system, the list in the Printer Description pop-up menu can be fairly long. The PPD Manager command (Utilities menu) displays the PPD Manager dialog box, which lets you control which PPDs are displayed in the Printer Description pop-up menu.


PPD Manager dialog box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

PPD Manager dialog box [PRINT]

Utilities --> PPD Manager

The PPD Manager dialog box lists all the PPDs available to QuarkXPress and lets you specify which PPDs are listed in the Printer Description pop-up menu in the Setup tab of the Print dialog box (File menu). The PPD Manager dialog box contains the Include column, the Name column, the System PPD Folder area, the Select (Mac OS) or Browse (Windows) button, and the Update button.


Include column [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Include column [PRINT]

Utilities --> PPD Manager

The Include column and pop-up menu indicate whether a PPD will be listed in the Printer Description pop-up menu and let you change the selected PPD’s status.

•	A checkmark indicates that the PPD will display in the Printer Description pop-up menu. No checkmark indicates that the PPD will not display in the Printer Description pop-up menu.

•	To change the status of a PPD, click in the Include column to add or remove a checkmark. You can also click the Include pop-up menu and choose Yes or No.

TIP: You can multiple-select PPDs and change their status all at once. To select a range of PPDs, click the first one and press Shift while you click the last one in the range. To select nonconsecutive PPDs, press Command (Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) while you click each PPD.


Name column [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Name column [PRINT]

Utilities --> PPD Manager

The Name column lists all the PPDs in the selected system PPD folder. If you have a PPD folder within your QuarkXPress folder, the Name column displays the PPDs in that folder as well.


System PPD Folder area, Select button [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

System PPD Folder area, Select/Browse button [PRINT]

Utilities --> PPD Manager

The System PPD Folder area lets you specify the system folder that contains the PPDs you want to access. On Mac OS, QuarkXPress accesses the "Printer Descriptions" folder inside the "Extensions" folder within your "System Folder" by default. On Windows 95 or 98, QuarkXPress accesses the "System" folder within the "Windows" folder by default.

However, you can change this to any other folder available to your computer. Clicking the Select (Mac OS) or Browse (Windows) button displays the System PPD Folder dialog box, which lets you locate another folder.


Update button [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Update button [PRINT]

Utilities --> PPD Manager

If you add a PPD to your system, the Update button lets you update the list of PPDs in the Name column without relaunching QuarkXPress.


Profile Manager [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Profile Manager command [PRINT]

Utilities menu

The Profile Manager command displays the Profile Manager dialog box, which lets you check to see which International Color Consortium (ICC) profiles are currently installed on your computer and being used by Quark CMS QuarkXTensions software. The Profile Manager command is available when the Quark CMS QuarkXTensions software is installed and Color Management Active is checked in the Color Management Preferences dialog box (Mac OS) or a Color Management Module (CMM) is chosen in the Color Management pop-up menu (Windows).

The Profile Manager dialog box contains the Include column, the Name column, the Location area, the Select (Mac OS) and Browse (Windows) buttons, and the Update button.


Include column [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Include column [PRINT]

Utilities --> Profile Manager

The Include column and pop-up menu let you indicate whether Quark CMS will use a profile.

•	A checkmark indicates Quark CMS will use the profile. No checkmark indicates that Quark CMS will not use it. By default, every profile installed is checked.

•	To change the status of a profile, click in the Include column to add or remove a checkmark. You can also choose Yes or No from the Include pop-up menu.

TIP: You can multiple-select profiles and change their status all at once. To select a range of profiles, click the first one and press Shift while you click the last one in the range. To select nonconsecutive profiles, press Command (Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) while you click each one.


Name column [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Name column [PRINT]

Utilities --> Profile Manager

The Name column displays a list of ICC profiles installed on your system.


Location area [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Location area [PRINT]

Utilities --> Profile Manager

The Location area displays information about a selected profile and where it is installed on the computer.


Select/Browse, Update buttons [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Select/Browse, Update buttons [PRINT]

Utilities --> Profile Manager

The Select (Mac OS) or Browse (Windows) button lets you locate the auxiliary profile folder.

The Update button lets you update the list of profiles to match the available profiles in a given folder.


Tracking Edit
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Tracking Edit command

Utilities menu

When the Kern-Track Editor QuarkXTensions software is loaded, you can create custom tracking tables for spacing characters in specific fonts. The custom tracking tables are applied to text when Auto Kern Above is checked and text is above the point size specified in the field (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences --> Character pane).

Any manual tracking applied to text (Style --> Track) is added to the tracking specifications made using the Kern-Track Editor. The Tracking Edit command (Utilities menu) displays the Tracking Edit dialog box, which lets you choose a font and edit its tracking table.


Tracking Edit dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Tracking Edit dialog box

Utilities --> Tracking Edit

The Tracking Edit dialog box displays all the fonts installed and available on your system. Most typefaces are made up of four style variations: plain, bold, italic, and bold-italic. Each font has its own tracking table; you must edit each table separately to modify an entire typeface. To customize a font’s tracking table, choose it.

•	The Edit button opens the Tracking Values dialog box for the chosen font.

•	The Save button saves all the changes made in the Tracking Values dialog box..


Tracking Values dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Tracking Values dialog box

Utilities --> Tracking Edit --> Edit button

The Tracking Values dialog box lets you specify custom tracking values from –100/200 to 100/200 em space for font sizes from 2 to 250 points. The controls in the dialog box work as follows:

•	A horizontal line at a Tracking Value of zero means that tracking values have not been modified for the chosen font.

•	To modify the tracking curve, click anywhere on the curve to create a handle. You can place up to four handles on the curve. To remove a handle, press Option (Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) while you click the handle.

•	As you drag a handle, tracking and size information for that point on the curve displays in the upper right corner of the dialog box.

•	Tracking values for font sizes that fall between handles are determined by the intersection of the font size and the tracking curve. Font sizes larger than 250 points are tracked at the same value as 250 points.

•	The Reset button erases changes made in previous editing sessions and sets tracking values to zero for all font sizes.

TIP: If you generally track a font when you use it, you may want to edit its tracking table. For example, if you always use 24-point Futura Extra Bold tracked to –10 for headlines, you can place a point on the tracking table at the intersection of 24 points and the tracking value of –10. You need to edit the tracking table for each version of a font (Futura, Futura Book, Future Extra Bold, Futura Extra Bold Oblique, etc.).


Kerning Edit
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Kerning Edit command

Utilities menu

A kerning table is a set of character pairs, each of which have a specific kerning value. When creating a font, a designer specifies a kerning value (a measurement that determines how close character pairs are placed to each other) for each of the pairs in the kerning table. Most PostScript fonts have a built-in kerning table.

QuarkXPress uses the information contained in a font’s kerning table when it performs automatic kerning. Automatic kerning is specified using the Auto Kern Above controls in the Character pane of the Preferences dialog box (Edit --> Preferences --> Preferences). Any manual kerning applied to text (Style --> Kern) is added to the kerning specifications made using the Kern-Track Editor.

When the Kern-Track Editor QuarkXTensions software is loaded, you can create custom kerning tables for fonts. The Kerning Edit command (Utilities menu) displays the Kerning Edit dialog box, which lets you choose a font so you can edit its kerning table.


Kerning Edit dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Kerning Edit dialog box

Utilities --> Kerning Edit

The Kerning Edit dialog box displays all the fonts installed and available on your system. Most typefaces have four style variations: plain, bold, italic, and bold-italic. Each font has its own kerning table; you must edit each table separately to modify an entire typeface. You can also use the Kerning Edit feature to create kerning tables for fonts that contain no kerning information. To customize a font’s kerning table, select it:

•	The Edit button opens the Kerning Values dialog box for the selected font.

•	The Save button saves all the changes made in the Kerning Values dialog box.


Kerning Values dialog box
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Kerning Values dialog box

Utilities --> Kerning Edit --> Edit button

The Kerning Values dialog box displays the current kerning pairs for the chosen font and lets you add, modify, and delete kerning pairs. You can specify custom kerning values from –100/200 to 100/200 em space for any kerning pair. Kerning values are measured in increments of 1/200 em space, so entering a kerning value of –20 for a character pair reduces the normal, unkerned character space by 1/10 (20/200) em space.

The controls in the dialog box work as follows:

•	The Kerning Pairs list lets you select from the list of existing kerning pairs to edit one.

•	The Preview area displays the selected kerning pair with its current values. You should make final decisions about kerning by looking at high-resolution output rather than the Preview area or text on a page.

•	The Pair field lets you enter a new kerning pair. If you select a pair in the Kerning Pairs list, it is automatically displayed in the Pair field.

•	The Value field lets you enter a kerning value or click the arrows to specify the kerning value for a pair. The Preview area updates to display the kerning pair with the new value.

•	The Add/Replace button lets you create a kerning pair from the information in the Pair and Value fields. The new or edited kerning pair is listed in the Kerning Pairs list.

•	The Delete button lets you remove a kerning pair from the Kerning Pairs list. After you click Delete, the deleted pair is removed from the list but is displayed in the Pair and Value fields.

•	The Reset button lets you revert an edited kerning table to the values originally built into the font, even if you have saved edits to the table during a previous editing session. The Reset button is available when you have made changes to a font’s kerning values.

•	You can export kerning tables as ASCII text files, then import those kerning tables for use with another font. You can also import kerning tables created or edited in a text editor. The Import button displays a dialog box that lets you locate a kerning table to use with the current font. The Export button generates an ASCII text file from the kerning table and lets you name and save that kerning table.

NOTE: If you save a table after you have modified it, it will be saved in the "XPress Preferences" file as a user-defined kerning table. Once you delete the "XPress Preferences" file, the kerning table information will be gone. We recommend that you export the modified kerning table for later use.


Build Index [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Build Index command[PRINT]

Utilities menu

The Build Index command (Utilities menu) displays the Build Index dialog box, which allows you to format and build your index. The Build Index command is only available when the Index QuarkXTensions software is loaded and the Index palette is displayed.


Build Index dialog box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Build Index dialog box [PRINT]

Utilities --> Build Index

The Build Index dialog box allows you to organize and build an index after you have tagged your index entries and adjusted your index preferences. The dialog box is divided into two areas. The top area lets you specify settings for the entire index, and the bottom area lets you specify style sheets for different entry levels. The controls include the Format buttons; the Entire Book, Replace Existing Index, and Add Letter Headings check boxes; the Style and Master Page pop-up menus; and the Level Styles area.


Format buttons [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Format buttons [PRINT]

Utilities --> Build Index

The Format options let you choose a Nested or Run-in index.

•	The Nested option arranges the entries in hierarchical order in separate paragraphs if your index has more than one entry level.

•	The Run-in option arranges any second-, third-, or fourth-level entries in a single paragraph following the first-level entry.


Entire Book check box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Entire Book check box [PRINT]

Utilities --> Build Index

If you are working with QuarkXPress books, checking Entire Book builds an index for the entire book. The Entire Book check box is available when a book is open.


Replace Existing Index check box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Replace Existing Index check box [PRINT]

Utilities --> Build Index

Checking Replace Existing Index replaces any previously built version of the index with the new version. If Replace Existing Index is unchecked, a new version of the index will be added after any existing versions.


Add Letter Headings check box [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Add Letter Headings check box [PRINT]

Utilities --> Build Index

Checking Add Letter Headings adds letter headings to each alphabetical area of the index. For example, if you have entries that start with "a," "f," and "t," the letters A, F, and T will be added just prior to the entries starting with those letters.


Style pop-up menu [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Style pop-up menu [PRINT]

Utilities --> Build Index --> Add Letter Headings area

When Add Letter Headings is checked, the Style pop-up menu is available. The Style pop-up menu lets you select a paragraph style sheet to be applied to your letter headings.


Master Page pop-up menu [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Master Page pop-up menu [PRINT]

Utilities --> Build Index

The Master Page pop-up menu lets you choose the master page for the index pages. You must use a master page with an automatic text box.


Level Styles area [PRINT]
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Level Styles area [PRINT]

Utilities --> Build Index

The Level Styles area lets you specify the paragraph style sheets used to format each entry level. If you have selected a Run-in index, only the First Level pop-up menu is available.

•	The First Level pop-up menu lets you choose a style sheet to apply to any index entries you have designated as first level.

•	The Second Level pop-up menu lets you choose a style sheet to apply to any index entries you have designated as second level.

•	The Third Level pop-up menu lets you choose a style sheet to apply to any index entries you have designated as third level.

•	The Fourth Level pop-up menu lets you choose a style sheet to apply to any index entries you have designated as fourth level.


Window menu (Windows only)
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Window menu (Windows only)

There are many reasons to change the way your documents display on-screen. Maybe you need to compare two versions of a document, or perhaps you are going to perform a thumbnail drag. Whatever the reason, in QuarkXPress for Windows, the Window menu lets you control the way open documents display on-screen.

The Window menu is divided into two sections. The first section lets you specify how open documents are displayed. The Cascade, Tile Horizontally, Tile Vertically, Arrange Icons, and Close All commands are available when a document is open. You can also use keyboard commands with the Cascade, Tile Horizontally, and Tile Vertically commands.

The second section lists all open documents and lets you choose which one to display.


Cascade command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Cascade command (Windows only)

Window menu

The Cascade command (Window menu) layers multiple open documents so just a portion of each document’s menu bar displays.


Tile Horizontally command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Tile Horizontally command (Windows only)

Window menu

If you have fewer than four documents open, the Tile Horizontally command resizes document windows so they all display, stacked from top-to-bottom on the screen. If four or more documents are open, the Tile Horizontally command arranges document windows so that all open documents display on-screen. The active document always displays in the upper left or top of the monitor.


Tile Vertically command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Tile Vertically command (Windows only)

Window menu

If you have fewer than four documents open, the Tile Vertically command resizes document windows so they all display side by side, with the title bars adjacent to each other beginning at the top of the screen. If four or more documents are open, Tile Vertically arranges document windows so that all open documents display on-screen. The active document always displays in the upper left of the monitor.


Keyboard commands for Windows menu
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Keyboard commands for the Windows menu

You can change all documents to the same view when cascading or tiling by pressing a modifier key while you choose Cascade, Tile Horizontally, or Tile Vertically from the Window menu.

Cascade or Tile to document view	Keyboard command
Actual Size	Ctrl+Alt
Fit in Window	Ctrl
Thumbnails	Alt


Arrange Icons command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Arrange Icons command (Windows only)

Window menu

The Arrange Icons command lets you arrange all minimized QuarkXPress documents into rows at the bottom of your monitor. Choosing Arrange Icons has the same effect as individually minimizing open QuarkXPress documents.


Close All command
QuarkXPress 5.0 Help

Close All command (Windows only)

Window menu

The Close All command lets you close all the active documents. If a document contains unsaved changes, a Save alert dialog box displays and lets you save changes. If a document was not saved previously, the Save as dialog box displays and lets you name the document and save changes.